Mercedes - C-Class - Owners Manual - 2011 - 2011

Disclaimer All of the für following PDF document for this sich vehicle model Daslanguage folgende versions PDF-Dokument dieses Fahrzeugmodell bezieht in allen relate solely toversion vehicles intended for sale on the German which Sprachversionen nur aufofdie die für den deutschen Marktand bestimmt The following theFahrzeuge, Owner‘s Manual describes allmarket models, series and correspond to German regulations. sind undequipment die den deutschen Vorschriften entsprechen. Bitte wenden Sie sich an special of your vehicle. Country-specific language variations are Ihren autorisierten Mercedes-Benz Servicestützpunkt, um equipped ein gedrucktes possible. Please note that your vehicle might not be withExemplar all the Please contact your authorised Mercedes-Benz Service Centreand to obtain für andere Fahrzeugmodelle und affects Fahrzeugmodelljahre zu erhalten. described functions. This also safety-relevant systems functions. a printed version forauthorised other vehicle models and vehicle model years. Thislike PDF Please contact your Mercedes-Benz dealership if you would document the latest version. Possible variations to your vehicle mayzu not Dieses PDF-Dokument stellt die Manual aktuelle Version dar. Mögliche Abweichungen to receive aisprinted Owner‘s for other vehicle models and vehicle be taken into account askönnten Mercedes-Benz constantlysein, updates their vehicles to Ihrem konkreten Fahrzeug nicht berücksichtigt da Mercedes-Benz model years. the state of the art and introduces changes design andanpasst, equipment. seine Fahrzeuge ständig dem neuesten Standinder Technik sowiePlease therefore that this PDF is document in no way replaces the version Änderungen in Form und Ausstattung vornimmt. Bitte beachten Sie daher, dass The onlinenote Owner‘s Manual the current and valid version. Itprinted is possible that which was affecting deliveredyour with yourFall vehicle. dieses PDF-Dokument in keinem das gedruckte ersetzt, mit deviations specific vehicle could Exemplar not be taken intodas account dem Fahrzeug ausgeliefert wurde. as Mercedes-Benz constantly adapts its vehicles according to the latest technology and makes changes to the form and the equipment. Please also read the printed Owner‘s Manual, supplementary documents and the digital Owner‘s Manual in the vehicle. Copyright All rights reserved. All texts, images and graphics are subject to copyright and other laws for the protection of intellectual property. They may not be copied or changed for any commercial use or for the purpose of being passed on nor used on other webistes. Internal use only Welcome to the world of Mercedes-Benz Before you drive off, please familiarise yourself with your vehicle and read this manual, especially the safety and warning notices. This will help you to obtain the maximum pleasure from your vehicle and avoid endangering yourself and others. The equipment or model designation of your vehicle may differ according to: Rmodel Rorder Rcountry variant Ravailability The illustrations in this manual show a lefthand-drive vehicle. On right-hand-drive vehicles, the arrangement and location of vehicle parts and controls differ accordingly. Mercedes-Benz is constantly updating its vehicles to the state of the art. Mercedes-Benz therefore reserves the right to introduce changes in the following areas: Rdesign Requipment Rtechnical features You cannot, therefore, base any claims on the illustrations or text content in this manual. The following are integral components of the vehicle: ROwner's Manual Booklet REquipment-dependent supplements Keep these documents in the vehicle at all times. When you sell the vehicle, always pass the documents on to the new owner. RService i You can get to know the important fea- tures of your vehicle in the interactive Owner's Manual on the Internet at: http://www.mercedes-benz.de/ betriebsanleitung The technical documentation team at Daimler AG wishes you safe and pleasant motoring. 2045847082Z102 É2045847082Z102UËÍ Contents Index ....................................................... 4 At a glance ........................................... 31 Introduction ......................................... 26 Safety ................................................... 45 Opening and closing ........................... 83 Seats, steering wheel and mirrors . . 103 Lights and windscreen wipers ......... 117 Climate control ................................. 133 Driving and parking .......................... 151 On-board computer and displays .... 221 Stowing and features ....................... 301 Maintenance and care ...................... 321 Breakdown assistance ..................... 333 Wheels and tyres .............................. 357 Technical data ................................... 375 3 4 Index 1, 2, 3 ... 12-button multifunction steering wheel Operating the on-board computer . 227 Overview .......................................... 41 12 V socket see Sockets 4-button multifunction steering wheel Overview .......................................... 40 4-button multifunction steering wheel Operating the on-board computer . 223 4ETS see ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction System) 4MATIC (permanent four-wheel drive) .................................................. 195 4MATIC off-road system ................... 195 A ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) Display message (12-button multifunction steering wheel) .............. 255 Display message (4-button multifunction steering wheel) ................ 250 Function/notes ................................ 72 Important safety notes .................... 72 Warning lamp ................................. 293 Activating/deactivating air-recirculation mode .................................... 141 Activating/deactivating cooling with air dehumidification ................. 137 Active Blind Spot Assist Display message (12-button multifunction steering wheel) .............. 276 Function/notes ............................. 209 Switching on/off (on-board computer, 12-button multifunction steering wheel) .............................. 238 Towing a trailer .............................. 212 Active Driving Assistance package . 209 Active Lane Keeping Assist Display message (12-button multifunction steering wheel) .............. 275 Function/information .................... 212 Switching on/off (on-board computer, 12-button multifunction steering wheel) .............................. 238 Towing a trailer .............................. 215 Active light function ......................... 121 Active Service System PLUS see ASSYST PLUS service interval display ADAPTIVE BRAKE ................................. 78 Adaptive brake lamps ......................... 74 Adaptive Highbeam Assist Function/notes ............................. 122 Adaptive Main-beam Assist Display message (12-button multifunction steering wheel) .............. 267 Adaptive Main-Beam Assist Switching on/off (on-board computer) ............................................. 240 Additional speedometer ................... 239 Additives (engine oil) ........................ 382 Adjusting the headlamp range ......... 120 Airbags Activation ......................................... 47 Front airbag (driver, front passenger) ....................................... 50 Important safety guidelines ............. 48 Kneebag ........................................... 50 Sidebag ............................................ 50 Windowbag ...................................... 51 Air-conditioning system see Climate control Air filter Display message (12-button multifunction steering wheel) .............. 271 Display message (4-button multifunction steering wheel) ................ 269 AIR FLOW ........................................... 138 Air pressure see Tyre pressure Air vents Glove compartment ....................... 148 Important safety notes .................. 147 Rear ............................................... 148 Setting ........................................... 147 Setting the centre air vents ........... 148 Setting the side air vents ............... 148 Index Alarm system see ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) Alertness Assistant see ATTENTION ASSIST AMGMenu (on-board computer) ....... 245 Anti-glare film .................................... 320 Anti-lock Braking System see ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) Anti-Theft Alarm system see ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) Anti-theft system Immobiliser ...................................... 80 Aquaplaning ....................................... 177 Ashtray ............................................... 316 ASSYST PLUS see ASSYST PLUS service interval display ASSYST PLUS service interval display Displaying service messages ......... 326 Hiding service messages ............... 326 Notes ............................................. 326 Service messages .......................... 326 ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) Activating/deactivating ................... 80 ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) ......... 80 Function ........................................... 80 Interior motion sensor ..................... 81 Switching off the alarm .................... 80 Tow-away protection ........................ 81 ATTENTION ASSIST Activating/deactivating ................. 238 Display message (12-button multifunction steering wheel) .............. 273 Function/notes ............................. 203 Audio DVD (12-button multifunction steering wheel) .......................... 234 Audio menu (on-board computer, 12-button multifunction steering wheel) ................................................. 233 AUTO lights Display message (12-button multifunction steering wheel) .............. 267 Display message (4-button multifunction steering wheel) ................ 264 see Lights Automatic engine start (ECO start/ stop function) .................................... Automatic engine switch-off (ECO start/stop function) .......................... Automatic headlamp mode .............. Automatic transmission Accelerator pedal position ............. Automatic drive program ............... Changing gear ............................... Display message (4-button multifunction steering wheel) ................ Driving tips .................................... Emergency running mode .............. Kickdown ....................................... Manual drive program .................... Problem (fault) ............................... Program selector button ................ Pulling away ................................... Releasing the parking lock manually ............................................... Selector lever ................................ Shift ranges ................................... Starting the engine ........................ Steering wheel gearshift paddles ... Trailer towing ................................. Transmission position display ........ Transmission positions .................. Automatic transmission emergency running mode ......................... Automatic transmissions Display message (12-button multifunction steering wheel) .............. Auxiliary heating Activating/deactivating ................. Activating/deactivating (on the centre console) .............................. Important safety notes .................. Problem (display message) ............ Remote control .............................. Setting (on-board computer, 12button multifunction steering wheel) ............................................ Setting the departure time ............. Auxiliary ventilation Activating/deactivating ................. Activating/deactivating (on the centre console) .............................. 157 157 119 163 164 163 283 163 168 163 166 168 163 156 168 162 165 155 164 163 162 162 168 285 143 143 143 147 144 242 145 143 143 5 6 Index Problem (display message) ............ 147 Remote control .............................. 144 Axle load, permissible (trailer towing) ...................................................... 389 B Bag hook ............................................ 308 Ball coupling Folding in ....................................... 218 Folding out ..................................... 217 BAS (Brake Assist System) ................. 73 Basic settings see Settings BAS PLUS (Brake Assist System PLUS) .................................................... 73 Battery (key) Checking .......................................... 87 Important safety notes .................... 86 Replacing ......................................... 87 Battery (vehicle) Charging ........................................ 349 Connecting .................................... 348 Disconnecting ................................ 348 Display message (12-button multifunction steering wheel) .............. 271 Display message (4-button multifunction steering wheel) ................ 269 Important safety notes .................. 346 Jump starting ................................. 350 Location ......................................... 347 Removing/fitting ........................... 348 Belt see Seat belt Belt force limiters (activation) ........... 47 Belt tensioner Activation ......................................... 47 Function ........................................... 56 Blind Spot Assist Activating/deactivating ................. 238 Display message (12-button multifunction steering wheel) .............. 276 Notes/function .............................. 205 Trailer towing ................................. 207 see Active Blind Spot Assist Bonnet Closing ........................................... 323 Display message (12-button multifunction steering wheel) .............. 286 Display message (4-button multifunction steering wheel) ................ 284 Opening ......................................... 322 Boot Emergency release .......................... 95 Important safety guidelines ............. 92 Locking separately ........................... 95 Opening/closing (automatically from outside) ................................... 93 Opening (automatically from inside) .............................................. 94 Boot lid Display message (12-button multifunction steering wheel) .............. 286 Display message (4-button multifunction steering wheel) ................ 284 Opening/closing .............................. 92 Opening dimensions ...................... 386 Brake Assist System see BAS (Brake Assist System) Brake fluid Display message (12-button multifunction steering wheel) .............. 258 Display message (4-button multifunction steering wheel) ................ 252 Notes ............................................. 383 Brake lamp Display message (12-button multifunction steering wheel) .............. 265 Display message (4-button multifunction steering wheel) ................ 262 Brake lamps Adaptive ........................................... 74 Changing bulbs .............................. 128 Brakes ABS .................................................. 72 BAS .................................................. 73 BAS PLUS ........................................ 73 Brake fluid (notes) ......................... 383 Display message (12-button multifunction steering wheel) .............. 255 Display message (4-button multifunction steering wheel) ................ 250 Driving tips .................................... 175 Index High-performance brake system .... Important safety notes .................. Parking brake ................................ Warning lamp ................................. Breakdown see Flat tyre see Towing away/tow-starting Bulbs see Changing bulbs 177 175 175 293 C Calling up a fault see Display messages Capacities see Technical data Car see Vehicle Care Automatic car wash ....................... Carpets .......................................... Display ........................................... Exterior lighting ............................. Gear or selector lever .................... High-pressure cleaner .................... Matt paintwork .............................. Notes ............................................. Paint .............................................. Plastic trim .................................... Reversing camera .......................... Roof lining ...................................... Seat belt ........................................ Seat cover ..................................... Sensors ......................................... Steering wheel ............................... Tail pipes ....................................... Trim pieces .................................... Washing by hand ........................... Wheels ........................................... Windows ........................................ Wiper blades .................................. Wooden trim .................................. Car key see Key Car wash (care) ................................. CD player/CD changer (12-button multifunction steering wheel) .......... 327 332 331 330 332 328 329 327 328 331 330 332 332 332 330 332 331 332 328 328 329 329 332 327 234 Cell phone see Mobile phone Central locking Automatic locking (on-board computer) ............................................. 242 Locking/unlocking (key) .................. 84 Centre console ..................................... 42 Changing bulbs Brake lamps ................................... 128 Cornering light function ................. 127 Dipped-beam headlamps ............... 126 Important safety notes .................. 125 Main-beam headlamps ................... 127 Overview of bulb types .................. 126 Parking lamps (front) ..................... 127 Reversing lamps ............................ 128 Standing lamps .............................. 127 Child-proof locks Important safety notes .................... 71 Rear doors ....................................... 71 Children Fastening seat belts ......................... 64 In the vehicle ................................... 57 Restraint systems ............................ 57 Child seat Automatic recognition ..................... 59 Display message (12-button multifunction steering wheel) .............. 260 Display message (4-button multifunction steering wheel) ................ 253 Integrated ........................................ 63 Integrated, ICS padded play table .... 65 Integrated, side head restraints ....... 66 Integrated, storing ........................... 67 ISOFIX .............................................. 60 On the front-passenger seat ............ 58 Problem (malfunction) ..................... 63 Recommendations ........................... 70 Suitable positions ............................ 68 Cigarette lighter ................................ 317 Cleaning Trailer tow hitch ............................. 331 Climate control Activating/deactivating rear window heating ................................... 141 Auxiliary heating/ventilation .......... 143 Controlling automatically ............... 138 7 8 Index Convenience opening/closing (air recirculation) ................................. 142 Cooling with air dehumidification . . 137 Demisting the windows .................. 140 Demisting the windscreen ............. 140 Important safety notes .................. 134 Indicator lamp ................................ 138 Notes on using THERMATIC automatic climate control ..................... 135 Notes on using THERMOTRONIC automatic climate control .............. 137 Overview of systems ...................... 134 Problems with cooling with air dehumidification ............................ 138 Problem with the rear window heating .......................................... 141 Rear control panel ......................... 136 Setting the air distribution ............. 139 Setting the airflow ......................... 139 Setting the air vents ...................... 147 Setting the climate mode (AIR FLOW) ............................................ 138 Setting the temperature ................ 138 Switching air-recirculation mode on/off ............................................ 141 Switching on/off ........................... 137 Switching residual heat on/off ...... 142 Switching the ZONE function on/ off .................................................. 140 THERMATIC automatic climate control (2-zone) ............................. 135 THERMOTRONIC (3-zone) automatic climate control ..................... 136 Coat hooks ......................................... 310 Cockpit Overview .......................................... 32 see Instrument cluster COMAND Online see separate operating instructions Combination switch .......................... 120 Combined luggage cover and net .... 309 Constant headlamp mode see Daytime driving lamps Consumption statistics On-board computer (12-button multifunction steering wheel) ........ 231 On-board computer (4-button multifunction steering wheel) ........ 226 Convenience closing feature .............. 97 Convenience opening/closing (airrecirculation mode) ........................... 142 Convenience opening feature ............ 97 Coolant (engine) Checking the level ......................... 324 Display message (12-button multifunction steering wheel) .............. 270 Display message (4-button multifunction steering wheel) ................ 268 Notes ............................................. 383 Temperature display (12-button multifunction steering wheel; AMG) ............................................. 245 Temperature gauge (12-button multifunction steering wheel) ........ 226 Temperature gauge (4-button multifunction steering wheel) ........ 222 Warning lamp ................................. 298 Cooling see Climate control Cornering lamps Changing bulbs .............................. 127 Cornering light function Display message (12-button multifunction steering wheel) .............. 264 Display message (4-button multifunction steering wheel) ................ 261 Function/notes ............................. 121 Crash-responsive emergency lighting ....................................................... 125 Cruise control Cruise control lever ....................... 178 Deactivating ................................... 180 Display message (12-button multifunction steering wheel) .............. 279 Display message (4-button multifunction steering wheel) ................ 272 Driving system ............................... 178 Important safety notes .................. 178 LIM indicator lamp ......................... 178 Selecting ........................................ 179 Setting a speed .............................. 180 Storing and maintaining current speed ............................................. 179 Index Cup holder Centre console .............................. 314 Important safety notes .................. 314 Rear compartment ......................... 315 D Dashboard see Cockpit Data see Technical data Daytime driving lamps Switching on/off (on-board computer, 12-button multifunction steering wheel) .............................. Daytime driving lights Display message (12-button multifunction steering wheel) .............. Display message (4-button multifunction steering wheel) ................ Switching on/off (on-board computer, 4-button multifunction steering wheel) .............................. Switching on/off (switch) .............. Delayed switch-off Exterior lighting (12-button multifunction steering wheel) ................ Interior lighting (12-button multifunction steering wheel) ................ Diesel .................................................. Diesel particle filter .......................... Digital speedometer ......................... Dipped beam Display message (4-button multifunction steering wheel) ................ Dipped-beam headlamps Changing bulbs .............................. Display message (12-button multifunction steering wheel) .............. Setting for driving abroad (symmetrical) ........................................ Setting for driving on the right/ left ................................................. Switching on/off ........................... Display (cleaning instructions) ........ 239 266 263 226 119 241 241 170 175 231 261 126 264 118 240 119 331 Display message (12-button multifunction steering wheel) ASSYST PLUS service interval ....... Calling up ....................................... Driving systems ............................. Engine ............................................ General notes ................................ Hiding ............................................ Key ................................................ KEYLESS-GO .................................. Lights ............................................. Safety systems .............................. Tyres .............................................. Vehicle ........................................... Display message (4-button multifunction steering wheel) ASSYST PLUS service interval ....... Calling up ....................................... Driving systems ............................. Engine ............................................ General notes ................................ Hiding ............................................ Key ................................................ KEYLESS-GO .................................. Lights ............................................. Safety systems .............................. Tyres .............................................. Vehicle ........................................... Distance display (on-board computer, 12-button multifunction steering wheel) .................................. Distance recorder 12-button multifunction steering wheel ............................................. see Trip meter Distance warning signal (warning lamp) .................................................. DISTRONIC PLUS Deactivating ................................... Display message (12-button multifunction steering wheel) .............. Displays in the multifunction display ................................................ Driving tips .................................... Function/notes ............................. Important safety notes .................. Selecting ........................................ 326 249 273 270 248 248 289 289 264 255 281 285 326 248 272 268 248 248 288 288 261 250 280 283 237 231 300 190 277 189 190 183 183 184 9 10 Index Setting the specified minimum distance ......................................... 188 Warning lamp ................................. 300 Door Automatic door locking feature (on-board computer, 12-button multifunction steering wheel) ........ 242 Automatic locking (switch) ............... 90 Central locking/unlocking (key) ...... 84 Control panel ................................... 44 Display message (12-button multifunction steering wheel) .............. 286 Display message (4-button multifunction steering wheel) ................ 284 Emergency locking ........................... 91 Emergency unlocking ....................... 91 Important safety notes .................... 89 Opening (from the inside) ................ 90 Drinks holder see Cup holders Drive program Automatic ...................................... 164 Display ........................................... 162 Manual ........................................... 166 Drive program selector ..................... 164 Driver's door see Door Driver's seat see Seats Drive system Active Blind Spot Assist ................. 209 Driving abroad Service24h .................................... 327 Symmetrical dipped beam ............. 118 Driving on flooded roads .................. 177 Driving safety system BAS PLUS (Brake Assist System PLUS) ............................................... 73 Electronic Brake-force Distribution .................................................. 78 ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) ............................................... 75 ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction System) ........................................... 75 Important safety guidelines ............. 72 Driving safety systems ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) ....... 72 ADAPTIVE BRAKE ............................. 78 Adaptive brake lamps ...................... 74 BAS (Brake Assist System) .............. 73 Overview .......................................... 72 PRE-SAFE® Brake ............................. 78 Driving system Active Lane Keeping Assist ............ 212 Display message (12-button multifunction steering wheel) .............. 273 Display message (4-button multifunction steering wheel) ................ 272 Driving systems Active Driving Assistance package ................................................. 209 ATTENTION ASSIST ........................ 203 Blind Spot Assist ............................ 205 Cruise control ................................ 178 Distronic Plus ................................ 183 Dynamic handling package with sports mode .................................. 192 HOLD function ............................... 193 Lane Keeping Assist ...................... 208 Lane package ................................ 205 Parking Guidance ........................... 199 Parktronic ...................................... 196 RACE START (AMG vehicles) .......... 194 Reversing camera .......................... 202 Speed Limit Assist ......................... 204 Speedtronic ................................... 180 Driving tips Aquaplaning ................................... 177 Automatic transmission ................. 163 Brakes ........................................... 175 DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 190 Downhill gradient ........................... 175 Driving abroad ............................... 118 Driving in winter ............................. 177 Driving on flooded roads ................ 177 Driving on wet roads ...................... 177 General .......................................... 175 Icy road surfaces ........................... 178 Limited braking efficiency on salted roads ....................................... 176 New brake pads/linings ................ 176 Running-in tips ............................... 152 Snow chains .................................. 360 Index Symmetrical dipped beam ............. Towing a trailer .............................. Tyre grip ........................................ Wet road surface ........................... Dynamic handling package with sports mode ....................................... 118 215 177 176 192 E EASY-ENTRY feature Activating/deactivating (12-button multifunction steering wheel) . . 243 Function/notes ............................. 111 EASY-EXIT feature Activating/deactivating (12-button multifunction steering wheel) . . 243 Crash-responsive ........................... 112 Function/notes ............................. 111 EASY-PACK load-securing kit ........... 310 EBD (electronic brake force distribution) Function/notes ................................ 78 EBD (Electronic Brake force Distribution) Display message (12 button multifunction steering wheel) .............. 257 EBD (Electronic Brake-force Distribution) Display message (4-button multifunction steering wheel) ................ 251 ECO start/stop function Deactivating/activating ................. 158 General information ....................... 156 Electrical fuses see Fuses Electronic Brake force Distribution see EBD (Electronic Brake force Distribution) Electronic Stability Program see ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) Electronic Traction System see ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction System) Emergency key Unlocking the driver's door .............. 91 Emergency key element Function/notes ................................ 86 Locking vehicle ................................ 91 Emergency release Driver's door .................................... 91 Fuel filler flap ................................. 172 Emergency spare wheel Notes/data .................................... 369 Storage location ............................ 336 Emergency unlocking Boot ................................................. 95 Tailgate ............................................ 95 Vehicle ............................................. 91 Engine ECO start/stop function ................ 156 Emergency starting ........................ 354 Engine number ............................... 379 Running irregularly ......................... 159 Starting problems .......................... 159 Starting the engine with the key .... 155 Starting with KEYLESS GO ............. 155 Stopping ........................................ 174 Warning lamp (engine diagnostics) ............................................... 298 Engine electronics Notes ............................................. 377 Problem (fault) ............................... 159 Engine oil Additives ........................................ 382 Checking the oil level ..................... 323 Checking the oil level using the dipstick .......................................... 323 Display message (12-button multifunction steering wheel) .............. 271 Display message (4-button multifunction steering wheel) ................ 269 Filling capacity ............................... 382 Notes about oil grades ................... 381 Notes on oil level/consumption .... 323 Temperature (12-button multifunction steering wheel) ................ 245 Topping up ..................................... 324 Viscosity ........................................ 382 Environmental protection Note ................................................. 26 Returning an end-of-life vehicle ....... 26 ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) AMG menu (on-board computer) . . . 245 Deactivating/activating (AMG vehicles) .......................................... 76 11 12 Index Deactivating/activating (except AMG vehicles) ................................ 237 Deactivating/activating (notes; except AMG vehicles) ...................... 75 Display message (12-button multifunction steering wheel) .............. 255 Display message (4-button multifunction steering wheel) ................ 250 ETS/4ETS ........................................ 75 Function/notes ................................ 75 Important safety guidelines ............. 75 Trailer stabilisation .......................... 77 Warning lamp ................................. 295 ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction System) ...................................................... 75 Exhaust tail pipe (cleaning instructions) .................................................. 331 Exterior lighting see Lights Exterior mirrors Adjusting ....................................... 112 Anti-dazzle mode (automatic) ........ 114 Folding in/out (automatically) ....... 113 Folding in/out (electrically) ........... 113 Folding in (12-button multifunction steering wheel) ....................... 244 Out of position (troubleshooting) ... 113 Parking position ............................. 114 Resetting ....................................... 113 Storing settings (memory function) ............................................... 115 F Fatigue Assist see ATTENTION ASSIST Fault message see Display messages Filler cap see Fuel filler flap Fire extinguisher ............................... First-aid kit ......................................... Flat tyre Changing a wheel/fitting the spare wheel ................................... MOExtended run-flat system ......... Preparing the vehicle ..................... 335 334 341 345 337 Raising the vehicle ......................... 343 TIREFIT kit ...................................... 337 Floormat ............................................. 319 Foglamps Extended range .............................. 122 Switching on/off ........................... 119 Frequencies Mobile phone ................................. 377 Two-way radio ................................ 377 Front foglamp Display message (12-button multifunction steering wheel) .............. 266 Front foglamps Display message (4-button multifunction steering wheel) ................ 263 Switching on/off ........................... 119 Front windscreen see Windscreen Fuel Displaying the range (12-button multifunction steering wheel) ........ 231 Displaying the range (4-button multifunction steering wheel) ........ 226 Important safety notes .................. 380 Notes about consumption ............. 380 Problem (malfunction) ................... 173 Refuelling ....................................... 168 Tank content/reserve fuel ............. 380 Tank content display (12-button multifunction steering wheel) .......... 37 Tank content display (4-button multifunction steering wheel) .......... 34 Fuel consumption Current (12-button multifunction steering wheel) .............................. 231 Fuel filler flap Emergency release ........................ 172 Opening/closing ............................ 171 Fuel filter Display message (12-button multifunction steering wheel) .............. 271 Display message (4-button multifunction steering wheel) ................ 269 Index Fuel reserve Display message (12-button multifunction steering wheel) .............. Display message (4-button multifunction steering wheel) ................ see Fuel Fuel tank Capacity ........................................ Problem (malfunction) ................... Fuse allocation chart (vehicle tool kit) ...................................................... Fuses Allocation chart ............................. Before changing ............................. Dashboard fuse box ....................... Fuse box in the boot ...................... Fuse box in the engine compartment .............................................. Fuse box in the luggage compartment .............................................. Important safety notes .................. 271 269 380 173 335 355 355 355 356 355 356 354 G Gear indicator (12-button multifunction steering wheel) .................. Gear or selector lever (cleaning instructions) ...................................... Gearshift program SETUP (on-board computer) .......... Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts ......... Glove compartment .......................... 245 332 245 376 303 H Handbrake see Parking brake Hazard warning lamps ...................... Headlamp Cleaning system (function) ............ Headlamps Misting up ...................................... Topping up the cleaning system .... see Automatic headlamp mode Head restraints Adjusting ....................................... Adjusting (electrically) ................... Adjusting (manually) ...................... 121 120 123 325 107 107 107 Adjusting (rear) .............................. Fitting/removing (rear) .................. Luxury ............................................ see NECK-PRO head restraints see NECK-PRO head restraints/ NECK-PRO luxury head restraints Heating see Climate control High-pressure cleaners .................... Hill start assist .................................. HOLD function Display message (12-button multifunction steering wheel) .............. Display message (4-button multifunction steering wheel) ................ Function/notes ............................. Hook ................................................... 107 108 107 328 156 273 272 193 308 I ICS padded play table ......................... 65 Ignition lock see Key positions Immobiliser .......................................... 80 Indicator and warning lamps Coolant .......................................... 298 DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 300 Engine diagnostics ......................... 298 Fuel tank ........................................ 298 Overview (12-button multifunction steering wheel) ......................... 39 Overview (4-button multifunction steering wheel) ................................ 36 SPORT handling mode ................... 296 Indicator lamps see Warning and indicator lamps Indicators see Turn signals Insect protection on the radiator .... 323 Instrument cluster (12-button multifunction steering wheel) Indicator and warning lamps ............ 39 Overview .......................................... 37 Settings ......................................... 239 Instrument cluster (4-button multifunction steering wheel) Indicator and warning lamps ............ 36 Overview .......................................... 34 13 14 Index Instrument cluster lighting Multifunction steering wheel with 12 buttons ....................................... 37 Multifunction steering wheel with 4 buttons ......................................... 34 Instrument lighting see Instrument cluster lighting Integrated child seat ICS padded play table ...................... 65 Important safety guidelines ............. 63 Side head restraints ......................... 66 Storing, ICS padded play table and side head restraints ......................... 67 Intelligent Light System Activating/deactivating (12-button multifunction steering wheel) . . 240 Display message (12-button multifunction steering wheel) .............. 267 Setting the dipped-beam headlamps for driving on the right/left . 240 Interior lighting ................................. 124 Automatic control system .............. 124 Delayed switch-off (12-button multifunction steering wheel) ........ 241 Emergency lighting ........................ 125 Manual control ............................... 125 Overview ........................................ 124 Reading lamp ................................. 124 Interior motion sensor ........................ 81 ISOFIX child seat securing system .... 60 J Jack Storage location ............................ 335 Using ............................................. 343 Jump starting (engine) ...................... 350 K Key Changing the battery ....................... 87 Checking the battery ....................... 87 Convenience closing feature ............ 97 Convenience opening feature .......... 97 Display message (4-button multifunction steering wheel) ................ 288 Door central locking/unlocking ....... 84 Emergency key element ................... 86 Loss ................................................. 88 Modifying the programming ............. 85 Positions (ignition lock) ................. 153 Problem (malfunction) ..................... 88 Starting the engine ........................ 155 KEYLESS-GO Convenience closing ........................ 98 Display message (12-button multifunction display) .......................... 289 Display message (4-button multifunction display) ............................ 288 Locking ............................................ 85 Start/Stop button .......................... 153 Starting the engine ........................ 155 Unlocking ......................................... 85 Key positions Key ................................................ 153 KEYLESS GO .................................. 153 Keys Display message (12-button multifunction steering wheel) .............. 289 Kickdown Driving tips .................................... 163 Manual drive program .................... 167 Kneebag ............................................... 50 L Lamps see Warning and indicator lamps Lane-change assistant see Blind Spot Assist Lane detection (automatic) see Lane Keeping Assist Lane Keeping Assist Activating/deactivating ................. Display message (12-button multifunction steering wheel) .............. Function/information .................... Lane package ..................................... Lap time (RACETIMER) ...................... Lashing eyelets ................................. Lighting see Lights Lights Activating/deactivating the exterior lighting delayed switch-off 238 275 208 205 245 307 Index (12-button multifunction steering wheel) ............................................ Activating/deactivating the Intelligent Light System ........................ Activating/deactivating the interior lighting delayed switch-off (12-button multifunction steering wheel) ............................................ Active light function ....................... Automatic headlamp mode ............ Cornering light function ................. Dipped-beam headlamps ............... Driving abroad ............................... Foglamps ....................................... Foglamps (extended range) ........... Hazard warning lamps ................... Headlamp flasher ........................... Headlamp range ............................ Light switch ................................... Main-beam headlamps ................... Motorway mode ............................. Parking lamps ................................ Rear foglamp ................................. Switching Adaptive Highbeam Assist on/off ................................. Switching the daytime driving lights on/off (12-button multifunction steering wheel) ................ Switching the daytime driving lights on/off (4-button multifunction steering wheel) ....................... Switching the daytime driving lights on/off (switch) ..................... Switching the surround lighting on/off (12-button multifunction steering wheel) .............................. Turn signals ................................... see Changing bulbs see Interior lighting Light sensor Display message (12-button multifunction steering wheel) .............. Display message (4-button multifunction steering wheel) ................ LIM indicator lamp Cruise control ................................ DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... Variable SPEEDTRONIC ................. 241 240 241 121 119 121 119 118 119 122 121 121 120 118 120 122 118 119 240 239 226 119 241 120 267 264 178 184 181 Limiting the speed see SPEEDTRONIC Loading guidelines ............................ 302 Locking see Central locking Locking (doors) Automatic ........................................ 90 Emergency locking ........................... 91 From inside (central locking button) .................................................. 90 Locking centrally see Central locking Locking verification signal (onboard computer) ............................... 242 Luggage compartment floor opening/closing ............................ 312 stowage well, under ....................... 312 Luggage cover ................................... 308 Luggage holder (EASY-PACK loadsecuring kit) ....................................... 311 Luggage net ....................................... 304 Lumbar support Adjusting ....................................... 109 Adjusting the 4-way lumbar support ................................................ 109 Luxury head restraint ....................... 107 Luxury multifunction steering wheel see 12-button multifunction steering wheel M M+S tyres ........................................... Main beam Display message (4-button multifunction steering wheel) ................ Main-beam headlamps Changing bulbs .............................. Display message (12-button multifunction steering wheel) .............. Switching Adaptive Highbeam Assist on/off ................................. Switching on/off ........................... Maintenance see ASSYST PLUS service interval display 360 262 127 266 122 120 15 16 Index Manual transmission Engaging reverse gear ................... 161 Gear lever ...................................... 160 Pulling away ................................... 155 Shifting to neutral .......................... 161 Shift recommendation ................... 161 Starting the engine ........................ 154 Matt finish (cleaning instructions) . . 329 Memory card (audio) ......................... 234 Memory function ............................... 115 Mercedes-Benz Service Centre see Qualified specialist workshop Message memory 12-button multifunction steering wheel ............................................. 249 4-button multifunction steering wheel ............................................. 248 Messages see Display messages Mirrors see Exterior mirrors see Rear-view mirror see Vanity mirror Mobile phone Frequencies ................................... 377 Installation ..................................... 377 Menu (on-board computer) ............ 235 Notes/placing in the bracket ......... 318 Transmission output (maximum) .... 377 Modifying the programming (key) ..... 85 MOExtended run-flat system ........... 345 Motorway mode ................................ 122 MP3 Operating ....................................... 234 see Separate operating instructions Multicontour seat .............................. 108 Multifunction display 4-button multifunction steering wheel ............................................. 223 Permanent display (12-button multifunction steering wheel) ........ 239 Multi-function display 12-button multifunction steering wheel ............................................. 228 Multifunction steering wheel (12button) see 12-button multifunction steering wheel Multifunction steering wheel (4 buttons) see 4-button multifunction steering wheel N Navigation Menu (on-board computer) ............ 232 On-board computer (12-button multifunction steering wheel) ........ 232 see separate operating instructions NECK-PRO head restraints Operation ......................................... 52 Resetting after being triggered ........ 52 NECK-PRO luxury head restraints Operation ......................................... 52 Resetting after being triggered ........ 52 Notes on running in a new vehicle . . 152 O Occupant safety Children in the vehicle ..................... 57 Important safety notes .................... 46 Odometer 4-button multifunction steering wheel ............................................. 225 see Total distance recorder see Trip meter Oil see Engine oil On-board computer RACETIMER ................................... 245 On-board computer (12-button multifunction steering wheel) AMG menu ..................................... 245 Assist menu ................................... 236 Audio menu ................................... 233 Convenience submenu .................. 243 DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 189 Important safety notes .................. 222 Instrument cluster submenu .......... 239 Lights submenu ............................. 239 Index Menu overview .............................. 230 Navigation menu ............................ 232 Operating ....................................... 227 Operating the video DVD ............... 234 Range ............................................ 231 Service menu ................................. 238 Standard display submenu ............ 231 Telephone menu ............................ 235 Trip menu ...................................... 231 On-board computer (12-button multifunction steering wheel) Displaying service messages ......... 326 Display messages .......................... 248 Heating submenu ........................... 242 Message memory .......................... 249 Vehicle submenu ........................... 241 On-board computer (12-button multifunction steering wheel)Settings menu ......................................... 238 On-board computer (12-button multifunction steering wheel) submenu Factory setting ............................... 244 On-board computer (4-button multifunction steering wheel) Important safety notes .................. 222 Menu overview .............................. 225 Switching daytime driving lights on/off ............................................ 226 On-board computer (4-button multifunction steering wheel) Displaying service messages ......... 326 Display messages .......................... 248 Individual vehicle settings .............. 223 Message memory .......................... 248 Operating ....................................... 223 Range ............................................ 226 Standard display ............................ 225 Trip computer ................................ 226 On-board diagnostic interface ........... 28 Opening and closing the side trim panels ................................................. 127 Operating safety On-board diagnostic interface .......... 28 Operating system see On-board computer Outside temperature Display (12-button multifunction steering wheel) .............................. 227 Display (4-button multifunction steering wheel) .............................. 222 Overhead control panel ...................... 43 Override feature Rear side windows ........................... 72 P Paint code .......................................... 379 Paintwork (cleaning instructions) . . . 328 Panorama sliding sunroof Important safety information ........... 99 Opening/closing ............................ 101 Opening/closing the roller sunblind ............................................... 101 Problem (malfunction) ................... 102 Rain closing feature ....................... 101 Resetting ....................................... 102 Park Assist Parking Guidance ........................... 199 Parking ............................................... 174 Important safety notes .................. 174 Parking brake ................................ 175 Position of exterior mirror, frontpassenger side ............................... 114 Reversing camera .......................... 202 see PARKTRONIC Parking aid see Exterior mirrors see PARKTRONIC Parking brake .................................... 175 Display message (12-button multifunction steering wheel) .............. 257 Display message (4-button multifunction steering wheel) ................ 251 Notes/function .............................. 175 Parking Guidance Display message (12-button multifunction steering wheel) .............. 276 Important safety notes .................. 199 Trailer towing ................................. 202 17 18 Index Parking lamp Display message (12-button multifunction steering wheel) .............. 266 Display message (4-button multifunction steering wheel) ................ 263 Parking lamps Changing bulbs .............................. 127 Switching on/off ........................... 118 Parking lamps (changing bulbs) ...... 127 PARKTRONIC Deactivating/activating ................. 198 Driving system ............................... 196 Function/notes ............................. 196 Problem (fault) ............................... 199 Sensor range ................................. 196 Trailer towing ................................. 198 Warning display ............................. 197 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF warning lamp ...................................................... 59 Permanent four-wheel drive see 4MATIC (permanent fourwheel drive) Petrol .................................................. 169 Plastic trim (cleaning instructions) . 331 Power windows see Side windows PRE-SAFE® (preventative occupant protection) Display message (12-button multifunction steering wheel) .............. 258 Display message (4-button multifunction steering wheel) ................ 252 PRE-SAFE® (preventive occupant safety system) Operation ......................................... 51 PRE-SAFE® Brake (vehicles with DISTRONIC PLUS) Function/notes ................................ 78 PRE-SAFE® Brake (vehicles with DISTRONIC PLUS) Display message (12-button multifunction steering wheel) .............. 259 Switching on/off ........................... 237 Warning lamp ................................. 300 Preventive occupant safety system see PRE-SAFE® (preventive occupant safety system) Program selector button .................. 163 Pulling away Automatic transmission ................. 156 Manual transmission ...................... 155 Q Qualified specialist workshop ........... 28 R RACE START (AMG vehicles) ............. 194 RACETIMER (on-board computer) .... 245 Radar sensor system Activating/deactivating ................. 242 Country overview ........................... 389 Display message (12-button multifunction steering wheel) .............. 274 Radiator cover ................................... 323 Radio Selecting a station (12-button multifunction steering wheel) ........ 233 see separate operating instructions Rain closing feature Panorama sliding sunroof .............. 101 Sliding sunroof ............................... 100 Range (fuel) Displaying (12-button multifunction steering wheel) ....................... 231 Displaying (4-button multifunction steering wheel) ....................... 226 Reading lamp ..................................... 124 Rear bench seat Folding the backrest forwards/ back ............................................... 305 Rear compartment Setting the airflow ......................... 139 Setting the air vents ...................... 148 Rear-compartment seat belt status indicator ........................................ 56 Index Rear foglamp Display message (12-button multifunction steering wheel) .............. 266 Display message (4-button multifunction steering wheel) ................ 263 Switching on/off ........................... 119 Rear seat Display message (12-button multifunction steering wheel) .............. 286 Display message (4-button multifunction steering wheel) ................ 284 Rear-view mirror Anti-dazzle mode (automatic) ........ 114 Dipping (manual) ........................... 112 Rear window blind ............................ 316 Rear window heating Problem (fault) ............................... 141 Switching on/off ........................... 141 Rear window wiper Replacing the wiper blade .............. 131 Switching on/off ........................... 130 Refuelling Fuel gauge ....................................... 34 Important safety notes .................. 168 Refuelling process ......................... 171 see Fuel Releasing the parking lock manually (automatic transmission) ........ 168 Remote control Auxiliary heating/ventilation .......... 144 Changing the batteries (auxiliary heating) ......................................... 145 Replacing the battery (auxiliary heating remote control) .................... 145 Reserve (fuel tank) see Fuel Reserve fuel Display message (12-button multifunction steering wheel) .............. 271 Display message (4-button multifunction steering wheel) ................ 269 Warning lamp ................................. 298 Residual heat (climate control) ........ 142 Restraint system see SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) Rev counter 12-button multifunction steering wheel ............................................. 4-button multifunction steering wheel ............................................. Reverse gear Engaging (automatic transmission) ............................................... Engaging (manual transmission) .... Reversing camera Cleaning instructions ..................... Function/notes ............................. Reversing lamp Changing bulbs .............................. Display message (12-button multifunction steering wheel) .............. Display message (4-button multifunction steering wheel) ................ Roller blind see Roller sunblind Roller sunblind Panorama sliding sunroof .............. Rear window .................................. Roof carrier ........................................ Roof lining and carpets (cleaning instructions) ...................................... Roof load (maximum) ........................ Route see Route guidance (navigation) Route guidance (navigation) ............ 226 222 162 161 330 202 128 266 263 101 316 313 332 384 232 S Safety Children in the vehicle ..................... 57 Child restraint systems .................... 57 Safety net ........................................... 309 Attaching ....................................... 310 Safety systems see Driving safety systems Seat Folding the backrest (rear compartment) forwards/back .............. 306 19 20 Index Seat belt Activating/deactivating seat-belt adjustment (12-button multifunction steering wheel) ....................... 244 Adjusting the driver's and frontpassenger seat belt ......................... 55 Adjusting the height ......................... 55 Belt force limiter .............................. 56 Belt tensioner .................................. 56 Cleaning ......................................... 332 Display message (12-button multifunction steering wheel) .............. 259 Display message (4-button multifunction steering wheel) ................ 252 Fastening ......................................... 55 Important safety guidelines ............. 53 Rear seat belt status indicator ......... 56 Releasing ......................................... 56 Warning lamp (function) ................... 56 Seat belts Warning lamp ................................. 291 Seats Adjusting (electrically) ................... 106 Adjusting (manually and electrically) .............................................. 106 Adjusting lumbar support .............. 109 Adjusting the 4-way lumbar support ................................................ 109 Adjusting the head restraint .......... 107 Cleaning the cover ......................... 332 Correct driver's seat position ........ 104 Important safety notes .................. 105 Multicontour seat .......................... 108 Seat heating problem .................... 110 Seat ventilation problem ................ 110 Storing settings (memory function) ............................................... 115 Switching seat heating on/off ....... 109 Switching the seat ventilation on/ off .................................................. 110 Sensors (cleaning instructions) ....... 330 Service see ASSYST PLUS service interval display Service menu (12-button multifunction steering wheel) .................. 238 Service products Brake fluid ..................................... 383 Coolant (engine) ............................ 383 Engine oil ....................................... 381 Fuel ................................................ 380 Important safety notes .................. 379 Settings Factory (12-button multifunction steering wheel) .............................. 244 On-board computer (12-button multifunction steering wheel) ........ 238 Setting the air distribution ............... 139 Setting the airflow ............................ 139 SETUP (on-board computer) ............. 245 Shifting to neutral (manual transmission) ............................................. 161 Sidebag ................................................ 50 Side marker lamp Display message (12-button multifunction steering wheel) .............. 266 Display message (4-button multifunction steering wheel) ................ 263 Side windows Convenience closing ........................ 97 Convenience opening ...................... 97 Important safety notes .................... 96 Opening/closing .............................. 97 Problem (malfunction) ..................... 99 resetting .......................................... 98 Sliding sunroof Important safety information ........... 99 Opening/closing ............................ 100 Problem (malfunction) ................... 102 Rain closing feature ....................... 100 Resetting ....................................... 100 see Panorama sliding sunroof Snow chains ...................................... 360 Socket Centre console .............................. 317 Luggage compartment ................... 318 Points to observe before use ......... 317 Rear compartment ......................... 318 Spare wheel Storage location ............................ 336 see Emergency spare wheel Specialist workshop ............................ 28 Spectacles compartment ................. 303 Index Speed, controlling see Cruise control Speed Limit Assist Activating/deactivating the warning function .................................... 236 Displaying ...................................... 236 Display message (12-button multifunction steering wheel) .............. 273 Display message in the multifunction display .................................... 205 Important safety notes .................. 204 Speedometer Activating/deactivating the additional speedometer ........................ 239 Digital ............................................ 231 In the instrument cluster (12-button multifunction steering wheel) .... 37 In the instrument cluster (4-button multifunction steering wheel) .... 34 Segments ...................................... 227 Selecting the unit of measurement .............................................. 239 see Instrument cluster SPEEDTRONIC Deactivating variable ..................... 182 Display message (12-button multifunction steering wheel) .............. 278 Display message (4-button multifunction steering wheel) ................ 272 Function/notes ............................. 180 Important safety notes .................. 180 LIM indicator lamp ......................... 181 Permanent ..................................... 183 Selecting ........................................ 181 Storing the current speed .............. 182 Variable ......................................... 181 SPORT handling mode Activating/deactivating (AMG vehicles) .......................................... 76 Warning lamp ................................. 296 SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) Display message (12-button multifunction steering wheel) .............. 260 Display message (4-button multifunction steering wheel) ................ 253 Introduction ..................................... 47 Warning lamp ................................. 297 Warning lamp (function) ................... 47 Starting (engine) ................................ 154 Station see Radio Steering Display message (12-button multifunction steering wheel) .............. 287 Display message (4-button multifunction steering wheel) ................ 285 Steering wheel Adjusting (electrically) ................... 111 Adjusting (manually) ...................... 111 Buttons (12-button multifunction steering wheel) .............................. 227 Buttons (4-button multifunction steering wheel) .............................. 223 Cleaning ......................................... 332 Gearshift paddles ........................... 164 Important safety notes .................. 110 Storing settings (memory function) ............................................... 115 Steering wheel gearshift paddles .... 164 Stopwatch (RACETIMER) ................... 245 Stowage compartment Spectacles compartment ............... 303 Stowage compartments Armrest (under) ............................. 303 Centre console .............................. 303 Cup holder ..................................... 314 Glove compartment ....................... 303 Important safety information ......... 302 Luggage net ................................... 304 Rear ............................................... 304 Under driver's seat/frontpassenger seat .............................. 304 Stowage well beneath the boot floor .................................................... 312 Summer opening see Convenience opening feature Summer tyres .................................... 359 Sun blind Rear side windows ......................... 315 Sun visor ............................................ 315 Supplement Restraint System see SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) 21 22 Index Surround lighting (12-button multifunction steering wheel) ................ 241 Switching off the alarm (ATA) ............ 80 T Tailgate Display message (12-button multifunction steering wheel) .............. 286 Display message (4-button multifunction steering wheel) ................ 284 Emergency unlocking ....................... 95 Important safety notes .................... 92 Limiting the opening angle ............... 94 Opening/closing .............................. 92 Opening/closing (automatically from inside) ...................................... 94 Opening/closing (automatically from outside) ................................... 93 Opening dimensions ...................... 386 Tail lamp Display message (12-button multifunction steering wheel) .............. 265 Display message (4-button multifunction steering wheel) ................ 262 Tank see Fuel tank Tank content Displaying the range (12-button multifunction steering wheel) ........ 231 Displaying the range (4-button multifunction steering wheel) ........ 226 Fuel gauge (12-button multifunction steering wheel) ......................... 37 Fuel gauge (4-button multifunction steering wheel) ......................... 34 Technical data Notes ............................................. 376 Trailer loads ................................... 388 Tyres/wheels ................................. 366 Vehicle data ................................... 384 Telephone Accepting a call ............................. 235 Display message (12-button multifunction steering wheel) .............. 288 Menu (on-board computer) ............ 235 Number from the phone book ........ 235 Redialling ....................................... 236 Rejecting/ending a call ................. 235 Telephone compartment ................ 303 Telescopic rod (Easy-Pack fix kit) .... 312 Temperature Coolant (12-button multifunction steering wheel; AMG) ..................... 245 Coolant (12-button multifunction steering wheel) .............................. 226 Coolant (4-button multifunction steering wheel) .............................. 222 Engine oil (12-button multifunction steering wheel) ....................... 245 Outside temperature (12-button multifunction steering wheel) ........ 227 Outside temperature (4-button multifunction steering wheel) ........ 222 Setting (climate control) ................ 138 TEMPOMAT Function/notes ............................. 178 Through-loading feature ................... 304 Tilt/sliding sunroof see Sliding sunroof Timing (RACETIMER) ......................... 245 TIREFIT kit .......................................... 337 Top Tether ............................................ 61 Total distance recorder Displaying (12-button multifunction steering wheel) ....................... 231 Displaying (4-button multifunction steering wheel) ....................... 225 Tow-away protection .......................... 81 Towing Important safety notes .................. 351 With the rear axle raised ................ 353 Towing a trailer Active Blind Spot Assist ................. 212 Active Lane Keeping Assist ............ 215 Axle load, permissible .................... 389 Bulb failure indicator for LED lamps ............................................. 220 Lights display message (12-button multifunction steering wheel) . . 264 Lights display message (4-button multifunction steering wheel) ........ 261 Trailer tow hitch display message (4-button multifunction steering wheel) ............................................ 285 Index Towing away Fitting the towing eye .................... 352 Removing the towing eye ............... 353 With both axles on the ground ....... 353 Tow-starting Emergency engine starting ............ 354 Fitting the towing eye .................... 352 Important safety notes .................. 351 Removing the towing eye ............... 353 Trailer coupling see Towing a trailer Trailer towing 7-pin connector ............................. 220 Blind Spot Assist ............................ 207 Cleaning the trailer tow hitch ......... 331 Coupling up a trailer ...................... 218 Decoupling a trailer ....................... 218 Driving tips .................................... 215 ESP® ................................................ 77 Folding in the ball coupling ............ 218 Folding out the ball coupling .......... 217 Important safety notes .................. 215 Mounting dimensions .................... 387 Parking Guidance ........................... 202 Parktronic ...................................... 198 Power supply ................................. 219 Shift range ..................................... 163 Trailer loads ................................... 388 Transmission see Automatic transmission see Manual transmission Transporting the vehicle .................. 353 Trim pieces (cleaning instructions) . 332 Trip computer On-board computer (12-button multifunction steering wheel) ........ 231 On-board computer (4-button multifunction steering wheel) ........ 226 Trip meter Displaying/resetting (4-button multifunction steering wheel) ........ 225 Displaying (12-button multifunction steering wheel) ....................... 231 Resetting (12-button multifunction steering wheel) ....................... 232 Trip odometer see Trip meter Turn signal Display message (12-button multifunction steering wheel) .............. Display message (4-button multifunction steering wheel) ................ Turn signals Switching on/off ........................... Two-way radio Frequencies ................................... Installation ..................................... Transmission output (maximum) .... Type identification plate see Vehicle identification plate Tyre pressure Calling up (on-board computer) ..... Display message (12-button multifunction steering wheel) .............. Display message (4-button multifunction steering wheel) ................ Not reached (TIREFIT) .................... Pressure loss warning .................... Reached (TIREFIT) .......................... Recommended ............................... Tyre pressure monitor Function/notes ............................. Restarting ...................................... Warning lamp ................................. Tyres Checking ........................................ Direction of rotation ...................... Display message (12-button multifunction steering wheel) .............. Display message (4-button multifunction steering wheel) ................ Grip ................................................ Important safety notes .................. Replacing ....................................... Service life ..................................... Storing ........................................... Tyre size (data) .............................. Tyre tread ...................................... see Flat tyre 265 262 120 377 377 377 363 281 280 340 362 340 361 363 365 300 358 366 281 280 177 358 365 359 366 366 359 23 24 Index U Unladen weight ................................. 384 Unlocking Emergency unlocking ....................... 91 From inside the vehicle (central unlocking button) ............................. 90 V Vanity mirror (in sun visor) .............. 315 Variable SPEEDTRONIC see SPEEDTRONIC Vehicle Correct use ...................................... 28 Data acquisition ............................... 29 Electronics ..................................... 377 Equipment ....................................... 26 Implied warranty .............................. 29 Individual settings .......................... 238 Leaving parked up ......................... 175 Locking (in an emergency) ............... 91 Locking (key) ................................... 84 Lowering ........................................ 344 Pulling away ................................... 155 Raising ........................................... 343 Registration ..................................... 28 Towing away .................................. 351 Tow-starting ................................... 351 Transporting .................................. 353 Unlocking (in an emergency) ........... 91 Unlocking (key) ................................ 84 Vehicle data ................................... 384 Vehicle battery see Battery (vehicle) Vehicle data ....................................... 384 see Technical data Vehicle dimensions ........................... 384 Vehicle emergency locking ................ 91 Vehicle identification number see VIN Vehicle identification plate .............. 379 Vehicle tool kit .................................. 335 Vehicle weights ................................. 384 Vents see Air vents Video (DVD) ........................................ 234 Video DVD (12-button multifunction steering wheel) .......................... 234 VIN ...................................................... 379 W Warning and indicator lamps ABS ................................................ 293 Brakes ........................................... 293 Distance warning signal ................. 300 ESP® .............................................. 295 ESP® OFF ....................................... 295 LIM (cruise control) ........................ 178 LIM (DISTRONIC PLUS) .................. 184 LIM (variable SPEEDTRONIC) ......... 181 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF ................ 59 Reserve fuel ................................... 298 Seat belt ........................................ 291 SRS ................................................ 297 Tyre pressure monitor ................... 300 Warning triangle ................................ 334 Washer fluid Display message (12-button multifunction steering wheel) .............. 288 Display message (4-button multifunction steering wheel) ................ 285 see Windscreen washer system Wheel bolt tightening torque ........... 344 Wheel chock ...................................... 342 Wheels Changing/replacing ....................... 365 Changing a wheel .......................... 341 Checking ........................................ 358 Cleaning ......................................... 328 Fitting a wheel ............................... 344 Important safety notes .................. 358 Removing a wheel .......................... 344 Storing ........................................... 366 Tightening torque ........................... 344 Wheel size/tyre size ...................... 366 Windowbag Display message (12-button multifunction steering wheel) .............. 261 Display message (4-button multifunction steering wheel) ................ 254 Operation ......................................... 51 Index Windows Cleaning ......................................... see Side windows Windscreen Demisting ...................................... Windscreen washer system ............. Windscreen wipers Problem (malfunction) ................... Rear window wiper ........................ Replacing the wiper blades ............ Switching on/off ........................... Winter operation Important safety notes .................. Radiator cover ............................... Slippery road surfaces ................... Snow chains .................................. Winter tyres Limiting the speed (on-board computer) ............................................. M+S tyres ...................................... Wiper blades Cleaning ......................................... Important safety notes .................. Replacing (on the rear window) ..... Replacing (windscreen) .................. Wooden trim (cleaning instructions) .................................................. 329 140 325 132 130 130 129 359 323 178 360 241 360 329 130 131 131 332 25 26 Introduction Protection of the environment Notes H Environmental note Daimler's declared policy is one of integrated environmental protection. The objectives are for the natural resources which form the basis of our existence on this planet to be used sparingly and in a manner which takes the requirements of both nature and humanity into account. You too can help to protect the environment by operating your vehicle in an environmentally responsible manner. Fuel consumption and the rate of engine, transmission, brake and tyre wear depend on the following factors: Roperating conditions of your vehicle personal driving style You can influence both factors. You should bear the following in mind: Operating conditions: Ryour Ravoid short trips as these increase fuel con- sumption. sure that the tyre pressures are always correct. Rdo not carry any unnecessary weight. Rkeep an eye on the vehicle's fuel consumption. Rremove roof racks once you no longer need them. Ra regularly serviced vehicle will contribute to environmental protection. You should therefore adhere to the service intervals. Ralways have maintenance work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Personal driving style: Rmake Rdo not depress the accelerator pedal when starting the engine. Rdo not warm up the engine with the vehicle stationary. Rdrive carefully and maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front. frequent, sudden acceleration. Rchange gear in good time and use each gear only up to Ô of its maximum engine speed. Ravoid Rswitch off the engine in stationary traffic. Returning end-of-life vehicles Mercedes-Benz will take back your Mercedes-Benz to dispose of it in an environmentally responsible manner, in accordance with the European Union (EU) End of Life Vehicles Directive. The End of Life Vehicles Directive applies to vehicles with a gross vehicle weight of up to 3.5 t, in accordance with national regulations. For several years, Mercedes-Benz has been meeting all the legal requirements for a design which allows for recycling and reuse. There is a network of return points and disassembly plants which can recycle your vehicle in an environmentally responsible manner. The options for recycling vehicles and parts are constantly being developed and improved. This means that your MercedesBenz will also continue to meet even the increased recycling quotas in the future in good time. You can obtain further information from your national Mercedes-Benz homepage or your national hotline number. Vehicle equipment This Owner's Manual describes all models and all standard and optional equipment of your vehicle available at the time of publication of the Owner's Manual. Country-specific differences are possible. Please note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all features described. This also applies to safetyrelevant systems and functions. The equipment in your vehicle may therefore differ from that shown in the descriptions and illustrations. All the systems found in your vehicle Introduction are listed in the original purchase agreement of your vehicle. Should you have any questions concerning equipment and operation, please consult a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Operating safety Safety notes G WARNING All work on the vehicle and, in particular, work relevant to safety or on safety-related systems must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. The specialist workshop must have the necessary specialist knowledge and tools to carry out the work required. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose. G WARNING Some safety systems only function when the engine is running. You should therefore never switch off the engine when driving. Otherwise, the safety systems of your vehicle may not function correctly and as a result will no longer protect you and other persons as intended. In addition, there is a risk that you may lose control of your vehicle and thus cause an accident. G WARNING Work carried out incorrectly, or alterations made to the vehicle, e.g. re-routing of cables under coverings, could cause the safety systems of your vehicle to stop working properly. The safety systems would thus no longer protect you and other persons as intended. In addition, there is a risk that you may lose control of your vehicle and thus cause an accident. All work and alterations to the vehicle, e.g. installations or modifications, should therefore be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. G WARNING If work on electronic equipment and its software is carried out incorrectly, this equipment could stop working. The electronic systems are networked via interfaces. Tampering with these electronic systems could cause malfunctions in systems which have not been modified. Malfunctions such as these can seriously jeopardise the vehicle's operating safety and therefore your own safety. You should therefore have all work and modifications to electronic components carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. General notes The following information applies to all radio system components in the vehicle and to COMAND: The radio system components in this vehicle are compliant with the basic requirements and all other relevant conditions of Directive 1999/5/EC. You can obtain further information from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. The equipment is approved by the vehicle manufacturer in accordance with European Automotive EMC Directive 95/54/EC. Operation according to its intended purpose is thus approved for your vehicle. The equipment does not require certification. The equipment conforms to the relevant equipment-specific EMC specifications in accordance with the following European standards: REN 55013 55020 Therefore, adherence to the relevant specifications for electromagnetic compatibility is guaranteed for this device. As a result, interference caused by your equipment to other electrical/electronic equipment and interference to your equipment caused by other electrical/electronic equipment can be largely prevented. REN Z 27 28 Introduction On-Board diagnostic interface G WARNING If you connect equipment to the on-board diagnostic interface, it can affect the operation of the vehicle systems. This can impair the operating safety of your vehicle while driving. There is a risk of accident. Do not connect any equipment to the onboard diagnostic interface. G WARNING Loose equipment or equipment cables which are connected to the on-board diagnostic interface may infringe on the space around the pedals. The equipment or the cables could get between the pedals in the event of sudden braking or acceleration. You may then no longer be able to brake, operate the clutch or accelerate as intended. There is a risk of accident. Do not attach any equipment or cables in the driver footwell. Connecting equipment to the on-board diagnostic interface can lead to emissions monitoring information being reset. This may lead to the vehicle failing to meet the requirements at the next emissions control test or main inspection. If the engine is switched off and equipment on the on-board diagnostic interface is used, the starter battery may discharge. The on-board diagnostic interface is intended for the connection of diagnostic equipment at a qualified specialist workshop. Qualified specialist workshop A qualified specialist workshop has the necessary specialist knowledge, tools and qualifications to correctly carry out the work required on your vehicle. This is especially the case for work relevant to safety. Observe the information in the Service Booklet. Always have the following work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop: Rwork relevant to safety and maintenance work Rrepair work Ralterations, installation work and modifications Rwork on electronic components Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Rservice Vehicle registration Mercedes-Benz may ask its Service Centres to carry out technical inspections on certain vehicles to improve their quality or safety. If you did not purchase your vehicle from an authorised specialist dealer and your vehicle has never been inspected at a MercedesBenz Service Centre, it is possible that your vehicle is not registered in your name with Mercedes-Benz. Mercedes-Benz can only inform you about vehicle checks if it has your registration data. It is advisable to register your vehicle with a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Inform Mercedes-Benz as soon as possible about any change in address or vehicle ownership. Correct use G WARNING Various warning stickers are affixed to your vehicle. Their purpose is to draw your attention, and the attention of others, to various dangers. Therefore, do not remove any warning stickers unless the sticker clearly states that you may do so. If you remove the warning stickers, you or others could be injured by failing to recognise certain dangers. Introduction Observe the following information when using your vehicle: Rthe safety notes in this manual "Technical data" section in this manual Rnational road traffic regulations Rnational road traffic licensing regulations After a fault has been rectified, the information is deleted from the memory. Other memory data is constantly overwritten. Rthe Implied warranty ! Follow the instructions in this manual about the proper operation of your vehicle as well as about possible vehicle damage. Damage to your vehicle that arises from culpable contraventions against these instructions are not covered either by Mercedes-Benz implied warranty or by the New or Used-Vehicle Warranty of Daimler AG. Other devices that store data Depending on the equipment level, your vehicle may feature communications and/or entertainment systems (e.g. navigation devices, telephone systems). These allow you to save and edit data required for the operation of the respective device. Further information on operation (e.g. on deleting data) can be found in the separate operating instructions. Data stored in the vehicle Fault data Components critical for vehicle operation are equipped with fault data memories as standard. There are also data storage devices which record the technical reactions of vehicle components to certain driving situations (e.g. airbag deployment or ESP® intervention). This data is used exclusively to: Rassist in the rectification of faults and defects Rhelp Mercedes-Benz optimise and develop vehicle functions The data cannot be used to trace the vehicle's movements. When your vehicle is serviced by MercedesBenz, this technical information can be read out from the fault memory. This is performed by authorised employees of the MercedesBenz service network using special diagnostic computers. Z 29 30 31 32 34 37 40 42 43 44 At a glance Cockpit ................................................. Instrument cluster (4-button steering wheel) ............................................ Instrument cluster (12-button steering wheel) ................................... Multifunction steering wheel ............. Centre console .................................... Overhead control panel ...................... Door control panel .............................. 32 Cockpit At a glance Cockpit Function : Page Automatic transmission: steering wheel gearshift paddles 164 ; Cruise control lever 178 = Instrument cluster (4-button steering wheel) Instrument cluster (12-button steering wheel) 34 37 ? Horn A PARKTRONIC warning display B Overhead control panel 43 C Climate control systems 134 D Ignition lock Start/Stop button 153 153 E Adjusts the steering wheel manually 110 F Adjusts the steering wheel electrically 110 G Combination switch 120 H Parking brake 175 196 Function Page I On-board diagnostic interface J Opens the bonnet 322 K Releases the parking brake 175 L Light switch 118 28 33 At a glance Cockpit Function Page : Overhead control panel ; PARKTRONIC warning display 196 = Cruise control lever ? Instrument cluster (4-button steering wheel) Instrument cluster (12-button steering wheel) Function Page E Opens the bonnet F On-board diagnostic interface 178 G Ignition lock Start/Stop button 153 153 34 H Adjusts the steering wheel manually 110 I Adjusts the steering wheel electrically 110 J Combination switch 120 K Parking brake 175 L Climate control systems 134 43 37 A Horn B Automatic transmission: steering wheel gearshift paddles 164 C Light switch 118 D Releases the parking brake 175 322 28 34 Instrument cluster (4-button steering wheel) At a glance Instrument cluster (4-button steering wheel) Displays and controls i Instrument cluster: kilometres Function Function Page : Fuel gauge ; Coolant temperature = Speedometer ? Rev counter 222 A ECO start/stop function Rear window wiper Automatic transmission: Transmission position and drive program Manual transmission: Gearshift recommendation Outside temperature HOLD function Stored limit speed 156 130 Multifunction display 223 B C 222 162 161 222 193 180 D Time Automatic transmission: Outside temperature (vehicles for the United Kingdom: speed in km/h) HOLD function Stored limit speed Brightness control knob for the instrument cluster lighting: turn clockwise or anticlockwise Page 222 193 180 35 At a glance Instrument cluster (4-button steering wheel) i Instrument cluster: miles Function Function Page : Fuel gauge ; Coolant temperature = Speedometer ? Rev counter 222 A ECO start/stop function Rear window wiper Automatic transmission: Transmission position and drive program Manual transmission: Gearshift recommendation Outside temperature HOLD function Stored limit speed 156 130 B Multifunction display 223 C Time Automatic transmission: Outside temperature (vehicles for the United Kingdom: speed in km/h) HOLD function Stored limit speed 222 193 180 222 162 161 222 193 180 Page D Brightness control knob for the instrument cluster lighting: turn clockwise or anticlockwise 36 Instrument cluster (4-button steering wheel) At a glance Warning and indicator lamps Function Page Function Page : Reserve fuel 298 D Engine diagnostics 298 ; Coolant 298 E ESP® 295 = ABS 293 F Rear foglamp 119 ? Brakes 293 G Main-beam headlamps 120 A Seat belt 291 H Dipped-beam headlamps 119 B Turn signal 120 I Front foglamps 119 C SRS 297 J Diesel engine: preglow 155 Instrument cluster (12-button steering wheel) 37 Instrument cluster (12-button steering wheel) At a glance Displays and controls i Instrument cluster: kilometres Function Page : Fuel gauge ; Coolant temperature 226 = Speedometer with segments 227 ? Multifunction display 228 A Rev counter 226 B Brightness control knob for the instrument cluster lighting: turn clockwise or anticlockwise Instrument cluster (12-button steering wheel) At a glance 38 i Instrument cluster: miles Function Function Page : Fuel gauge ; Coolant temperature 226 = Speedometer with segments 227 ? Multifunction display 228 A Rev counter B Brightness control knob for the instrument cluster lighting: turn clockwise or anticlockwise Page 226 Instrument cluster (12-button steering wheel) 39 At a glance Warning and indicator lamps Function : Page Function G Page % Diesel engine: preglow ÷ ESP® in AMG vehicles 155 H ? Coolant 298 295 I R Rear foglamp 119 J Brakes 293 J A #! Turn signals 120 K Main-beam headlamps 120 B ! ABS 293 L Dipped-beam headlamps 119 C 6 SRS 297 L N Front foglamps 119 D ; Engine diagnostics 298 M 8 Reserve fuel 298 E h Tyre pressure monitor 300 F 7 Seat belt 291 ÷ ESP® M SPORT handling mode in AMG vehicles 295 ; · Distance warning 300 = å ESP® OFF ? 296 K 296 40 Multifunction steering wheel At a glance Multifunction steering wheel 4-button multifunction steering wheel Function : Multifunction display ; Audio system; see the separate operating instructions = W Increases the volume ? X Decreases the volume A C Scrolls through lists Changes values Confirms display messages Page 223 Function B V Press briefly: Selects a menu Press and hold: Selects the standard display Page Multifunction steering wheel 41 At a glance 12-button multifunction steering wheel Function : Multifunction display ; Audio system/COMAND Online; see the separate operating instructions = ? Switches on LINGUATRONIC; see the separate operating instructions ? ~ Rejects or ends a call Exits telephone book/ redial memory 6 Makes or accepts a call Switches to the redial memory WX Adjusts the volume 8 Mute Page 228 Function A B 235 =; Selects a menu 9: Selects the submenu or scrolls through lists a Confirms selections and hides display messages % Back or deactivates LINGUATRONIC Page 230 230 42 Centre console At a glance Centre console Function Page : Audio system/COMAND Online; see separate operating instructions ; c Seat heating 109 = s Seat ventilation 110 ? c PARKTRONIC 196 A ¤ ECO start/stop button 156 £ Hazard warning lamps 121 B C D 4 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp u Saloon: rear window roller sunblind M Dynamic driving package with sports mode Function E 59 316 192 Page & Auxiliary heating M Dynamic driving package with sports mode 143 F Stowage compartment Ashtray Cigarette lighter Power socket 302 316 317 317 G Gear lever Selector lever 160 162 H Stowage compartment Cup holder 302 314 I Stowage compartment 302 J Audio/COMAND controller K Selects the drive program 192 163 Overhead control panel 43 At a glance Overhead control panel Function : ; = ? A u Switches the rear interior lighting on/off | Switches the automatic interior lighting control on/off p Switches the righthand reading lamp on/off ë Deactivates towaway protection 3 Opens/closes the sliding sunroof Page Function 3 Opens/closes the panorama sliding sunroof with roller sunblinds 125 124 124 81 100 Page 101 B Rear-view mirror C ê Deactivates the interior motion sensor 81 p Switches the lefthand reading lamp on/off 124 c Switches the front interior lighting on/off 125 D E 112 44 Door control panel At a glance Door control panel Function Page : Opens the door 90 ; %& Unlocks/locks the vehicle 90 = Adjusts the seat electrically 106 ? r45= Stores settings for the seat, exterior mirrors and steering wheel 115 7Zö\ Adjusts and folds the exterior mirrors in/out electrically 112 A B C D W Opens/closes the side windows 97 n Activates/deactivates the override feature for the side windows in the rear compartment 72 o Saloon: opens the boot lid q Estate with the EASYPACK tailgate: opens/ closes the tailgate 94 94 Useful information .............................. Occupant safety .................................. Children in the vehicle ........................ Driving safety systems ....................... Anti-theft systems .............................. 46 46 57 72 80 Safety 45 46 Occupant safety Useful information Safety i This Owner's Manual describes all models and all standard and optional equipment available to your vehicle at the time of publication of the Owner's Manual. Countryspecific deviations are possible. Please note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all features described. This also applies to safety-relevant systems and functions. i Please read the information on qualified specialist workshops (Y page 28). Occupant safety Important safety notes Seat belts, together with the Supplemental Restraint System – SRS (Y page 47), are complementary, co-ordinated restraint systems. They reduce the risk of injury in specific, pre-defined types of accident situations and thereby increase occupant safety. However, seat belts and airbags generally do not protect against objects penetrating the vehicle from the outside. To ensure that the restraint systems can deliver their full potential protection, make sure that: Rthe seat and head restraint are adjusted properly (Y page 104). Rthe seat belt has been fastened properly (Y page 55). Rthe airbags can inflate unrestricted if deployed (Y page 48). Rthe steering wheel is adjusted properly (Y page 104). Rthe restraint systems have not been modified. i An airbag increases the protection of vehicle occupants wearing a seat belt. As such, they are only an additional restraint system which complements, but does not replace, the seat belt. All vehicle occupants must wear their seat belt correctly at all times, even if the vehicle is equipped with airbags. The airbags are not deployed in all types of accidents. For example, if the protective capacity of correctly fastened seat belts is not increased by deploying the airbags, the airbags will not deploy. Airbag deployment only provides increased protection if the seat belt is worn correctly because: Rthe seat belt helps to keep the vehicle occupant in the best position in relation to the airbag. Rin a head-on collision, for example, the seat belt prevents the vehicle occupant from being propelled towards the point of impact. It can thus reduce the risk of injury. In accidents in which an airbag is deployed, it provides increased protection only if the seat belt is worn correctly. G WARNING If service work is not carried out correctly, the operating safety of your vehicle may be affected. This could cause you to lose control of your vehicle and cause an accident. Moreover, the safety systems may no longer be able to protect you or others as they are designed to do. Always have service work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. The workshop must have the necessary specialist knowledge and tools to carry out the work required. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose. In particular, work relevant to safety or on safety-related systems must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. G WARNING G WARNING Modifications to or work performed incorrectly on the following parts can result in the restraint systems not functioning as intended: If SRS is malfunctioning, individual systems may be activated unintentionally or may not be triggered in the event of an accident with a high rate of vehicle deceleration. A malfunction has occurred if: Rthe restraint system, consisting of seat belts and their anchorage points, belt tensioners, belt force limiters and airbags Rthe wiring Rnetworked electronic systems Airbags and belt tensioners could fail to deploy or be triggered in an accident despite the deceleration force being sufficient to trigger the systems, or could be triggered unintentionally. For this reason, never make any modifications to the restraint systems. Therefore, you must not tamper with electronic components or their software. SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) Introduction SRS consists of: Rthe 6 SRS warning lamp Rairbags Rairbag control unit (with crash sensors) tensioners Rbelt force limiters SRS reduces the risk of occupants coming into contact with the vehicle's interior in the event of an accident. It can also reduce the effect of the forces to which occupants are subjected during an accident. Rbelt SRS warning lamp SRS functions are checked regularly when you switch on the ignition and when the engine is running. Therefore, malfunctions can be detected in good time. The 6 SRS warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up when the ignition is switched on. It goes out no later than a few seconds after the engine is started. Rthe 6 SRS warning lamp does not light up when the ignition is switched on. Rthe engine is running and the 6 SRS warning lamp does not go out after a few seconds. Rthe engine is running and the 6 SRS warning lamp lights up again. In this case, have SRS checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. MercedesBenz recommends that you use a MercedesBenz Service Centre for this purpose. In particular, work relevant to safety or on safety-related systems must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Triggering of belt tensioners, belt force limiters and airbags During the first stage of a collision, the airbag control unit evaluates important physical data relating to vehicle deceleration or acceleration, such as: Rduration Rdirection Rmagnitude Based on the evaluation of this data, the airbag control unit pre-emptively triggers the belt tensioners in the first stage. i The front belt tensioners can only be trig- gered if the seat belt tongues on the front seats are correctly engaged in the seat belt buckles. If there is an even higher rate of vehicle deceleration or acceleration in a longitudinal direction, the front airbags are also deployed. Your vehicle has adaptive, two-stage front airbags. The airbag control unit evaluates vehicle deceleration or acceleration in the event Z 47 Safety Occupant safety Safety 48 Occupant safety of a collision. In the first deployment stage, the front airbag is filled with enough propellant gas to reduce the risk of injuries. The front airbag is fully deployed if a second deployment threshold is exceeded within a few milliseconds. The belt tensioner and airbag triggering thresholds are variable and are adapted to the rate of deceleration or acceleration of the vehicle. This process is pre-emptive in nature. The triggering process must take place in good time at the start of the collision. i Airbags are not deployed in all types of accidents. Also, not all airbags are deployed together in an accident. The different airbag systems work independently of each other. How the airbag system works is determined by the severity of the collision detected, especially the vehicle deceleration or acceleration, and the apparent type of accident: Rhead-on collision impact Rrear impact Rside The rate of vehicle deceleration or acceleration and the direction of the force are essentially determined by: Rthe distribution of forces during the collision Rthe collision angle Rthe deformation characteristics of the vehicle Rthe characteristics of the object with which the vehicle has collided Factors which can only be seen and measured after a collision has occurred do not play a decisive role in the deployment of an airbag, nor do they provide an indication of airbag deployment. The vehicle may be deformed significantly, e.g. the bonnet or the wing, without an airbag being deployed. This is the case if only parts which are relatively easily deformed are affec- ted and the rate of deceleration is not high. Conversely, airbags may be deployed even though the vehicle suffers only minor deformation. This is the case if, for example, very rigid vehicle parts such as longitudinal body members are hit, and sufficient deceleration occurs as a result. Airbags Important safety notes Airbag deployment slows down and restricts the movement of the vehicle occupant. If the airbags are deployed, you will hear a bang and a small amount of powder may also be released. Only in rare cases will the bang affect your hearing. The powder that is released generally does not constitute a health hazard. The 6 SRS warning lamp lights up. The airbag installation locations are identified by the AIRBAG symbol. G WARNING Airbags provide additional protection; they are not, however, a substitute for seat belts. Observe the following notes to reduce the risk of serious or even fatal injury caused by airbag deployment: Rall vehicle occupants – in particular, pregnant women – must wear their seat belt correctly at all times and lean back against the backrest, which should be positioned as close to the vertical as possible. The head restraint must support the back of the head at about eye level. Ralways secure children less than 1.50 m tall and under 12 years of age in suitable child restraint systems. Rall vehicle occupants must select a seat position that is as far away from the airbag as possible. The driver's seat position must allow the vehicle to be driven safely. The driver's chest should be as far away from Occupant safety Rdo not lean on the doors from inside the vehicle. Rmake sure that there are no people, animals or objects between the vehicle occupants and the area where the airbags are deployed. Rdo not place any objects between the seat backrest and the door. Rdo not hang any hard objects, for example, coat hangers, on the grab handles or coat hooks. Rdo not attach accessories, e.g. cup holders, to the doors. It is not possible to rule out a risk of injury being caused by an airbag, due to the high speed at which the airbag must be deployed. G WARNING Airbag functionality can only be assured if the following parts are not covered and no badges or stickers are attached to them: Rpadded steering wheel boss cover below the steering column Rfront-passenger airbag cover Router side of front seat bolsters Rside trim next to the rear seat backrest Rroof frame cover between the front A-pillar and the C-pillar in the rear compartment Rkneebag G WARNING A small amount of powder is released when an airbag is deployed. The powder could cause short-term breathing difficulties in people with asthma or other respiratory problems. In order to prevent breathing difficulties, you should leave the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so. You can also open the window to allow fresh air to enter the interior. The powder does not constitute a health hazard and does not indicate that there is a fire in the vehicle. Z Safety the centre of the driver's airbag cover as possible. Rmove the front-passenger seat as far back as possible. This is especially important if you have secured a child in a child restraint system on the front-passenger seat. Rvehicle occupants – in particular, children – must not lean their heads into the area of the window in which the sidebag/windowbag is deployed. Rrearward-facing child restraint systems must not be fitted to the front-passenger seat unless the front-passenger airbag has been disabled. On the front-passenger seat, the front-passenger airbag is disabled if a child restraint system with a transponder for automatic child seat recognition is fitted to the front-passenger seat in a vehicle equipped with automatic child seat recognition. The 4 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp must be continuously lit. If the front-passenger seat of your vehicle does not have automatic child seat recognition, or your rearward-facing child restraint system does not have automatic child seat recognition, children must be secured in a child restraint system on a suitable seat in the rear. If you secure a forward-facing child restraint system to the front-passenger seat, you must move the front-passenger seat as far back as possible. Rmake sure there are no heavy or sharpedged objects in the pockets of clothing. Rdo not lean forwards, e.g. over the cover of the driver's/front-passenger airbag, particularly when the vehicle is in motion. Rdo not put your feet on the dashboard. Ronly hold the steering wheel on the outside. This allows the airbag to be fully deployed. You could be injured if the airbag is deployed and you are holding the inside of the steering wheel. 49 50 Occupant safety Safety G WARNING The airbag parts are hot after the airbag has been deployed. Do not touch them as you could burn yourself. Have the airbags replaced at a qualified specialist workshop. Otherwise, occupants are not protected by the airbags in the event of another accident. Front airbags The front airbags increase protection for the driver's and front-passenger's head and chest. out automatic child seat recognition has been fitted or that a child restraint system with automatic child seat recognition is incorrectly fitted. ! Do not place heavy objects on the front- passenger seat. The system may then detect that the seat is occupied and if there is an accident, the restraint systems on the front-passenger side could be deployed. Have restraint systems that have been triggered replaced. Driver's kneebag i The driver's kneebag is only available in certain countries. The driver's kneebag increases protection of the driver against: Rknee injuries injuries Rlower leg injuries Rthigh Driver's airbag : deploys in front of the steering wheel; front-passenger airbag ; deploys in front of and above the glove compartment. They are deployed: Rat the start of an accident with a high rate of vehicle acceleration or deceleration in a longitudinal direction Rif the system determines that airbag deployment can offer additional protection to that provided by the seat belt Rif the seat belt is fastened Rindependently of other airbags in the vehicle Front-passenger airbag ; is only activated if the system determines that the frontpassenger seat is occupied. The 4 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp on the centre console is not lit (Y page 59). This means that a child restraint system with- Driver's kneebag : is always deployed along with the driver's airbag and inflates underneath the steering column. Sidebags G WARNING If you wish to use seat covers, Mercedes-Benz recommends that, for safety reasons, you only use seat covers that have been approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles. The seat covers must have a special tear seam for sidebags. Otherwise, the sidebags cannot deploy correctly and would fail to provide the Occupant safety 51 intended protection in the event of an accident. Appropriate seat covers can be obtained from a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Rhead Rneck Rarms Safety When deployed, the sidebags offer additional protection for the thorax of the vehicle occupants on the side of the vehicle on which the impact occurs. However, they do not protect the: Saloon (example) Windowbags : are deployed: Ron the side on which an impact occurs the start of an accident with a high rate of lateral vehicle deceleration or acceleration, e.g. in a side impact Rregardless of whether the front-passenger seat is occupied Rindependently of seat belt use Rindependently of the front airbags Rat Example: Saloon Front sidebags : and rear sidebags ; deploy next to the outer seat cushions. The sidebags are deployed: Ron the side on which an impact occurs the start of an accident with a high rate of lateral vehicle deceleration or acceleration, e.g. in a side impact Rindependently of seat belt use Rindependently of the front airbags Rindependently of the belt tensioners Rat Windowbags The windowbags enhance the level of protection for the head, but not chest or arms, of the vehicle occupants on the side of the vehicle on which the impact occurs. The windowbags are integrated into the side of the roof frame and deploy in the area from the A-pillar to the C-pillar. PRE-SAFE® (preventative occupant protection) PRE-SAFE® takes pre-emptive measures to protect occupants in certain hazardous situations. PRE-SAFE® intervenes: Rin emergency braking situations, e.g. if BAS is activated or for vehicles with DISTRONIC PLUS, BAS PLUS intervenes powerfully Rif the radar sensor system detects an imminent danger of collision in certain situations (on vehicles with DISTRONIC PLUS) Rin critical driving situations, e.g. when physical limits are exceed and the vehicle understeers or oversteers severely Z Occupant safety 52 PRE-SAFE® takes the following measures depending on the hazardous situation detected: Safety Rthe front seat belts are pre-tensioned. with the memory function: it adjusts the front-passenger seat if it is in an unfavourable position. Rif the vehicle skids, the sliding sunroof/ panorama sliding sunroof and the side windows are closed so that only a small gap remains. If the hazardous situation passes without resulting in an accident, PRE-SAFE® slackens the belt pretensioning. The air pressure in the side bolsters on the multicontour seat is reduced again. All settings made by PRESAFE® can then be reversed. If the seat belts are not released: Rvehicles X Move the backrest or seat back slightly, but only when the vehicle is stationary. The belt pretensioning is reduced and the locking mechanism is released. G WARNING When adjusting the seat, make sure that nobody can become trapped. ! Make sure that there are no objects in the footwell or behind the seats when moving the seat back. There is a risk that the seats and/or the objects could be damaged. More information about seat-belt adjustment, a convenience function integrated into PRE-SAFE®, can be found in the "Seat-belt adjustment" section (Y page 55). NECK-PRO head restraint/NECK-PRO luxury head restraint (except AMG vehicles) NECK-PRO head restraints/NECK-PRO luxury head restraints increase protection of the driver's and front-passenger's head and neck. In the event of a rear collision of a certain severity, the NECK-PRO head restraints/ NECK-PRO luxury head restraints on the driver's and front-passenger seats are moved forwards and upwards. This provides better head support. G WARNING Only use head restraint covers which have been tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle model. The use of non-approved head restraint covers may prevent NECK-PRO head restraints/ NECK-PRO luxury head restraints from triggering properly. The NECK-PRO head restraints/NECK-PRO luxury head restraints can therefore not provide the intended protection. Consult a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre regarding availability. If the NECK-PRO head restraints/NECK-PRO luxury head restraints have been triggered in an accident, reset the NECK-PRO head restraints/NECK-PRO luxury head restraints on the driver's and front-passenger seats (Y page 52). Otherwise, the additional protection will not be available in the event of another rear-end collision. NECK-PRO head restraints/NECK-PRO luxury head restraints that have been triggered are moved forwards and can no longer be adjusted. Resetting a triggered NECK-PRO head restraint/NECK-PRO luxury head restraint Important safety notes Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have NECK-PRO head restraints/NECK-PRO luxury head restraints checked at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre, if your vehicle is involved in a rear-end collision. Occupant safety 53 NECK-PRO head restraints i Resetting the NECK-PRO head restraints Safety requires a lot of strength. If you have difficulty resetting the NECK-PRO head restraints, have this work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Remove resetting tool : from the vehicle document wallet. X Slide resetting tool : into guide ; between the NECK-PRO luxury head restraint and the rear cover of the head restraint. X Push resetting tool : downwards until you hear the head restraint deployment mechanism engage. X Pull out resetting tool :. X Firmly press the NECK-PRO luxury head restraint cushion back = until it engages. X Repeat this procedure for the second NECK-PRO luxury head restraint. X Put resetting tool : back into the vehicle document wallet. X Tilt the top of the NECK-PRO head restraint cushion forwards in the direction of arrow :. X Push the NECK-PRO head restraint cushion down in the direction of arrow ; as far as it will go. X Firmly push the NECK-PRO head restraint cushion back in the direction of arrow = until the cushion engages. X Repeat this procedure for the second NECK-PRO head restraint. X NECK-PRO luxury head restraints i If you have difficulty resetting the NECK- PRO luxury head restraints, have this work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Seat belts Important safety notes Seat belts are the most effective means of restraining the movement of vehicle occupants in the event of an accident. This reduces the risk of vehicle occupants coming into contact with parts of the vehicle interior. G WARNING A seat belt which is not worn correctly, or which has not been engaged in the seat belt buckle correctly, cannot perform its intended protective function. Under certain circumstances, this could cause severe or even fatal injuries in the event of an accident. Z 54 Occupant safety Make sure that all occupants – in particular, pregnant women – wear their seat belt correctly at all times. Safety RThe seat belt must fit snugly on your body and must not be twisted. Therefore, avoid wearing bulky clothing, e.g. a winter coat. The shoulder belt section must be routed across the centre of your shoulder – on no account across your neck or under your arm – and pulled tight against your upper body. The lap belt must always pass across your lap as low down as possible, i.e. over your hip joints – not across your abdomen. If necessary, push down the belt strap slightly and then retighten it in the roll-up direction. RDo not route the belt strap across sharp edges or fragile objects, especially if these are located on or in your clothing, e.g. spectacles, pens, keys, etc. The seat belt strap could be damaged and tear in an accident, and you or other vehicle occupants could be injured. ROnly one person should use each seat belt at any one time. Children must never travel sitting on the lap of other occupants. It would not be possible to restrain the child in the event of a sudden change in direction, braking or an accident. This could result in severe or even fatal injuries to the child and other occupants. RPersons less than 1.50 m tall cannot wear the seat belts correctly. For this reason, secure persons less than 1.50 m tall in specially designed, suitable restraint systems. RChildren less than 1.50 m tall or under 12 years of age cannot wear the seat belts properly. Therefore, they should always be secured in a suitable child restraint system on a suitable vehicle seat. You can find more information under "Children in the vehicle" in the "Safety" section of the Owner's Manual. Follow the manufacturer's installation instructions when fitting a child restraint system. RDo not secure any objects with a seat belt if the seat belt is also being used by one of the vehicle's occupants. G WARNING The seat belt does not offer the intended level of protection unless the backrest is almost vertical. Under certain circumstances, this could cause severe or even fatal injuries in the event of an accident. Before starting a journey, make sure that the seat is properly adjusted and that the backrest is almost vertical. G WARNING A dirty or damaged seat belt or a seat belt that has been subjected to a load in an accident or which has been modified no longer offers the intended level of protection. Under certain circumstances, this could cause severe or even fatal injuries in the event of an accident. For this reason, check regularly that the seat belts are not damaged or dirty. Always have damaged seat belts or seat belts that have been subjected to a load in an accident replaced at a qualified specialist workshop. Consult a qualified specialist workshop which has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools to carry out the work required. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose. For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use seat belts which have been approved by Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle. Occupant safety Fastening seat belts 55 The belt strap is tightened slightly when: Example: Saloon Adjust the seat and move the backrest to an almost vertical position (Y page 104). X Pull the seat belt smoothly through belt sash guide :. X Without twisting it, guide the shoulder section of the seat belt across the middle of your shoulder and the lap section across your hips. X Engage belt tongue ; in buckle =. Seat-belt adjustment: if necessary, the driver's and front-passenger seat belts automatically adjust to the upper body (Y page 55). X If necessary, adjust the seat belt to the appropriate height (Y page 55). X If necessary, pull upwards on the shoulder section of the seat belt to tighten the belt across your body. X For more information about releasing the seat belt with release button ?, see "Releasing seat belts" (Y page 56). Seat belt adjustment The seat-belt adjustment function adjusts the driver's and front-passenger seat belt to the upper body of the occupants. engage the belt tongue in the belt buckle and you then turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. Rthe key is in position 2 in the ignition lock and you then engage the belt tongue in the buckle. The seat-belt adjustment will apply a certain tightening force if any slack is detected between the occupant and the seat belt. Do not hold on to the seat belt tightly while it is adjusting. On vehicles with a luxury multifunction steering wheel (12 buttons), you can switch the seat-belt adjustment on and off using the on-board computer (Y page 244). The seat-belt adjustment is an integral part of the PRE-SAFE® convenience function. More information about PRE-SAFE® can be found in the "PRE-SAFE® (preventative occupant protection)" section (Y page 51). Belt height adjustment You can adjust the seat belt height on the driver's seat and the front-passenger seat. Adjust the height so that the upper part of the seat belt is routed across the centre of your shoulder. X To raise: slide the belt sash guide upwards. The belt sash guide engages in various positions. X To lower: press and hold belt sash guide release :. Z Safety Ryou Occupant safety 56 Slide the belt sash guide downwards. X Release belt sash guide release : and make sure that the belt sash guide has engaged. Safety X Releasing seat belts X Press release button ? (Y page 55) and guide belt tongue ; back towards belt sash guide :. ! Make sure that the seat belt is fully rolled up. Otherwise, the seat belt or belt tongue will be trapped in the door or in the seat mechanism. This could damage the door, the door trim panel and the seat belt. Damaged seat belts can no longer fulfil their protective function and must be replaced. Consult a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Belt warning for driver and front passenger The 7 seat belt warning lamp in the instrument cluster is a reminder for all occupants to fasten their seat belts. It may light up continuously or flash. In addition, there may be a warning tone. The 7 seat belt warning lamp goes out and the warning tone ceases when the driver and the front passenger have fastened their seat belt. For certain countries only: regardless of whether the driver or the front passenger have fastened their seat belts, the 7 seat belt warning lamp lights up for six seconds after the engine is started. It then goes out if the driver and the front passenger have fastened their seat belts. i For more information on the 7 seat belt warning lamp, see "Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster, seat belt" (Y page 291). Rear seat belt status indicator The rear-compartment seat belt status indicator tells you if the rear passengers have their seat belts fastened. The rear-compartment seat belt status indicator indicates the rear seat on which the belt is fastened. The ü symbol in the display indicates a fastened seat belt. If a seat belt is not fastened or if a seat is not occupied, the ý symbol is displayed. The rear-compartment seat belt status indicator appears in the multifunction display for around 30 seconds if: Ryou drive off and reach a speed of approximately 10 km/h. Rthe rear passengers fasten or unfasten their seat belts while the vehicle is in motion. Rsomeone gets in or out of the vehicle and the vehicle drives off again. You can also cancel the rear seat belt status indicator immediately (Y page 248). i The status indicator for the rear-compartment seat belts is only available for certain countries. Belt tensioners, belt force limiters The front seat belts and the outer seat belts in the rear are equipped with belt tensioners. The belt tensioners tighten the seat belts in an accident, pulling them close against the body. Belt tensioners do not correct incorrect seat positions or incorrectly fastened seat belts. Belt tensioners do not pull vehicle occupants back towards the backrest. If the seat belt is also fitted with a belt force limiter and this is triggered, the force exerted by the seat belt on the vehicle occupant is reduced. The belt force limiters on the front seats are synchronised with the front airbags. They take on a part of the deceleration force, Children in the vehicle Rthe ignition is switched on. Rthe restraint systems are operational; see "SRS warning lamp" (Y page 47). Rthe belt tongue is engaged in the buckle on each of the three-point seat belts in the front. The belt tensioners on the outside seats in the rear compartment are triggered independently of the lock status of the seat belts. The belt tensioners are triggered depending on the type and severity of an accident: Rif, in the event of a head-on or rear-end col- lision, the vehicle decelerates or accelerates rapidly in a longitudinal direction during the initial stages of the impact Rif, in the event of a side impact, on the side opposite the impact the vehicle decelerates or accelerates rapidly in a lateral direction If the airbags are deployed, you will hear a bang, and a small amount of powder may also be released. Only in rare cases will the bang affect your hearing. The powder that is released generally does not constitute a health hazard. The 6 SRS warning lamp lights up. G WARNING If the seat belt tensioners have been triggered, they provide no additional protection in the event of another accident. Therefore, have belt tensioners which have been triggered replaced at a qualified specialist workshop. Comply with safety regulations when disposing of belt tensioners. Any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre can provide details of these regulations. ! If the front-passenger seat is not occu- pied, do not engage the seat belt tongue in the buckle on the front-passenger seat. Otherwise, the belt tensioner could be triggered in the event of an accident. Children in the vehicle Safety resulting in the force exerted on the occupant being distributed over a greater area. The belt tensioners can only be activated when: 57 Child restraint systems Important safety notes G WARNING To reduce the risk of serious or even fatal injury to the child in the event of a sudden change in direction, braking or an accident: Rchildren less than 1.50 m tall and under twelve years of age must always be secured in special child restraint systems on a suitable vehicle seat. This is necessary because the seat belts are not designed for children. Rdo not secure children less than 1.50 m tall or under twelve years of age on the frontpassenger seat. Exception: the vehicle is equipped with automatic child seat recognition on the front-passenger seat and the child is secured in a child restraint system with transponders for automatic child seat recognition. Rif you secure a forward-facing child restraint system to the front-passenger seat, you must move the front-passenger seat as far back as possible. Rchildren must never travel sitting on the lap of another occupant. Due to the forces which occur in the event of a sudden change of direction, heavy braking or an accident, it would not be possible to restrain the child. The child could be thrown against parts of the vehicle interior and be seriously or even fatally injured. G WARNING The child restraint system cannot perform its protective function if it is not correctly fitted to a suitable vehicle seat. The child cannot be restrained in the event of an accident, heavy braking or sudden changes of direction. The Z Safety 58 Children in the vehicle child could be seriously or even fatally injured. For this reason, when fitting a child restraint system, observe the manufacturer's installation instructions and the correct use of the child restraint system. Child restraint systems should be fitted to the rear seats. Children are generally better protected there. The entire base of the child restraint system must always rest on the seat cushion. Therefore, never place objects, e.g. a cushion, under the child restraint system. Only use child restraint systems with the original cover designed for them. Only replace damaged covers with genuine Mercedes-Benz covers. We recommend the use of child restraint systems which have been approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles. If a child is travelling in your vehicle, secure the child using a child restraint system which is appropriate to the size, age and weight of the child and recommended for MercedesBenz vehicles. You should preferably fit the restraint system to a suitable rear seat. You can also secure the child in the integrated child seat (Y page 63). Make sure that the child is secured in a child restraint system throughout the trip. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use the child restraint systems listed at (Y page 70). You can obtain further information about the correct child restraint system from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. i It is advisable to use Mercedes-Benz care products to clean child restraint systems. You can obtain information about this at any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. G WARNING Do not leave children unsupervised in the vehicle, even if they are secured in a child restraint system. They could injure themselves on parts of the vehicle. They could also be seriously or even fatally injured by prolonged exposure to extreme heat or cold. Do not expose the child restraint system to direct sunlight. Parts of the child restraint system could heat up and the child could burn herself/himself on them. If a child opens a door, the child or other persons could be injured as a result. They could get out and injure themselves or be injured by a passing vehicle. G WARNING Unsecured or incorrectly positioned loads increase the risk of injury for children and all other occupants in the event of: Ran accident braking manoeuvre Ra sudden change of direction Do not carry heavy or hard objects in the vehicle interior unless they are secured. You will find further information under "Loading guidelines" in the index. Ra Child seat on the front-passenger seat Warning notice on the front-passenger sun visor PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp 4 is not lit. To make you aware of this danger, a corresponding warning sticker has been affixed on the dashboard and on both sides of the sun visor on the front-passenger side. Information about recommended child restraint systems is available at any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Warning symbol for a rearward-facing child restraint system Automatic child seat recognition on the front-passenger seat G WARNING If the front-passenger airbag is not disabled: Ra child secured in a child restraint system on the front-passenger seat could be seriously and even fatally injured by the frontpassenger airbag deploying. This is especially a risk if the child is in the immediate vicinity of the front-passenger airbag when it deploys. Rnever secure a child on the front-passenger seat in a rearward-facing child restraint system. Only secure a rearward-facing child restraint system on a suitable rear seat. Ralways move the front-passenger seat to the rearmost position if you secure a child in a forward-facing child restraint system on the front-passenger seat. The front-passenger airbag is not disabled: vehicles without automatic child seat recognition on the front-passenger seat Rin vehicles with automatic child seat recognition in the front-passenger seat, if no special child restraint system with transponders for automatic child seat recognition in the front-passenger seat has been fitted Ron vehicles with automatic child seat recognition on the front-passenger seat, if the If your vehicle does not have automatic child seat recognition1 on the front-passenger seat, this is indicated by a special sticker. The sticker is affixed to the side of the dashboard on the front-passenger side. The sticker is visible when you open the front-passenger door. Ron 1 The front-passenger seat sensor system for child restraint systems detects whether a Vehicles without automatic child seat recognition on the front-passenger seat: if you turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock, the 4 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp lights up briefly but has no function. It does not indicate that there is automatic child seat recognition on the front-passenger seat. Z 59 Safety Children in the vehicle Safety 60 Children in the vehicle special Mercedes-Benz child seat with a transponder for automatic child seat recognition has been fitted. In this case, 4 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp : lights up. The front-passenger front airbag is disabled. G WARNING If the 4 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp does not light up when the child restraint system is fitted, the front-passenger airbag has not been disabled. If the frontpassenger airbag deploys, the child could be seriously or even fatally injured. Proceed as follows: Rdo not use a rearward-facing child restraint system on the front-passenger seat. a rearward-facing child restraint system on a suitable rear seat. Rfit or Ronly use a forward-facing child restraint system on the front-passenger seat and move the front-passenger seat to the rearmost position. Rhave the automatic child seat recognition checked at a qualified specialist workshop. To ensure that the automatic child seat recognition on the front-passenger seat functions/communicates correctly, never place objects, e.g. a cushion, under the child restraint system. The entire base of the child restraint system must always rest on the seat cushion. An incorrectly fitted child restraint system cannot perform its intended protective function in the event of an accident, and could lead to injuries. i If the front-passenger front airbag is dis- abled by the automatic child seat recognition, the following remain enabled on the front-passenger side: Rthe sidebag windowbag Rthe belt tensioner Rthe G WARNING Do not place electronic devices on the frontpassenger seat, e.g.: Rlaptops, when switched on phones Rcards with transponders, e.g. ski passes or access cards Signals from electronic equipment can cause interference in the automatic child seat recognition sensor system. This can lead to a system malfunction. This may cause the 4 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp to light up without there being a child seat with transponders for automatic child seat recognition fitted. The front-passenger airbag will not then deploy during an accident. It is also possible that the 6 SRS warning lamp lights up and/or the 4 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp does not light up briefly when you turn the key in the ignition lock to position 2. Rmobile ISOFIX child seat securing system for the rear seats ISOFIX is a standardised securing system for specially designed child restraint systems on the rear seats. Securing rings for two ISOFIX child restraint systems are fitted on the left and right of the rear seats. G WARNING A child restraint system secured by the ISOFIX child seat securing system does not provide sufficient protection for children weighing more than 22 kg. For this reason, do not secure children weighing more than 22 kg in a child restraint system secured by the ISOFIX child seat securing system. If the child weighs more than 22 kg, secure the child restraint system using a three-point seat belt. G WARNING The child restraint system cannot perform its protective function if it is not correctly fitted to a suitable vehicle seat. The child cannot be restrained in the event of an accident, heavy braking or sudden changes of direction. The child could be seriously or even fatally injured. For this reason, when fitting a child restraint system, observe the manufacturer's installation instructions and the correct use of the child restraint system. For reasons of safety, only use child restraint systems with the ISOFIX child seat securing system on the rear seats. We recommend that you use the ISOFIX child restraint systems that have been recommended for Mercedes-Benz. An incorrectly fitted child restraint system could come loose and seriously or even fatally injure the child or other vehicle occupants. When fitting the child restraint system, always make sure that it is engaged correctly in the securing rings on both sides. G WARNING Please note that if child restraint systems, or their retaining systems, are damaged or subjected to a load in an accident, they may not be able to provide their protective function. This could result in serious or even fatal injuries to the secured child in the event of an accident, heavy braking or a sudden change in direction. For this reason, have child restraint systems and their anchorages which have been damaged or subjected to a load in an accident checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. 61 Safety Children in the vehicle Illustration showing a vehicle equipped with through-loading facility in the rear bench seat Vehicles without a through-loading facility in the rear bench seat (Saloon): pull the protective caps from securing rings :. X Install the ISOFIX child restraint system. Comply with the manufacturer's instructions when installing the ISOFIX child restraint system. X Top Tether Top Tether provides an additional connection between the child restraint system secured with ISOFIX and the rear seat. It helps reduce the risk of injury even further. The Top Tether anchorage points are located in the rear compartment behind the head restraints. ! When fitting the child restraint system, make sure that the seat belt for the centre seat does not get trapped. Otherwise, the seat belt could be damaged. Saloon Z Children in the vehicle Safety 62 Estate Move head restraint : upwards. Saloon: fold up cover ; of Top Tether anchorage =. X Route Top Tether belt A under head restraint : between the two head restraint bars. X Hook Top Tether hook ? into Top Tether anchorage =. X Make sure that Top Tether belt A is not twisted. X Saloon: fold down cover ; of Top Tether anchorage =. X Move head restraint : back down again slightly if necessary (Y page 107). Make sure that you do not interfere with the correct routing of Top Tether belt A. X Fit the ISOFIX child restraint system with Top Tether. Comply with the manufacturer's installation instructions when doing so. Make sure that Top Tether belt A is tight. X X Children in the vehicle 63 Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The 4 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp on the centre console is lit. A special Mercedes-Benz child seat with a transponder for automatic child seat recognition has been fitted to the front-passenger seat. The front-passenger airbag has therefore been disabled as desired. G Risk of injury There is no child seat fitted to the front-passenger seat. Automatic child seat recognition is malfunctioning. It is also possible that the 6 SRS warning lamp lights up and/ or the 4 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp does not light up briefly when you switch the ignition on. X Remove electronic equipment from the front-passenger seat, e.g. Rlaptop Rmobile phone Rcards with transponders, such as ski passes or access cards If the 4 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp is still lit: X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Integrated child seat Important safety notes G WARNING To reduce the risk of serious or even fatal injury to the child in the event of a sudden change in direction, braking or an accident: Ryou must follow the manufacturer's installation instructions for the child seat when fitting the integrated child seat (ICS) padded play table and side head restraint and when fastening the seat belt. Rdo not modify the integrated child seat, the ICS padded play table or the side head restraint. Do not use protective covers. Rmake sure that the ICS padded play table and the side head restraints do not become trapped or damaged. This could happen when you - close the doors - adjust the seat - store the ICS padded play table and the side head restraints - transport heavy objects Rreplace the integrated child seat, the padded play table and the side head restraints if these were damaged or subjected to heavy loads during an accident. Rnote: children who weigh less than 12.5 kg require a different child restraint system. Information about other child restraint systems is available from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Rthe vehicle's rear seat backrest must be locked in position. The child seats are integrated into the right and left-hand rear seat cushions. In conjuncZ Safety Problems with child seat recognition 64 Children in the vehicle Safety tion with the components listed in the following table, they comply with the legal requirements of ECE R 44.04. Weight categories Integrated child seat ICS pad- Side ded play head table restrain ts Group I: 12.5 to 18 kg Folded out Mandatory Mandatory Group II: 15 to 25 kg Folded out Not permissible Mandatory Group III: Folded 22 to out 36 kg Not permissible Mandatory Mercedes-Benz recommends using the integrated child seat for children who weigh between 12.5 and 36 kg. For children weighing between approximately 12.5 kg and 18 kg: an ICS padded play table and a side head restraint which have been specially approved for the integrated child seat must also be used. Folding out the child seat X Pull release handle ? forwards. X Lift integrated child seat = and press it back until it engages. Fastening a child's seat belt G WARNING To reduce the risk of serious or even fatal injury to the child in the event of a sudden change in direction, braking or an accident: Rthe shoulder section of the seat belt must be routed across the centre of the child's shoulder – never across the child's neck – and must fit snugly against the child's chest. The lap section of the seat belt must be routed across the child's pelvis – not across the abdomen – and pulled snug against the child's body. Retighten the belt strap if necessary. Rnever secure more than one child at a time in the child restraint system. Rthe belt strap must not be trapped or twisted, nor rub against any sharp edges. Rif you have not fitted the side head restraint, the head restraint must always be adjusted correctly when driving with a child in the integrated child seat. If the head restraint is correctly adjusted, the back of the head is supported by the centre of the head restraint at about eye level. Observe the installation instructions for the ICS padded play table and the additional warnings and information about risk of injury. Pull the seat belt smoothly from the inertia reel. X Engage the seat belt tongue in the belt buckle. X If you are using integrated child seat = without the ICS padded play table, make sure that the seat belt: X Example: Saloon : Side head restraints ; Seat belt guide = Integrated child seat ? Release handle Ris routed as low as possible across the pel- vic area, in front of the hips Ris tightened across the lap by pulling upwards on the shoulder section of the seat belt Ris tight and is routed across the centre of the child's shoulder Ris not twisted and does not pass across the child's neck or under the child's arm X Adjust the head restraint if necessary (Y page 107). Folding in the child seat could result in serious or even fatal injury to the child. For this reason, observe the following description when fitting the ICS padded play table: The ICS padded play table is only suitable for use together with the folded out integrated child seat. On the rear seats, only use the ICS padded play table which is recommended for Mercedes-Benz vehicles. An incorrectly fitted ICS padded play table could come loose and seriously or even fatally injure the child or other vehicle occupants. After fitting the ICS padded play table, make sure that it is secured correctly. G WARNING X X Pull release handle : forwards. Push the centre of the integrated child seat forwards and down ; until it engages. Padded table for the integrated child seat Important safety notes Use the ICS padded play table in accordance with the instructions in table (Y page 63). You must not use the integrated child seat with ICS padded play table directly attached to a baby car seat on which a body weight of up to 10 kg is permissible. Do not modify the ICS padded play table, integrated child seat or seat belts. The ICS padded play table must not be used without a cover. The cover must not be removed from the ICS padded play table or replaced with a cover from another manufacturer. Otherwise, the official approval is invalidated and the padded play table's protective function could be restricted. ! Make sure that the ICS padded play table is not trapped or damaged, for example when you: Rclose the doors the seat Rstore the ICS padded play table or transport heavy objects Radjust G WARNING If the ICS padded play table is not installed and used correctly on the integrated child seat, it cannot provide the intended protection. It would then not be possible to restrain the child in the event of an accident, sudden braking or abrupt change in direction and this Z 65 Safety Children in the vehicle 66 Children in the vehicle Pull the seat belt smoothly from the inertia reel. X Attach the lower and upper sections of the belt in left seat belt guide point =. X Guide both sections of the belt to right seat belt guide point = and attach. X Engage the seat belt tongue in the belt buckle. X Slide ICS padded play table ; close to the child's body. X Pull both parts of the belt tight. Make sure that the seat belt is not twisted. X Adjust the head restraint if necessary (Y page 107). Safety X Example: Saloon : Side head restraints ; ICS padded play table = Seat belt guide points ? Left leg A Integrated child seat B Right leg Fitting the ICS padded play table X Fold out integrated child seat A(Y page 63). X Place the child on integrated child seat A. X Fold both legs ? and B down. X Place ICS padded play table ; over integrated child seat A. Side head restraints for the integrated child seat Use the side head restraints in accordance with the instructions in table (Y page 63). i Should a side head restraint be required for the second integrated child seat, this can be ordered at any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. G WARNING Make sure that: Rthe belt is routed as described below. seat belt is not twisted. Rthe ICS padded play table is right up against the child's body. Rthe belt strap is not trapped or twisted and does not rub against any sharp edges. Otherwise, it may not be possible to restrain the child in the event of an accident, sudden braking or abrupt change in direction and this could result in serious or even fatal injury to the child. Rthe Example: Saloon G WARNING If you do not secure the side head restraint at the anchor points intended, it cannot provide the intended level of protection. It would then not be possible to protect the child in the event of an accident, sudden braking or abrupt change in direction and this could result in serious or even fatal injury to the child. Only attach the side head restraint to the intended anchor points on the rear head restraint. For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use side head restraints which have been approved by Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle. Fitting side head restraints Slide head restraint ; upwards and position it upright. X Slide side head restraints B from the front to the centre of both head restraint bars until they engage. The right- and left-hand lock verification indicators = must be folded in. The red surfaces should no longer be visible. X Make sure that side head restraint B is engaged in both head restraint bars. X Slide head restraint ; downwards (Y page 107) until it rests on the upper edge of side head restraints B. X Guide the seat belt through seat belt guide A on the door side on side head restraint B. X Secure the child (Y page 64). X otherwise, they may come loose. In the event of an accident, sudden braking or abrupt change in direction, they could injure vehicle occupants or cause damage to the vehicle. When you are not using the ICS padded play table and the side head restraints, store these in a suitable place, such as the boot. For example, on vehicles with TIREFIT, you can store the side head restraints in the stowage compartment under the boot/luggage compartment floor (Y page 312)/ (Y page 312). Removing the side head restraints Take the seat belt out of seat belt guide A. X Move head restraint ; upwards. X Press left or right release button ? and pull side head restraint B forward to remove it. The left and right lock verification indicators : fold out briefly. X Adjust head restraint ; (Y page 107). X Storing the padded table and the side head restraints G WARNING Secure the ICS padded play table and the side head restraints in the vehicle as specified; Z 67 Safety Children in the vehicle Children in the vehicle 68 Suitable positioning of the child restraint systems Key to the letters used in the table: Safety X U Seat which is unsuitable for children in this weight category. Suitable for child restraint systems in the Universal category that are approved for use in this weight category. UF Suitable for forward-facing child restraint systems that belong to the "Universal" category and are approved for use in this weight category. L Suitable for child restraint systems as recommended, see the following table of "Recommended child restraint systems" (Y page 70). Seat positions Weight catego- Front-passenger seat ries FrontThe frontpassenger air- passenger airbag is not disa- bag is disabled: bled2 Rear seat Left, right Centre Group 0: up to 10 kg X U3, L3 U, L L Group 0+: up to 13 kg X U3, L3 U, L L Group I: 9 to 18 kg U3, L3 U3, L3 U, L U, L Group II: 15 to 25 kg U3, L3 U3, L3 U, L U, L Group III: 22 to 36 kg U3, L3 U3, L3 U, L U, L "Universal" category child restraint systems can be recognised by their orange approval label. Vehicles with automatic child seat recognition on the front-passenger seat: a child restraint system of the "Universal" category with a transponder for automatic child seat recognition must be fitted. The 4 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp must be lit. 3 Adjust the front-passenger seat to the rearmost position and the belt outlet height to the lowest position. 2 69 Safety Children in the vehicle Approval label on the child restraint system (example) Key to the letters used in the table: X ISOFIX position that is not suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems in this weight category and/or size category. IUF Suitable for forward-facing ISOFIX child seat securing systems that belong to the "universal" category which are approved for use in this weight category. IL Suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems as recommended; see the following table of "Recommended child restraint systems" (Y page 70). Suitability of the rear seats for attaching ISOFIX child restraint systems Weight categories Size category Equipment Rear seat, left and right Carry-cot F ISO/L1 X G ISO/L2 X 0: up to 10 kg up to approximately 6 months E ISO/R1 IL 0+: up to 13 kg up to approximately 15 months E ISO/R1 IL D ISO/R2 IL C ISO/R3 IL I: 9 to 18 kg between approximately 9 months and 4 years D ISO/R2 IL C ISO/R3 IL B ISO/F2 IUF B1 ISO/F2X IUF A ISO/F3 IUF Z Children in the vehicle 70 Recommended child restraint systems Safety If you fit a child restraint system without a transponder for automatic child seat recognition to the front-passenger seat, position the front-passenger seat in its rearmost position. Weight catego- Manufacries turer Type Approval number (E1 ...) Order num- Automatic ber child seat (A 000 ...) recognition Group 0: up to 10 kg up to approximately 6 months Britax Römer BABY SAFE PLUS4 03 301146 04 301146 970 10 00 Yes Group 0+: up to 13 kg up to approximately 15 months Britax Römer BABY SAFE PLUS4 03 301146 04 301146 970 10 00 Yes Group I: 9 to 18 kg between approximately 9 months and 4 years Britax Römer DUO PLUS4 03 301133 04 301133 970 11 00 Yes 970 16 00 No Category II/III: Britax 15 to 36 kg Römer between approximately 4 and 12 years KIDFIX 04 301198 970 18 00 Yes 970 19 00 No Suggested ISOFIX child restraint systems from the Universal category. Weight categories Size category Manufacturer Type Approval number (E1 ...) Order number Automatic child seat recognition Carry-cot F – – – – – G – – – – – E – – – – – Group 0: up to 10 kg 4 Move the front-passenger seat to the rearmost and highest position. Weight categories Size category Manufacturer Type Britax Römer BABY SAFE 04 301146 B6 6 86 ISOFIX 8224 PLUS No D – – – – – C – – – – – Group I: D 9 to 18 kg C – – – – – – – – – – B – – – – – B1 Britax Römer DUO PLUS 03 301133 A 000 970 04 301133 11 00 Yes A – – – Group 0+: E up to 13 kg Child-proof locks Important safety notes G WARNING Activate the child-proof locks for the rear doors and the override switch for the rear windows when children are travelling in the vehicle. Otherwise, the children could open doors or side windows while the vehicle is in motion and injure themselves or others. G WARNING Do not leave children unsupervised in the vehicle, even if they are secured in a child restraint system. They could injure themselves on parts of the vehicle. They could also be seriously or even fatally injured by prolonged exposure to extreme heat or cold. Do not expose the child restraint system to direct sunlight. Parts of the child restraint system could heat up and the child could burn herself/himself on them. Approval number (E1 ...) – Order number – Automatic child seat recognition If a child opens a door, the child or other persons could be injured as a result. They could get out and injure themselves or be injured by a passing vehicle. Child-proof locks for the rear doors You secure each door individually with the child-proof locks on the rear doors. A door secured with a child-proof lock cannot be opened from inside the vehicle. When the vehicle is unlocked, the door can be opened from the outside. Z 71 Safety Children in the vehicle Driving safety systems 72 RABS (Anti-lock Braking System) (Brake Assist System) RBAS PLUS (Brake Assist System Plus*) RAdaptive brake lamps RESP® (Electronic Stability Program) REBD (electronic brake force distribution) RADAPTIVE BRAKE RPRE-SAFE® Brake Safety RBAS Saloon (example) To activate: press the child-proof lock lever up in the direction of arrow :. X Make sure that the child-proof locks are working properly. X X To deactivate: press the child-proof lock lever down in the direction of arrow ;. Override feature for the rear side windows Important safety notes If you fail to adapt your driving style, the driving safety systems can neither reduce the risk of accident nor override the laws of physics. Driving safety systems are merely aids designed to assist driving. You are responsible for the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed and for braking in good time. Always adapt your driving style to suit the prevailing road and weather conditions, as well as the traffic conditions and maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front. Drive carefully. i Please note that the driving safety sys- X To activate/deactivate: press button ;. If indicator lamp : is lit, operation of the rear side windows is disabled. Operation is only possible using the switches in the driver's door. If indicator lamp : is off, operation is possible using the switches in the rear compartment. Driving safety systems Driving safety systems overview In this section, you will find information about the following driving safety systems: tems described only work as effectively as possible when there is adequate contact between the tyres and the road surface. Pay particular attention to the information regarding tyres, recommended minimum tyre tread depths etc. in the "Wheels and tyres" section (Y page 358). In wintry driving conditions, always use winter tyres (M+S tyres) and if necessary, snow chains. Only in this way will the driving safety systems described in this section work as effectively as possible. ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) Important safety notes i Observe the "Important safety notes" section (Y page 72). ABS regulates brake pressure in such a way that the wheels do not lock when you brake. This allows you to continue steering the vehicle when braking. ABS works from a speed of about 8 km/h upwards, regardless of road-surface conditions. ABS works on slippery surfaces, even when you only brake gently. G WARNING If ABS is faulty, the wheels could lock when braking. This limits the steerability of the vehicle when braking and the braking distance may increase. If ABS is deactivated due to a malfunction, then BAS and ESP are also deactivated. There is an increased risk of your vehicle skidding in certain situations. You should always adapt your driving style to suit the prevailing road and weather conditions. Braking If ABS intervenes when braking, you will feel a pulsing in the brake pedal. X If ABS intervenes: continue to depress the brake pedal with force until the braking situation is over. X To make a full brake application: depress the brake pedal with full force. The pulsating brake pedal can be an indication of hazardous road conditions and functions as a reminder to take extra care while driving. G WARNING Do not depress the brake pedal several times in quick succession (pumping). Pumping the brake pedal reduces the braking effect. You might otherwise not be able to stop the vehicle in time and could cause an accident. Depress the brake pedal firmly and smoothly. BAS (Brake Assist) i Observe the "Important safety notes" section (Y page 72). BAS operates in emergency braking situations. If you depress the brake pedal quickly, BAS automatically boosts the braking force, thus shortening the stopping distance. X Keep the brake pedal firmly depressed until the emergency braking situation is over. ABS prevents the wheels from locking. The brakes will function as usual once you release the brake pedal. BAS is deactivated. G WARNING If BAS has malfunctioned, the braking system remains available with full brake boosting effect. However, braking force is not automatically increased in emergency braking situations and the stopping distance may increase. BAS PLUS (Brake Assist System Plus) BAS PLUS is only available on vehicles with DISTRONIC PLUS. i Observe the "Important safety notes" section (Y page 72). BAS PLUS assists you in braking during hazardous situations at speeds above 30 km/h and uses the radar sensor system to evaluate the traffic situation. With the help of the radar sensor system, BAS PLUS can detect obstacles that are in the path of your vehicle for an extended period of time. At speeds up to approximately 70 km/h, BAS PLUS may also detect stationary obstacles, for example, stopped or parked vehicles. Should you approach an obstacle and BAS PLUS has detected a risk of collision, BAS PLUS calculates the braking force necessary to avoid a rear-end collision. Should you apply the brakes forcefully, BAS PLUS can automatically increase the braking force to a level suitable for the traffic conditions. If BAS PLUS demands particularly high braking force, preventative passenger protection Z 73 Safety Driving safety systems Safety 74 Driving safety systems measures (PRE-SAFE®) are activated simultaneously. X Keep the brake pedal depressed until the emergency braking situation is over. ABS prevents the wheels from locking. Ra narrow vehicle travelling in front, e.g. a motorbike Ra vehicle travelling in front on a different line G WARNING The brakes will work normally again if: BAS PLUS does not react: Ryou Rto release the brake pedal. Rthere is no longer any danger of a rear-end collision. Rno obstacle is detected in front of your vehicle. BAS PLUS is then deactivated. Vehicles with COMAND and navigation system: the radar sensor system is switched off automatically in the vicinity of radio telescope facilities (Y page 389). Vehicles without COMAND and a navigation system and vehicles for Australia: the radar sensor system and on-board computer must be switched off in the vicinity of radio telescope facilities (Y page 242). For BAS PLUS to assist you when driving, the radar sensor system must be switched on and operational; see "Radar sensor system" in the index. people or animals oncoming vehicles Rto crossing traffic Rwhen cornering As a result, BAS PLUS may not intervene in critical situations. There is a risk of an accident. Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation and be ready to brake. Rto Following damage to the front end of the vehicle, have the configuration and operation of the radar sensors checked at a qualified specialist workshop. This also applies to collisions at slow speeds where there is no visible damage to the front of the vehicle. If BAS PLUS is not available due to a malfunction in the radar sensor system, the brake system remains available with full brake boosting effect and BAS. G WARNING BAS PLUS cannot always clearly identify objects and complex traffic situations. BAS PLUS cannot intervene in these cases. There is a risk of an accident. Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation and be ready to brake. In particular, the detection of obstacles can be impaired if there is: Rdirt on the sensors or anything else covering the sensors Rsnow or heavy rain Rinterference by other radar sources Rthe possibility of strong radar reflections, for example in multi-storey car parks Adaptive brake lamps i Adaptive brake lamps are only available in certain countries. If you brake sharply from a speed of more than 50 km/h or if braking is assisted by BAS or BAS PLUS, the brake lamps flash rapidly. In this way, traffic travelling behind you is warned in an even more noticeable manner. If you brake sharply from a speed of more than 70 km/h to a standstill, the hazard warning lamps are activated automatically. If the brakes are applied again, the brake lamps light up continuously. The hazard warning lamps switch off automatically if you travel faster than 10 km/h. You can also switch off the hazard warning lamps using the hazard warning switch button (Y page 121). Driving safety systems Important safety notes i See the "Important safety notes" section (Y page 72). If ESP® detects that the vehicle is deviating from the direction desired by the driver, one or more wheels are braked to stabilise the vehicle. If necessary, the engine output is also modified to keep the vehicle on the desired course within physical limits. ESP® assists the driver when pulling away on wet or slippery roads. ESP® can also stabilise the vehicle during braking. If ESP® intervenes, the ÷ ESP® warning lamp flashes in the instrument cluster. G WARNING If the ÷ warning lamp in the instrument cluster flashes, proceed as follows: not deactivate ESP® under any circumstances. Ronly depress the accelerator pedal as far as necessary when pulling away. Radapt your driving style to suit the prevailing road and weather conditions. Otherwise, the vehicle could go into a skid. Rdo ESP® cannot reduce the risk of an accident if you drive too fast. ESP® cannot override the laws of physics. ! Switch the ignition off when: Rthe parking brake is being tested using a dynamometer Rthe vehicle is being towed with the front/ rear axle raised Application of the brakes by ESP® may otherwise destroy the brake system. ! Do not tow vehicles with 4MATIC with the front or rear axle raised. i Only use wheels with the recommended tyre sizes. Only then will properly. ESP® function ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction System) Traction control is part of ESP®. Traction control brakes the drive wheels individually if they spin. This enables you to pull away and accelerate on slippery surfaces, for example if the road surface is slippery on one side. On vehicles with 4MATIC, more drive torque is also transferred to the wheel or wheels with traction. Traction control remains active if you deactivate ESP®. G WARNING Traction control cannot reduce the risk of an accident if you drive too fast. Traction control cannot override the laws of physics. Deactivating/activating ESP® (except AMG vehicles) You cannot activate and deactivate ESP® on vehicles with a 4-button multifunction steering wheel. ESP® is activated automatically when the engine is started. i Vehicles with ECO start/stop function: the ECO start/stop function switches the engine off automatically when the vehicle comes to a stop. The engine starts automatically when the driver wants to pull away again. ESP® remains in its previously selected status. Example: if ESP® was deactivated before the engine was switched off, ESP® remains deactivated when the engine is switched on again. It may be best to deactivate ESP® in the following situations: Rwhen using snow chains deep snow Ron sand or gravel Rin G WARNING Activate ESP® as soon as the situations described above no longer apply. ESP® will otherwise not be able to stabilise the vehicle Z Safety ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) 75 Driving safety systems 76 if the vehicle starts to skid or a wheel starts to spin. Safety If you deactivate ESP®: RESP® no longer improves driving stability. Rthe engine's torque is no longer limited, and the drive wheels can spin. The spinning of the wheels results in a cutting action, which provides better grip. Rtraction control is still activated. RESP® still provides support when you brake. If ESP® is deactivated and one or more wheels start to spin, the ÷ ESP® warning lamp in the instrument cluster flashes. In such situations, ESP® will not stabilise the vehicle. X To deactivate:(Y page 237). The å ESP® OFF warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. G WARNING ESP® is deactivated if the å warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up continuously when the engine is running. If the ÷ warning lamp and å warning lamp are lit continuously, ESP® is not available due to a malfunction. There is an increased risk of your vehicle skidding in certain situations. You should always adapt your driving style to suit the prevailing road and weather conditions. X To activate:(Y page 237). The å ESP® OFF warning lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. Deactivating/activating ESP® (AMG vehicles) Activating/deactivating SPORT handling mode ESP® is activated automatically when the engine is started. It may be best to activate SPORT handling mode in the following situations: Rwhen using snow chains deep snow Ron sand or gravel Otherwise, you should only use SPORT handling mode on designated race circuits. Rin G WARNING Deactivate SPORT handling mode and activate ESP® as soon as the situations described above no longer apply. Otherwise, SPORT handling mode will only be able to stabilise the vehicle to a limited degree if the vehicle starts to skid or a wheel starts to spin. When SPORT handling mode is activated: RESP® only improves driving stability to a limited degree. Rthe engine's torque is restricted to a limited degree and the drive wheels can spin. The spinning of the wheels results in a cutting action, which provides better grip. Rtraction control is still activated. RESP® still provides support when you brake firmly. If SPORT handling mode is activated and one or more wheels start to spin, the ÷ ESP® warning lamp in the instrument cluster flashes. ESP® only stabilises the vehicle to a limited degree. X To activate: briefly press button :. The M SPORT handling mode warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. The SPORT handling mode message appears in the multifunction display. X To deactivate: briefly press button :. The M SPORT handling mode warning lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. Activating/deactivating ESP® ESP® is activated automatically when the engine is started. It may be best to deactivate ESP® in the following situations: using snow chains deep snow Ron sand or gravel X Rwhen Rin G WARNING Activate ESP® as soon as the situations described above no longer apply. ESP® will otherwise not be able to stabilise the vehicle if the vehicle starts to skid or a wheel starts to spin. If you deactivate ESP®: RESP® no longer improves driving stability. Rthe engine's torque is no longer limited and the drive wheels are able to spin. The spinning of the wheels results in a cutting action, which provides better grip. Rtraction control is still activated. RPRE-SAFE® is no longer available; it is also not activated if you brake firmly and ESP® intervenes. RPRE-SAFE® Brake is no longer available; nor is it activated if you brake firmly and ESP® intervenes. RESP® still provides support when you brake firmly. If ESP® is deactivated and one or more wheels start to spin, the ÷ ESP® warning lamp in the instrument cluster does not flash. In such situations, ESP® will not stabilise the vehicle. 77 Safety Driving safety systems To deactivate: press button : until the å ESP® OFF warning lamp lights up in the instrument cluster. The ÷OFF message appears in the multifunction display. G WARNING ESP® is deactivated if the å warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up continuously when the engine is running. If the ÷ warning lamp and å warning lamp are lit continuously, ESP® is not available due to a malfunction. There is an increased risk of your vehicle skidding in certain situations. You should always adapt your driving style to suit the prevailing road and weather conditions. X To activate: briefly press button :. The å ESP® OFF warning lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. The ÷ON message appears in the multifunction display. ESP® trailer stabilisation ESP® trailer stabilisation is not available in AMG vehicles. If your vehicle with trailer (vehicle/trailer combination) begins to lurch, you can only stabilise the vehicle/trailer combination by depressing the brake firmly. In this situation, ESP® assists you and can detect if the vehicle/trailer combination Z Driving safety systems Safety 78 begins to lurch. ESP® slows the vehicle down by braking and limiting the engine output until the vehicle/trailer combination has stabilised. Trailer stabilisation is active above speeds of about 65 km/h. G WARNING If road and weather conditions are poor, trailer stabilisation will not be able to prevent the trailer from swerving and will thus be unable to reduce the risk of an accident. Trailers with a high centre of gravity can tip over before ESP® can detect this. ESP® Trailer stabilisation does not work if is deactivated or disabled because of a malfunction. EBD (electronic brake force distribution) i Observe the "Important safety notes" section (Y page 72). EBD monitors and controls the brake pressure on the rear wheels to improve driving stability while braking. G WARNING If EBD has malfunctioned, the braking system remains available with full brake boosting effect. However, the rear wheels can still lock, e.g. under full braking. This could cause you to lose control of your vehicle and cause an accident. You should therefore adapt your driving style to the different handling characteristics. X Observe the notes on warning and indicator lamps (Y page 293) as well as display messages (Y page 251) (4-button multifunction steering wheel) and (Y page 257) (12button multifunction steering wheel). ADAPTIVE BRAKE ADAPTIVE BRAKE enhances braking safety and offers increased braking comfort. In addition to the braking function, ADAPTIVE BRAKE also has the HOLD function (Y page 193) and hill start assist (Y page 156). For further information, see Driving tips (Y page 175). PRE-SAFE® Brake PRE-SAFE® Brake is only available in vehicles with DISTRONIC PLUS. i Observe the "Important safety notes" section (Y page 72). PRE-SAFE® Brake can help you to minimise the risk of a frontal collision with a vehicle ahead or reduce the effects of such a collision. If PRE-SAFE® Brake has detected a risk of collision, you will be warned visually and acoustically as well as by automatic braking. PRE-SAFE® Brake cannot prevent a collision without your intervention. This function will issue a warning at speeds of around 30 km/h or more if: Rfor a period of several seconds, the distance to the vehicle in front is too short for the speed at which you are travelling. The · distance warning lamp then lights up in the instrument cluster. Ryou are rapidly approaching the vehicle in front. An intermittent warning tone will then sound and the · distance warning lamp will light up in the instrument cluster. X Brake immediately in order to increase the distance from the vehicle in front. or X Take evasive action provided it is safe to do so. Driving safety systems Rbrake the vehicle automatically from a speed of up to approximately 200 km/h Rtrigger preventative passenger protection measures (PRE-SAFE®) (Y page 51) Due to the nature of the system, particularly complicated driving conditions may cause unnecessary warnings or the unnecessary intervention of PRE-SAFE® Brake. To end this, you can either depress the accelerator pedal further, activate kickdown or release the brake pedal. The braking action of PRE-SAFE® Brake is ended automatically if: Ryou drive slower than approximately 15 km/h. Ryou manoeuvre to avoid the obstacle. Rthere is no longer any danger of a rear-end collision. Rthere is no longer an obstacle detected in front of your vehicle. With the help of the radar sensor system, PRE-SAFE® Brake can detect obstacles that are in front of your vehicle for an extended period of time. At speeds up to approximately 70 km/h, PRE-SAFE® Brake may also detect stationary obstacles, for example stopped or parked vehicles. If you approach an obstacle and PRE-SAFE® Brake detects a risk of a collision, the system will initially alert you both visually and acoustically. If you do not brake or take evasive action, the system will warn you by automatically braking the vehicle gently. If there is an increased risk of collision, preventative passenger protection measures (PRE-SAFE®) are activated (Y page 51). If the risk of collision remains and you do not brake, take evasive action or accelerate significantly, the vehicle may perform automatic emergency braking. Automatic emergency braking is not performed until immediately prior to an accident that can no longer be avoided. G WARNING Even if PRE-SAFE® Brake slows the vehicle before an imminent rear-end collision, the system cannot avert a collision without the intervention of the driver. There is a risk of an accident. Brake according to the situation or take evasive action. Delayed intervention by the driver can lead to an accident. G WARNING PRE-SAFE® Brake cannot always clearly identify objects and complex traffic conditions. In these cases, PRE-SAFE® Brake may: Rgive an unnecessary warning and then brake the vehicle Rnot give a warning or intervene There is a risk of an accident. Always pay particular attention to the traffic situation and be ready to brake, especially if PRE-SAFE® Brake warns you. Terminate the intervention in a non-critical driving situation. In particular, the detection of obstacles can be impaired if there is: Rdirt on the sensors or anything else covering the sensors Rsnow or heavy rain Rinterference by other radar sources Rthe possibility of strong radar reflections, for example in multi-storey car parks Ra narrow vehicle travelling in front, e.g. a motorbike Ra vehicle travelling in front on a different line G WARNING PRE-SAFE® Brake does not react: Rto people or animals oncoming vehicles Rto crossing traffic Rwhen cornering Rto Z Safety If the driver and passengers have fastened their seat belts, PRE-SAFE® Brake can also can also perform the following at speeds of above approximately 30 km/h: 79 Safety 80 Anti-theft systems As a result, PRE-SAFE® Brake may not give warnings or intervene in critical situations. There is a risk of an accident. Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation and be ready to brake. In order to maintain the appropriate distance to the vehicle in front and thus prevent a collision, you must apply the brakes yourself. X To activate/deactivate: activate or deactivate PRE-SAFE® Brake in the on-board computer (Y page 237). The Ä symbol appears in the multifunction display as long as the HOLD function is not activated (Y page 193). On vehicles with parking guidance, the Ä symbol is displayed when P is engaged or you are driving faster than 35 km/h. Vehicles with COMAND and navigation system: the radar sensor system is switched off automatically in the vicinity of radio telescope facilities (Y page 389). Vehicles without COMAND and a navigation system and vehicles for Australia: the radar sensor system and on-board computer must be switched off in the vicinity of radio telescope facilities (Y page 242). For PRE-SAFE® Brake to assist you when driving, the radar sensor system must be switched on (Y page 242) and be operational. Following damage to the front end of the vehicle, have the configuration and operation of the radar sensors checked at a qualified specialist workshop. This also applies to collisions at slow speeds where there is no visible damage to the front of the vehicle. Anti-theft systems Immobiliser The immobiliser prevents your vehicle from being started without the correct key. To activate with the key: remove the key from the ignition lock. X To activate with KEYLESS-GO: switch the ignition off and open the driver's door. X To deactivate: switch on the ignition. X i The immobiliser is always deactivated when you start the engine. ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) A visual and audible alarm is triggered if the alarm system is primed and you open: Ra door vehicle with the emergency key element Rthe boot lid/tailgate Rthe bonnet The alarm is not switched off, even if you close the open door that has triggered it, for example. Rthe To prime: lock the vehicle with the key or KEYLESS-GO. Indicator lamp : flashes. The alarm system is primed after approximately 15 seconds. X To deactivate: unlock the vehicle with the key or KEYLESS-GO. X Anti-theft systems X 81 To stop the alarm using the key: insert the key into the ignition lock. The alarm is switched off. X Press the % or & button on the key. The alarm is switched off. X To stop the alarm using KEYLESS-GO: grasp the outside door handle. The key must be outside the vehicle. The alarm is switched off. or X Safety or Press button :. Indicator lamp ; lights up briefly. X Lock the vehicle with the key or KEYLESSGO. Tow-away protection is deactivated. X Press the Start/Stop button on the dashboard. The key must be inside the vehicle. The alarm is switched off. Tow-away protection Tow-away protection remains deactivated until: An audible and visual alarm is triggered if your vehicle's angle of inclination is altered while tow-away protection is primed. This occurs if the vehicle is jacked up on one side, for example. X To prime: lock the vehicle with the key or KEYLESS-GO. Tow-away protection is primed after approximately 30 seconds. X To deactivate: unlock the vehicle with the key or KEYLESS-GO. Tow-away protection is deactivated automatically. Rthe To prevent a false alarm, deactivate tow-away protection manually if your vehicle: X Ris being transported being loaded onto a ferry or car transporter, for example Ris parked on a movable surface, e.g. in a split-level garage Deactivating: Ris X Remove the key from the ignition lock. vehicle is unlocked again. door is opened and closed again. Rthe vehicle is locked again. Ra Interior motion sensor If the interior motion sensor is primed, a visual and audible alarm is triggered if movement is detected in the vehicle interior while the vehicle is locked. This occurs if someone reaches into the vehicle interior, for example. To activate: Make sure that: Rthe side windows are closed. Rthe sliding sunroof/panorama sliding sunroof is closed. Rthere are no objects, e.g. mascots, hanging on the rear-view mirror or on the grab handles on the roof trim. This will prevent false alarms. X Lock the vehicle with the key or KEYLESSGO. The interior motion sensor is primed after approximately 30 seconds. Z Anti-theft systems 82 To switch off: Safety X Unlock the vehicle with the key or KEYLESS-GO. The interior motion sensor is deactivated automatically. To prevent a false alarm, deactivate the interior motion sensor if you lock your vehicle and: Rpeople or animals remain in the vehicle. side windows remain open. Rthe sliding sunroof/panorama sliding sunroof remains open. Deactivating: Rthe X Remove the key from the ignition lock. X Press button :. Indicator lamp ; flashes briefly. X Lock the vehicle with the key or KEYLESSGO. The interior motion sensor is deactivated. The interior motion sensor remains deactivated until: Rthe vehicle is unlocked again. door is opened and closed again. Rthe vehicle is locked again. Ra i UK only: Your vehicle is equipped with a double lock function. The doors cannot be opened from the inside if the vehicle has been locked with the key (Y page 90). Deactivate the interior motion sensor before locking the vehicle with the key. The doors can then be opened from the inside after the vehicle has been locked from the outside with the key. Observe the "Important safety notes" (Y page 89). 83 84 84 89 92 96 99 Opening and closing Useful information .............................. Key ....................................................... Doors .................................................... Boot/luggage compartment .............. Side windows ...................................... Sliding sunroof .................................... 84 Key Useful information Opening and closing i This Owner's Manual describes all models and all standard and optional equipment available to your vehicle at the time of publication of the Owner's Manual. Countryspecific deviations are possible. Please note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all features described. This also applies to safety-relevant systems and functions. i Please read the information on qualified specialist workshops (Y page 28). Key Key functions Locking and unlocking centrally The key centrally locks/unlocks: Rthe doors boot lid/tailgate Rthe fuel filler flap Rthe G WARNING Only for the United Kingdom: if the vehicle has been locked with the key, the double lock function is activated as standard. It is then not possible to open the doors from inside the vehicle. Therefore, do not leave any people behind in the vehicle, particularly children, elderly people or people in need of special assistance if the vehicle has been locked with the key. As a result, they may not be able to free themselves in the event of an emergency. As a result, they could be seriously or even fatally injured by prolonged exposure to extremely high or low temperatures, for example. In this case, rescuing people from outside the vehicle is difficult. Deactivate the interior motion sensor before you lock the vehicle with the key. The doors can then be opened from the inside after the vehicle has been locked from the outside with the key. G WARNING If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, they could: Ropen a door from inside the vehicle at any time, even if it has been locked Rstart the vehicle using a key which has been left in the vehicle Rrelease the parking brake They could thereby endanger themselves and others. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. Always take the key with you when leaving the vehicle, even if you are only leaving it for a short time. G WARNING If a key ring is too heavy or too large, the weight acting on the key could cause it to turn in the ignition lock or catch on the steering wheel. This could cause the engine to be switched off suddenly. You may lose control of the vehicle and cause an accident. Do not attach any heavy or large key rings to the key that is inserted in the ignition. : & To lock the vehicle ; F To unlock the boot lid/tailgate = % To unlock the vehicle When unlocking, the turn signals flash once. When locking, they flash three times. When it is dark, the surround lighting also comes on if it is activated in the on-board computer (Y page 241). Key 85 To unlock the vehicle: touch the inner surface of the door handle. X To lock the vehicle: touch sensor surface :. X Convenience closing feature: touch recessed sensor surface ; for an extended period (Y page 98). Opening and closing If you activate the acoustic locking confirmation function, you will hear the following, depending on the date of production of the vehicle: Ran acoustic signal when locking or Rone acoustic signal when unlocking and three when locking. The audible signal can be activated and deactivated using the on-board computer (Y page 242). X To unlock centrally: press the % button. If you do not open the vehicle within approximately 40 seconds of unlocking: Rthe vehicle is locked again. anti-theft system is primed again. X To lock centrally: press the & button. Rthe KEYLESS-GO You can start, lock or unlock the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO. To do this, you only need carry the key with you. When you touch the surface of the sensors on the vehicle's outside door handles, KEYLESS-GO establishes a radio connection between the vehicle and the key. When the engine is started and whilst you are driving, KEYLESS-GO also checks whether a valid key is in the vehicle by periodically establishing radio contact. When locking or unlocking with KEYLESS-GO, the distance between the key and the door handle you wish to lock or unlock must not be greater than 1 m. X If you pull on the handle of the boot lid/tailgate, only the boot/luggage compartment of the vehicle is unlocked. Changing the settings of the locking system You can change the setting of the locking system in such a way that only the driver's door and the fuel filler flap are unlocked. This is useful if you frequently travel on your own. X To change the setting: press and hold down the % and & buttons simultaneously for approximately six seconds until the battery check lamp (Y page 87) flashes twice. i If the setting of the locking system is changed within the signal range of the vehicle, pressing the & or % button locks or unlocks the vehicle. The key now functions as follows: To unlock the driver's door: press the % button once. X To unlock centrally: press the % button twice. X To lock centrally: press the & button. X Z Key 86 The KEYLESS-GO function is changed as follows: To unlock the driver's door: touch the inner surface of the door handle on the driver's door. X To unlock centrally: touch the inner surface of the door handle on the frontpassenger door or the rear door. X To lock centrally: touch the outer sensor surface on one of the door handles. Opening and closing X X To unlock the fuel filler flap: insert the key in the ignition lock. Removing the emergency key element Restoring the factory settings X Press the % and & buttons simultaneously for approximately six seconds until the battery check lamp flashes twice. X Push release catch : in the direction of the arrow and at the same time, remove emergency key element ; from the key. Emergency key element General notes If the vehicle can no longer be locked or unlocked with the key, use the emergency key element. If you use the emergency key element to unlock and open the driver's door or the boot lid/tailgate, the anti-theft alarm system will be triggered (Y page 80). There are several ways to turn off the alarm: X To turn the alarm off with the key: press the % or & button on the key. or X Insert the key into the ignition lock. or X To deactivate the alarm with KEYLESSGO: press the Start/Stop button in the ignition lock. The key must be in the vehicle. or X Lock or unlock the vehicle using KEYLESSGO. The key must be outside the vehicle. If you unlock the vehicle using the emergency key element, the fuel filler flap will not be unlocked automatically. Key battery Important safety notes Have the batteries changed at a qualified specialist workshop. G WARNING Batteries are toxic and contain caustic substances. For this reason, keep batteries out of the reach of children. If a battery has been swallowed, visit a doctor immediately. H Environmental note Batteries contain pollutants. It is illegal to dispose of them with the household rubbish. They must be collected separately and disposed of in an environmentally responsible recycling system. Dispose of batteries in an environmentally responsible manner. Take discharged batteries to a qualified specialist workshop or to a col- Key Checking the battery X Press the & or % button. The battery is working properly if the battery check lamp : lights up briefly If battery check lamp : does not light up briefly during the test, the battery is discharged. X Changing the battery (Y page 87) i If the key battery is checked within the signal reception range of the vehicle, pressing the & or % button locks or unlocks the vehicle. Changing the battery You require a CR 2025 3 V cell battery. X Take the emergency key element out of the key (Y page 86). Press emergency key element ; into the opening in the key in the direction of the arrow until battery tray cover : opens. When doing so, do not hold cover : shut. X Remove battery tray cover :. X Repeatedly tap the key against your palm until battery = falls out. X Insert the new battery with the positive terminal facing upwards. Use a lint-free cloth to do so. X Make sure that the surface of the battery is free from lint, grease and all other forms of contamination. X Insert the front tabs of battery tray cover : and then press to close it. X Insert the emergency key element into the key. X Check the function of all key buttons on the vehicle. X Z Opening and closing lection point for used batteries. 87 88 Key Problems with the key Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions You cannot lock or unlock the vehicle using the key. The key battery is discharged or nearly discharged. X Try again to lock/unlock the vehicle using the remote control function of the key. Point the tip of the key at the driver's door handle from close range and press the % / & button. Opening and closing Problem If this does not work: X Check the key battery (Y page 87) and replace it if necessary (Y page 87). X Lock (Y page 91) or unlock (Y page 91) the vehicle using the emergency key element. The key is faulty. X Lock (Y page 91) or unlock (Y page 91) the vehicle using the emergency key element. X Have the key checked at a qualified specialist workshop. You can no longer lock There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves. or unlock the vehicle X Lock/unlock the vehicle using the remote control function of using KEYLESS-GO. the key. Point the tip of the key at the driver's door handle from close range and press the % / & button. There is a fault with KEYLESS-GO. X Lock/unlock the vehicle using the remote control function of the key. Point the tip of the key at the driver's door handle from close range and press the % / & button. X Have KEYLESS-GO checked at a qualified specialist workshop. If this does not work: X Check the key battery (Y page 87) and replace it if necessary (Y page 87). X Lock (Y page 91) or unlock (Y page 91) the vehicle using the emergency key element. You have lost a key. Have the key deactivated at a qualified specialist workshop. Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers. X If necessary, have the locks changed as well. X X You have lost the emergency key element. X X Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers. If necessary, have the locks changed as well. Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The engine cannot be started using the key. The on-board voltage is too low. X Switch off non-essential consumers, e.g. seat heating or interior lighting, and try to start the engine again. If this does not work: X Check the starter battery and charge it if necessary (Y page 346). or X Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 350). or X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. The engine cannot be started using the key. The steering lock is mechanically blocked. X Remove the key and reinsert it into the ignition lock. While doing this, turn the steering wheel in both directions. The engine cannot be A door is open. Therefore, the key cannot be detected as easily. started using KEYLESS- X Close the door and try to start the vehicle again. GO. The key is in the vehicle. There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves. X Start your vehicle with the key in the ignition lock. Doors Important safety notes G WARNING Only for the United Kingdom: if the vehicle has been locked with the key, the double lock function is activated as standard. It is then not possible to open the doors from inside the vehicle. Therefore, do not leave any people behind in the vehicle, particularly children, elderly people or people in need of special assistance if the vehicle has been locked with the key. As a result, they may not be able to free themselves in the event of an emergency. As a result, they could be seriously or even fatally injured by prolonged exposure to extremely high or low temperatures, for example. In this case, rescuing people from outside the vehicle is difficult. Deactivate the interior motion sensor before you lock the vehicle with the key. The doors can then be opened from the inside after the vehicle has been locked from the outside with the key. G WARNING If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, they could: Ropen a door from inside the vehicle at any time, even if it has been locked Rstart the vehicle using a key which has been left in the vehicle Rrelease the parking brake They could thereby endanger themselves and others. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. Always take the key with you when leaving the vehicle, even if you are only leaving it for a short time. Z 89 Opening and closing Doors Doors 90 Opening and closing Unlocking and opening the doors from the inside For all countries except the United Kingdom: you can open a door from inside the vehicle even if it has been locked. Only for the United Kingdom: if the vehicle has been locked with the key, the double lock function is activated as standard. It is then not possible to open the doors from inside the vehicle. Deactivate the interior motion sensor (Y page 81) before you lock the vehicle with the key. The doors can then be opened from the inside after the vehicle has been locked from the outside with the key. You can only open the rear doors from inside the vehicle if they are not secured by the child-proof locks (Y page 71). i It is only possible to lock the vehicle cen- trally if the front-passenger door is closed. To unlock: press button :. X To lock: press button ;. X Automatic locking feature The vehicle is locked automatically when the ignition is switched on and the wheels are turning. You could therefore be locked out when: Rthe vehicle is being pushed. vehicle is being towed. Rthe vehicle is being tested on a dynamometer. Rthe X Pull door handle ;. If the door is locked, locking knob : pops up. The door is unlocked and can be opened. Centrally locking and unlocking the vehicle from the inside You can centrally lock or unlock the vehicle from the inside. The central locking/unlocking button does not lock or unlock the fuel filler flap. i You cannot unlock the vehicle centrally from the inside if the vehicle has been locked with the key or KEYLESS-GO. To deactivate: press and hold button : for about five seconds until a tone sounds. X To activate: press and hold button ; for about five seconds until a tone sounds. X i If you press one of the two buttons and do not hear a tone, the relevant setting has already been selected. Doors Unlocking the driver's door (emergency key element) If the vehicle can no longer be unlocked with the key, use the emergency key element. If you use the emergency key element to unlock and open the driver's door, the antitheft alarm system will be triggered (Y page 80). X Take the emergency key element out of the key (Y page 86). X Insert the emergency key element into the lock of the driver's door as far as it will go. Open the driver's door. X Close the front-passenger door, the rear doors and the boot lid/tailgate. X Press the locking button (Y page 90). X Check whether the locking knobs on the front-passenger door and the rear doors are still visible. Press down the locking knobs by hand, if necessary. X Close the driver's door. X Take the emergency key element out of the key (Y page 86). X Insert the emergency key element into the lock of the driver's door as far as it will go. X X Turn the emergency key element clockwise as far as it will go to position 1. i On right-hand-drive vehicles, turn the emergency key element anti-clockwise. Turn the emergency key element anticlockwise to position 1. The door is unlocked. i On right-hand-drive vehicles, turn the emergency key element clockwise. X Turn the emergency key element back and remove it. X Insert the emergency key element into the key. X Turn the emergency key element back and remove it. X Make sure that the doors and the boot lid/ tailgate are locked. X Insert the emergency key element into the key. X i If you lock the vehicle as described above, the fuel filler flap is not locked. The antitheft alarm system is not primed. Locking the vehicle (emergency key element) If the vehicle can no longer be locked with the key, use the emergency key element. Z Opening and closing On vehicles with a luxury multifunction steering wheel, you can also activate and deactivate the automatic locking via the on-board computer (Y page 242). 91 92 Boot/luggage compartment Boot/luggage compartment Important safety notes Opening and closing Do not leave the key in the boot/luggage compartment. You could otherwise lock yourself out. Opening/closing manually Opening X Press the % button on the key. G WARNING Exhaust fumes could enter the vehicle interior if the engine is running and the boot lid/tailgate is open. This could poison you. Therefore, you should make sure that the boot lid/ tailgate is always closed when the engine is running. ! The boot lid/tailgate swings upwards and to the rear when opened. Therefore, make sure that there is sufficient clearance above and behind the boot lid/tailgate. i You will find details on the boot lid/tail- gate opening dimensions in the Technical data section (Y page 386). On the Saloon, the boot lid can be: Ropened and closed manually from outside automatically from outside Ropened automatically from inside Rlocked separately Runlocked with the emergency key element On the Estate without EASY-PACK tailgate, the tailgate can be: Ropened Handle (example: Estate) Pull handle :. X Raise the boot lid/tailgate. X Estate with the EASY-PACK tailgate: if you pull handle : and keep it in this position, you can open the tailgate manually. If you release the handle, the tailgate opens automatically. Closing G WARNING Make sure that nobody can become trapped as you close the tailgate. Ropened and closed manually from outside from the inside with the emergency key element On the Estate with EASY-PACK tailgate, you can: Runlocked Rclose the tailgate manually from outside and close the tailgate automatically from outside Ropen and close the tailgate automatically from inside Rlimit the opening angle of the tailgate Runlock the tailgate from inside with the emergency key element Ropen Recess (example: Estate) Boot/luggage compartment Opening/closing automatically from outside Important safety notes G WARNING Only for the United Kingdom: if the vehicle has been locked with the key, the double lock function is activated as standard. It is then not possible to open the doors from inside the vehicle. Therefore, do not leave any people behind in the vehicle, particularly children, elderly people or people in need of special assistance if the vehicle has been locked with the key. As a result, they may not be able to free themselves in the event of an emergency. As a result, they could be seriously or even fatally injured by prolonged exposure to extremely high or low temperatures, for example. In this case, rescuing people from outside the vehicle is difficult. Deactivate the interior motion sensor before you lock the vehicle with the key. The doors can then be opened from the inside after the vehicle has been locked from the outside with the key. become trapped. To stop the opening or closing procedure, press the closing button on the tailgate again or pull the handle on the outside of the tailgate. ! The boot lid/tailgate swings upwards and to the rear when opened. Therefore, make sure that there is sufficient clearance above and behind the boot lid/tailgate. i You will find details on the boot lid/tail- gate opening dimensions in the Technical data section (Y page 386). Opening You can open the boot lid/tailgate automatically with the key or the handle in the boot lid/tailgate. Estate with EASY-PACK tailgate: open/ close the tailgate fully using the automatic function after stopping the tailgate in an intermediate position. X Press and hold the F button on the key until the boot lid/tailgate opens. or X If the boot lid/tailgate is unlocked, pull the handle of the boot lid/tailgate and let it go again immediately. Closing You can close the tailgate automatically using the closing button5 or the locking button6. G WARNING Monitor the tailgate opening and closing procedures to make sure that nobody can 5 6 For vehicles with the EASY-PACK tailgate only. For vehicles with the EASY-PACK tailgate and KEYLESS-GO only. Z Opening and closing Pull the boot lid/tailgate down using recess :. X Estate: push the tailgate closed from outside the vehicle. X If necessary, lock the vehicle with the & button on the key (Y page 84) or with KEYLESS-GO (Y page 85). i If a KEYLESS-GO key is detected in the boot/luggage compartment, the boot lid/ tailgate will not lock. Saloon: the boot lid then opens again. X 93 Boot/luggage compartment Opening and closing 94 Closing button and locking button (example: vehicle with the EASY-PACK tailgate and KEYLESS-GO) To close: press closing button : on the tailgate. X To close and lock simultaneously: Press locking button ; on the tailgate. X Remote operating switch (example: Estate) X To open: press the upper section of remote operating switch : for the tailgate/boot lid until the tailgate/boot lid opens. i If you leave a KEYLESS-GO key in the luggage compartment, the tailgate will not lock. To close (Estate): turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock. X Press the lower section of tailgate remote operating switch : until the tailgate is closed. Opening/closing automatically from the inside Limiting the opening angle of the tailgate (Estate) X G WARNING Important safety notes Monitor the tailgate closing procedure to make sure that nobody can become trapped. Release the tailgate's remote operating button to stop the closing procedure. You can limit the opening angle of the tailgate. This is possible in the top half of its opening range, up to approximately 20 cm before the stop. Limiting the opening angle can be useful if there is not sufficient clearance above the open tailgate, for example. Saloon: you can open the boot lid from the driver's seat when the vehicle is stationary and unlocked. Estate with EASY-PACK tailgate: you can open/close the tailgate from the driver's seat when the vehicle is stationary and unlocked. ! Make sure there is sufficient clearance to open the tailgate fully when setting the opening angle. The tailgate could otherwise be damaged. Ideally, set the opening angle outside. Activating To open the tailgate: pull the handle on the tailgate. X To stop the opening procedure at the desired position: press the closing button X Boot/luggage compartment Deactivating X Press and hold the closing button (Y page 93) in the tailgate until you hear two short tones. Locking the boot separately (Saloon) Remove the emergency key element. X Insert the emergency key element into the key. X Unlocking the boot (Saloon) ! The boot lid swings upwards when opened. Therefore, make sure that there is sufficient clearance above the boot lid. If the boot cannot be unlocked with the key or KEYLESS-GO, use the emergency key element. If you use the emergency key element to unlock and open the boot lid, the anti-theft alarm system will be triggered (Y page 80). X Take the emergency key element out of the key (Y page 86). X Insert the emergency key element into the boot lid lock as far as the stop. In some countries, you can lock the boot separately. If you then unlock the vehicle centrally, the boot remains locked and cannot be opened. X Close the boot lid. X Take the emergency key element out of the key (Y page 86). Turn the emergency key element anticlockwise from position 1 as far as it will go to position 2. The boot is unlocked. X Turn the emergency key element back to position 1 and remove it. X Insert the emergency key element into the key. X Insert the emergency key element into the boot lid lock as far as the stop. X Turn the emergency key element clockwise from position 1 to position 2. X Tailgate emergency release (Estate) If the tailgate can no longer be opened from outside the vehicle, use the emergency release on the inside of the tailgate. Z Opening and closing (Y page 93) in the tailgate or pull the handle on the outside of the tailgate again. X To store the position: press and hold the closing button in the tailgate until you hear a short tone. The opening angle limiter is activated. The tailgate will now stop in the stored position when opening. i If you wish to open the tailgate fully, pull the handle of the tailgate again after it has stopped automatically. This does not delete the stored position. 95 Side windows 96 X Take the emergency key element out of the key (Y page 86). i You will find details on the tailgate open- Opening and closing ing dimensions in the Technical data section (Y page 386). G WARNING Make sure that nobody can become trapped as you close a side window. If there is a risk of becoming trapped, release the switch or press it again to open the side window again. G WARNING Children may injure themselves if they open or close the side windows. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. Always take the key with you when leaving the vehicle, even if you are only leaving it for a short time. ! When opening, the tailgate swings up and out. Therefore, make sure that there is sufficient clearance above and behind the tailgate. Insert emergency key element ; into opening in trim :. X Turn emergency key element ; 90° clockwise. X Push emergency key element ; in the direction of the arrow and open the tailgate. X Side windows Important safety notes G WARNING Make sure that nobody can become trapped between the side window and the door frame when a side window is opened. Do not touch or lean against the side window during the opening procedure. You could become trapped between the side window and the door frame as the side window moves down. If there is a risk of becoming trapped, release the switch or pull the switch upwards to close the side window again. G WARNING Do not leave children unsupervised in the vehicle, even if they are secured in a child restraint system. The children could: Rbe seriously or even fatally injured on parts of the vehicle seriously or even fatally injured by prolonged exposure to extremely high or extremely low temperatures If children open a door, they could: Rbe Rseriously or even fatally injure other people Rget out of the vehicle and injure themselves, or be seriously or even fatally injured by a passing vehicle Activate the child-proof locks/override feature if children are travelling in the vehicle. They could otherwise open doors or side windows while the vehicle is in motion and thereby injure themselves or others. Side windows Opening and closing the side windows 97 Convenience opening feature You can ventilate the vehicle before you start driving. To do this, the key is used to carry out the following functions simultaneously: Runlock the vehicle the side windows Ropen the sliding sunroof or the panorama sliding sunroof and the roller sunblinds Rswitch on the seat ventilation for the driver's seat i The convenience opening feature can only be operated using the key. The key must be close to the driver's door handle. : Front left ; Front right = Rear right ? Rear left The switches for all side windows are located on the driver's door. There is also a switch on each door for the corresponding side window. The switches on the driver's door take precedence. i The side windows cannot be operated from the rear when the override feature for the side windows is activated (Y page 72). Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock. X To open: press the corresponding switch. X To close: pull the corresponding switch. i If you press the switch beyond the point of resistance, an automatic opening/closing process is started in the corresponding direction. You can stop automatic operation by pressing again. X i You can continue to operate the side windows after switching off the engine or removing the key. This function remains active for five minutes or until the driver's or front-passenger door is opened. Point the tip of the key at the driver's door handle. X Press and hold the % button until the side windows and the sliding sunroof or the panorama sliding sunroof are in the desired position. X If the roller sunblinds of the panorama sliding sunroof are closed, the roller sunblinds are opened first. X Press and hold the % button again until the panorama sliding sunroof is in the desired position. X To interrupt convenience opening: release the % button. Convenience closing feature General notes When you lock the vehicle, you can simultaneously: Rclose the side windows the sliding sunroof or the panorama sliding sunroof On vehicles with a panorama sliding sunroof, you can then close the roller sunblinds. Rclose G WARNING When using the convenience closing feature, make sure that nobody can become trapped. Z Opening and closing Ropen Side windows 98 Proceed as follows if there is a risk of entrapment: With the key: Rrelease the & button. Opening and closing Rpress and hold the % button until the side windows and the sliding sunroof or the panorama sliding sunroof open again. With KEYLESS-GO: Rrelease the sensor surface on the door han- dle. Rpull the door handle immediately and hold it. The side windows and the sliding sunroof or the panorama sliding sunroof open. Using the key i The key must be close to the driver's door Touch recessed sensor surface : on the door handle until the side windows and the sliding sunroof or the panorama sliding sunroof are fully closed. i Make sure you only touch recessed sensor surface :. X X handle. Point the tip of the key at the driver's door handle. X Press and hold the & button until the side windows and the sliding sunroof or the panorama sliding sunroof are fully closed. X Make sure that all the side windows and the sliding sunroof or panorama sliding sunroof are closed. X Make sure that all the side windows and the sliding sunroof or panorama sliding sunroof are closed. On vehicles with a panorama sliding sunroof: X Touch recessed sensor surface : on the door handle again until the roller sunblinds of the panorama sliding sunroof close. X To interrupt convenience closing: release recessed sensor surface : on the door handle. On vehicles with a panorama sliding sunroof: X X Press and hold the & button again until the roller sunblinds of the panorama sliding sunroof close. To interrupt convenience closing: release the & button. Using KEYLESS-GO The KEYLESS-GO key must be outside the vehicle. All the doors must be closed. Resetting the side windows You must reset each side window if a side window can no longer be closed fully. X Close all the doors. X Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock. X Pull the corresponding switch on the door control panel until the side window is completely closed. (Y page 97). X Hold the switch for an additional second. Sliding sunroof If the side window opens again slightly: Sliding sunroof Immediately pull the corresponding switch on the door control panel until the side window is completely closed (Y page 97). X Hold the switch for an additional second. X If the corresponding side window remains closed after the button has been released, the side window has been reset correctly. If this is not the case, repeat the steps above again. Important safety notes Problems with the side windows Problem: a side window cannot be closed because it is blocked by objects, e.g. leaves in the window guide. Remove the objects. X Close the side window. X Problem: a side window cannot be closed and you cannot see the cause. G WARNING Closing the side windows with increased force or without the anti-entrapment feature could lead to serious or even fatal injury. Make sure that nobody can become trapped when closing the side windows. If a side window is obstructed during closing and reopens again slightly: X Immediately after the window blocks, pull the corresponding switch again until the side window has closed. The side window is closed with increased force. If a side window is obstructed again during closing and reopens again slightly: X Immediately after the window blocks, pull the corresponding switch again until the side window has closed. The side window is closed without the antientrapment feature. Your vehicle may be fitted with a sliding sunroof or a panorama sliding sunroof. In the following section, the term "sliding sunroof" refers to both types of sliding sunroof. G WARNING Make sure that nobody can become trapped when opening and closing the sliding sunroof. If there is a risk of entrapment, release the switch immediately. During automatic operation, push the switch briefly in any direction to stop the sliding sunroof. G WARNING Children could injure themselves if they operate the sliding sunroof. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. Always take the key with you when leaving the vehicle, even if you are only leaving it for a short time. G WARNING The glass in the panorama sunroof could break in an accident. If you are not wearing a seat belt, there is a risk that you could be thrown through the opening in the event of the vehicle overturning. Therefore, always wear a seat belt to reduce the risk of injuries. ! Only open the panorama sliding sunroof if it is free of snow and ice. Otherwise, malfunctions may occur. Do not allow anything to protrude from the sliding sunroof. Otherwise, the seals could be damaged. i Resonance noises can occur in addition to the usual airflow noises when the sliding sunroof is open. They are caused by minor pressure fluctuations in the vehicle interior. Change the position of the sliding sunroof or open a side window slightly to reduce or eliminate these noises. Z Opening and closing X 99 Sliding sunroof 100 Operating the sliding sunroof Opening and closing i You can continue to operate the sliding Opening and closing sunroof after switching off the engine or removing the key. This function remains active for five minutes or until the driver's or front-passenger door is opened. Rafter six hours Rif there is a malfunction in the power supply The rear of the sliding sunroof is then raised in order to ventilate the vehicle interior. i If the sliding sunroof is obstructed when being closed by the rain closing feature, it opens again slightly. The rain closing feature is then deactivated. The sliding sunroof does not close if: Rit is raised at the rear. is blocked. Rno rain is falling on the area of the windscreen being monitored by the rain sensor (e.g. because the vehicle is under a bridge or in a carport). Rit Resetting Overhead control panel : To raise ; To open = To close/lower Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock. X Press or pull the 3 switch in the corresponding direction. i If you press the 3 switch beyond the point of resistance, an automatic opening/ closing process is started in the corresponding direction. You can stop automatic operation by pressing again. The sun protection cover automatically opens along with the sliding sunroof. You can open or close the sun protection cover manually when the sliding sunroof is raised or closed. X Rain closing feature When the key is in position 0 in the ignition lock or is removed, the sliding sunroof closes automatically: Rif it starts to rain Rat extreme outside temperatures Reset the sliding sunroof if it does not move smoothly. X Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock. X Raise the sliding sunroof fully at the rear (Y page 100). X Keep the 3 switch pressed for another second. X Make sure that the sliding sunroof can be fully opened and closed again (Y page 100). X If this is not the case, repeat the steps above again. ! If the sliding sunroof still cannot be opened or closed fully after resetting, contact a qualified specialist workshop. Sliding sunroof Opening and closing The panorama sliding sunroof does not close if: Rit is raised at the rear. is blocked. Rno rain is falling on the area of the windscreen being monitored by the rain sensor (e.g. because the vehicle is under a bridge or in a carport). Rit Operating the panorama sliding sunroof roller sunblinds General notes Overhead control panel : To raise ; Opening = To close/lower Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock. X Push or pull the 3 switch in the corresponding direction. i If you press the 3 switch beyond the point of resistance, an automatic opening/ closing process is started in the corresponding direction. You can stop automatic operation by pressing again. X The roller sunblinds shield the vehicle interior from sunlight. The two roller sunblinds can only be opened and closed together when the panorama sliding sunroof is closed. G WARNING Make sure that nobody can become trapped as you open or close the roller sunblinds. Opening and closing Rain closing feature When the key is in position 0 in the ignition lock or is removed, the panorama sliding sunroof closes automatically: Rif it starts to rain Rat extreme outside temperatures Rafter six hours Rif there is a malfunction in the power supply The panorama sliding sunroof remains raised at the rear in order to allow ventilation of the vehicle interior. i If the panorama sliding sunroof is obstructed when being closed by the rain closing feature, it opens again slightly. The rain closing feature is then deactivated. Overhead control panel : To open ; To open = To close Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock. X Press or pull the 3 switch in the corresponding direction. i If you press the 3 switch beyond the point of resistance, an automatic opening/ X Z Opening and closing Operating the panorama sliding sunroof 101 102 Sliding sunroof closing process is started in the corresponding direction. You can stop automatic operation by pressing again. Opening and closing Resetting the panorama sliding sunroof and the roller sunblinds Reset the panorama sliding sunroof and the roller sunblinds if the panorama sliding sunroof or the roller sunblinds do not move smoothly. X Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock. X Press the 3 switch to the point of resistance in the direction of arrow ; and hold it until the panorama sliding sunroof has opened about 10 cm. X Pull the 3 switch repeatedly to the point of resistance in the direction of arrow = until the panorama sliding sunroof is fully closed. X Keep the 3 switch pulled for an additional second. X Press the 3 switch to the point of resistance in the direction of arrow ; and hold it until the roller sunblinds are open 10 cm. X Pull the 3 switch repeatedly to the point of resistance in the direction of arrow = until the roller sunblinds are fully closed. X Keep the 3 switch pulled for an additional second. X Make sure that the panorama sliding sunroof and the roller sunblinds can be fully opened and closed again (Y page 101). X If this is not the case, repeat the steps above again. ! If the panorama sliding sunroof and the roller sunblind cannot be fully opened or closed after resetting, contact a qualified specialist workshop. Problems with the sliding sunroof Your vehicle may be fitted with a sliding sunroof or a panorama sliding sunroof. In the fol- lowing section, the term "sliding sunroof" refers to both types of sliding sunroof. Problem: the sunroof cannot be closed and you cannot see the cause. G WARNING You could be severely or even fatally injured when closing the sliding sunroof with increased closing force or if the anti-entrapment feature is deactivated. Make sure that nobody can become trapped when closing the sliding sunroof. If the sliding sunroof is obstructed during closing and reopens again slightly: X Immediately after the sliding sunroof blocks, pull the 3 switch in the overhead control panel down to the point of resistance and hold it until the sliding sunroof is closed. The sliding sunroof is closed with increased force. If the sliding sunroof is obstructed again during closing and reopens again slightly: X Immediately after the sliding sunroof blocks, pull the 3 switch in the overhead control panel down to the point of resistance and hold it until the sliding sunroof is closed. The sliding sunroof is closed without the anti-entrapment feature. 103 104 104 105 110 112 115 Seats, steering wheel and mirrors Useful information ............................ Correct driver's seat position .......... Seats .................................................. Steering wheel .................................. Mirrors ............................................... Memory function .............................. 104 Correct driver's seat position Useful information Seats, steering wheel and mirrors i This Owner's Manual describes all models and all standard and optional equipment available to your vehicle at the time of publication of the Owner's Manual. Countryspecific deviations are possible. Please note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all features described. This also applies to safety-relevant systems and functions. i Please read the information on qualified specialist workshops (Y page 28). Correct driver's seat position Ryou can fasten the seat belt properly. have moved the backrest to an almost vertical position. Ryou have set the seat cushion angle so that your thighs are gently supported. Ryou can depress the pedals properly. X Check whether the head restraint is adjusted properly (Y page 107). When doing so, make sure that you have adjusted the head restraint so that the back of your head is supported at eye level by the centre of the head restraint. Ryou Observe the safety guidelines on steering wheel adjustment (Y page 110). X Check whether steering wheel : is adjusted properly. Adjust the steering wheel manually (Y page 111) Adjusting the steering wheel electrically (Y page 111) When adjusting the steering wheel, make sure: Ryou can hold the steering wheel with your arms slightly bent. can move your legs freely. Ryou can see all the displays in the instrument cluster clearly. Ryou Observe the safety guidelines on seat adjustment (Y page 105). X Check whether you have adjusted seat = properly. Manual and electrical seat adjustment (Y page 106) Electrical seat adjustment (Y page 106) When adjusting the seat, make sure: Ryou are as far away from the driver's airbag as possible. Ryou are sitting in a normal upright position. Observe the safety guidelines for seat belts (Y page 53). X Check whether you have fastened seat belt ; properly (Y page 55). The seat belt should: Rfit snugly across your body routed across the middle of your shoulder Rbe routed in your pelvic area across the hip joints X Before starting off, adjust the rear-view mirror and the exterior mirrors (Y page 112) Rbe Seats G WARNING Seats Make sure that the back of your head is supported at eye level by the central area of the head restraint. If your head is not supported correctly by the head restraint, you could suffer a severe neck injury in the event of an accident. Never drive if the head restraints are not engaged and set correctly. Important safety notes G WARNING G WARNING A seat belt can only offer its intended degree of protection when the backrest is almost vertical and the occupant is sitting upright. Avoid seat positions that do not allow the seat belt to be routed correctly. Adjust the backrest so that it is as upright as possible. Never travel with the backrest reclined too far backwards. You could otherwise be seriously or even fatally injured in the event of an accident or sudden braking. The seats can still be adjusted when there is no key in the ignition lock. For this reason, children should never be left unsupervised in the vehicle. They could adjust the seats and become trapped. G WARNING Only adjust the driver's seat when the vehicle is stationary. You will otherwise be distracted from the road and traffic conditions and you could lose control of the vehicle as a result of the seat moving. This could cause an accident. G WARNING If you adjust the seat height carelessly, you or others could be trapped and thereby injured. Children in particular could unintentionally press the buttons to electrically adjust the seats and become trapped. Take care that: Rwhile moving the seats, your hands do not get under the lever assembly of the seat adjustment system. Rchildren in the vehicle do not slide their hands under the levers. G WARNING Make sure that nobody can become trapped when adjusting the seats. Observe the notes on airbags. Secure children as recommended; see the "Children in the vehicle" section. ! To avoid damage to the seats and the seat heating, observe the following information: Rdo not spill any liquids on the seats. If liquid is spilled on the seats, dry them as soon as possible. Rif the seat covers are damp or wet, do not switch on the seat heating. The seat heating should also not be used to dry the seats. Rclean the seat covers as recommended; see the "Interior care" section. Rdo not transport heavy loads on the seats. Do not place sharp objects on the seat cushions, e.g. knives, nails or tools. The seats should only be occupied by passengers, if possible. Rwhen the seat heating is in operation, do not cover the seats with insulating materials, e.g. blankets, coats, bags, seat covers, child seats or booster seats. ! When you move the seats, make sure that there are no objects in the footwell or behind the seats. Otherwise, you could damage the seats and the objects. Z Seats, steering wheel and mirrors in such a way that you have a good view of road and traffic conditions. X Vehicles with a memory function: save the seat, steering wheel and exterior mirror settings (Y page 115). 105 106 Seats Seats, steering wheel and mirrors i The head restraints in the front seats are fitted with the NECK-PRO system (Y page 52). For this reason, it is not possible to remove the head restraints from the front seats. Vehicles without the through-loading feature: the head restraints cannot be removed from the rear compartment seats. Please contact a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for more information. Seat fore-and-aft adjustment Lift handle ? and slide the seat forwards or backwards. X Release lever ? again. Make sure that you hear the seat engage in position. X Seat cushion angle X Turn handwheel = in the desired direction. i Related topics: RThrough-loading feature in the rear bench seat (Saloon) RLuggage compartment enlargement (Estate) (Y page 306) Adjusting the seats electrically Adjusting the seats manually and electrically : Head restraint height ; Seat cushion angle = Seat height ? Seat fore-and-aft adjustment A Backrest angle : Backrest angle ; Seat height = Seat cushion angle ? Seat fore-and-aft adjustment i AMG vehicles are equipped with a seat with an integrated head restraint. It is, therefore, not possible to set the height and angle of the head restraint. i Adjust the seat cushion angle so that your thighs are lightly supported. i Vehicles with memory function: if PRE- SAFE® has been triggered, the frontpassenger seat will be moved to a better position if it was previously in an unfavourable position. i You can store the seat settings using the memory function (Y page 115). i AMG vehicles are equipped with a seat featuring an integrated head restraint and the head restraint adjustment button is disabled. It is therefore not possible to set the height and angle of the head restraint. Seats Adjusting the head restraints manually Adjusting the head restraint height To raise: pull the head restraint up to the desired position. X To lower: press release catch : in the direction of the arrow and push the head restraint down to the desired position. Adjusting the luxury head restraints G WARNING When folding back the head restraint side bolsters, do not put your hands between the side bolster and the cushion holder. There is a danger of becoming trapped. X Adjusting the angle of the head restraints To adjust the side bolsters of the head restraint: push or pull right and/or lefthand side bolster : into the desired position. X To adjust the angle of the head restraint: push or pull the head restraint in the direction of arrow ;. X Rear seat head restraints Adjusting the rear seat head restraint height X Push or pull the lower edge of the head restraint in the direction of the arrow. Adjusting the head restraints electrically X To adjust the head restraint height: slide the switch for head restraint adjustment (Y page 106) up or down in the direction of the arrow. If the head restraint is fully lowered, it is necessary to press release catch :. X To raise: pull the head restraint up to the desired position. Z Seats, steering wheel and mirrors Adjusting the head restraints 107 Seats 108 Seats, steering wheel and mirrors X To lower: press release catch : and push the head restraint down until it is in the desired position. Adjusting the rear seat head restraint angle Adjust the head restraints so that they are as close as possible to your head. You can only adjust the two outer head restraints. Release the rear seat backrest and fold it slightly forwards (Y page 305). X To remove: pull the head restraint up to the stop. X Press release catch : and pull the head restraint out of the guides. X To refit: insert the head restraint so that the notches on the bar are on the left when viewed in the direction of travel. X Push the head restraint down until you hear it engage in position. X Fold back the rear seat backrest until it engages. X Adjusting the multicontour seat You can adjust the contour of the front seats individually so as to provide optimum support for your back and sides. X Pull or push the bottom of the head restraint until it is in the desired position. Fitting/removing the rear seat head restraints7 G WARNING Occupants should only travel sitting on seats which have the head restraints installed. This reduces the risk of injury to the passengers in the rear in the event of an accident. : To adjust the thigh cushion ; To adjust the backrest contour in the lum- bar region = To adjust the backrest contour in the upper back region ? To adjust the side bolsters of the seat backrest X 7 Except for Saloons without the through-loading feature. Make sure that the key is in position 2 in the ignition lock. Seats You can adjust the contour of the driver's seat so as to provide optimum support for your back. Switching the seat heating on/off Switching on/off G WARNING Repeatedly setting the seat heating to level 3 may result in excessive seat temperatures. The health of passengers that have limited temperature sensitivity or a limited ability to react to excessively high temperatures may be affected or they may even suffer burn-like injuries. Therefore, do not use seat heating level 3 repeatedly. The three red indicator lamps in the button indicate the heating level you have selected. X Move adjustment lever : in the direction of the arrow until the desired backrest contour is achieved. i If the battery voltage is too low, the seat heating may switch off. Adjusting the 4-way lumbar support You can adjust the contour of the front seat backrests individually to provide optimum support for your back. Driver's and front-passenger seat : To raise the backrest contour ; To soften the backrest contour = To lower the backrest contour ? To harden the backrest contour The system automatically switches down from level 3 to level 2 after approximately eight minutes. The system automatically switches down from level 2 to level 1 after approximately ten minutes. The system automatically switches off approximately 20 minutes after it is set to level 1. X Make sure that the key is in position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock. X To switch on: press button : repeatedly until the desired heating level is set. X To switch off: press button : repeatedly until all the indicator lamps go out. Z Seats, steering wheel and mirrors Adjusting the lumbar support 109 Steering wheel 110 Problems with the seat heating Problems with the seat ventilation The seat heating has switched off prematurely or cannot be switched on. The vehicle's electrical system voltage is too low because too many electrical consumers are switched on. The seat ventilation has switched off prematurely or cannot be switched on. The vehicle's electrical system voltage is too low because too many electrical consumers are switched on. Seats, steering wheel and mirrors X Switch off electrical consumers that you do not need, such as the rear window heating or interior lighting. Switching the seat ventilation on/off X Switch off electrical consumers which you do not need, such as the rear window heating or interior lighting. Steering wheel Switching on/off Important safety notes The three blue indicator lamps in the buttons indicate the ventilation level you have selected. G WARNING The electrically adjustable steering wheel can still be adjusted when there is no key in the ignition lock. Therefore, do not leave children unsupervised in the vehicle, as they could become trapped if the steering wheel is adjusted. i If the battery voltage is too low, the seat ventilation may switch off. Make sure that the key is in position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock. X To switch on: press button : repeatedly until the desired ventilation level is set. X i You can open the side windows and the sliding sunroof using the "Convenience opening" feature (Y page 97). The seat ventilation of the driver's seat automatically switches to the highest level. X To switch off: press button : repeatedly until all the indicator lamps go out. G WARNING Only adjust the steering wheel when the vehicle is stationary and do not pull away until the steering wheel adjustment mechanism is locked in position. You might otherwise drive without the steering wheel adjustment mechanism being locked in position. As a result, you could be distracted from road and traffic conditions by an unintentional movement of the steering wheel and thereby cause an accident. However, the steerability of the vehicle is not affected. Steering wheel Adjusting the steering wheel manually 111 i Related topics: REASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature (Y page 111) RStoring settings (Y page 115) EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature : Release lever ; To adjust the steering wheel height The EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature makes getting in and out of your vehicle easier. You can activate and deactivate the EASYENTRY/EXIT feature in the on-board computer (Y page 243). = To adjust the steering wheel position G WARNING Push release lever : down completely. The steering column is unlocked. X Adjust the steering wheel to the desired position. X Push release lever : up completely. The steering column is locked. X Check if the steering column is locked. When doing so, try to push the steering wheel up or down or try to move it in the fore-and-aft direction. Rpress (fore-and-aft adjustment) X Adjusting the steering wheel electrically Make sure that nobody can become trapped when you activate the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature. If there is a risk of someone becoming trapped, stop the adjustment procedure. To halt the procedure: the steering column adjustment button. Rbriefly press one of the memory function position buttons. The steering column stops moving immediately. Do not keep the memory function position button pressed down, otherwise the memory function will start and the steering wheel and seat will begin to move. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. They could open the driver's door and thereby unintentionally activate the EASYENTRY feature and become trapped. : To adjust the steering wheel height ; To adjust the steering wheel position (fore-and-aft adjustment) Z Seats, steering wheel and mirrors Important safety notes 112 Mirrors Position of the steering wheel when the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is active The steering wheel tilts upwards if you: Rremove the key from the ignition lock the driver's door and KEYLESS-GO is in position 1 Ropen the driver's door and the key is in position 0 or 1 in the ignition lock Seats, steering wheel and mirrors Ropen The crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature is only operational if the EASY-EXIT/ENTRY feature is activated in the on-board computer. Mirrors Rear-view mirror Rear-view mirror (manual anti-dazzle) i The steering wheel only moves upwards if it has not already reached the upper end stop. If you insert the key into the ignition lock with the driver's door closed, the steering wheel is automatically moved to the previously set position. Position of the steering wheel for driving The steering wheel is moved to the previously set position if: Rthe Ryou driver's door is closed insert the key into the ignition lock or Ryou press the Start/Stop button once on vehicles with KEYLESS-GO. If you close the driver's door with the key inserted into the ignition lock, the steering wheel is automatically moved to the previously set position. The last position of the steering wheel is stored after each manual setting or when you store the setting with the memory function (Y page 115). Crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature If the crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature is triggered in an accident, the steering column will move upwards when the driver's door is opened. This occurs irrespective of the position of the key in the ignition lock. This makes it easier to exit the vehicle and rescue the occupants. X Anti-dazzle mode: flick anti-dazzle switch : forwards or back. Exterior mirrors Adjusting the exterior mirrors G WARNING The exterior mirrors reduce the size of the image. Objects are actually closer than they appear. You could misjudge the distance from vehicles driving behind and cause an accident, e.g. when changing lane. For this reason, make sure of the actual distance from the vehicle driving behind by glancing over your shoulder. The convex exterior mirrors provide a larger field of vision. The exterior mirrors are automatically heated if the rear window heating is switched on and the outside temperature is low. Mirrors 113 i Make sure that the exterior mirrors are always folded out fully while the vehicle is in motion, as they may otherwise vibrate. Make sure that the key is in position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock. X Press button : for the left-hand exterior mirror or button ; for the right-hand exterior mirror. The indicator lamp in the corresponding button lights up in red. The indicator lamp goes out again after some time. You can adjust the selected mirror using adjustment button = as long as the indicator lamp is lit. X Press adjustment button = up, down, to the right or to the left until the exterior mirror is set to a position that provides you with a good overview of traffic conditions. X Folding the exterior mirrors in or out electrically If the battery has been disconnected or completely discharged, the exterior mirrors must be reset. The exterior mirrors will otherwise not fold in when you select the "Fold in mirrors when locking" function in the on-board computer (Y page 244). X Make sure that the key is in position 1 in the ignition lock. X Briefly press button :. Folding the exterior mirrors in or out automatically If the "Fold in mirrors when locking" function is activated in the on-board computer (Y page 244): Rthe exterior mirrors fold in automatically as soon as you lock the vehicle from the outside. Rthe exterior mirrors fold out again automatically as soon as you unlock the vehicle and then open the driver's or front-passenger door. i The mirrors do not fold out if they have been folded in manually. Exterior mirror out of position Make sure that the key is in position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock. X Briefly press button :. Both exterior mirrors fold in or out. X If an exterior mirror has been pushed out of position, proceed as follows: X Vehicles without electrically folding exterior mirrors: move the exterior mirror into the correct position manually. X Vehicles with electrically folding exterior mirrors: press the mirror-folding button (Y page 113) repeatedly until you hear the mirror engage in position. The mirror housing is engaged again and you can adjust the exterior mirrors as usual (Y page 112). Z Seats, steering wheel and mirrors Setting the exterior mirrors Mirrors 114 Automatic anti-dazzle mirrors Seats, steering wheel and mirrors G WARNING If incident light from headlamps is prevented from striking the sensor in the rear-view mirror, for instance, by luggage piled too high in the vehicle, the mirror's automatic anti-dazzle function will not operate. Incident light could then blind you. This may distract you from the traffic conditions and, as a result, you may cause an accident. The rear-view mirror and the exterior mirror on the driver's side automatically go into antidazzle mode if the ignition is switched on and incident light from headlamps strikes the sensor in the rear-view mirror. The mirrors do not go into anti-dazzle mode if reverse gear is engaged or the interior lighting is switched on. Engage reverse gear. The exterior mirror on the front-passenger side moves to the preset parking position. X Use adjustment button = to adjust the exterior mirror to a position that allows you to see the rear wheel and the kerb. The parking position is stored. X i If you shift the transmission to another position, the exterior mirror on the frontpassenger side returns to the driving position. i You can also store the parking position using memory button M ?. Make sure that the key is in position 2 in the ignition lock. X With the exterior mirror on the frontpassenger side activated, use adjustment button = to adjust the exterior mirror to a position which allows you to see the rear wheel and the kerb. X Press memory button M ? and one of the arrows on adjustment button = within three seconds. The parking position is stored if the exterior mirror does not move. X Parking position for the exterior mirror on the front-passenger side Setting and storing the parking position You can position the front-passenger side exterior mirror in such a way that you can see the rear wheel on that side as soon as you engage reverse gear. You can store this position. If the mirror moves out of position, repeat the steps. Calling up a stored parking position setting Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. X Adjust the exterior mirror on the frontpassenger side with the corresponding button (Y page 112). X Engage reverse gear. The exterior mirror on the front-passenger side moves to the stored parking position. X Make sure that the vehicle is stationary and that the key is in position 2 in the ignition lock. X Press button ; for the exterior mirror on the front-passenger side. X Memory function 115 The exterior mirror on the front-passenger side moves back to its original position: soon as you exceed a speed of 10 km/h Rabout ten seconds after you have disengaged reverse gear Rif you press button : for the exterior mirror on the driver's side Memory function X Storing settings X With the memory function, you can store up to three different settings, e.g. for three different people. The following settings are stored as a single memory preset: Rposition of the seat, backrest and head restraint Rdriver's side: steering wheel position Rdriver's side: position of the exterior mirrors on the driver's and front-passenger sides G WARNING The memory function can still be used when the key has been removed. For this reason, children should never be left unsupervised in the vehicle. They could otherwise become trapped when adjusting the seat or the steering wheel. G WARNING Only use the memory function on the driver's side when the vehicle is stationary. Otherwise, you could be distracted from the traffic conditions by the steering wheel and seat moving of their own accord, and as a result cause an accident. Adjust the seat (Y page 106). On the driver's side, adjust the steering wheel (Y page 111) and the exterior mirrors (Y page 112). X Press memory button M and then press storage position button 1, 2 or 3 within three seconds. The settings are stored in the selected preset position. A tone sounds when the settings have been completed. Calling up a stored setting ! If you want to move the seat from the fully reclined position to a stored seat position, first raise the backrest. The seat could otherwise be damaged. X Press and hold the relevant storage position button 1, 2 or 3 until the seat, steering wheel and exterior mirrors are in the stored position. i The setting procedure is interrupted as soon as you release the storage position button. Z Seats, steering wheel and mirrors Ras 116 117 118 118 124 125 129 Lights and windscreen wipers Useful information ............................ Exterior lighting ................................ Interior lighting ................................. Changing bulbs ................................. Windscreen wipers ........................... Exterior lighting 118 Useful information i This Owner's Manual describes all models and all standard and optional equipment available to your vehicle at the time of publication of the Owner's Manual. Countryspecific deviations are possible. Please note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all features described. This also applies to safety-relevant systems and functions. If the headlamps are converted to symmetrical dipped beam, the "motorway mode" and "extended range foglamps" functions (Intelligent Light System) are not available. Light switch Operation Lights and windscreen wipers i Please read the information on qualified specialist workshops (Y page 28). Exterior lighting Important safety notes For reasons of safety, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you drive with the lights switched on even during the daytime. In some countries, operation of the headlamps varies due to legal requirements and self-imposed obligations. Notes on driving abroad Convert to symmetrical dipped beam when driving abroad: switch the headlamps to symmetrical dipped beam in countries in which traffic drives on the opposite side of the road to the country where the vehicle is registered. This prevents glare to oncoming traffic. Symmetrical lights do not illuminate as large an area of the edge of the carriageway. Convert the headlamps as close to the border as possible before driving in these countries (Y page 240). Convert to asymmetrical dipped beam after returning: convert the headlamps back to asymmetrical dipped beam as soon as possible after crossing the border when returning (Y page 240). 8 1W Left-hand parking lamps 2X Right-hand parking lamps 3T Side lamps, licence plate and instru- ment cluster lighting 4à Automatic headlamp mode/daytime driving lights 5L Dipped-beam/main-beam headlamps BR Rear foglamp CN Foglamps8 The turn signals, main-beam headlamps and the headlamp flasher are operated using the combination switch (Y page 120). ! Switch off the side lamps and parking lamp when you leave the vehicle. This prevents the battery from discharging. The exterior lighting (except the side lamps/ parking lamps) switches off automatically if you: Rremove the key from the ignition lock the driver's door with the key in position 0 Ropen Only vehicles with front foglamps have the "Foglamps" function. Exterior lighting When the dipped-beam headlamps are switched on, the L indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. If you hear a warning tone when you leave the vehicle, the lights may still be switched on. X Turn the light switch to Ã. To switch on the dipped-beam headlamps: turn the key in the ignition lock to position 2 or start the engine. X Turn the light switch to L. The L indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. X Daytime driving lights You can activate or deactivate the daytime driving lights function using the on-board computer (Y page 239). X To activate the daytime driving lights: you can activate the daytime driving lights function using the on-board computer (vehicles with a 12-button multifunction steering wheel). X Turn the light switch to Ã. When the engine is on: depending on the ambient light conditions, the daytime driving lights or the parking and dipped-beam headlamps are switched on. When the dipped-beam headlamps are switched on, the L indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. Automatic headlamp mode X 9 To switch on automatic headlamp mode: turn the light switch to Ã. Key in position 1 in the ignition lock: the side lamps are switched on or off automatically depending on the brightness of the ambient light. With the engine running: depending on the brightness of the ambient light, the daytime driving lights9 or the dipped-beam headlamps are switched on or off automatically. G WARNING If the light switch is set to Ã, the dippedbeam headlamps will not come on automatically if it is foggy. This could endanger you and others. Therefore, turn the light switch to L in fog. The automatic headlamp feature is only an aid. The driver is responsible for the vehicle's lighting at all times. Foglamps Only vehicles with front foglamps have the "Foglamps" function. G WARNING If you suspect that driving conditions will be foggy, turn the light switch to L before you start your journey. Otherwise, your vehicle may not be visible and you could endanger yourself and others. To switch on the foglamps: turn the key in the ignition lock to position 2 or start the engine. X Turn the light switch to T, L or Ã. X Press the N button. The green N indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. X To switch off the front foglamps: press the N button. The green N indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. X Rear foglamp To switch on the rear foglamp: turn the key in the ignition lock to position 2 or start the engine. X Turn the light switch to L or Ã. X Only if daytime driving lights have been activated via the on-board computer. Z Lights and windscreen wipers Dipped-beam headlamps 119 Exterior lighting 120 Press the R button. The yellow R indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. X To switch off the rear foglamp: press the R button. The yellow R indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. X Lights and windscreen wipers Vehicles with front foglamps: when the light switch is in the T position, the rear foglamp can only be switched on if the foglamps (without dipped-beam headlamps) are switched on. Headlamp cleaning system The headlamps are cleaned automatically if the "Wipe with washer fluid" function is operated ten times while the lights are on and the engine is running (Y page 129). Combination switch Turn signals Adjusting the headlamp range (halogen headlamps) The headlamp range control allows you to adjust the cone of light from the headlamps to suit the vehicle load. : Main-beam headlamps ; Turn signal, right = Headlamp flasher ? Turn signal, left 1 Driver's seat, front-passenger seat and To indicate briefly: press the combination switch briefly to the pressure point in the direction of arrow ; or ?. The corresponding turn signal flashes three times. X To indicate: press the combination switch beyond the pressure point in the direction of arrow ; or ?. 2 Driver's seat, front-passenger seat and Main-beam headlamps X Headlamp range control g Driver's seat and front-passenger seat occupied rear seats occupied rear seats occupied, luggage compartment/boot laden 3 Driver's and front-passenger seats occupied and maximum permissible rear axle load utilised, e.g. when towing a trailer X X Start the engine. Turn headlamp range control to the position which corresponds to the load in your vehicle. To switch on the main-beam headlamps: turn the key in the ignition lock to position 2 or start the engine. X Turn the light switch to L or Ã. X Exterior lighting Headlamp flasher only the turn signal lamp on the corresponding side of the vehicle will flash. X To switch off the hazard warning lamps: press button :. The hazard warning lamps switch off automatically if the vehicle reaches a speed of over 10 km/h again after full brake application. i The hazard warning lamps still operate if the ignition is switched off. Intelligent Light System Active light function To switch on: turn the key in the ignition lock to position 1 or 2 or start the engine. X Pull the combination switch in the direction of arrow =. X Hazard warning lamps The active light function is a system that moves the headlamps according to the steering movements of the front wheels. In this way, relevant areas remain illuminated while driving. This allows you to recognise pedestrians, cyclists and animals. Active: when the lights are switched on. The hazard warning lamps automatically switch on if: Cornering light function Ran airbag is deployed. vehicle decelerates rapidly from a speed of more than 70 km/h and comes to a standstill. X To switch on the hazard warning lamps: press button :. All turn signals flash. If you now switch on a turn signal using the combination switch, Rthe Z Lights and windscreen wipers Press the combination switch beyond the pressure point in the direction of arrow :. In the à position, the main-beam headlamps are only switched on when it is dark and the engine is running. The K indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up when the main-beam headlamps are switched on. X To switch off the main-beam headlamps: move the combination switch back to its normal position. The K indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. X 121 122 Exterior lighting The cornering light function improves the illumination of the road over a wide angle in the direction you are turning, enabling better visibility in tight bends, for example. It can only be activated when the dipped-beam headlamps are switched on. Active: Rif Lights and windscreen wipers you are driving at speeds below 40 km/h, the cornering light function is activated either by the turn signal or by the steering wheel being turned. Rif you are driving at speeds between 40 km/h and 70 km/h, the cornering light function is activated by the steering wheel being turned. Not active: if you are driving at speeds above 40 km/h or switch off the turn signal or turn the steering wheel to the straight-ahead position. The cornering light function may remain lit for a short time, but is automatically switched off after no more than three minutes. Extended range foglamps Motorway mode Motorway mode increases the range of the beam. Active: Rif you are driving at speeds above 110 km/h and do not make any large steering movements for 1000 m Rif you are driving at speeds above 130 km/h Not active: if you are driving at speeds below 80 km/h following activation. The extended range foglamps reduce the glare experienced by the driver and improve the illumination of the edge of the carriageway. Active: if you are driving at speeds below 70 km/h and you switch on the rear foglamp Not active: if you are driving at speeds above 100 km/h or if you switch off the rear foglamp following activation Adaptive Highbeam Assist You can use this function to set the headlamps to change between dipped beam and main beam automatically. The system recognises vehicles with their lights on, either approaching from the opposite direction or travelling in front of your vehicle, and consequently switches the headlamps from main beam to dipped beam. The system automatically adapts the dippedbeam headlamp range depending on the distance to the other vehicle. Once the system no longer detects any other vehicles, it reactivates the main-beam headlamps. The system's optical sensor is located behind the windscreen near the overhead control panel. Exterior lighting 123 indicator lamp in the instrument cluster stays on. X To deactivate: move the combination switch back to its normal position. The _ indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. Adaptive Highbeam Assist is only an aid designed to assist driving. The driver is responsible for adjusting the vehicle's lighting to the prevailing light, vision and traffic conditions. The system may be impaired or deactivated: Rif To activate: activate the Adaptive Highbeam Assist function using the on-board computer (Y page 240). X Turn the light switch to Ã. X Press the combination switch beyond the pressure point in the direction of arrow : (Y page 120). If it is dark and the light sensor activates the dipped-beam headlamps, the _ indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. If you are driving at speeds above 45 km/h: the headlamp range is set automatically depending on the distance between the vehicle and other road users. If you are driving at speeds above 55 km/h and no other road users are recognised: the main-beam headlamps are switched on automatically. The K indicator lamp in the instrument cluster also lights up. If you are driving at speeds below 45 km/h or other road users are recognised or the roads are adequately lit: the main-beam headlamps are switched off automatically. The K indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. The _ X there is poor visibility, e.g. due to snow, rain, fog or spray Rif the area of the windscreen around the optical sensor is dirty, misted up or covered up, e.g. by a sticker The system may not recognise the following road users: Rroad users that have no lighting, e.g. pedes- trians users that have poor lighting, e.g. cyclists Rroad users whose lighting is not clearly visible, e.g. road users behind a crash barrier Ron rare occasions: road users that have lights that may be recognised too late or not at all The automatic main-beam headlamps will not be deactivated, or they may be activated despite road users travelling in front of or approaching the vehicle. Thus, you could cause an accident and injure yourself and others. Always observe traffic conditions and, if necessary, dip the lights manually. Rroad Headlamps misted up inside The headlamps may mist up on the inside if there is high atmospheric humidity. Z Lights and windscreen wipers G WARNING Interior lighting 124 X Drive with the headlamps switched on. The level of moisture diminishes, depending on the length of the journey and the weather conditions (humidity and temperature). If the level of moisture does not diminish: X Have the headlamps checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Lights and windscreen wipers Interior lighting Overview of interior lighting Rear-compartment overhead control panel : p To switch the right-hand reading lamp on/off ; p To switch the left-hand reading lamp on/off Interior lighting control Important notes Front overhead control panel : u To switch the rear interior lighting on/off ; | To switch the automatic interior lighting control on/off = p To switch the right-hand front read- ing lamp on/off ? c To switch the front interior lighting on/off A p To switch the left-hand front reading lamp on/off In order to prevent the vehicle's battery from discharging, the interior lighting functions are automatically deactivated after some time except for when the key is in position 2 in the ignition lock. Automatic interior lighting control X To switch on/off: press the | button. When the automatic interior lighting control is activated, the button is flush with the overhead control panel. The interior lighting automatically switches on if you: Runlock the vehicle a door Rremove the key from the ignition lock The interior light is activated for a short while when the key is removed from the ignition lock. You can activate this delayed switch-off using the on-board computer (Y page 241). Ropen Changing bulbs To switch the front interior lighting on/ off: press the c button. X To switch the rear interior lighting on/ off: press the u button. X To switch the reading lamps on/off: press the p button. X Crash-responsive emergency lighting The interior lighting is activated automatically if the vehicle is involved in an accident. X To switch off the crash-responsive emergency lighting: press the hazard warning lamp button. or X Lock and then unlock the vehicle using the key. Changing bulbs Important safety notes Xenon bulbs If your vehicle is equipped with xenon bulbs, you can recognise this by the following: the cone of light from the xenon bulbs moves from the top to the bottom and back again when you start the engine. For this to be observed, the lights must be switched on before starting the engine. G DANGER Xenon bulbs carry a high voltage. You could get an electric shock and be seriously or even fatally injured if you touch the electric contacts on xenon bulbs. Therefore, never remove the cover from xenon bulbs. Do not change xenon bulbs yourself, but have them replaced at a qualified specialist workshop which has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools to carry out the work required. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose. In particular, work relevant to safety or on safety-related systems must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Bulbs and lamps are an important aspect of vehicle safety. You must therefore make sure that these function correctly at all times. Have the headlamp setting checked regularly. Other bulbs There are bulbs other than the xenon bulbs that you cannot replace. Replace only the bulbs listed (Y page 126). Have the bulbs that you cannot replace yourself changed at a qualified specialist workshop. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose. In particular, work relevant to safety or on safety-related systems must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. If you require assistance changing bulbs, consult a qualified specialist workshop. Do not touch the glass tube of new bulbs with your bare hands. Even minor contamination can burn into the glass surface and reduce the service life of the bulbs. Always use a lintfree cloth or only touch the base of the bulb when fitting. Only use bulbs of the correct type. If the new bulb still does not light up, consult a qualified specialist workshop. Bulbs and lamps are an important aspect of vehicle safety. You must therefore make sure that these function correctly at all times. Have the headlamp setting checked regularly. G WARNING Bulbs and lights can become very hot. For this reason, allow them to cool down before changing them. Otherwise, you could burn yourself when you touch them. Keep bulbs out of the reach of children. Otherwise, they could damage them, for example, and injure themselves. Z Lights and windscreen wipers Manual interior lighting control 125 126 Changing bulbs Never use a bulb which has been dropped. Such a bulb may explode and injure you. Halogen bulbs are pressurised and could explode when you change them, especially if they are very hot. You should therefore wear eye protection and gloves when you are changing them. Lights and windscreen wipers Overview of bulb replacement – bulbs You can replace the following bulbs. The details for the bulb type can be found in the legend. Tail lamps : Reversing lamp: P 21 W ; Brake lamp: P 21 W = Brake lamp/side lamp: P 21 W Changing the front bulbs Dipped-beam headlamps (halogen headlamps) Halogen headlamps : Side lamp/parking lamp: W 5 W ; Main-beam headlamp: H7 55 W = Dipped-beam headlamp: H7 55 W Switch off the lights. Open the bonnet. X Turn housing cover : anti-clockwise and pull it out. X Turn bulb holder ; anti-clockwise and pull it out. X Take the bulb out of bulb holder ;. X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder ;. X Insert bulb holder ; into the lamp and turn it clockwise. X Align housing cover : and turn it clockwise until it engages. X X Bi-xenon headlamps : Cornering lamp: H7 55 W Changing bulbs Main-beam headlamps (halogen headlamps) 127 Take the bulb out of bulb holder ;. X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder ;. X Insert bulb holder ;. X Align housing cover : and turn it clockwise until it engages. X Switch off the lights. Open the bonnet. X Turn housing cover : anti-clockwise and pull it out. X Turn bulb holder ; anti-clockwise and pull it out. X Take the bulb out of bulb holder ;. X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder ;. X Insert bulb holder ; into the lamp and turn it clockwise. X Align housing cover : and turn it clockwise until it engages. X X Side lamps/parking lamps (halogen headlamps) Switch off the lights. Open the bonnet. X Turn housing cover : anti-clockwise and pull it out. X Turn bulb holder ; anti-clockwise and pull it out. X Take the bulb out of bulb holder ;. X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder ;. X Insert bulb holder ; into the lamp and turn it clockwise. X Align housing cover : and turn it clockwise until it engages. X X Changing the rear bulbs Opening and closing the side trim panels Switch off the lights. X Open the bonnet. X Turn housing cover : anti-clockwise and pull it out. X Pull out bulb holder ;. X You must open the side trim panel in the luggage compartment/boot and remove the first-aid kit before you can change the bulbs in the tail lamps. Z Lights and windscreen wipers Cornering light function (Intelligent Light System) Changing bulbs 128 Saloon Lights and windscreen wipers Right-hand side trim panel Left-hand side trim panel To open: turn release knob : in the direction of the arrow and remove side trim panel ;. X To close: insert side trim panel ; and press it down firmly until it snaps into place. X Tail lamps Switch off the lights. Open the boot or luggage compartment. X Open the side trim panel (Y page 127). X X Right-hand side trim panel To open: turn rotary catch : 90° in the direction of the arrow and remove side trim panel ;. X To close: insert side trim panel ; and turn release knob : 90° in the opposite direction to the arrow. X Estate Saloon Left-hand side trim panel Estate Windscreen wipers Remove the tail lamp connector X Simultaneously press retaining lugs : in the direction of the arrow and slightly pull out the bulb holder with the bulbs. X Remove the connector for LED light functions from the top of the bulb holder. X Pull the bulb holder out with the bulbs. X 129 Reinsert the connector for LED light functions in the bulb holder. X Insert the bulb holder again and lock it in place. X Insert the tail lamp connector. X Close the side trim panel (Y page 127). X Windscreen wipers G WARNING Saloon : reversing lamp ; brake lamp = Side lamp/brake lamp The windscreen will not longer be wiped properly if the wiper blades are worn. This could prevent you from observing the traffic conditions, thereby causing an accident. Replace the wiper blades twice a year, ideally in spring and autumn. ! Do not operate the windscreen wipers when the windscreen is dry, as this could damage the wiper blades. Moreover, dust that has collected on the windscreen can scratch the glass if wiping takes place when the windscreen is dry. ! If the windscreen wipers leave smears on the windscreen after the vehicle has been washed in an automatic car wash, this may be due to wax or other residue. Clean the windscreen with washer fluid after an automatic car wash. Estate : reversing lamp ; brake lamp = Side lamp/brake lamp Press the respective bulb :, ; or = back and turn it anti-clockwise to remove it from the bulb holder. X Insert the new bulb into the bulb holder and turn it clockwise. X Z Lights and windscreen wipers Switching the windscreen wipers on/ off Windscreen wipers 130 Lights and windscreen wipers Switching the rear window wiper on/ off Combination switch 1 $ Windscreen wipers off 2 Ä Intermittent wipe, low10 3 Å Intermittent wipe, high11 Combination switch : è Switch 4 ° Continuous wipe, slow 2 ô To wipe with washer fluid 5 ¯ Continuous wipe, fast 3 I To switch on intermittent wiping B í Single wipe/ î To wipe the 4 0 To switch off intermittent wiping windscreen using washer fluid Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock. X Turn the combination switch to the corresponding position. X ! Intermittent wiping with rain sensor: due to optical influences and the windscreen becoming dirty in dry weather conditions, the windscreen wipers may be activated inadvertently. This could damage the windscreen wiper blades or scratch the windscreen. For this reason, you should always switch off the windscreen wipers in dry weather. In the Ä or Å position, the appropriate wiping frequency is set automatically according to the intensity of the rain. In the Å position, the rain sensor is more sensitive than in the Ä position, causing the windscreen wiper to wipe more frequently. 10 Rain 11 Rain sensor set to low sensitivity. sensor set to high sensitivity. 5 ô To wipe with washer fluid Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock. X Turn switch : on the combination switch to the corresponding position. When the rear window wiper is switched on, the icon appears in the instrument cluster. X Replacing the wiper blades Important safety notes G WARNING The wiper arms could start moving and cause an injury if you leave the windscreen wipers switched on. Remove the key from the ignition lock before replacing the wiper blades. ! To avoid damaging the windscreen wiper blades, make sure that you touch only the wiper arm of the windscreen wiper. Windscreen wipers wiper arm has been folded away from the windscreen. Never fold a windscreen wiper arm without a wiper blade back onto the windscreen/ rear window. Hold the windscreen wiper arm firmly when you change the wiper blade. If you release the windscreen wiper arm without a wiper blade and it falls onto the windscreen, the windscreen may be damaged by the force of the impact. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the wiper blades replaced by a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. at a MercedesBenz Service Centre. Make sure that the wiper blade slides fully onto the retaining pin on the wiper arm. X Turn the wiper blade parallel to the wiper arm. X Fold the wiper arm back onto the windscreen. Replacing the rear window wiper blade G WARNING The wiper arm could be set in motion and injure you if the windscreen wipers are switched on. Remove the key from the ignition lock before replacing the wiper blade. Removing the wiper blade Replacing the windscreen wiper blades Removing the wiper blades X Remove the key from the ignition lock or turn the key to position 0 (KEYLESS-GO). X Fold the wiper arm away from the windscreen until it engages. X Set the wiper blade at right angles to the wiper arm. Remove the key from the ignition lock. Fold wiper arm : away from the rear window until it engages. X Position wiper blade ; at a right angle to wiper arm :. X Hold wiper arm : and press wiper blade ; in the direction of the arrow until it releases. X Remove wiper blade ;. X X X Remove the wiper blade from the retaining pin on the wiper arm in the direction of the arrow. Fitting the wiper blades X Push the new wiper blade onto the retaining pin on the wiper arm in the opposite direction to the arrow. Fitting the wiper blade X Place new wiper blade ; onto wiper arm :. X Hold wiper arm : and press wiper blade ; in the opposite direction to the arrow until it engages. Z Lights and windscreen wipers ! Never open the bonnet if a windscreen 131 Windscreen wipers 132 Make sure that wiper blade ; is seated correctly. X Position wiper blade ; parallel to wiper arm :. X Fold wiper arm : back onto the rear window. X Problems with the windscreen wipers Lights and windscreen wipers The windscreen wipers are obstructed Leaves or snow, for example, may be obstructing the windscreen wiper movement. The wiper motor has been deactivated. X For safety reasons, you should remove the key from the ignition lock. or X Switch off the engine using the Start/Stop button and open the driver's door. X Remove the cause of the obstruction. X Switch the windscreen wipers back on. The windscreen wipers are inoperative The windscreen wiper drive is malfunctioning. X Select another wiper speed on the combination switch. X Have the windscreen wipers checked at a qualified specialist workshop. The spray nozzles are misaligned The windscreen washer fluid from the spray nozzles no longer hits the centre of the windscreen. The spray nozzles are misaligned. X Have the spray nozzles adjusted at a qualified specialist workshop. 133 134 134 137 147 Climate control Useful information ............................ Overview of climate control systems ................................................... Operating the climate control system ..................................................... Adjusting the air vents ..................... 134 Overview of climate control systems Useful information i This Owner's Manual describes all models and all standard and optional equipment available to your vehicle at the time of publication of the Owner's Manual. Countryspecific deviations are possible. Please note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all features described. This also applies to safety-relevant systems and functions. i Please read the information on qualified Climate control specialist workshops (Y page 28). pollen. A clogged filter reduces the amount of air supplied to the vehicle interior. For this reason, you should always observe the interval for replacing the filter, which is specified in the Service Booklet. As it depends on environmental conditions, e.g. heavy air pollution, the interval may be shorter than stated in the Service Booklet. i It is possible that the residual heat func- tion may be activated automatically an hour after the key is removed. The vehicle is then ventilated for 30 minutes to dry the airconditioning system. Overview of climate control systems Important safety notes G WARNING Observe the settings recommended on the following pages. Otherwise, the windows could mist up. This may obstruct your view of the traffic situation and, as a result, you may cause an accident. THERMATIC/THERMOTRONIC automatic climate control controls the temperature and the humidity of the vehicle interior and filters out undesirable substances from the air. THERMATIC/THERMOTRONIC automatic climate control is only operational when the engine is running12. Optimum operation is only achieved when you drive with the side windows and sliding sunroof/panorama sliding sunroof closed. i Ventilate the vehicle for a brief period during warm weather, e.g. using the convenience opening feature (Y page 97). This will speed up the cooling process and the desired vehicle interior temperature will be reached more quickly. i The integrated filter can filter out most particles of dust and completely filters out 12 THERMOTRONIC automatic climate control: the residual heat function can only be activated/deactivated when the ignition is switched off. Overview of climate control systems 135 Climate control Control panel for THERMATIC automatic climate control (2-zone) : Sets the temperature, left (Y page 138) ; Demists the windscreen (Y page 140) = Activates/deactivates the ZONE function (Y page 140) ? Activates/deactivates cooling with air dehumidification (Y page 137) A Switches the rear window heating on/off (Y page 141) B Sets the temperature, right (Y page 138) C Activates/deactivates air-recirculation mode (Y page 141) D Sets the air distribution (Y page 139) E Increases the airflow (Y page 139) F Reduces the airflow (Y page 139) G Switches climate control on/off (Y page 137) H Sets climate control to automatic mode (Y page 138) Notes on using THERMATIC automatic climate control The following contains notes and recommendations on optimum use of THERMATIC automatic climate control. RActivate climate control using the à and ¿ buttons. The indicator lamps in the à and ¿ buttons light up. RSet the temperature to 22 †. ROnly use the demisting function briefly until the windscreen is clear again. ROnly use air-recirculation mode briefly, e.g. if there are unpleasant outside odours or when in a tunnel. The windows could otherwise mist up, as in air-recirculation mode, no fresh air is drawn into the vehicle. RUse the ZONE function to adopt the temperature settings on the driver's side for the front-passenger side as well. The indicator lamp in the á button goes out. Z 136 Overview of climate control systems Climate control Control panel for THERMOTRONIC automatic climate control (3-zone) Front control panel : Sets the temperature, left (Y page 138) ; Demists the windscreen (Y page 140) = Activates/deactivates the residual heat function (Y page 142) ? Activates/deactivates cooling with air dehumidification (Y page 137) A Switches the rear window heating on/off (Y page 141) B Sets the temperature, right (Y page 138) C Activates/deactivates the ZONE function (Y page 140) D Switches climate control on/off (Y page 137) E Sets the air distribution (Y page 139) F Increases the airflow (Y page 139) G Reduces the airflow (Y page 139) H Sets the climate mode (Y page 138) I Activates/deactivates air-recirculation mode (Y page 141) J Sets climate control to automatic mode (Y page 138) Rear control panel K Increases the airflow (Y page 139) L Reduces the airflow (Y page 139) M Display N Reduces the temperature (Y page 138) O Increases the temperature (Y page 138) Operating the climate control system Below, you can find a number of notes and recommendations to help you use THERMOTRONIC automatic climate control optimally. RSwitch on climate control using the à and ¿ buttons. The indicator lamps in the à and ¿ buttons light up. RIn automatic mode, you can also use the ñ button to set a climate mode (FOCUS/MEDIUM/DIFFUSE). The MEDIUM level is recommended. RSet the temperature to 22 †. ROnly use the demisting function briefly until the windscreen is clear again. ROnly use air-recirculation mode briefly, e.g. if there are unpleasant outside odours or when in a tunnel. The windows could otherwise mist up, as in air-recirculation mode, no fresh air is drawn into the vehicle. RUse the ZONE function to adopt the temperature settings on the driver's side for the front-passenger side and the rear compartment as well. The indicator lamp in the á button goes out. RUse the residual heat function if you want to heat or ventilate the vehicle interior when the ignition is switched off. The residual heat function can only be activated or deactivated with the ignition switched off. Operating the climate control system Switching climate control on/off Important information i When climate control is switched off, the air supply and air circulation are also switched off. Only select this setting briefly. Otherwise, the windows may mist up. i Switch on climate control primarily using the à button (Y page 138). Activating/deactivating Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. X To switch on: press the à button. The indicator lamp in the à button lights up. Airflow and air distribution are set to automatic mode. or X Press button ^. The indicator lamp in the ^ button goes out. The previously selected settings come into effect again. X To switch off: press the ^ button. The indicator lamp in the ^ button lights up. X Activating/deactivating the cooling with air dehumidification function Important information The cooling with air dehumidification function is only available when the engine is running. The air inside the vehicle is cooled and dehumidified according to the temperature selected. G WARNING If the "cooling with air dehumidification" function is deactivated, the air inside the vehicle will not be cooled (during warm weather) or dehumidified. The windows could mist up more quickly. This may prevent you from observing the traffic conditions, thereby causing an accident. Condensation may drip from the underside of the vehicle when THERMOTRONIC is in cooling mode. This is normal and not a sign that there is a malfunction. i The cooling with air dehumidification function uses refrigerant R134a. This coolant does not contain chlorofluorocarbons, and therefore does not damage the ozone layer. Z Climate control Notes on using THERMOTRONIC automatic climate control 137 Operating the climate control system 138 Activating/deactivating X To activate: press the ¿ button. The indicator lamp in the ¿ button lights up. X To switch off: press the ¿ button. The indicator lamp in the ¿ button goes out. The cooling with air dehumidification function has a delayed switch-off feature. or Problems with the cooling with air dehumidification function This function is only available with the THERMOTRONIC automatic climate control. The climate control settings are especially effective at high temperatures. You can select the following climate control settings in automatic mode: Climate control X When you press the ¿ button, the indicator lamp in the button flashes three times or remains off. You can no longer switch on the cooling with air dehumidification function. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Setting climate control to automatic mode In automatic mode, the set temperature is maintained automatically at a constant level. The system automatically regulates the temperature of the dispensed air, the airflow and the air distribution. Automatic mode will achieve optimal operation if cooling with air dehumidification is also activated. If desired, cooling with air dehumidification can be deactivated. X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. X Set the desired temperature. X To activate: press the à button. The indicator lamp in the à button lights up. Automatic air distribution and airflow are activated. i THERMOTRONIC automatic climate con- trol: when automatic mode is activated, you can select a climate mode setting (Y page 138). X To switch off: press the _ button. Press the K or I button. The indicator lamp in the à button goes out. Automatic air distribution and airflow are deactivated. Setting the climate mode FOCUS high airflow that is set slightly cooler MEDIUM medium airflow, standard setting DIFFUSE low airflow that is set slightly warmer and with a lower rate of airflow Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. X Press the à button. X Press the ñ button repeatedly until the desired climate mode appears in the display. X Setting the temperature THERMATIC automatic climate control Different temperatures can be set for the driver's and front-passenger sides. Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. X To increase/reduce: turn controls : and B clockwise or anti-clockwise (Y page 135). Only change the temperature setting in small increments. Start at 22 †. X Operating the climate control system THERMOTRONIC automatic climate control zones You can select different temperature settings for the driver's and front-passenger sides as well as for the rear compartment. Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. X To increase/reduce the temperature in the front: turn controls : and B clockwise or anti-clockwise (Y page 136). Only change the temperature setting in small increments. Start at 22 †. X To increase/reduce the temperature in the rear compartment using the front control panel: press the á button. The indicator lamp in the á button goes out. X Turn control : clockwise or anti-clockwise (Y page 136). Only change the temperature setting in small increments. Start at 22 †. X To increase/reduce the temperature in the rear compartment using the rear control panel: press the r or s button on the rear control panel. Only change the temperature setting in small increments. Start at 22 †. X i If you leave the vehicle parked for longer than 30 minutes, the temperature setting for the rear compartment then switches back to 22 †. Setting the air distribution Air distribution settings P Directs the airflow through the centre and side air vents. O Directs the airflow through the footwell air vents. S Directs the airflow through the centre and side air vents and the footwell air vents. ¯ Directs the airflow through the demister vents. b Directs the airflow through the centre and side air vents as well as the demister vents. a Directs the airflow through the footwell and demister vents. _ Directs the airflow through the demister, centre and side air vents as well as the footwell air vents. i Regardless of the air distribution setting, airflow is always directed through the side air vents. The side air vents can only be closed when the controls on the side air vents are turned downwards. Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. X Press the _ button repeatedly until the desired symbol appears in the display. The indicator lamp in the à button goes out. Automatic control is deactivated and the air distribution is controlled according to the selected setting. X Setting the airflow Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. X To increase/reduce: press the K or I button. i You can use THERMOTRONIC automatic climate control to set the airflow in the rear compartment separately. X Z Climate control THERMOTRONIC automatic climate control 139 Operating the climate control system 140 The climate control system switches to the following functions: Switching the ZONE function on/off Climate control X To switch on: press the á button. The indicator lamp in the á button lights up. THERMATIC automatic climate control: the temperature setting for the driver's side is not adopted for the front-passenger side. THERMOTRONIC automatic climate control: the temperature setting for the driver's side is not adopted for the front-passenger side and the rear compartment. When the buttons for temperature, airflow or air distribution are activated, the temperature setting for the driver's side is not adopted for the other climate control zones. X To switch off: press the á button. The indicator lamp in the á button goes out. THERMATIC automatic climate control: the temperature setting for the driver's side is adopted for the front-passenger side. THERMOTRONIC automatic climate control: the temperature setting for the driver's side is adopted for the front-passenger side and the rear compartment. Demisting the windscreen You can use this function to defrost the windscreen or to demist the inside of the windscreen and the side windows. i You should only select the demisting function until the windscreen is clear again. Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. X To activate: press the ¬ button. The indicator lamp in the ¬ button lights up. X 13 Depending on the outside temperature. Rcooling with air dehumidification on airflow13 Rhigh temperature13 Rair distribution to the windscreen and front side windows Rair-recirculation mode off Rhigh X To switch off: press the ¬ button. The indicator lamp in the ¬ button goes out. The previously selected settings come into effect again. The cooling with air dehumidification function remains on. Air-recirculation mode remains deactivated. or X Press the à button. The indicator lamp in the ¬ button goes out. Airflow and air distribution are set to automatic mode. or X Turn temperature control : or B clockwise or anti-clockwise (Y page 135), (Y page 136). or X Press the K or I button. Demisting the windows Windows misted up on the inside Activate the ¿ cooling with air dehumidification function. X Activate automatic mode Ã. X If the windows continue to mist up, activate the demisting function (Y page 140). X i You should only select this setting until the windscreen is clear again. Operating the climate control system Activate the windscreen wipers. Press the _ button repeatedly until the O or P symbol appears in the display. i You should only select this setting until the windscreen is clear again. X X Rear window heating Activating/deactivating G WARNING Clear all windows of ice or snow before setting off. Otherwise, impaired visibility could endanger you and others. The rear window heating has a high current draw. You should therefore switch it off as soon as the window is clear. as it only switches off automatically after several minutes. If the battery voltage is too low, the rear window heating may switch off. X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. X Press the ¤ button. The indicator lamp in the ¤ button lights up or goes out. Problems with the rear window heating The rear window heating has switched off prematurely or cannot be activated. X Switch off any consumers that are not required, e.g. reading lamps or interior lighting. When the battery is sufficiently charged, the rear window heating is activated again automatically. 14 THERMOTRONIC Activating/deactivating air-recirculation mode You can deactivate the flow of fresh air if unpleasant odours are entering the vehicle from outside. The air already inside the vehicle will then be recirculated. The operation of air-recirculation mode is the same for all control panels. G WARNING Only switch over to air-recirculation mode briefly at low outside temperatures. Otherwise, the windows could mist up, thus impairing visibility and endangering yourself and others. This may prevent you from observing the traffic conditions, thereby causing an accident. Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. X To activate: press the g button. The indicator lamp in the g button lights up. X i In the event of high pollution levels14 or at high outside temperatures, air-recirculation mode is automatically activated. When air-recirculation mode is activated automatically, the indicator lamp in the g button is not lit. Outside air is added after about 30 minutes. X To switch off: press the g button. The indicator lamp in the g button goes out. automatic climate control only. Z Climate control Windows misted up on the outside 141 Operating the climate control system 142 i Air-recirculation mode deactivates auto- sliding sunroof move back to their original position. The indicator lamp in the g button goes out. Air-recirculation mode is deactivated. matically: approximately five minutes at outside temperatures below approximately 5† Rafter approximately five minutes if cooling with air dehumidification is deactivated Rafter approximately 30 minutes at outside temperatures above approximately 5† Climate control Rafter Convenience opening/closing using the air-recirculation button G WARNING Make sure that nobody can become trapped between the side window and the door frame as the side windows are opened and closed. Make sure that all objects and body parts are clear of the side windows when they are being opened or closed. You or the objects could be drawn in or become trapped between the side window and the door frame as the window moves. If there is a risk of entrapment, operate the W switch to move the side window in the opposite direction. Make sure that nobody can become trapped as the sliding sunroof/panorama sliding sunroof is opened and closed. If there is a risk of entrapment, operate the 3 switch to move the sliding sunroof/panorama sliding sunroof in the opposite direction. X X Convenience closing feature: press and hold the g button until the side windows and the sliding sunroof/panorama sliding sunroof are closed. The indicator lamp in the g button lights up. Air-recirculation mode is activated. Convenience opening feature: press and hold the g button until the side windows and the sliding sunroof/panorama sliding sunroof are opened. The side windows and the sliding sunroof/panorama i If you open the side windows or the sliding sunroof/panorama sliding sunroof manually after closing them with the convenience closing feature, they will remain in this position when opened using the convenience opening feature. Activating/deactivating the residual heat function The residual heat function is only available with THERMOTRONIC automatic climate control. It is possible to make use of the residual heat of the engine to continue heating the stationary vehicle for up to 30 minutes after the engine has been switched off. The heating time depends on the temperature that has been set. i The blower will run at a low speed regardless of the airflow setting. i If you activate the residual heat function at high temperatures, only the ventilation will be activated. The blower runs at medium speed. Turn the key to position 0 in the ignition lock or remove it. X To activate: press the Ì button. The indicator lamp in the Ì button lights up. X X To switch off: press the Ì button. The indicator lamp in the Ì button goes out. i Residual heat is deactivated automatically: Rafter about 30 minutes the ignition is switched on Rif the battery voltage drops Rif the coolant temperature is too low Rwhen Operating the climate control system Important safety notes G WARNING Exhaust fumes are produced when the auxiliary heating is in operation. Inhaling these exhaust fumes can be poisonous. You should therefore switch off the auxiliary heating in confined spaces without an extraction system, e.g. a garage. G WARNING When operating the auxiliary heating, parts of the vehicle may become very hot, and highly inflammable material such as fuels could be ignited. Operating the auxiliary heating is thus prohibited at filling stations or when your vehicle is being refuelled. You must therefore switch off the auxiliary heating at filling stations. ! Operating the auxiliary heating/ventila- tion draws on the vehicle battery. After you have heated or ventilated the vehicle a maximum of two times, drive for a longer distance. You cannot use the auxiliary ventilation to cool the vehicle interior to a temperature lower than the outside temperature. Before switching on Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. X Set the temperature. X The auxiliary heating/ventilation can be activated even when the climate control is being controlled manually. Optimum comfort can be attained when the system is set to automatic mode. Set the temperature to 22 †. The auxiliary heating/ventilation can be activated or deactivated using the remote control or the button on the centre console. The on-board computer can be used to specify up to three departure times, one of which may be preselected (Y page 242). Switching the auxiliary heating/ventilation on/off using the centre console button i Switch on the auxiliary heating regularly, e.g. for about ten minutes every month. The auxiliary heating heats the air in the vehicle interior to the set temperature without using the heat of the running engine. The auxiliary heating is operated directly using the vehicle's fuel. For this reason, the tank content must be at least at reserve fuel level to ensure that the auxiliary heating functions. The auxiliary heating/ventilation automatically adjusts to changes in temperature and weather conditions. For this reason, the auxiliary heating could switch from ventilation mode to heating mode or from heating mode to ventilation mode. The auxiliary heating switches off automatically after 50 minutes. This time limit can be altered. To do this, visit a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Button on the centre console The colours of the indicator lamps on the button have the following meanings: Blue Auxiliary ventilation switched on Red Auxiliary heating switched on Yellow Departure time preselected (Y page 242) Z Climate control Auxiliary heating 143 144 Operating the climate control system Switching on auxiliary heating/ventilation X Press button :. The red or blue indicator lamp in button : lights up. Climate control Switching off auxiliary heating/ventilation X Press button :. The red or blue indicator lamp in button : goes out. Auxiliary heating remote control : Display Switching the auxiliary heating/ventilation on/off using the remote control ; . To check the status/set the depar- Your vehicle comes with one remote control. You may use two additional remote controls for your vehicle. For further information, consult a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. The remote control has a maximum range of approximately 300 metres. This range is reduced by: = ^ To switch off the auxiliary heating/ Rsources of radio interference objects between the remote control and the vehicle Rthe remote control being in an unfavourable position in relation to the vehicle Rtransmitting from an enclosed space Rsolid i The optimum range can be achieved if you hold the remote control vertically, pointing upwards when you press one of the buttons. i A battery symbol appears in the display when the battery in the remote control is low. Replace the remote control battery (Y page 145). ture time ventilation ? u To switch on the auxiliary heating/ ventilation A , To check the status/set the depar- ture time Switching on auxiliary heating/ventilation X Press the u button. ON is shown in the remote control display. Switching off auxiliary heating/ventilation X Press the ^ button. OFF is shown in the remote control display. Checking the status of the auxiliary heating/ventilation X Press the , or . button. The following messages can appear in the display: Display Meaning The auxiliary heating/ ventilation is switched off. Operating the climate control system The auxiliary heating is switched on. The number in the display shows the remaining time (in minutes) for the auxiliary heating. A departure time has been activated. The departure time appears in the display. A departure time has been activated. The auxiliary ventilation is currently selected. The departure time appears in the display. A departure time has been activated. The auxiliary heating is currently selected. The departure time appears in the display. Setting a departure time X Press the , or . button repeatedly until the time to be changed appears in the display. X Press the u and ^ buttons simultaneously. The Î symbol in the remote control display flashes. X Press the , or . button to set the desired departure time. i The longer you press the , or . button, the faster the time changes. X Press the u and ^ buttons simultaneously. The new departure time is stored. Activating the set departure time X Press the , or . button repeatedly until the desired departure time appears in the display. X Press the u button. The Í symbol and the departure time appear in the display. Deactivating a set departure time X Press the , or . button. The status of the auxiliary heating is shown in the display. X Press the . button. The first departure time stored appears in the display. X Press the ^ button. The display message OFF appears in the display. Replacing the remote control battery One 6 V pin battery, type 2CR11108 is required. Prise apart the side arms of battery cover ; and pull off battery cover ;. X Remove old battery :. X Insert the new battery. Observe the polarity signs on the back of the remote control when doing so. X Z Climate control The auxiliary ventilation is switched on. The number in the display shows the remaining time (in minutes) for the auxiliary ventilation. 145 Operating the climate control system 146 Slide battery cover ; back onto the remote control. X Use the remote control to check the vehicle's auxiliary heating functions. Climate control X Adjusting the air vents 147 Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions FAIL The starter battery is not charged sufficiently or the system is faulty. X Charge the starter battery. X Make another attempt to switch on the auxiliary heating using the remote control. X Have the auxiliary heating checked at a qualified specialist workshop. $ The signal transmission between the transmitter and the vehicle is faulty. X Change your position in relation to the vehicle, moving closer if necessary. X Make another attempt to switch the auxiliary heating on or off using the remote control. FAIL © FAIL There is not enough fuel in the fuel tank, or the auxiliary heating is faulty. X Refuel at the nearest filling station. X Make another attempt to switch on the auxiliary heating using the remote control. X Have the auxiliary heating checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Important safety notes In order to ensure the direct flow of fresh air through the air vents into the vehicle interior, please observe the following notes: G WARNING Rkeep Adjusting the air vents Very hot or very cold air can flow from the air vents. This could cause burns or frostbite to bare skin in the immediate vicinity of the vents. Keep bare skin away from these air outlets. If necessary, direct the airflow away to a different area of the vehicle interior. the air inlet between the windscreen and the bonnet free of blockages, such as ice, snow or leaves Rnever cover the vents or air inlets in the vehicle interior. i For virtually draught-free ventilation, adjust the sliders of the air vents to the centre position. Z Climate control Problems with the auxiliary heating/ventilation Adjusting the air vents 148 Setting the centre air vents flow depends on the airflow and air distribution settings. ! Close the air vent when heating the vehi- cle. At high outside temperatures, open the air vent and activate the "cooling with air dehumidification" function. Otherwise, temperature-sensitive items stored in the glove compartment could be damaged. : Centre air vent, left Climate control ; Centre air vent, right = Centre vent thumbwheel, right ? Centre vent thumbwheel, left X To open/close: turn thumbwheels = and ? up or down. Setting the side air vents : Air vent thumbwheel ; Air vent X To open/close: turn thumbwheel : clockwise or anti-clockwise. Setting the rear-compartment air vents Setting the centre vents in the rear compartment X To open/close: turn thumbwheel = to the left or right. i Side window demister vent : is never completely shut, even if side air vent ; is shut. Setting the glove compartment air vent When automatic climate control is activated, the glove compartment can be ventilated, for instance to cool its contents. The level of air- : Rear-compartment air vent thumbwheel ; Rear-compartment air vent, right Adjusting the air vents 149 = Rear control panel for THERMOTRONIC automatic climate control ? Rear-compartment air vent, left To open/close: turn thumbwheel : up or down. Climate control X Z 150 Useful information ............................ Running-in notes ............................... Driving ............................................... Manual transmission ........................ Automatic transmission ................... Refuelling ........................................... Parking ............................................... Driving tips ........................................ Driving systems ................................ Towing a trailer ................................. 152 152 152 160 161 168 174 175 178 215 Driving and parking 151 152 Driving Useful information Driving and parking i This Owner's Manual describes all models and all standard and optional equipment available to your vehicle at the time of publication of the Owner's Manual. Countryspecific deviations are possible. Please note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all features described. This also applies to safety-relevant systems and functions. i Please read the information on qualified specialist workshops (Y page 28). Running-in notes Important safety notes G WARNING New brake pads/linings only have optimal braking performance after several hundred kilometres. Until then, compensate for this by applying greater force to the brake pedal. This also applies when brake pads/linings or brake discs have been changed. The first 1,500 km The more you look after the engine when it is new, the more satisfied you will be with its performance in the future. RTherefore, drive at varying speeds and engine speeds for the first 1,500 km. RAvoid heavy loads on the engine during this period, e.g. driving at full throttle. RChange gear in good time, at the latest when the rev counter needle is 2/3 of the way to the red area in the rev counter display. RDo not manually shift to a lower gear to brake the vehicle. Vehicles with automatic transmission: RIf possible, do not depress the accelerator pedal past the point of resistance (kickdown). ROnly select shift ranges 3, 2 or 1 when driving slowly, e.g. in mountainous terrain. After 1,500 km, you may gradually bring the vehicle up to full road and engine speeds. Additional running-in notes for AMG vehicles: Rdo not drive at speeds above 140 km/h for the first 1,500 km. allow the engine to reach a maximum engine speed of 4,500 rpm briefly. Ronly i You should also observe these notes on running in if the engine or parts of the drive train on your vehicle have been replaced. AMG vehicles with rear axle locking differential Your vehicle is fitted with a self-locking differential on the rear axle. Change the oil after a running-in period of 3,000 km to improve protection of the rear axle differential. This oil change extends the service life of the differential. Have the oil change carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. MercedesBenz recommends that you use a MercedesBenz Service Centre for this purpose. Driving Important safety notes G WARNING Do not place any objects in the driver's footwell. If you use a floormat or carpet in the driver's footwell, make sure that it is correctly secured and that there is sufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not place several floormats on top of one another. Loose objects or the floormats could otherwise get caught between the pedals if you Driving Key positions Key Driving and parking accelerate or brake suddenly. You will then not be able to brake, declutch or accelerate as intended. This could lead to accidents and injury. G WARNING Do not change down for additional engine braking on a slippery road surface. This could cause the drive wheels to lose their grip and the vehicle could skid. This could cause you to lose control of your vehicle and cause an accident. ! Warm up the engine quickly. Do not use the engine's full performance until it has reached operating temperature. Only set the automatic transmission to the respective drive positions when the vehicle is stationary. Where possible, avoid spinning the drive wheels when pulling away on slippery roads. Otherwise, you could damage the drive train. ! AMG vehicles: at low engine oil tempera- tures (below +20 †), the maximum engine speed is restricted in order to protect the engine. To protect the engine and maintain smooth engine operation, avoid driving at full throttle when the engine is cold. 153 g To remove the key 1 Power supply for some consumers, such as the windscreen wipers 2 Ignition (power supply for all consumers) and drive position 3 To start the engine If the key is at position 0 in the ignition lock for a longer period, it can no longer be turned in the ignition lock. The steering is then locked. To unlock it, remove the key and reinsert it into the ignition lock. The steering wheel is locked when the key is removed from the ignition lock. i If the key does not belong to the vehicle it can still be turned in the ignition lock. However, the ignition will not be switched on The engine cannot be started. KEYLESS-GO General notes Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO are equipped with a key featuring an integrated KEYLESS-GO function and a detachable Start/Stop button. The Start/Stop button must be inserted into the ignition lock and the key must be in the vehicle. Pressing the Start/Stop button several times in succession corresponds to the different key positions in the ignition lock. This is only the case if you are not depressing the brake pedal. Z Driving 154 Driving and parking If you depress the brake pedal and press the Start/Stop button, the engine starts immediately. X Position 0: if Start/Stop button : has not yet been pressed, this corresponds to the key being removed from the ignition. X Position 1: press Start/Stop button :. You can now activate the windscreen wipers, for example. X i If you then open the driver's door when in this position, the power supply is deactivated. X Position 2 (ignition): press Start/Stop button : twice. i If you press Start/Stop button : once when in this position and the driver's door is open, the power supply is deactivated again. Removing the Start/Stop button You can remove the Start/Stop button from the ignition lock and start the vehicle as normal using the key. i When you insert Start/Stop button : into ignition lock ;, the system needs approximately two seconds recognition time before you can use Start/Stop button :. Starting the engine Important safety notes G WARNING Never leave the engine running in enclosed spaces. The exhaust gases contain carbon monoxide. Inhaling exhaust fumes constitutes a health hazard and could lead to loss of consciousness or even death. ! Do not depress the accelerator pedal when starting the engine. i Vehicles with a petrol engine: the cat- alytic converter is preheated for up to 30 seconds after a cold start. The sound of the engine may change during this time. i You do not have to remove the Start/Stop button from the ignition lock when you leave the vehicle. Remove Start/Stop button : from ignition lock ;. Manual transmission Depress the brake pedal and keep it depressed. X Fully depress the clutch pedal. X Shift to neutral N. X i You can only start the engine when the clutch pedal is fully depressed. Automatic transmission X the key into the ignition lock. The key must be in the vehicle and the Start/Stop button must be inserted in the ignition lock. This mode for starting the engine operates independently of the ECO start/stop automatic engine start function. Shift the transmission to position P. The transmission position display in the multifunction display shows P. i You can also start the engine when the transmission is in position N. Starting procedure with the key i To start the engine using the key instead of KEYLESS-GO, pull the Start/Stop button out of the ignition lock. To start a petrol engine: turn the key to position 3 in the ignition lock (Y page 153) and release it as soon as the engine is running. X To start a diesel engine: turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 153). The % preglow indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. X When the % preglow indicator lamp goes out, turn the key to position 3 (Y page 153) and release it as soon as the engine is running. X i You can start the engine without preglow if the engine is warm. i Vehicles with automatic transmis- sion: you can also use the touch-start function. To do this, turn the key to position 3 (Y page 153) and release it immediately. The engine then starts automatically. Using KEYLESS-GO to start the engine G WARNING Your vehicle can be started using a valid KEYLESS-GO key. For this reason, children should never be left unsupervised in the vehicle. Always take the key with you when leaving the vehicle, even if you are only leaving it for a short time. Depress the brake pedal and keep it depressed. X To start a petrol engine: press the Start/ Stop button (Y page 153) once. The engine starts. X To start a diesel engine: press the Start/ Stop button (Y page 153) once. Preglow is activated and the engine starts. X Pulling away Manual transmission Depress the brake pedal and keep it depressed. X Fully depress the clutch pedal. X Shift to either first gear or reverse gear R. X Release the parking brake (Y page 175). X Release the brake pedal. X Slowly release the clutch pedal and gently depress the accelerator pedal. X ! Change gear in good time and avoid spin- ning the wheels. Otherwise, you could damage the vehicle. i Follow the shift recommendations in the multifunction display for an economical driving style (Y page 161). i The vehicle locks centrally once you have pulled away. The locking knobs in the doors drop down. You can open the doors from the inside at any time. You can also deactivate the automatic locking feature (Y page 242). i The Start/Stop button can be used to start the vehicle manually without inserting Z 155 Driving and parking Driving Driving Driving and parking 156 Automatic transmission Hill start assist will not function if: i It is only possible to shift the transmission Ryou from position P to the desired position if you depress the brake pedal. Only then is the selector lever lock released. Depress the brake pedal and keep it depressed. X Shift the transmission to position D or R. X Release the parking brake (Y page 175). X Release the brake pedal. X Carefully depress the accelerator pedal. X i The vehicle locks centrally once you have pulled away. The locking knobs in the doors drop down. You can open the doors from the inside at any time. You can also deactivate the automatic locking feature (Y page 242). i Upshifts take place at higher engine speeds after a cold start. This helps the catalytic converter to reach its operating temperature more quickly. Hill start assist Hill start assist helps you when pulling away forwards or in reverse on an uphill gradient. It holds the vehicle for a short time after you have removed your foot from the brake pedal. This gives you enough time to move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal and depress it before the vehicle begins to roll. G WARNING Never leave the vehicle when it is held by hill start assist. After approximately one second, hill start assist will no longer brake your vehicle and it could roll away. X Take your foot off the brake pedal. i Once you have taken your foot off the brake pedal, the vehicle is held for around one second. X Pull away. are pulling away on a level road or a downhill gradient. Ron vehicles with automatic transmission, the transmission is in position N. Rthe parking brake is applied. RESP® is malfunctioning. ECO start/stop function General notes The ECO start/stop function switches the engine off automatically if the vehicle stops moving. The engine starts automatically when you pull away again. The ECO start/stop function thereby helps you to reduce the fuel consumption and emissions of your vehicle. The ECO start/stop function is activated each time the engine is switched on. If all conditions for automatic engine switch-off are fulfilled (Y page 157), the ¤ ECO symbol is shown in green in the multifunction display. If not all conditions are fulfilled, the ¤ ECO symbol is shown in yellow. If the ECO start/stop function is deactivated (Y page 158), ECO symbol ¤ is not shown. G WARNING If the engine is switched off and the ECO symbol is shown in green in the multifunction display, the engine has been switched off automatically. All of the vehicle's systems remain active. If you open the door, unfasten your seat belt or remove your foot from the brake pedal, the engine will automatically start. The vehicle may begin moving. You could suffer serious or even fatal injury or cause an accident resulting in injury or death. Never leave the vehicle while the ECO symbol in the multifunction display is shown in green or yellow. Always secure the vehicle against rolling away before leaving it. Driving ! Always switch the ignition off and take the key with you when leaving the vehicle. 157 Vehicles with manual transmission The engine is only switched off if: Rthe outside temperature is within the range that is suitable for the system. engine is at normal operating temperature. Rthe set temperature for the vehicle interior has been reached. Rthe battery is sufficiently charged. Rthe system detects that the windscreen is not misted up when the air-conditioning system is switched on. Rthe bonnet is closed. Rthe vehicle is not being steered. Rthe driver's door is closed and the seat belt is fastened. Rthe i The engine can be switched off automat- ically a maximum of four times (first stop and three subsequent stops) in succession. The ¤ ECO symbol is shown in yellow in the multifunction display after the engine has been started automatically for the fourth time. The engine can only be switched off automatically again when the ¤ ECO symbol is shown in green in the multifunction display. i During automatic engine switch-off, the climate control system only operates at a reduced capacity. If you require full climate control capacity, the ECO start/stop function can be deactivated by pressing the ECO button (Y page 158). The ECO start/stop function switches off the engine automatically at low speeds. Brake the vehicle until it comes to a standstill. X Engage neutral N(Y page 161) (follow gearshift instruction : to engage neutral N, if necessary). X Release the clutch pedal. The engine is switched off automatically. X Vehicles with automatic transmission The ECO start/stop function switches the engine off automatically if the vehicle is braked to a standstill and the brake remains depressed with the transmission in position D or N. i You can still activate the HOLD function when the vehicle is stationary, even if the engine has been switched off automatically. It is then not necessary to continue applying the brakes during the automatic stop phase. When you depress the accelerator pedal, the engine starts automatically and the braking effect of the HOLD function is deactivated. Depress the accelerator pedal carefully, as the engine must be started first. Automatic engine start The engine is started automatically if: Rthe ECO start/stop function is deactivated by pressing the ECO button. Rthe vehicle starts to roll. Z Driving and parking Automatic engine switch-off Driving and parking 158 Driving Rthe Deactivating Rthe X brake system requires this. battery's charge status is too low. Rthe driver's seat belt is removed or the driver's door is opened. Rthe bonnet is opened. Ryou shift the transmission from position D to R. Ryou steer the vehicle. Vehicles with manual transmission The engine is started automatically if you: Rdepress Rdepress the clutch pedal the accelerator pedal ! Only engage gear when the clutch pedal is depressed. Vehicles with automatic transmission The engine is started automatically if you: Rrelease the brakes when in transmission position D or N, unless the HOLD function is activated or Rengage reverse gear R or Rdepress the accelerator pedal i Shifting the transmission to position P does not start the engine. Deactivating/activating the ECO start/ stop function Press button :. Indicator lamp ; on button : and the ¤ ECO symbol in the multifunction display go out. Activating X Press button :. Indicator lamp ; lights up. If all conditions are fulfilled, the ¤ ECO symbol appears in green in the multifunction display. If not all conditions are fulfilled, the ¤ ECO symbol is shown in yellow in the multifunction display. If this is the case, the ECO start/stop function is not available. If indicator lamp ; is off, the ECO start/stop function has been deactivated manually or as the result of a malfunction. The engine will then not be switched off automatically when the vehicle stops. i The ECO start/stop function is activated each time the engine is switched on. Driving 159 Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The engine does not start. The HOLD function or DISTRONIC PLUS is activated. X Deactivate the HOLD function (Y page 193) or DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 183). X Try to start the engine again. The engine does not start. The starter motor can be heard. RThere is a malfunction in the engine electronics. is a malfunction in the fuel supply. X Before attempting to start the engine again, turn the key in the ignition back to position 0 or press the Start/Stop button repeatedly until all indicator lamps in the instrument cluster go out. X Try to start the engine again (Y page 154). Avoid excessively long and frequent attempts to start the engine, as this will drain the battery. RThere If the engine does not start after several attempts: X Consult a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. The engine does not The fuel tank is empty. start. The starter motor X Refuel the vehicle. can be heard. The reserve fuel warning lamp is lit and the fuel gauge display shows 0. The engine does not start. You cannot hear the starter motor. The on-board voltage is too low because the battery is too weak or discharged. X Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 350). If the engine does not start despite attempts to jump-start it: X Consult a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. The starter motor was exposed to a thermal load that was too high. X Allow the starter motor to cool down for approximately two minutes. X Try to start the engine again. If the engine still does not start: X Consult a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Z Driving and parking Problems with the engine Driving and parking 160 Manual transmission Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Vehicles with a petrol engine: The engine is not running smoothly and is misfiring. There is a malfunction in the engine electronics or in a mechanical component of the engine management system. X Only depress the accelerator pedal slightly. X Have the cause rectified immediately at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Otherwise, non-combusted fuel may get into the catalytic converter and damage it. The coolant temperaThe coolant level is too low. The coolant is too hot and the engine ture display is showing is no longer being cooled sufficiently. more than 120 †. The X Stop as soon as possible and allow the engine and the coolant coolant warning lamp to cool down. may also be lit and a X Check the coolant level (Y page 324). Observe the warning warning tone may notes as you do so and top up the coolant if necessary. sound. If the coolant level is correct, the engine radiator fan may be faulty. The coolant is too hot and the engine is no longer being cooled sufficiently. X At coolant temperatures under 120 †, drive on to the nearest qualified specialist workshop, e.g. to a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. X Avoid heavy loads on the engine as you do so, e.g. driving on mountain roads and stop-start traffic. Manual transmission Important safety notes G WARNING The movement of the pedals must not be impaired in any way. Do not keep any objects in the driver's footwell. Make sure that floormats or carpets are correctly secured and that there is sufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not place several floormats on top of one another. to lose control of your vehicle and cause an accident. Gear lever G WARNING Do not change down for additional engine braking on a slippery road surface. This could cause the drive wheels to lose their grip and the vehicle could skid. This could cause you Gear lever ! Only engage gear when the clutch pedal is depressed. Automatic transmission you should always push the gear lever all the way to the right. Otherwise, you could shift unintentionally into 3rd or 4th gear and damage the transmission. If you shift down at too high a speed (transmission braking), this can cause the engine to overrev, leading to engine damage. Do not use the clutch bite point to keep the vehicle stationary on uphill gradients. There is otherwise a risk of damaging the clutch. Engaging reverse gear ! Only shift into reverse gear R when the vehicle is stationary. Otherwise, you could damage the transmission. i The ECO start/stop function is not available when reverse gear is engaged. For further information on the ECO start/ stop function, see (Y page 156). X ! On long and steep downhill gradients, especially if the vehicle is laden or towing a trailer, you must shift into gear 1, 2 or 3 in good time. This uses the engine's braking effect. This relieves the load on the brake system and prevents the brakes from overheating and wearing too quickly. Move the gear lever firmly to the left beyond the point of resistance and then forwards. Shift recommendation The gearshift recommendations assist you in adopting an economical driving style. The recommended gear is shown in the multifunction display. Shifting to neutral N X X X Depress the clutch pedal fully. Move the gear lever to position N:. Shift gear according to gearshift recommendation : shown in the multifunction display of the instrument cluster. Automatic transmission Neutral N with ECO start/stop function activated In neutral N, the engine is switched off if the vehicle speed is below a certain threshold and the clutch pedal is not depressed. For further information on the ECO start/stop function, see (Y page 156). Important safety notes G WARNING The movement of the pedals must not be impaired in any way. Do not keep any objects in the driver's footwell. Make sure that floormats or carpets are correctly secured and that there is sufficient clearance for the pedals. Z Driving and parking ! When shifting between 5th and 6th gear, 161 162 Automatic transmission Do not place several floormats on top of one another. Transmission position and drive program display Driving and parking G WARNING Do not change down for additional engine braking on a slippery road surface. This could cause the drive wheels to lose their grip and the vehicle could skid. This could cause you to lose control of your vehicle and cause an accident. i Bear in mind that the power transmission between the engine and the transmission is interrupted when the engine is switched off. Therefore, to prevent the vehicle from rolling away, shift the automatic transmission to position P and apply the parking brake when the engine is switched off and the vehicle is stationary. : Transmission position display ; Drive program display The current transmission position and drive program appear in the multifunction display. Transmission positions Selector lever B Park position Prevents the vehicle from rolling away when stopped. Do not shift the transmission into position P (Y page 174) unless the vehicle is stationary. The key can only be removed if the transmission is in position P. If the key is removed from the ignition lock, the selector lever is locked. C Reverse gear Only shift the transmission to R when the vehicle is stationary. Overview of transmission positions Selector lever (example) P Park position with selector lever lock R Reverse gear N Neutral D Drive Automatic transmission Neutral Do not shift the transmission to N while driving. Otherwise, the automatic transmission could be damaged. Releasing the brakes will allow you to move the vehicle freely, e.g. to push it or tow it. If ESP® is deactivated or faulty: only shift the transmission to position N if the vehicle is in danger of skidding, e.g. on icy roads. ! Rolling in neutral N can lead to damage to the transmission. 7 Drive The automatic transmission changes gear automatically. All forward gears are available. Changing gear The automatic transmission shifts to the individual gears automatically when it is in transmission position D. This automatic gearshifting behaviour is determined by: Ra shift range restriction, if selected Rthe selected drive program (Y page 163) Rthe position of the accelerator pedal Rthe road speed reduces load change reactions and is conducive to a sporty driving style. The sound generated by the double-clutch function depends on the drive program selected. Kickdown Use kickdown for maximum acceleration. Depress the accelerator pedal beyond the pressure point. The transmission shifts to a lower gear depending on the engine speed. X Ease off the accelerator pedal once the desired speed is reached. The automatic transmission shifts back up. X Trailer towing Drive in the middle of the engine speed range on uphill gradients. X Shift down to shift range 3 or 2(Y page 165) depending on the uphill or downhill gradient, even if cruise control or SPEEDTRONIC is activated. X Program selector button General notes The program selector button allows you to choose between different driving characteristics. Driving tips Accelerator pedal position Your style of driving influences how the automatic transmission shifts gear: Rlittle throttle: early upshifts throttle: late upshifts Rmore AMG vehicles Example: program selector button When shifting down, the double-clutch function is active regardless of the currently selected drive program. The double-clutch function Z Driving and parking A 163 Automatic transmission Driving and parking 164 E Economy Comfortable, economical driving S Sport Sporty driving style M Manual Manual gearshifting i For further information on the automatic drive program, see (Y page 164). X Press program selector button : repeatedly until the letter for the desired gearshift program appears in the multifunction display. i The automatic transmission switches to automatic drive program E each time the engine is started. X Turn drive program selector : until the desired drive program appears in the multifunction display in the speedometer. The drive program indicator on drive program selector : lights up in red. i The automatic transmission switches to automatic drive program C each time the engine is started. i RS cannot be selected during normal driving. For further information on RACE START (Y page 194). Steering wheel gearshift paddles AMG vehicles : Left-hand steering wheel gearshift paddle ; Right-hand steering wheel gearshift pad- dle Drive program selector with manual drive program C Controlled Efficiency Comfortable, economical driving S Sport Sporty driving style S+ SportPlus Extremely sporty driving style M Manual Manual gearshifting RS RACE START Optimal vehicle acceleration from a standstill i For further information on the automatic drive program, see (Y page 164). In the automatic drive program, you can restrict or derestrict the shift range by using the steering wheel gearshift paddles or the selector lever (Y page 165). In the manual drive program, you can change gear using the steering wheel gearshift paddles or the selector lever (Y page 166). i You can only change gear with the steer- ing wheel gearshift paddles when the transmission is in position D. Automatic drive program Drive program E (drive program C on AMG vehicles) is characterised by the following: Automatic transmission engine and automatic transmission settings. Roptimal fuel consumption resulting from the automatic transmission shifting up sooner. Rthe vehicle pulling away more gently in forward and reverse gears, unless the accelerator pedal is depressed fully. Rincreased sensitivity. This improves driving stability on slippery road surfaces, for example. Rthe automatic transmission shifting up sooner. This results in the vehicle being driven at lower engine speeds and the wheels being less likely to spin. Drive program S (or, in the case of AMG vehicles, drive programs S and S+) is characterised by the following: engine and automatic transmission settings Rthe vehicle pulling away in first gear Rthe automatic transmission shifting up later Ras a result of the later automatic transmission shift points, the fuel consumption possibly being higher 5 To use the braking effect of the engine on downhill gradients and for driving: Ron steep mountain roads mountainous terrain Rin arduous conditions Rin 4 To use the braking effect of the engine on extremely steep downhill gradients and on long downhill stretches Restricting the shift range X Press the selector lever to the left towards D–. or X Rsporty Pull the left-hand steering wheel gearshift paddle. The automatic transmission shifts down one gear and restricts the shift range to the relevant gear. i If the engine exceeds the maximum engine speed when shifting down, the automatic transmission protects against engine damage by not shifting down. i If the maximum engine speed for the shift range is reached and you continue to accelerate, the automatic transmission shifts up in order to prevent the engine from overrevving, even if the shift range is restricted. Shift ranges Introduction When the automatic transmission is in position D, it is possible to restrict or derestrict the shift range (Y page 165). The shift range selected is shown in the multifunction display. The automatic transmission shifts only as far as the selected gear. Shift range = To use the engine's braking effect Derestricting the shift range X Briefly press the selector lever to the right towards D+. or X Pull the right-hand steering wheel gearshift paddle. The shift range is derestricted. Z Driving and parking Rcomfort-oriented 165 Automatic transmission 166 Clearing the shift range restriction Driving and parking X Press and hold the selector lever towards D+ until D is shown once more in the multifunction display. or X Pull and hold the right-hand steering wheel gearshift paddle until D is shown again in the multifunction display. The automatic transmission shifts from the current shift range directly to D. Selecting the ideal shift range X Press the selector lever to the left towards D– and hold it in position. Upshifting X or X Pull the right-hand steering wheel gearshift paddle (Y page 164). The automatic transmission shifts up to the next gear. X Shift up a gear when the ^ upshift symbol appears in the display instead of M. Vehicles with AMG engines ! In manual gearshift program M, the auto- matic transmission does not shift up automatically even when the engine limiting speed for the current gear is reached. When the engine limiting speed is reached, the fuel supply is cut to prevent the engine from overrevving. You must make sure that the engine speed does not reach the red area of the rev counter. Otherwise, there is a risk of engine damage. or X Pull the left-hand steering wheel gearshift paddle and hold it in position. The automatic transmission shifts to the gear which allows optimum acceleration and deceleration. To do this, the automatic transmission shifts down one or more gears. X Manual drive program Switching on the manual drive program Manual drive program M can be selected using the program selector or the drive program selector button. You can change gear using the steering wheel gearshift paddles or the selector lever in manual drive program M if the transmission is in position D. X Press the program selector button (Y page 163) repeatedly until M appears in the multifunction display. X AMG vehicles: turn the drive program selector (Y page 164) until M appears in the multifunction display. The indicator M on the drive program selector lights up in red. Briefly press the selector lever to the right towards D+. Shift up a gear if the colour in the multifunction display in the speedometer changes to red and the UP display message is shown. Downshifting X Briefly press the selector lever to the left towards D–. or X Pull the left-hand steering wheel gearshift paddle (Y page 164). The automatic transmission shifts down to the next gear. i If you slow down or stop without shifting down, the automatic transmission automatically shifts down. i If you desire maximum acceleration, push the selector lever to the left or pull and hold the left-hand steering wheel gearshift paddle until the transmission shifts to the optimal gear for the current speed. Automatic transmission 167 Kickdown i Vehicles with an AMG engine: it is not Driving and parking possible to use kickdown in manual drive program M. You can also use kickdown for maximum acceleration in manual drive program M. X Depress the accelerator pedal beyond the pressure point. The transmission shifts to a lower gear depending on the engine speed. Switching off the manual drive program Vehicles without the dynamic handling package with sports mode: press the program selector button (Y page 163) repeatedly until E or S appears in the multifunction display. X Vehicles with the dynamic handling package with sports mode: press the program selector button (Y page 163). M is no longer shown in the multifunction display. X AMG vehicles: turn the drive program selector (Y page 164) until C, S or S+ appears in the multifunction display. X Z Refuelling 168 Problems with the transmission Driving and parking Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The transmission has The transmission is losing oil. problems shifting gear. X Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre, immediately. The acceleration ability The transmission is in emergency mode. is deteriorating. It is only possible to shift into second gear and reverse gear. The transmission no X Stop the vehicle. longer changes gear. X Shift the transmission to position P. X Switch off the engine. X Wait at least 10 seconds before restarting the engine. X Shift the transmission to position D or R. If D is selected, the transmission shifts into second gear; if R is selected, the transmission shifts into reverse gear. X Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre, immediately. Releasing the parking lock manually In the event of an electrical fault, it is possible to release the selector lever lock manually to move it out of position P, e.g. if you wish to tow the vehicle away. cloth) from the right-hand edge, pulling it up and out. X Press release button ; down and simultaneously move the selector lever out of position P. The selector lever can now be moved freely until it is returned to position P. Refuelling Important safety notes ! Do not use any sharp-edged objects to remove the selector lever gaiter from the centre console. This could damage the selector lever gaiter. X X Apply the parking brake. Prise out selector lever gaiter : with a flat, blunt object, (e.g. a screwdriver wrapped in G WARNING Fuel is highly flammable. Fire, naked flames and smoking are therefore prohibited when handling fuels. Switch off the engine and the auxiliary heating before refuelling. G WARNING Do not come into contact with fuels. It is hazardous to your health if your skin comes into direct contact with fuels or you breathe in fuel vapours. Refuelling G WARNING ! Use a filter when adding fuel from a fuel Do not use petrol to refuel vehicles with a diesel engine. Do not mix diesel with petrol. This would result in damage to the fuel system and engine, which could lead to a vehicle fire. i E10 fuel contains up to 10% bioethanol. diesel engine. Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with a petrol engine. Even small amounts of the wrong fuel result in damage to the fuel system and the engine. ! Do not switch on the ignition if you acci- dentally refuel with the wrong fuel. Otherwise, the fuel will enter the fuel lines. Notify a qualified specialist workshop and have the fuel tank and fuel lines drained completely. Petrol (EN 228, DIN 51626) Fuel grade ! Only refuel using unleaded premium- grade petrol with at least 95 RON/85 MON, which conforms to European standard EN 228 or an equivalent specification. ! Do not use the following: RE85 (petrol with 85% ethanol) RE100 (100% ethanol) RM15 (petrol with 15% methanol) RM85 (petrol with 85% methanol) RM100 (100% methanol) RPetrol with metallic additives RDiesel Do not mix fuels such as this with petrol and do not use any additives. Doing so may cause engine damage. This does not include additives for the removal and prevention of residue build-up. Petrol must only be mixed with additives recommended by Mercedes-Benz. More information about recommended additives can be obtained from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. can. The fuel lines and/or the diesel injection system could otherwise be blocked by particles from the fuel can. Your vehicle is E10 compatible. You can refuel your vehicle using E10 premiumgrade petrol. i If the recommended fuel is not available, but only as a temporary measure, you may also use regular unleaded petrol, 91 RON/82.5 MON. This may reduce engine performance and increase fuel consumption. Avoid driving at full throttle. In some countries, the fuel grade available may not be adequate and could cause deposits to build up. In consultation with a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre, this petrol may be mixed with the additive recommended by Mercedes-Benz (part no. A000989254510). You must observe the notes and mixing ratios specified on the container. For further information on "Fuel", see (Y page 380). AMG vehicles ! Only refuel using super-grade unleaded petrol with at least 98 RON/88 MON, which conforms to European standard EN 228 or equivalent. You can otherwise impair engine output or damage the engine. i If the recommended fuel is not available and only as a temporary measure, you may also use premium-grade unleaded petrol, 95 RON/85 MON. This may reduce engine performance and increase fuel consumption. Avoid driving at full throttle. ! In emergencies, and only if the recom- mended fuel is not available, you may also use standard unleaded petrol, 91 RON/ 82.5 MON. Z Driving and parking ! Do not use petrol to refuel vehicles with a 169 Driving and parking 170 Refuelling However, using this fuel results in considerably higher petrol consumption and significantly reduced engine performance. Avoid driving at full throttle. If no fuel other than regular petrol with 91 RON/82.5 MON or a lower grade is permanently available, you should have the vehicle adapted to run on this fuel in a qualified specialist workshop. MercedesBenz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose. C 350 BlueEFFICIENCY and C 350 4MATIC BlueEFFICIENCY ! Only refuel using unleaded, sulphur-free premium-grade petrol with at least 95 RON/85 MON, which conforms to European standard EN 228 or an equivalent specification. You can otherwise impair engine output or damage the emission control system. i In some countries, the available petrol may not be sufficiently low in sulphur. This fuel can temporarily produce unpleasant odours, especially on short journeys. As soon as sulphur-free fuel (sulphur content < 10 ppm) is used for refuelling, the odours are reduced. Diesel (EN 590) Fuel grade ! Vehicles without a diesel particle fil- ter: in countries where only diesel fuels with a higher sulphur content are available, the vehicle's oil change intervals are shorter. More information about intervals for changing the oil can be obtained from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. ! Only use fuel that complies with the EN 590 European standard. Fuel that does not comply with EN 590 can lead to increased wear, engine damage and damage to the exhaust system. Do not use the following: Rmarine diesel oil Rbio-diesel Rvegetable oil Rpetrol Rparaffin Rkerosene Do not mix these fuels with diesel fuels and do not use any special additives. Otherwise, this can lead to damage to the engine. This excludes flow improver; see "Low outside temperatures". Rheating ! Use a filter when adding fuel from a fuel can. Otherwise, the fuel lines and/or the diesel injection system could be blocked by particles from the fuel can. For further information on "Fuel", see (Y page 380). ! When refuelling, only use diesel fuel that Low outside temperatures ! Vehicles with diesel particle filters: in Diesel fuel with improved cold flow qualities is available during the winter months. In Europe, various climate-dependent low-temperature classes are defined in EN 590. Refuelling with diesel fuel which complies with the climatic specifications of standard EN 590 can help to prevent operating problems. At exceptionally low temperatures, it is possible that the flow properties of the fuel may be inadequate. This also applies to fuel that has conforms to the European standard EN 590 or is of equivalent quality. You can otherwise impair engine output or damage the engine. countries outside the EU, only use low sulphur Euro diesel with a sulphur content of under 50 ppm. Otherwise, the emission control system could be damaged. Refuelling 171 not been adapted to suit the climatic conditions, e.g. diesel fuel from warmer regions. i Further information about country-spe- Driving and parking cific fuel properties can be obtained from oil companies, e.g. at filling stations. Flow improver Flow improvers can be added to improve the cold resistance of diesel fuel. The effectiveness of a flow improver is not guaranteed with every diesel fuel. Correct dosage and thorough mixing are decisive factors in ensuring improvement in lowtemperature resistance. Avoid excessive dosage. Excessive dosage may actually decrease low-temperature resistance under certain circumstances. Follow the manufacturer's dosing instructions. Mix the additive with the diesel in good time, before the flow properties of the diesel become inadequate. Malfunctions can otherwise only be rectified by heating the entire fuel system, e.g. by parking the vehicle in a heated garage. Observe the information provided by the manufacturer when using a flow improver. Only use flow improvers that have been tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz. You can obtain further information from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Refuelling Fuel filler flap The fuel filler flap is unlocked or locked automatically when you open or close the vehicle with the key or using KEYLESS-GO. The position of the fuel filler cap is displayed in the instrument cluster 8. The arrow next to the filling pump indicates the side of the vehicle. Saloon (example) : To open the fuel filler flap ; To insert the fuel filler cap = Tyre pressure table ? Fuel type Opening X Switch off the engine. Remove the key from the ignition lock. KEYLESS-GO: open the driver's door. This switches the ignition to position 0, which corresponds to having removed the key. The driver's door can be closed again. X Press the fuel filler flap in the direction of arrow :. The fuel filler flap opens slightly. X Open the fuel filler flap. X Turn the fuel filler cap anti-clockwise and remove it. X Insert the fuel filler cap into the holder bracket on the inside of filler flap ;. X Completely insert the pump nozzle into the filler neck and refuel. X Only fill the tank until the pump nozzle switches off. X ! Overfilling the fuel tank could damage the fuel system. Closing Replace the fuel filler cap and turn it clockwise. The fuel filler cap audibly engages. X Close the fuel filler flap. X Z Refuelling 172 i Close the fuel filler flap before locking the Driving and parking vehicle. A locking pin otherwise prevents the fuel filler flap from closing after the vehicle has been locked. Fuel filler flap emergency release G WARNING The edges on the inside of the vehicle body can be sharp. You could injure yourself when using the fuel filler flap emergency release. Avoid contact with the edges on the inside of the vehicle body. The emergency release is located in the boot/luggage compartment behind the side trim on the right-hand side, when viewed in the direction of travel. X Open the boot lid/tailgate. X Saloon: open the right-hand side trim panel (Y page 356). X Estate: open the right-hand side trim panel (Y page 356). Example: Saloon Pull emergency release : in the direction of the arrow. The fuel filler flap is released. X Open the fuel filler flap. X Refuelling 173 Problems with the fuel and fuel tank Fuel is leaking from the vehicle. The engine does not start. Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions G Risk of explosion or fire The fuel line or the fuel tank is faulty. X Turn the key to position 0(Y page 153) in the ignition lock immediately and remove it. X Do not restart the engine under any circumstances. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. The fuel tank of a vehicle with a diesel engine has been run completely dry. X Refuel the vehicle with at least five litres of diesel. X Turn the ignition on for at least 10 seconds (Y page 153). X Start the engine continuously for up to 10 seconds until it runs smoothly. If the engine does not start: X Turn the ignition on again for approximately 10 seconds (Y page 153). X Start the engine again continuously for up to 10 seconds until it runs smoothly. If the engine does not start after three attempts: X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. The fuel filler flap cannot be opened. The fuel filler flap is not unlocked. or The key battery is discharged. X Unlock the vehicle using the emergency key element (Y page 86). X Open the boot lid or the tailgate. X Manually unlock the fuel filler flap using the emergency release (Y page 172). The fuel filler flap is unlocked, but the opening mechanism is jammed. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Z Driving and parking Problem 174 Parking Parking Driving and parking Important safety notes Therefore, do not switch off the engine while you are driving. G WARNING Vehicles with manual transmission Only remove the key from the ignition lock when the vehicle is stationary, as you cannot steer the vehicle when the key is removed. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. They could release the parking brake. This could lead to a serious or fatal accident. Shift to either first gear or reverse gear R. Turn the key to position 0 in the ignition lock and remove it. The immobiliser is activated. X Apply the parking brake firmly. G WARNING Vehicles with automatic transmission Under no circumstances should the exhaust system come into contact with flammable materials such as dry grass or petrol, for example. Do not park the vehicle on dry grassland or harvested grain fields. The hot exhaust system could otherwise ignite the flammable material and set the vehicle on fire. X To ensure that the vehicle is secured against rolling away unintentionally: Rthe parking brake must be applied. Ron vehicles with manual transmission, engage first gear or reverse gear. Ron vehicles with automatic transmission, the transmission must be in position P and the key must be removed from the ignition lock. Ron steep uphill or downhill gradients, turn the front wheels towards the kerb. Switching off the engine Important safety notes G WARNING If the engine is not running, there is no power assistance for the steering and brakes. Steering and braking then requires significantly greater effort. As a result, you might lose control of the vehicle, cause an accident and injure yourself and others. X X X Apply the parking brake firmly. Shift the transmission to position P. Using the key X Turn the key to position 0 in the ignition lock and remove it. The immobiliser is activated. i The key can only be removed if the transmission is in position P. Using KEYLESS-GO Press the Start/Stop button (Y page 153). The engine stops and all the indicator lamps in the instrument cluster go out. i When the driver's door is closed, this corresponds to key position 1. When the driver's door is open, this corresponds to key position 0, i.e. key removed. X i The engine can be turned off while the vehicle is in motion by pressing and holding the Start/Stop button for three seconds. This function operates independently of the ECO start/stop automatic engine switchoff function. Driving tips Parking brake 175 Driving tips General driving tips G WARNING To apply: depress parking brake ; firmly. The J indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up if the engine is running. X To release: depress the brake pedal and keep it depressed. X Pull release handle :. The J indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. X Parking up the vehicle If you leave the vehicle parked up for longer than four weeks, the battery may be damaged by exhaustive discharge. X Disconnect the battery (Y page 348) or connect it to a trickle charger. i You can obtain information about trickle chargers from a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. If you leave the vehicle parked up for longer than six weeks, the vehicle may suffer damage as a result of lack of use. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop and seek advice. Never switch the engine off while the vehicle is in motion. There is no power assistance for the steering and the service brake when the engine is not running. You will require considerably more effort to steer and brake, and you could therefore lose control of the vehicle and cause an accident. Engine oil ! Vehicles with a diesel particle filter: If the vehicle is mostly driven for short distances, it is possible that malfunctions may occur during the automatic cleaning of the diesel particle filter. This can lead to engine damage. Therefore, if you frequently drive short distances, make sure to drive on motorways or country roads for 20 minutes at least every 500 km. Brakes Important safety notes G WARNING Do not change down for additional engine braking on a slippery road surface. This could cause the drive wheels to lose their grip and the vehicle could skid. G WARNING Make sure that other road users are not endangered by your braking. Downhill gradients On long and steep downhill gradients, especially if the vehicle is laden or towing a trailer, you must shift to a lower gear in good time or, Z Driving and parking Rolling with the engine switched off 176 Driving tips on vehicles with automatic transmission, select shift range 1, 2 or 3. Driving and parking i This also applies if you have activated cruise control, SPEEDTRONIC or DISTRONIC PLUS. This will use the braking effect of the engine, so less braking will be required to maintain the speed. This relieves the load on the brake system and prevents the brakes from overheating and wearing too quickly. Heavy and light loads G WARNING Never depress the brake pedal continuously while the vehicle is in motion, e.g. never cause the brakes to rub by applying constant slight pedal pressure. This causes the brake system to overheat, increases the braking distance and can lead to the brakes failing completely. If the brakes have been subjected to a heavy load, do not stop the vehicle immediately, but drive on for a short while. This allows the airflow to cool the brakes more quickly. If the brakes have been used only moderately, you should occasionally test their effectiveness. To do this, brake more firmly from a higher speed. This improves the grip of the brakes. Wet road surface If driving in heavy rain for a prolonged period of time without braking, there may be a delayed reaction from the brakes when braking for the first time. This may also occur after the vehicle has been washed. You have to depress the brake pedal more firmly. Maintain a greater distance from the vehicle in front. After driving on a wet road or having the vehicle washed, brake firmly while paying attention to the traffic conditions. This will warm up the brake discs, thereby drying them more quickly and protecting them against corrosion. Limited braking performance on salttreated roads G WARNING The layer of salt on the brake discs and the brake pads/linings may cause a delay in the braking effect, resulting in a significantly longer braking distance, which could lead to an accident. To avoid this danger, you should: Roccasionally brake carefully, without putting other road users at risk, when you are driving on salted roads. This helps to remove any salt that may have started to build up on the brake discs and the brake pads/linings. Rmaintain a greater distance to the vehicle ahead and drive with particular care. Rcarefully apply the brakes at the end of a trip and immediately after commencing a new trip, so that salt residues are removed from the brake discs. New brake pads/linings G WARNING New brake pads/linings only reach their optimum braking effect after several hundred kilometres of driving. Before this optimum braking effect is reached, you should compensate for the reduced braking effect by applying greater pressure when braking. This also applies after the brake discs or the brake pads/linings have been replaced. For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only have brake pads/linings fitted to your vehicle which have been approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles or which correspond to an equivalent quality standard. Brake pads/linings which have not been approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles or which are not of an equivalent quality could affect your vehicle's operating safety. Driving tips The high-performance brake system is designed for heavy loads. This may lead to noise when braking. This will depend on: Rspeed Rbraking force Renvironmental conditions, such as temperature and humidity The wear of individual components of the brake system, such as the brake pads/linings or brake discs, depends on the individual driving style and operating conditions. For this reason, it is impossible to state a mileage that will be valid under all circumstances. An aggressive driving style will lead to high wear. You can obtain further information about this from your Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Tyre traction G WARNING Whereas the vehicle can be fully controlled at a certain speed on dry roads, you must reduce your speed on wet or icy roads to achieve the same road safety. You could otherwise cause an accident. Pay particular attention to the road conditions at temperatures around freezing point. If ice has formed on the road surface (e.g. from fog), a thin film of water rapidly forms on the ice when you brake, considerably reducing tyre traction. Drive with particular care in such weather conditions. Driving on wet roads Aquaplaning If water has accumulated to a certain depth on the road surface, there is a danger of aquaplaning occurring, even if: Ryou drive at low speeds tyres have adequate tread depth For this reason, do not drive in tyre ruts, and brake carefully. Rthe Driving on flooded roads If you have to drive on stretches of road on which water has collected, please bear in mind that: Rthe maximum permitted still water depth is 25 cm. should drive no faster than at walking pace. Ryou ! Bear in mind that vehicles travelling in front or in the opposite direction create waves. This may cause the maximum permissible water depth to be exceeded. These notes must be observed under all circumstances. You could otherwise damage the engine, the electronics or the transmission. Winter driving General notes G WARNING If the vehicle becomes trapped in snow, ensure that snow is kept away from the exhaust pipe and from around the vehicle as long as the engine is running. Otherwise, poisonous carbon monoxide (CO) may enter the vehicle, resulting in loss of consciousness and even death. To assure sufficient fresh air ventilation, open a window slightly on the side of the vehicle not facing the wind. Z Driving and parking High-performance brake system for AMG vehicles 177 Driving systems Driving and parking 178 At the onset of winter, have your vehicle winterproofed at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Observe the notes in the "Winter operation" section (Y page 359). Driving with summer tyres Observe the notes in the "Winter operation" section (Y page 359). Slippery road surfaces G WARNING Do not shift down for additional engine braking on a slippery road surface. This could cause the drive wheels to lose their grip and the vehicle could skid. You should drive particularly carefully on slippery road surfaces. Avoid sudden acceleration, steering and braking manoeuvres. If the vehicle threatens to skid or cannot be stopped when moving at low speed: Vehicles with manual transmission: engage neutral. X Vehicles with automatic transmission: shift the transmission to position N. X Try to bring the vehicle under control by using corrective steering. X i For more information on driving with snow chains, see (Y page 360). Driving systems Cruise control Important safety notes Cruise control maintains a constant road speed for you. It brakes automatically in order to avoid exceeding the set speed. You must select a low gear in good time on long and steep downhill gradients, especially if the vehicle is laden or towing a trailer. On vehicles with automatic transmission, select shift range 1, 2 or 3. By doing so, you will make use of the braking effect of the engine. This relieves the load on the brake system and prevents the brakes from overheating and wearing too quickly. G WARNING Do not change down for additional engine braking on a slippery road surface. This could cause the drive wheels to lose their grip and the vehicle could skid. Use cruise control only if road and traffic conditions make it appropriate to maintain a steady speed for a prolonged period. You can store any road speed above 30 km/h. G WARNING Cruise control cannot take account of road and traffic conditions. Always pay attention to traffic conditions even when cruise control is activated. Cruise control is only an aid designed to assist driving. You are responsible for the vehicle's speed and for braking in good time. G WARNING Do not use cruise control Rin traffic conditions that do not allow you to drive at a constant speed (e.g. heavy traffic or winding roads). You may otherwise cause an accident. Ron slippery roads. The drive wheels may lose their grip when braking or accelerating and the vehicle may skid. Rwhen there is low visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain or snow. Cruise control lever You can operate cruise control and variable SPEEDTRONIC with the cruise control lever. Driving systems RLIM indicator lamp off: cruise control is selected. RLIM indicator lamp on: variable SPEEDTRONIC is selected. Storing and maintaining the current speed You can store the current speed if you are driving faster than 30 km/h. X Accelerate the vehicle to the desired speed. X Briefly press the cruise control lever up : or down ?. X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. Cruise control is activated. The vehicle automatically maintains the speed. i Cruise control may be unable to maintain the stored speed on uphill gradients. The stored speed is resumed when the gradient evens out. Cruise control maintains the stored speed on downhill gradients by automatically applying the brakes. : To switch on or to increase the speed ; LIM indicator lamp = To switch on with the current speed or i Vehicles with manual transmission: RAlways drive at adequate, but not excessive, engine speeds. RChange gear in good time. RIf possible, do not change down several gears at a time. with the last stored speed ? To switch on or to reduce the speed A To switch between cruise control and variable SPEEDTRONIC B To deactivate cruise control When you activate cruise control, the stored speed is shown in the multifunction display for five seconds. Vehicles with the 4-button multifunction steering wheel: the stored speed is then permanently displayed in the status indicator together with the ¯ symbol. Vehicles with the 12-button multifunction steering wheel: the segments from the stored speed up to the maximum speed light up in the multifunction display. Storing the current speed or calling up the last stored speed Selecting cruise control X X Check whether LIM indicator lamp ; is off. If it is off, cruise control is already selected. If it is not, press the cruise control lever in the direction of arrow A. LIM indicator lamp ; in the cruise control lever goes out. Cruise control is selected. G WARNING Only call up a stored speed if you know what that speed is and if it is suitable for the current traffic and driving situation. You can otherwise endanger yourself or others by unintentionally triggering sudden acceleration or braking. Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards you =. X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. The first time cruise control is activated, it stores the current speed or regulates the speed of the vehicle to the previously stored speed. Z Driving and parking The LIM indicator lamp on the cruise control lever indicates which system you have selected: 179 Driving systems 180 Setting a speed or Press the cruise control lever up : for a higher speed or down ? for a lower speed. X Keep the cruise control lever pressed until the desired speed is reached. X Release the cruise control lever. The new speed is stored. X Driving and parking X i Cruise control is not deactivated if you depress the accelerator pedal. For example, if you accelerate briefly to overtake, cruise control adjusts the vehicle's speed to the last speed stored after you have finished overtaking. Making adjustments in 1 km/h increments X Briefly press the cruise control lever to the pressure point, up : for a higher speed or down ? for a lower speed. The last speed stored is increased or reduced. Making adjustments in 10 km/h increments X Briefly press the cruise control lever beyond the pressure point, up : for a higher speed or down ? for a lower speed. The last speed stored is increased or reduced. Deactivating cruise control There are several ways to deactivate cruise control: X Briefly press the cruise control lever forwards B. or X Brake Briefly press the cruise control lever in the direction of arrow A. Variable SPEEDTRONIC is selected. LIM indicator lamp ; in the cruise control lever lights up. Cruise control is automatically deactivated if: Ryou depress the parking brake. are driving at less than 30 km/h. RESP® intervenes or if you deactivate ESP®. Ryou shift into neutral in a vehicle with manual transmission while driving or depress the clutch pedal for longer than six seconds. Ron vehicles with manual transmission, you shift to a gear that is too high, and as a result the engine speed is too low. Ron vehicles with automatic transmission, you shift into position N while driving. If cruise control is deactivated, you will hear a warning tone. You will see the Cruise control off message in the multifunction display for approximately five seconds. Ryou i The last speed stored is cleared when you switch off the engine. SPEEDTRONIC Important safety notes SPEEDTRONIC brakes automatically so that you do not exceed the set speed. On long and steep downhill gradients, especially if the vehicle is laden or towing a trailer, you must shift to a lower gear in good time or select shift range 1, 2 or 3 on vehicles with automatic transmission. By doing so, you will make use of the braking effect of the engine, which relieves the load on the brake system and prevents the brakes from overheating and wearing too quickly. If you need additional braking, depress the brake pedal repeatedly rather than continuously. Driving systems Never depress the brake pedal continuously while the vehicle is in motion, e.g. never cause the brakes to rub by applying constant slight pedal pressure. This causes the brake system to overheat, increases the braking distance and can lead to the brakes failing completely. You can use the cruise control lever to limit the speed to any speed above 30 km/h while the engine is running. Driving and parking G WARNING G WARNING Do not change down for additional engine braking on a slippery road surface. This could cause the drive wheels to lose their grip and the vehicle could skid. You can set a variable or permanent limit speed: Rvariable for speed limits, e.g. in built-up areas Rpermanent for long-term speed restrictions, e.g. when driving with winter tyres fitted (Y page 183) G WARNING Speedtronic is only an aid designed to assist driving. You are responsible for the vehicle's speed and for braking in good time. i The speed indicated in the speedometer may differ slightly from the limit speed stored. Variable SPEEDTRONIC General notes With the cruise control lever, you can operate cruise control or DISTRONIC PLUS and variable SPEEDTRONIC. The LIM indicator lamp on the cruise control lever indicates which system you have selected: RLIM indicator lamp off: cruise control or DISTRONIC PLUS is selected. RLIM indicator lamp on: variable SPEEDTRONIC is selected. 181 : To store the current speed or a higher speed ; LIM indicator lamp = To store the current speed or to call up the last stored speed ? To store the current speed or a lower speed A To switch between cruise control and var- iable SPEEDTRONIC B To deactivate variable SPEEDTRONIC Selecting variable SPEEDTRONIC X Check whether LIM indicator lamp ; is on. If it is on, variable SPEEDTRONIC is already selected. If it is not, press the cruise control lever in the direction of arrow A. LIM indicator lamp ; in the cruise control lever lights up. Variable SPEEDTRONIC is selected. G WARNING If there is a change of drivers, advise the new driver of the limit speed stored. Only use variable SPEEDTRONIC if you will not have to accelerate suddenly to a speed above that stored as the limit speed. You could otherwise cause an accident. Z Driving systems 182 You can only exceed the limit speed stored if you deactivate variable SPEEDTRONIC: Rusing the cruise control lever depressing the accelerator pedal beyond the pressure point (kickdown) It is not possible to deactivate variable SPEEDTRONIC by braking. Driving and parking Rby Storing the current speed You can use the cruise control lever to limit the speed to any speed above 30 km/h while the engine is running. X Briefly press the cruise control lever to the pressure point up : or down ?. The current speed is stored. For five seconds, the multifunction display shows the stored speed, e.g. Limit 100 km/h. Vehicles with the 4-button multifunction steering wheel: the stored speed is permanently displayed in the status indicator, e.g. LIM 100 km/h. Vehicles with a 12-button multifunction steering wheel: on the speedometer, the segments from the start of the scale up to the stored speed are lit up. Storing the current speed or calling up the last stored speed G WARNING Only select a stored speed if you know what that speed is and whether it is suitable for the current driving and traffic situation. Otherwise, sudden braking could endanger you or others. X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards you =. Making adjustments in 1 km/h increments X Briefly press the cruise control lever to the pressure point, up : for a higher speed or down ? for a lower speed. or X Keep the cruise control lever pressed to the pressure point until the desired speed is set. Press the cruise control lever up : for a higher speed or down ? for a lower speed. Making adjustments in 10 km/h increments X Briefly press the cruise control lever beyond the pressure point, up : for a higher speed or down ? for a lower speed. or X Keep the cruise control lever pressed beyond the pressure point until the desired speed is set. Press the cruise control lever up : for a higher speed or down ? for a lower speed. Deactivating variable SPEEDTRONIC There are several ways to deactivate variable SPEEDTRONIC: X Briefly press the cruise control lever forwards B. or X Briefly press the cruise control lever in the direction of arrow A. LIM indicator lamp ; in the cruise control lever goes out. Variable SPEEDTRONIC is deactivated. Cruise control is selected. Variable SPEEDTRONIC is automatically deactivated: Rif you depress the accelerator pedal beyond the pressure point (kickdown), but only if your current speed does not differ by more than 20 km/h from the stored speed. Driving systems G WARNING It is not possible to deactivate variable Speedtronic by braking. i The last speed stored is cleared when you switch off the engine. Permanent SPEEDTRONIC You can use the on-board computer to limit the speed permanently to a value between 160 km/h (e.g. for driving on winter tyres) and the maximum speed (Y page 241). Shortly before the stored speed is reached, it appears in the multifunction display. Permanent SPEEDTRONIC remains active, even if variable SPEEDTRONIC is deactivated. You cannot exceed the stored limit speed, even if you depress the accelerator pedal beyond the pressure point (kickdown). DISTRONIC PLUS Important safety notes DISTRONIC PLUS regulates the speed and automatically helps you maintain the distance to the vehicle detected in front. It brakes automatically in order to avoid exceeding the set speed. On long and steep downhill gradients, especially if the vehicle is laden or towing a trailer, you must select shift range 1, 2 or 3 in good time. By doing so, you will make use of the braking effect of the engine. This relieves the load on the brake system and prevents the brakes from overheating and wearing too quickly. If a slower-moving vehicle is detected in front, DISTRONIC PLUS causes your vehicle to brake and maintain the preset distance to the vehicle in front. G WARNING Do not change down for additional engine braking on a slippery road surface. This could cause the drive wheels to lose their grip and the vehicle could skid. G WARNING DISTRONIC PLUS is only an aid designed to assist driving. The driver remains fully responsible for the vehicle's distance from other vehicles, the vehicle's speed and for braking in good time. DISTRONIC PLUS does not react in particular to: Rpedestrians Rstationary obstacles on the road, e.g. stop- ped or parked vehicles and crossing traffic DISTRONIC PLUS may not detect narrow vehicles driving in front, e.g. motorcycles, or vehicles driving on a different line. Therefore, always pay attention to traffic conditions even when DISTRONIC PLUS is activated. Otherwise, you may fail to recognise dangers in time, cause an accident and injure yourself and others. Roncoming G WARNING DISTRONIC PLUS cannot take account of road and traffic conditions. If DISTRONIC does not recognise or no longer recognises the vehicle in front, do not activate DISTRONIC or, if it is already active, deactivate it. This is especially the case: Rbefore corners filter lanes Rwhen changing to a lane with faster moving traffic Rin complex driving situations or where lanes are diverted, e.g. at roadworks on a motorway Ron Z Driving and parking You will hear a warning tone if this is the case. Ron vehicles with manual transmission, if you shift to a higher gear and as a result the engine speed is too low. 183 Driving and parking 184 Driving systems DISTRONIC PLUS otherwise maintains the current speed set by you or accelerates up to the set speed. DISTRONIC PLUS cannot take account of weather conditions. Deactivate, or do not activate, DISTRONIC PLUS: Rif the roads are slippery, snow-covered or icy. The wheels could lose their grip when braking or accelerating. The vehicle could start to skid. Rif the sensors are dirty or there is poor visibility, e.g. due to snow, rain or fog. Distance control may be impaired. Always pay attention to traffic conditions even when DISTRONIC PLUS is activated. Otherwise, you may fail to recognise dangers in time, cause an accident and injure yourself and others. The radar sensor system is automatically deactivated near radio telescope facilities (Y page 389). If you want DISTRONIC PLUS to assist you, the radar sensor system must be activated (Y page 242) and operational. If there is no vehicle in front, DISTRONIC PLUS operates in the same way as cruise control in the speed range between 30 km/h and 200 km/h. If a vehicle is driving in front of you, DISTRONIC operates in the speed range between 0 km/h and 200 km/h. Do not use DISTRONIC PLUS while driving on roads with steep gradients. G WARNING DISTRONIC PLUS brakes your vehicle up to a maximum of 4 m/s2 depending on its speed. This corresponds to approximately 40% of your vehicle's maximum braking power. You must also apply the brakes yourself if this braking power is not sufficient. If DISTRONIC PLUS detects a risk of collision with a vehicle in front, an intermittent warning tone sounds. In addition, the · distance warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. Brake to avoid a collision. Cruise control lever With the cruise control lever, you can operate DISTRONIC PLUS and variable SPEEDTRONIC. The LIM indicator lamp on the cruise control lever indicates which system you have selected: RLIM indicator lamp off: DISTRONIC PLUS is selected. RLIM indicator lamp on: variable SPEEDTRONIC is selected. : To store the current speed or a higher speed ; To set the specified minimum distance = LIM indicator lamp ? To store the current speed or call up the last stored speed A To store the current speed or a lower speed B To switch between DISTRONIC PLUS and variable SPEEDTRONIC C To deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS Selecting DISTRONIC PLUS X Check whether LIM indicator lamp = is off. If it is off, DISTRONIC PLUS is already selected. If it is not, press the cruise control lever in the direction of arrow B. LIM indicator lamp = in the cruise control lever goes out. DISTRONIC PLUS is selected. Switching on DISTRONIC PLUS, storing the current speed and maintaining it Important safety notes G WARNING The vehicle can be braked when DISTRONIC PLUS is activated. For this reason, deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS if the vehicle is to be set in motion by other means (e.g. in a car wash or by towing). TRONIC PLUS is deactivated and a warning tone sounds. X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards you ?, or briefly press up : or down A. DISTRONIC PLUS is selected. X Keep the cruise control lever pressed up : or down A until the desired speed is set. X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. Your vehicle adapts its speed to that of the vehicle in front, but only up to the desired stored speed. i If you do not fully release the accelerator pedal, the DISTRONIC PLUS suspended message is shown in the multifunction display. The set distance to a slower-moving vehicle in front will then not be maintained. You will be driving at the speed you determine by the position of the accelerator pedal. To activate DISTRONIC PLUS, the following conditions must be fulfilled: Rfor vehicles not equipped with a navigation system, the Becker® MAP PILOT must be connected. See the separate Audio 20 operating instructions. Rthe engine must be running. It may take up to two minutes of driving before DISTRONIC PLUS is ready for use. Rthe parking brake must not be applied. RESP® must be activated but not intervening. Rthe transmission must be in position D. Rthe bonnet must be closed. Rthe driver's door must be closed when you shift from P to D or your seat belt must be fastened. Rthe front-passenger door and the rear doors must be closed. Rthe vehicle must not be skidding. Activating while driving When driving at speeds below 30 km/h, you can only activate DISTRONIC PLUS if the vehicle in front has been detected and is shown in the multifunction display. If the vehicle in front is no longer detected and shown, DIS- Activating when driving towards a stationary vehicle If the vehicle in front of you is stationary, you can only activate DISTRONIC PLUS once your vehicle is stationary as well. X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards you ?, or briefly press up : or down A. DISTRONIC PLUS is selected. i DISTRONIC PLUS can only be activated at under 30 km/h if a vehicle in front has been detected. Therefore, the DISTRONIC PLUS distance display in the instrument cluster should be activated (Y page 237). X Keep the cruise control lever pressed up : or down A until the desired speed is set. i You can use the cruise control lever to set the stored speed and the control on the cruise control lever to set the specified minimum distance (Y page 188). Z 185 Driving and parking Driving systems Driving systems 186 Pulling away X If the vehicle in front pulls away: remove your foot from the brake pedal. Driving and parking X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards you ?. or X Accelerate briefly. Your vehicle pulls away and adapts its speed to that of the vehicle in front. Driving If there is no vehicle in front, DISTRONIC PLUS operates in the same way as cruise control. If a slower-moving vehicle is detected in front, DISTRONIC causes your vehicle to brake. This maintains the preset distance to the vehicle in front. If DISTRONIC PLUS detects a faster-moving vehicle in front, it increases the driving speed of your vehicle, but only up to the desired speed you have stored. G WARNING If you depress the brake, DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated unless your vehicle is stationary. DISTRONIC PLUS then no longer brakes your vehicle. In such cases, control the distance from vehicles travelling in front with the brake alone. You could otherwise cause an accident and thereby injure yourself and others. The driver remains fully responsible for the vehicle's distance from other vehicles, the speed being driven and for braking in good time. Changing lanes If you wish to change to the passing lane (in countries where traffic drives on the right, the passing lane is the left-hand lane), DISTRONIC PLUS supports you if: Ryou are driving faster than 60 km/h. PLUS is maintaining the distance to a vehicle in front. Ryou switch on the appropriate turn signals. RDISTRONIC PLUS does not detect a danger of collision. RDISTRONIC If these conditions are met, your vehicle is accelerated. Acceleration will be interrupted if changing lanes takes too long or if the distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front becomes too small. G WARNING DISTRONIC PLUS and Active Blind Spot Assist are only an aid designed to assist driving. They do not relieve you of the responsibility of paying attention. The driver remains fully responsible for the vehicle's distance from other vehicles, the vehicle's speed and for braking in good time. Always pay attention to traffic conditions and your surroundings. Otherwise, you may fail to recognise dangers in time, cause an accident and injure yourself and others. Vehicles with COMAND Online i The following function is not operational in all countries. DISTRONIC PLUS uses additional information from your navigation system so that it can react appropriately to certain traffic situations. This is the case if, while following a vehicle, DISTRONIC PLUS is active and you: Rapproach or drive through a roundabout a T junction Rturn off at a motorway exit Even if the vehicle in front leaves the detection range, DISTRONIC PLUS temporarily maintains the current driving speed and does not accelerate. This is based on the current map data in the navigation system. Rapproach Driving systems 187 If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that the vehicle in front is stopping, it brakes your vehicle until it is stationary. Once your vehicle is stationary, it remains stationary and you do not need to depress the brake. Example: roundabout The current speed is maintained: Rapproximately 10 seconds before the roundabout/T junction and for approximately 1.5 seconds when driving on the roundabout Rapproximately 12 seconds before reaching a motorway exit and approximately 4 seconds after the motorway exit Afterwards, the vehicle accelerates back to the set speed you specified. Stopping G WARNING Never get out of the vehicle when DISTRONIC PLUS is activated. DISTRONIC PLUS must also never be operated, activated or deactivated by a passenger or from outside the vehicle. DISTRONIC PLUS does not replace the parking brake and must not be used for parking. The DISTRONIC PLUS braking effect is cancelled and the vehicle can start moving if: RDISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated using the cruise control lever. Ryou accelerate. Rthere is a malfunction in the system or an interruption in the power supply, e.g. battery failure. Rthe electrical system in the engine compartment, the battery or the fuses are tampered with. Rthe battery is disconnected. i Depending on the specified minimum dis- tance, your vehicle will come to a standstill at a sufficient distance behind the vehicle in front. The specified minimum distance is set using the control on the cruise control lever. You will see a warning message in the multifunction display if DISTRONIC PLUS is activated and: Rthe driver's door is open and the driver's seat belt is unfastened. Rthe engine is switched off, unless it is automatically switched off by the ECO start/ stop function. Rthe bonnet is opened. Select Park (P) X Move the selector lever to P to prevent the vehicle from rolling away. DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated. The warning message in the multifunction display disappears. The horn will also sound at regular intervals if DISTRONIC PLUS is activated and you: Rswitch the engine off, open the driver's door and take off your seat belt Ropen the bonnet The sounding of the horn alerts you to the fact that the vehicle has been parked while DISTRONIC PLUS is still activated. The sound becomes louder if you attempt to lock the vehicle. The vehicle is not locked until DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated. Z Driving and parking If you wish to leave the vehicle or park it, deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS and secure the vehicle against rolling away. Driving systems 188 i If the engine has been switched off, it Driving and parking cannot be started again until DISTRONIC PLUS has been deactivated. If DISTRONIC PLUS is activated and a fault occurs in the system or if there is a disruption in the power supply, the Brake immedi‐ ately message is shown in the multifunction display. Immediately depress the brake firmly until the warning message in the multifunction display goes out or shift the transmission to position P. DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated. Setting a speed Press the cruise control lever up : for a higher speed or down A for a lower speed. X Keep the cruise control lever pressed until the desired speed is reached. X Release the cruise control lever. The new speed is stored. DISTRONIC PLUS is activated and adjusts the vehicle's speed to the new speed stored. X Making adjustments in 1 km/h increments X Briefly press the cruise control lever to the pressure point, up : for a higher speed or down A for a lower speed. The last speed stored is increased or reduced. Making adjustments in 10 km/h increments X Briefly press the cruise control lever beyond the pressure point, up : for a higher speed or down A for a lower speed. The last speed stored is increased or reduced. Storing the current speed or calling up the stored speed G WARNING Only call up a stored speed if you know what that speed is and if it is suitable for the current traffic and driving situation. You can otherwise endanger yourself or others by unintentionally triggering sudden acceleration or braking. Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards you ?. X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. DISTRONIC PLUS is activated. The first time it is activated, the current speed is stored. Otherwise, it sets the vehicle cruise speed to the previously stored value. X Setting the specified minimum distance You can set the specified minimum distance for DISTRONIC PLUS by varying the time span between one and two seconds. With this function, you can set the minimum distance that DISTRONIC PLUS keeps to the vehicle in front, dependent on vehicle speed. You can see this distance in the multifunction display (Y page 189). Driving systems i Make sure that you maintain a sufficient and safe distance from the vehicle in front. Adjust the distance to the vehicle in front if necessary. Displaying DISTRONIC PLUS in the speedometer Displaying DISTRONIC PLUS in the multifunction display General notes In the Assistance menu (Y page 236) of the on-board computer, you can select the distance display. Display when DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated X Select the Distance display function using the on-board computer (Y page 237). When DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated, you will see the following in the multifunction display: Example: vehicles with automatic transmission : Symbol for activated PRE-SAFE® Brake Example: vehicles with automatic transmission ; Vehicle in front, if detected When DISTRONIC PLUS is activated, one or two segments ; in the set speed range light up. = Distance indicator: current distance to i For design reasons, the speed displayed in the speedometer may differ slightly from the speed set for DISTRONIC PLUS. If DISTRONIC PLUS detects a vehicle in front, segments ; between speed of the vehicle in front : and stored speed = light up. the vehicle in front ? Specified minimum distance to the vehi- cle in front; adjustable A Own vehicle Display when DISTRONIC PLUS is activated X Select the Distance display function using the on-board computer (Y page 237). You will see the stored speed for about five seconds when you activate DISTRONIC PLUS. After this time, you will see the following in the multifunction display while DISTRONIC PLUS is activated: Z Driving and parking To increase: turn control ; in direction =. DISTRONIC PLUS then maintains a greater distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front. X To decrease: turn control ; in direction :. DISTRONIC PLUS then maintains a shorter distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front. X 189 Driving systems 190 i The last speed stored remains stored until you switch off the engine. Driving and parking i DISTRONIC PLUS is not deactivated if you depress the accelerator pedal. If you accelerate to overtake, DISTRONIC PLUS adjusts the vehicle's speed to the last speed stored after you have finished overtaking. : DISTRONIC PLUS activated ; Own vehicle = Specified minimum distance to the vehi- cle in front; adjustable ? Vehicle in front, if detected Deactivating DISTRONIC PLUS There are several ways to deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS: X Briefly press the cruise control lever forwards :. or X Brake, unless the vehicle is stationary. or X Briefly press the cruise control lever in the direction of arrow =. Variable SPEEDTRONIC is selected. LIM indicator lamp ; in the cruise control lever lights up. When you deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS, the DISTRONIC PLUS off message is shown in the multifunction display for approximately five seconds. DISTRONIC PLUS is automatically deactivated if: Ryou apply the parking brake. are driving slower than 25 km/h and there is no vehicle in front, or if the vehicle in front is no longer detected. RESP® intervenes or if you deactivate ESP®. Rthe transmission is in the P, R or N position. Rthe vehicle is near a radio telescope facility (Y page 389). Ryou switch off the radar sensor system (Y page 242). Ryou pull the cruise control lever towards you in order to pull away and the frontpassenger door or one of the rear doors is open. Rthe vehicle has skidded. If DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated, you will hear a warning tone. The DISTRONIC PLUS off message is shown in the multifunction display for approximately five seconds. If the vehicle has been stopped by DISTRONIC PLUS and a fault occurs in the system, the Brake immediately message appears in the multifunction. Depress the brake pedal immediately so that the vehicle does not roll away. DISTRONIC PLUS is then deactivated, and the message disappears. Ryou Tips for driving with DISTRONIC PLUS General notes The following contains descriptions of certain road and traffic conditions in which you must be particularly attentive. In such situations, brake if necessary. DISTRONIC PLUS is then deactivated. Driving systems Cornering, going into and coming out of a bend 191 DISTRONIC PLUS has not detected the vehicle cutting in yet. The distance to this vehicle will be too short. The ability of DISTRONIC PLUS to detect vehicles when cornering is limited. Your vehicle may brake unexpectedly or late. Vehicles travelling on a different line Driving and parking Narrow vehicles DISTRONIC PLUS has not yet detected the vehicle in front on the edge of the carriageway, because of its narrow width. The distance to the vehicle in front will be too short. Obstructions and stationary vehicles DISTRONIC PLUS may not detect vehicles travelling on a different line. The distance to the vehicle in front will be too short. Other vehicles changing lane DISTRONIC PLUS does not brake for obstacles or stationary vehicles. If, for example, the detected vehicle turns a corner and reveals an obstacle or stationary vehicle, DISTRONIC PLUS will not brake for these. Z 192 Driving systems Driving and parking Crossing vehicles DISTRONIC PLUS may detect vehicles that are crossing your lane by mistake. Activating DISTRONIC PLUS at traffic lights with crossing traffic, for example, could cause your vehicle to pull away unintentionally. Dynamic handling package with sports mode General notes The most important part of the dynamic handling package with sports mode is the adjustable suspension system. This automatically controls and adapts the suspension to the respective driving situation. The calibration of the suspension depends on: Ryour driving style road surface conditions Ryour individual selection; see the following description If your vehicle is equipped with automatic transmission, the dynamic handling package with sports mode also includes steering wheel gearshift paddles (Y page 164) with a manual drive program (Y page 166). Rthe Example: position of dynamic handling package with sports mode button X Start the engine. Sports tuning The firmer setting of the suspension tuning in sports mode ensures even better contact with the road. Select this mode when employing a sporty driving style, e.g. on winding country roads. Your selection remains stored until you switch off the engine. X Press button ;. Indicator lamp : lights up. Sports suspension tuning is selected. Depending on the engine output, the accelerator pedal is more responsive. On vehicles with automatic transmission, drive program S is selected. Comfort tuning In comfort mode, the driving characteristics of your vehicle are more comfortable. Select this mode if you prefer a more comfortable driving style, but also when driving fast on straight roads, e.g. motorways. X Press button ;. Indicator lamp : goes out. Comfortable suspension tuning is selected. On vehicles with automatic transmission, drive program E is selected. HOLD function General notes The HOLD function can assist the driver in the following situations: X Quickly depress the brake pedal further until HOLD display : appears in the multifunction display. The HOLD function is activated. You can release the brake pedal. pulling away, especially on steep slopes Rwhen manoeuvring on steep slopes Rwhen waiting in traffic The vehicle is kept stationary without the driver having to depress the brake pedal. The braking effect is cancelled and the HOLD function is deactivated when you depress the accelerator pedal to pull away. i If depressing the brake pedal the first Activation conditions Deactivating the HOLD function You can activate the HOLD function if: The HOLD function is deactivated automatically if: Rwhen Rthe vehicle is stationary. Rthe engine is running or if it has been automatically switched off by the ECO start/ stop function. Rthe driver's door is closed or if your seat belt is fastened. Rthe parking brake is not applied. Rthe bonnet is closed. Rthe selector lever is in position D, R or N on vehicles with automatic transmission. RDISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated. Activating the HOLD function Make sure that the activation conditions are met. X Depress the brake pedal. X time does not activate the HOLD function, wait briefly and then try again. G WARNING The vehicle's brakes are applied when the HOLD function is activated. For this reason, deactivate the HOLD function if the vehicle is to be set in motion by other means (e.g. in a car wash or by towing). Ryou accelerate. On vehicles with automatic transmission: only when the transmission is in position D or R. Ryou shift the transmission to position P on vehicles with automatic transmission. Ryou apply the brakes again with a certain amount of pressure until HOLD disappears from the multifunction display. Ryou activate DISTRONIC PLUS. G WARNING Never get out of the vehicle when the HOLD function is activated. The HOLD function must never be operated or deactivated by a passenger or from outside the vehicle. The HOLD function does not replace the parking brake and must not be used for parking. Example: vehicles with automatic transmission Z 193 Driving and parking Driving systems 194 Driving systems The braking effect of the HOLD function is cancelled and the vehicle could roll away if: Driving and parking Rthe HOLD function is deactivated by depressing the accelerator pedal or the brake pedal. Rthere is a malfunction in the system or an interruption in the power supply, e.g. battery failure. Rthe electrical system in the engine compartment, the battery or the fuses are tampered with. Rthe battery is disconnected. If you leave the vehicle or park it, deactivate the HOLD function and secure the vehicle against rolling away. You will see a warning message in the multifunction display if the HOLD function is activated and: driver's door is open and the driver's seat belt is unfastened. Rthe engine is switched off, unless it is automatically switched off by the ECO start/ stop function. Rthe bonnet is opened. For vehicles with manual transmission: Brake immediately X Immediately depress the brake pedal firmly until the warning message in the multifunction display goes out. This deactivates the HOLD function. The sounding of the horn alerts you to the fact that the vehicle has been parked while the HOLD function is still activated. If you attempt to lock the vehicle, the tone becomes louder. The vehicle is not locked until the HOLD function is deactivated. i If the engine has been switched off, it cannot be started again until the HOLD function has been deactivated. If there is a fault in the system or power supply while the HOLD function is activated, the Brake immediately message is shown in the multifunction display. Immediately depress the brake firmly until the warning message in the multifunction display goes out. On vehicles with automatic transmission, you can also shift into position P. This deactivates the HOLD function. Rthe On vehicles with automatic transmission: Select Park (P) X Move the selector lever to P to prevent the vehicle from rolling away. The HOLD function is deactivated. The warning message in the multifunction display disappears. A horn will also sound at regular intervals if the HOLD function is activated and you: Rswitch the engine off, open the driver's door and take off your seat belt Ropen the bonnet RACE START Important safety notes i RACE START is only available in AMG vehicles. RACE START enables optimal acceleration from a standing start. The precondition for this is a suitable high-grip road surface. G WARNING RACE START is only available when SPORT handling mode is activated. SPORT handling mode will only be able to stabilise the vehicle to a limited degree if the vehicle starts to skid or a wheel starts to spin. The vehicle is therefore harder to control at the threshold range. You could lose control of the vehicle and cause an accident. RACE START should only be used on closed off circuits. Always adapt your driving style to suit the prevailing road and weather conditions. Driving systems RACE START can be activated when: Rthe doors are closed. Rthe engine is running and it has reached an operating temperature of approximately 80 †. This is the case when the engine oil temperature in the multifunction display stops flashing. RSPORT handling mode is activated. (Y page 76) Rthe steering wheel is in the straight-ahead position. Rthe vehicle is stationary and the brake pedal is depressed (left foot). Rthe transmission is in position D. Activating RACE START Depress the brake pedal with your left foot, and keep it depressed. X Turn the drive program selector clockwise (Y page 163) until the RS lamp lights up. The multifunction display shows the RACE START Confirm: Paddle UP Cancel: Paddle DOWN message. i If the conditions for activation are no longer fulfilled, RACE START is cancelled. The multifunction display shows the RACE START cancelled message. X X To cancel: pull the left steering wheel shift paddle (Y page 164). or To confirm: pull the right steering wheel shift paddle (Y page 164). The multifunction display shows the RACE START available Depress accelera‐ tor message. i If you do not depress the accelerator pedal fully within two seconds, RACE START is cancelled. The multifunction display shows the RACE START not possi‐ ble See Owner's Manual message. X Depress the accelerator pedal fully. The engine speed rises to approximately 4000 rpm. The multifunction display shows the RACE START Release brake to start message. i If you do not release the brake pedal within seven seconds, RACE START is cancelled. The multifunction display shows the RACE START cancelled message. X X Take your foot off the brake, but keep the accelerator pedal depressed. The vehicle pulls away at maximum acceleration. The multifunction display shows the RACE START active message. RACE START is deactivated when the vehicle reaches a speed of approximately 50 km/h. Drive program S+ is activated. SPORT handling mode remains activated. RACE START is deactivated immediately if you release the accelerator pedal during RACE START or if any of the activation conditions are no longer fulfilled. The multifunction display shows the RACE START not possi‐ ble See Owner's Manual message. i If RACE START is used repeatedly in a short period of time, it is only available again after having driven the vehicle a certain distance. 4MATIC (permanent all-wheel drive) 4MATIC ensures that all four wheels are permanently driven. Together with ESP®, it improves the traction of your vehicle whenever a drive wheel spins due to insufficient grip. G WARNING 4MATIC cannot reduce the risk of an accident if you drive too fast. If a drive wheel spins due to insufficient grip: Z Driving and parking Conditions for activation 195 Driving and parking 196 Driving systems Ronly depress the accelerator pedal as far as PARKTRONIC is activated automatically if you: Raccelerate Rswitch necessary when pulling away. less when driving. Radapt your driving style to suit road and traffic conditions. ! Never tow the vehicle with one axle raised. This may damage the transfer case. Damage of this sort is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz implied warranty. All wheels must remain either on the ground or be fully raised. Observe the instructions for towing the vehicle with all wheels in full contact with the ground. on the ignition to position D, R or N on vehicles with automatic transmission Rrelease the parking brake PARKTRONIC is deactivated at speeds above 18 km/h. It is reactivated at lower speeds. PARKTRONIC monitors the area around your vehicle using six sensors in the front bumper and four sensors in the rear bumper. Rshift i In wintry driving conditions, the maximum effect of 4MATIC can only be achieved if you use winter tyres (M+S tyres), with snow chains if necessary. PARKTRONIC Important safety notes G WARNING PARKTRONIC is only an aid and may not detect all obstacles. It is not a substitute for attentive driving. You are always responsible for safety and must continue to pay attention to your immediate surroundings when parking and manoeuvring. You could otherwise endanger yourself and others. : Example: sensors in the front bumper, left-hand side Range of the sensors General notes The sensors must be free of dirt, ice and slush; otherwise, they may not function correctly. Clean the sensors regularly, taking care not to scratch or damage them (Y page 330). G WARNING Make sure that no persons or animals are in the manoeuvring range. Otherwise, they could be injured. PARKTRONIC is an electronic parking aid with ultrasonic sensors. It indicates visually and audibly the distance between your vehicle and an object. Example: side view (Saloon) Driving systems 197 the minimum, the distance may no longer be shown. Example: top view (Saloon) The warning displays show the distance between the sensors and the obstacle. The warning display for the front area is located on the dashboard above the centre air vents. The warning display for the rear area is located on the roof lining in the rear compartment. Front sensors Centre approximately 100 cm Corners approximately 60 cm Rear sensors Centre approximately 120 cm Corners approximately 80 cm ! When parking, pay particular attention to objects above or below the sensors, such as flower pots or trailer drawbars. PARKTRONIC does not detect such objects when they are in the immediate vicinity of the vehicle. You could damage the vehicle or the objects. The sensors may not detect snow and objects which absorb ultrasonic sources. Ultrasonic sources, such as an automatic car wash, a lorry's compressed-air brakes or a pneumatic drill, could cause PARKTRONIC to malfunction. PARKTRONIC may not function correctly on uneven terrain. Warning display for the front area : Segments on the left-hand side of the vehicle ; Segments on the right-hand side of the vehicle = Segments showing operational readiness The warning display for each side of the vehicle is divided into five yellow and two red segments. PARKTRONIC is operational if yellow segments showing operational readiness = light up. The gear lever position or the transmission position of the automatic transmission determines which warning display is active when the engine is running. Minimum distance Centre approximately 20 cm Corners approximately 15 cm If there is an obstacle within this range, the relevant warning displays light up and a warning tone sounds. If the distance falls below Z Driving and parking Warning displays 198 Driving systems Deactivating/activating PARKTRONIC Driving and parking Manual transmission: Gear lever position Warning display Forwards gear or Neutral Front area activated Reverse gear, or Rear and front areas the vehicle is rolling activated backwards Automatic transmission: Transmission position Warning display D Front area activated R, N or the vehicle is rolling backwards Rear and front areas activated P No areas activated One or more segments light up as the vehicle approaches an obstacle, depending on the vehicle's distance from the obstacle. From the: Rsixth segment onwards, you will hear an intermittent warning tone for approximately two seconds. Rseventh segment onwards, you will hear a warning tone for approximately two seconds. This indicates that you have now reached the minimum distance. : Indicator lamp ; To deactivate/activate PARKTRONIC If indicator lamp : lights up, PARKTRONIC is deactivated. Parking Guidance is also deactivated. i PARKTRONIC is automatically activated when you turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. Towing a trailer PARKTRONIC is deactivated for the rear area when you establish an electrical connection between your vehicle and a trailer. ! Fold in the ball coupling if the trailer tow hitch is not required. PARKTRONIC measures the minimum detection range to an obstacle from the bumper, not the ball coupling. Driving systems 199 Problems with PARKTRONIC Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Only the red segments PARKTRONIC has malfunctioned and has switched off. in the PARKTRONIC X If problems persist, have PARKTRONIC checked at a qualified warning displays are lit. specialist workshop. You also hear a warning tone for approximately two seconds. PARKTRONIC is deactivated after approximately 20 seconds, and the indicator lamp in the PARKTRONIC button lights up. Only the red segments The PARKTRONIC sensors are dirty or there is interference. in the PARKTRONIC X Clean the PARKTRONIC sensors (Y page 330). warning displays are lit. X Switch the ignition back on. PARKTRONIC is deactivated after approxThe problem may be caused by an external source of radio or imately 20 seconds. ultrasound waves. X See if PARKTRONIC functions in a different location. Parking Guidance Important safety notes Parking Guidance is an electronic parking aid with ultrasound. Ultrasound is used to measure the road on both sides of the vehicle. A suitable parking space is indicated by the parking symbol. You receive steering instructions when parking. You may also use PARKTRONIC (Y page 196). G WARNING Parking Guidance is merely an aid and may recommend parking spaces that are not suitable for parking. For example, these might be spaces where parking is prohibited, driveways, unsuitable surfaces, etc. Parking Guidance measures the parking space as you drive past it. Any later changes to the parking space are not taken into account. For instance, this may be the case when the vehicle parked in front of or behind the space changes its position or when an obstacle is moved into the parking space. Parking Guidance does not relieve you of the responsibility for paying attention. If you rely solely on Parking Guidance, you could cause an accident and injure yourself and others. You are always responsible for safety and must continue to pay attention to your immediate surroundings when parking and manoeuvring. G WARNING Objects located above the height range of Parking Guidance will not be detected when the parking space is measured. These are not taken into account when the parking procedure is calculated, e.g. overhanging loads, tail sections or loading ramps of goods vehicles. In some circumstances, Parking Guidance Z Driving and parking Problem 200 Driving systems Driving and parking might therefore issue steering instructions too soon. This may lead to a collision. For this reason, you should avoid using Parking Guidance in such situations. G WARNING Make sure that no persons or animals are in the manoeuvring range. Otherwise, they could be injured. lead you across or onto the kerb. If necessary, cancel the parking procedure with Parking Guidance. ! If unavoidable, you should drive over obstacles such as kerbs slowly and not at a sharp angle. Otherwise, you may damage the wheels or tyres. Detecting parking spaces When PARKTRONIC is deactivated, Parking Guidance is also unavailable. Use Parking Guidance for parking spaces: Rthat are parallel to the direction of travel are on straight roads, not bends Rthat are on the same level as the road, i.e. not on the pavement, for example. Parking Guidance may not detect flat kerbs Parking tips: ; Parking symbol Ron = Detected parking space on the right Rthat narrow roads, drive as closely as possible past the parking space. Rparking spaces that are littered, overgrown or partially occupied by trailer drawbars might be identified incorrectly or not at all. Rsnowfall or heavy rain may lead to a parking space being measured inaccurately. Rpay attention to the PARKTRONIC (Y page 197) warning messages during the parking procedure. Rwhen transporting a load which protrudes from your vehicle, you must not use Parking Guidance. Rnever use Parking Guidance with snow chains or an emergency spare wheel fitted. Rmake sure that the tyre pressures are always correct. This has a direct effect on the steering instructions. Rthe way your vehicle is positioned in the parking space after parking is dependent on various factors. These include the position and shape of the vehicles parked in front and behind it and the conditions of the location. In some cases, Parking Guidance may guide you too far or not far enough into a parking space. In some cases, it may also Example: vehicles with automatic transmission : Detected parking space on the left Parking Guidance is automatically activated when you drive forwards. The system is operational at speeds of up to approximately 35 km/h. While in operation, the system independently locates and measures parking spaces on both sides of the vehicle. When driving at speeds below 30 km/h, you will see parking symbol ; as a status indicator in the instrument cluster. When a parking space has been detected, an arrow towards the right = or the left : also appears. Parking Guidance only displays parking spaces on the front-passenger side as standard. Parking spaces on the driver's side are displayed as soon as the turn signal on the driver's side is activated. To park on the driver's side, you must leave the driver's side turn signal switched on until you have engaged reverse gear. Driving systems 201 Parking Guidance will only detect parking spaces: Rthat are parallel to the direction of travel are at least 1.5 m wide Rthat are at least 1.3 m longer than your vehicle A parking space is displayed while you are driving past it, and until you are approximately 15 m away from it. Example: vehicles with automatic transmission X Parking G WARNING PARKTRONIC and Parking Guidance are merely parking aids and may not detect all obstacles. They do not relieve you of the responsibility of paying attention. You are always responsible for safety and must continue to pay attention to your immediate surroundings when parking and manoeuvring. You could otherwise endanger yourself and others. Stop the vehicle when the parking space symbol shows the desired parking space in the instrument cluster. X Vehicles with manual transmission: shift to reverse gear. Vehicles with automatic transmission: shift into position R. The following message appears in the multifunction display: Check vehicle sur‐ roundings Confirm with OK. X Press the a button on the multifunction steering wheel to confirm. The multifunction display switches to Parking Guidance. Depending on your distance from the parking space, the Please drive backwards message appears in the multifunction display. If necessary, reverse towards the parking space. This is indicated by an arrow pointing backwards. Continue reversing until you hear a tone. Stop – the parking position has been reached. The arrow is white. The Please steer to the right or Please steer to the left message appears in the multifunction display. X Example: vehicles with automatic transmission While the vehicle is stationary, turn the steering wheel in the specified direction until the arrow is white and a warning tone sounds. X To reverse into the parking space: maintain the steering wheel angle and reverse carefully. X Stop as soon as you hear a warning tone. The vehicle has reached the position in which you need to countersteer. The Please steer to the left or Please steer to the right message appears in the multifunction display. X Countersteering: while the vehicle is stationary, turn the steering wheel in the specified direction until the arrow is white and a warning tone sounds. X Z Driving and parking Rthat Driving systems 202 To reverse into the parking space: maintain the steering wheel angle and reverse carefully. X Stop as soon as you hear a warning tone, at the latest when PARKTRONIC sounds the continuous warning tone. The Parking Guidance finished message appears in the multifunction display and a warning tone sounds. You may be asked to steer in a different direction and then change gear. In this case, further displays in the multifunction display will direct you to the final position. Driving and parking X X X Manoeuvre if necessary. Always observe the warning messages displayed by PARKTRONIC (Y page 197). Reversing camera Important safety notes The reversing camera is an optical parking aid. It shows the area behind your vehicle in the COMAND Online display. G WARNING Make sure that no persons or animals are in the manoeuvring range. Otherwise, they could be injured. The reversing camera is located in the handle strip of the boot lid/tailgate. Cancelling Parking Guidance X Press the PARKTRONIC button on the centre console (Y page 198). Parking Guidance is cancelled immediately and PARKTRONIC is deactivated. Parking Guidance is cancelled automatically if it is no longer possible to guide you into the parking space, or if a malfunction occurs. The parking space symbol goes out and a warning tone sounds. The Parking Guid‐ ance cancelled message appears in the multifunction display. Towing a trailer For vehicles with a trailer tow hitch, the minimum length for parking spaces is slightly increased. If you have attached a trailer to your vehicle, you should not use Parking Guidance. When the electrical connection is established between your vehicle and the trailer, Parking Guidance ceases to be available. PARKTRONIC is deactivated for the rear area. : Reversing camera View through the camera The area behind the vehicle is displayed as a mirror image, as in the rear-view mirror. G WARNING The reversing camera is only an aid and may display obstacles in a distorted or incorrect manner, or may not even display them at all. The reversing camera does not relieve you of the responsibility to pay attention. The camera cannot show objects: Rvery near to the rear bumper Rbelow the rear bumper Rin the area immediately above the boot lid handle/tailgate handle recess You are always responsible for safety and must continue to pay attention to your immediate surroundings when parking and manoeuvring. This applies to the areas Driving systems G WARNING Under the following circumstances, the reversing camera will not function, or will function in a limited manner: Rif the boot lid/tailgate is open heavy rain, snow or fog Rat night or in very dark places Rif the camera is exposed to very bright light Rif the area is lit by fluorescent light (the display may flicker) Rif there is a sudden change in temperature, e.g. when driving into a heated garage in winter Rif the camera lens is dirty or obstructed Rif the rear of your vehicle is damaged. In this event, have the camera position and setting checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose. Do not use the reversing camera in these types of situation. You could otherwise injure others or damage objects and your vehicle while you are parking. Rin Activating the reversing camera Make sure that the key is in position 2 in the ignition lock. X Make sure that the "Reversing camera" function is selected in COMAND Online (see the separate operating instructions for COMAND Online). X Engage reverse gear. The area behind the vehicle is shown in the COMAND Online display. X ATTENTION ASSIST Important safety notes ATTENTION ASSIST helps you during long, monotonous journeys such as on motorways and trunk roads. It is active in the 80 km/h to 180 km/h range. If ATTENTION ASSIST detects typical indicators of fatigue or increasing lapses in concentration on the part of the driver, it suggests taking a break. G WARNING ATTENTION ASSIST is only an aid and may detect your tiredness or lapses in concentration too late or not at all. It is not a substitute for a well rested and attentive driver. Fatigue may cause you to recognise hazardous situations too late, misjudge a situation or react slower. For this reason, make sure you feel rested before you begin driving and during your journey. Always take breaks in good time and regularly, especially during long journeys. Otherwise, you may fail to recognise dangers in time, cause an accident and injure yourself and others. ATTENTION ASSIST assesses your level of fatigue or lapses in concentration by taking the following criteria into account: Ryour personal driving style, e.g. steering characteristics Rdriving conditions, e.g. time, driving time The functionality of ATTENTION ASSIST is restricted, and warnings may be delayed or not occur at all: Rif the road condition is poor, e.g. if the surface is uneven or if there are potholes Rif there is a strong side wind Rif you have adopted a sporty driving style with high cornering speeds or high rates of acceleration Rif you are predominantly driving slower than 80 km/h or faster than 180 km/h Rif you are currently using COMAND Online or making a telephone call with it Z Driving and parking behind, in front of and next to the vehicle. You could otherwise endanger yourself and others. 203 Driving systems 204 Rif the time has been set incorrectly active driving situations, such as when you change lanes or change your speed Driving and parking Rin Warning and display messages in the multifunction display Example: vehicles with automatic transmission X Activate ATTENTION ASSIST using the onboard computer (Y page 238). Symbol : appears in the multifunction display. If ATTENTION ASSIST is active, you will be warned no sooner than 20 minutes after your journey has begun. You will then hear an intermittent warning tone twice, and the Attention Assist: Drowsiness detec‐ ted message appears in the multifunction display. X If necessary, take a break. X Press the a button to confirm the message. On long journeys, take regular breaks in good time to allow yourself to rest properly. If you do not take a break and ATTENTION ASSIST still detects typical indicators of fatigue or increasing lapses in concentration, you will be warned again after 15 minutes at the earliest. ATTENTION ASSIST is reset and starts assessing your tiredness again when you continue your journey if: Ryou switch off the engine. take off your seat belt and open the driver's door, e.g. for a change of drivers or to take a break. Ryou Speed Limit Assist Important safety notes Speed Limit Assist shows you detected speed limits in the multifunction display. Data from the navigation system is also used for this purpose. The display appears if a traffic sign indicating a speed limit or the end of a speed limit is detected. If Speed Limit Assist does not detect any traffic signs, the speed limit from the digital road map is taken and shown in the display. Speed Limit Assist detects the traffic signs with a camera attached behind the top of the windscreen. : Speed Limit Assist camera G WARNING Speed Limit Assist is only an aid and may detect speed limit signs incorrectly or not at all. The system may be impaired or may not function if: Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to snow, rain, fog or spray. Rthere is glare, e.g. from the sun or from oncoming traffic. Rthe windscreen is dirty, misted up or covered, for instance by a sticker, in the vicinity of the camera. Rthe traffic signs are covered, for instance by dirt, snow or trees. Driving systems traffic signs are poorly illuminated. Rthere are ambiguous traffic signs, for instance near roadworks or on multi-lane roads. Traffic signs always have priority over the Speed Limit Assist display. Speed Limit Assist cannot detect road and traffic conditions. It is not a substitute for attentive driving. Always pay attention to traffic conditions and your surroundings. Otherwise, you may fail to recognise dangers in time, cause an accident and injure yourself and others. Information in the multifunction display X Activate the Speed Limit Assist warning function using the on-board computer (Y page 236). Symbol ; appears. Permanently showing detected traffic signs in the multifunction display If Speed Limit Assist is selected in the onboard computer, a traffic sign indicating the speed limit or end of a speed limit zone : appears in the multifunction display as soon as it is detected. Traffic sign indicating a speed limit : is generally displayed until: Ra traffic sign indicating the end of the speed limit is detected. make a turn. Ryou leave or enter a town. Rthe road type changes (e.g. motorway, country road). Ryou have travelled a certain minimum distance without the traffic sign being repeated or detected again. X Display Speed Limit Assist using the onboard computer (Y page 236). Ryou Example: vehicles featuring automatic transmission with a selector lever : Traffic sign indicating a speed limit or the end of a speed limit ; Speed Limit Assist is available and the warning function is switched on in the onboard computer = Units used in the traffic sign displayed Briefly showing detected traffic signs in the multifunction display When you activate the Speed Limit Assist warning function, a traffic sign indicating the speed limit or end of speed limit zone : may appear in the multifunction display. The traffic sign appears for approximately five seconds as soon as it is detected. Other items in the multifunction display are suppressed during this time. i You can also activate Speed Limit Assist using COMAND Online. The maximum permissible speed is shown in the COMAND display; see the COMAND operating instructions. Lane Tracking package General notes The Lane Tracking package consists of Blind Spot Assist (Y page 205) and Lane Keeping Assist (Y page 208). Blind Spot Assist Important safety notes Blind Spot Assist uses a radar sensor system to monitor the areas on both sides of your vehicle. It supports you from speeds of Z Driving and parking Rthe 205 Driving and parking 206 Driving systems 30 km/h. A warning display in the exterior mirrors draws your attention to vehicles detected in the monitored area. If you then switch on the corresponding turn signal to change lane, you will also receive an optical and audible collision warning. For monitoring, Active Blind Spot Assist uses sensors in the rear bumper. G WARNING Blind Spot Assist is only an aid designed to assist driving. It may fail to detect some vehicles and is no substitute for attentive driving. Blind Spot Assist cannot detect road and traffic conditions. It may fail to detect narrow vehicles, such as motorcycles or bicycles, or only detect them too late. Monitoring may be affected by dirty sensors, strong spray or poor visibility caused by snow, rain or mist, for example. In this case, vehicles are detected late or not at all. Always pay attention to traffic conditions and your surroundings. Otherwise, you may fail to recognise dangers in time, cause an accident and injure yourself and others. The radar sensor system is automatically deactivated near radio telescope facilities (Y page 389). For Blind Spot Assist to assist you when driving, the radar sensor system must be activated (Y page 242) and operational. Monitoring range of the sensors Blind Spot Assist monitors the area up to three metres behind your vehicle and directly next to your vehicle, as shown in the diagram. Example: Saloon G WARNING Blind Spot Assist monitors certain areas in the immediate vicinity of your vehicle. Vehicles that approach and drive past at high speeds are not detected. There is no display and no warning. If the lanes are very wide, it may not be possible to monitor the complete width of the neighbouring lane. For this reason, vehicles in the next lane may not be detected, especially if they are driving in a staggered formation in different lanes. This may be the case if vehicles are driving at the edge of their lane that is furthest away from your vehicle. Always pay attention to traffic conditions and your surroundings. Otherwise, you may fail to recognise dangers in time, cause an accident and injure yourself and others. If the lanes are narrow, vehicles driving in the lane beyond the lane next to your vehicle may be indicated, especially if the vehicles are not driving in the middle of their lane. This may be the case if the vehicles are driving on the inner side of their lane. Due to the nature of the system: Rwarnings may be issued in error when driv- ing close to crash barriers or similar solid lane borders. Rwarnings may be interrupted when driving alongside long vehicles, such as lorries, for a prolonged time. The two sensors for Blind Spot Assist are integrated into the sides of the rear bumper. Make sure that the bumper is free of dirt, ice or slush in the vicinity of the sensors. The radar sensors must not be covered, for example by cycle racks or overhanging loads. Following a severe impact or in the event of damage to the bumpers, have the function of the radar sensors checked at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Blind Spot Assist may otherwise not work properly. Indicator and warning display : Yellow indicator lamp/red warning lamp If Blind Spot Assist is switched on, indicator lamp : in the exterior mirrors lights up yellow up to a speed of 30 km/h. At speeds above 30 km/h, the indicator lamp goes out and Blind Spot Assist is operational. If a vehicle is detected within the monitoring range of Blind Spot Assist at speeds above 30 km/h, warning lamp : on the corresponding side lights up in red. This warning is always emitted when a vehicle enters the blind spot monitoring range from behind or from the side. When you overtake a vehicle, the warning only occurs if the difference in speed is less than 12 km/h. The yellow indicator lamp goes out if reverse gear is engaged. Blind Spot Assist is then deactivated. The brightness of the indicator/warning lamps is adjusted automatically according to the ambient light. G WARNING Blind Spot Assist is not active at speeds below 30 km/h, and the indicator lamps in the exterior mirrors are yellow. Vehicles in the monitoring range are then not indicated. Always pay attention to traffic conditions and your surroundings. Otherwise, you may fail to recognise dangers in time, cause an accident and injure yourself and others. Collision warning If a vehicle is detected in the monitoring range of Blind Spot Assist and you switch on the turn signal, a double warning tone sounds. Red warning lamp : flashes. If the turn signal remains on, detected vehicles are indicated by the flashing of red warning lamp :. There are no further warning tones. Switching on Blind Spot Assist X On vehicles without a navigation system, make sure that the Becker® MAP PILOT is connected; see the separate operating instructions for Audio 20. X Make sure that the radar sensor system (Y page 242) and Blind Spot Assist (Y page 238) are activated in the on-board computer. X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. Warning lamps : light up red in the exterior mirrors for approximately 1.5 seconds and then turn yellow. Trailer towing If you attach a trailer, make sure that you have correctly established the electrical connection. This can be accomplished by checking Z 207 Driving and parking Driving systems Driving and parking 208 Driving systems the trailer lighting. Blind Spot Assist is then deactivated. The indicator lamp in the exterior mirrors lights up yellow, and the Blind Spot Assist currently unavailable See Owner's Manual message appears in the multifunction display. i You can deactivate the indicator lamps in the exterior mirrors. To do so, switch off Blind Spot Assist if: Rthe key is in position 2 in the ignition lock. Rthe engine is not running. Rthe electrical connection to the trailer has been established. Lane Keeping Assist Important safety notes Lane Keeping Assist monitors the area in front of your vehicle by means of a camera at the top of the windscreen. Lane Keeping Assist detects lane markings on the road and warns you before you leave your lane unintentionally. : Lane Keeping Assist camera If you have chosen the Display unit Speed-/odometer(Y page 239) function in the on-board computer and select km as the unit of measurement, Active Lane Keeping Assist is active from speeds of 60 km/h. If the miles display unit is selected, the assistance range begins at 40 mph. G WARNING Lane Keeping Assist does not keep your vehicle in its lane. It is only an aid and may detect the lane markings on the road incorrectly or not at all. The system may be impaired or may not function if: Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to insufficient illumination of the road, or due to snow, rain, fog or spray. Rthere is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, the sun, or reflection from other vehicles. Rthe windscreen is dirty, misted up or covered, for instance by a sticker, in the vicinity of the camera Rseveral or no lane markings for a single lane are present. Rthe lane markings are worn away, dark or covered up, e.g. by dirt or snow. Rthe distance to the vehicle in front is too small and the lane markings thus cannot be detected. Rthe lane markings on the road are unclear, e.g. near roadworks. Rthe lane markings change quickly, e.g. lanes branch off, cross one another or merge. Rthe road is narrow and winding. Lane Keeping Assist cannot detect road and traffic conditions. It is not a substitute for attentive driving. You are responsible for the vehicle's speed, braking in good time, and steering correctly. Always adapt your driving style to suit the prevailing road and weather conditions. Always pay attention to traffic conditions and your surroundings. Otherwise, you may fail to recognise dangers in time, cause an accident and injure yourself and others. A warning may be given if a front wheel passes over a lane marking. It will warn you by means of intermittent vibration in the steering wheel for up to 1.5 seconds. Driving systems Ryou approach the outer lane marking on a bend. Rthe road has very wide lanes, e.g. a motorway. Rthe system recognises solid lane markings. The warning vibration occurs later if: Rthe road has narrow lanes. cut the corner on a bend. No warning vibration occurs if: Ryou Ryou clearly and actively steer, brake, or accelerate. Ryou cut the corner on a sharp bend. Ra driving safety system intervenes, such as ABS, BAS or ESP®. Ryou have switched on the turn signals. In this event, the warnings are suppressed for a certain period of time. Activating Lane Keeping Assist Active Driving Assistance package General notes The Active Driving Assistance package consists of DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 183), Active Blind Spot Assist (Y page 209) and Active Lane Keeping Assist (Y page 212). Active Blind Spot Assist Important safety notes Active Blind Spot Assist uses a radar sensor system to monitor the side areas of your vehicle which are in back of the driver. A warning display in the exterior mirrors draws your attention to vehicles detected in the monitored area. If you then switch on the corresponding turn signal to change lane, you will also receive an optical and audible collision warning. If a risk of lateral collision is detected, corrective braking may help you avoid a collision. To support the course-correcting brake application, Active Blind Spot Assist also uses the forward-facing radar sensor system. Active Blind Spot Assist supports you from a speed of approximately 30 km/h. G WARNING Active Blind Spot Assist is only an aid and may detect vehicles/obstacles incorrectly or not at all. The system may be impaired or may not function if: Example: vehicles with automatic transmission X Activate Lane Keeping Assist using the onboard computer (Y page 238). Symbol : appears in the multifunction display. If you drive at speeds above 60 km/h and lane markings are detected, symbol : is shown in green. Lane Keeping Assist is ready for use. Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to snow, rain, fog or spray. Rthe rear and/or front sensors are dirty. Active Blind Spot Assist may not detect narrow vehicles, such as motorcycles or bicycles, or only detect them too late. It cannot detect vehicles which are overtaken at a small distance and then enter the blind spot area. Active Blind Spot Assist cannot detect road and traffic conditions. It is not a substitute for attentive driving. You are responsible for the vehicle's speed, braking in good time, and steering correctly. Always adapt your driving Z Driving and parking In order that you are warned only when necessary and in good time if you cross the lane marking, the system recognises certain conditions and warns you accordingly. The warning vibration occurs earlier if: 209 Driving and parking 210 Driving systems style to suit the prevailing road and weather conditions. Always pay attention to traffic conditions and your surroundings. Otherwise, you may fail to recognise dangers in time, cause an accident and injure yourself and others. The radar sensor system is automatically deactivated near radio telescope facilities (Y page 389). For Active Blind Spot Assist to assist you when driving, the radar sensor system must be activated (Y page 242) and operational. Monitoring range Active Blind Spot Assist monitors the area up to three metres behind your vehicle and directly next to your vehicle as shown in the diagram. For this purpose, Active Blind Spot Assist uses radar sensors in the rear bumper. Example: Saloon G WARNING Active Blind Spot Assist monitors certain areas in the immediate vicinity of your vehicle. Vehicles that approach and drive past at high speeds are not detected. No visual nor audible warnings are emitted and the system does not brake the vehicle to correct your course. If the lanes are very wide, it may not be possible to monitor the complete width of the neighbouring lane. For this reason, vehicles in the next lane may not be detected, especially if they are driving in a staggered formation. This may be the case if vehicles are driving at the edge of their lane that is furthest away from your vehicle. Always pay attention to traffic conditions and your surroundings. Otherwise, you may fail to recognise dangers in time, cause an accident and injure yourself and others. If the lanes are narrow, vehicles driving in the lane beyond the lane next to your vehicle may be indicated, especially if the vehicles are not driving in the middle of their lane. This may be the case if there are vehicles at the edge of their lane nearest your vehicle. Due to the nature of the system: Rwarnings may be issued in error when driv- ing close to crash barriers or similar solid lane borders. Rwarnings may be interrupted when driving alongside long vehicles, such as lorries, for a prolonged time. Two Active Blind Spot Assist radar sensors are integrated into the front and rear bumpers respectively. An additional radar sensor is located behind the cover in the radiator grille. Make sure that the bumpers are free of dirt, ice or slush around the sensors. The rear sensors must not be covered, e.g. by bicycle racks or overhanging loads. Following a severe impact or in the event of damage to the bumpers, have the function of the radar sensors checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Blind Spot Assist may otherwise not work properly. Indicator and warning display : Yellow indicator lamp/red warning lamp When Active Blind Spot Assist is activated, indicator lamp : in the exterior mirrors lights up in yellow at speeds of up to 30 km/h. At speeds above 30 km/h, the indicator lamp goes out and Active Blind Spot Assist is operational. If a vehicle is detected within the monitoring range of Blind Spot Assist at speeds above 30 km/h, warning lamp : on the corresponding side lights up red. This warning is always emitted when a vehicle enters the blind spot monitoring range from behind or from the side. When you overtake a vehicle, the warning only occurs if the difference in speed is less than 12 km/h. The yellow indicator lamp goes out if reverse gear is engaged. Active Blind Spot Assist is then no longer active. The brightness of the indicator/warning lamps is adjusted automatically according to the ambient light. G WARNING Active Blind Spot Assist is not active at speeds below 30 km/h. The indicator lamps in the exterior mirrors are yellow. Vehicles in the monitoring range are then not indicated. Always pay attention to traffic conditions and your surroundings. Otherwise, you may fail to recognise dangers in time, cause an accident and injure yourself and others. Visual and acoustic collision warning If you switch on the appropriate turn signals and a vehicle is detected in the side monitoring range, you will receive a visual and acoustic collision warning. You will hear a double warning tone and red warning lamp : flashes. If the turn signal remains on, detected vehicles are indicated by the flashing of red warning lamp :. There are no further warning tones. Course-correcting brake application If Active Blind Spot Assist detects a risk of a lateral collision in the monitoring range, a course-correcting brake application is carried out. This is designed to help you avoid a collision. The course-correcting brake application is available in the range between 30 km/h and 200 km/h. If a course-correcting brake application occurs, red warning lamp : flashes in the exterior mirror and the following is shown in the multifunction display, for example: Example: vehicles with automatic transmission G WARNING Active Blind Spot Assist is only an aid designed to assist driving. It is not a substitute for attentive driving. Automatic braking by the system may not always be sufficient to avoid a collision. In such cases, you need to steer, brake or accelerate yourself. In very rare cases, the system may detect a risk of collision where there is none and brake in error near crash barriers or similar road boundaries. Active Blind Spot Assist cannot detect all traffic situations and road users. Ensure at all times that there is sufficient lateral distance between you and other road Z 211 Driving and parking Driving systems Driving and parking 212 Driving systems users or obstacles. You can, for example, countersteer gently or depress the accelerator pedal at any time to cancel inappropriate braking action. You are responsible for the vehicle's speed, correct steering and for braking in good time. Always adapt your driving style to suit the prevailing road and weather conditions. Always pay attention to traffic conditions and your surroundings. Otherwise, you may fail to recognise dangers in time, cause an accident and injure yourself and others. Trailer towing If you attach a trailer, make sure that you have correctly established the electrical connection. This can be accomplished by checking the trailer lighting. Active Blind Spot Assist is then deactivated. The indicator lamp in the exterior mirrors lights up yellow, and the Active Blind Spot Assist currently unavailable See Owner's Manual message appears in the multifunction display. Either a very slight course-correcting brake application, or none at all, may occur if: Important safety notes Active Lane Keeping Assist monitors the area in front of your vehicle by means of a camera at the top of the windscreen. Active Lane Keeping Assist detects lane markings on the road and warns you before you leave your lane unintentionally. If you do not react to the warning, a lane-correcting application of the brakes can bring the vehicle back into the original lane. Rthere are vehicles or obstacles, e.g. crash barriers, on both sides of your vehicle. Ra vehicle approaches too closely on the side. Ryou have adopted a sporty driving style with high cornering speeds. Ryou brake or accelerate decisively. Ra driving safety system intervenes, such as ESP® or PRE-SAFE® Brake. RESP® is deactivated. Ra loss of tyre pressure or a defective tyre is detected. Activating Active Blind Spot Assist X On vehicles without a navigation system, make sure that the Becker® MAP PILOT is connected; see the separate operating instructions for Audio 20. X Make sure that the radar sensor system (Y page 242) and Active Blind Spot Assist (Y page 238) are activated in the on-board computer. X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. Warning lamps : light up red in the exterior mirrors for approximately 1.5 seconds and then turn yellow. Active Lane Keeping Assist : Active Lane Keeping Assist camera If you have selected the Display unit Speed-/odometer(Y page 239) function in the on-board computer and select km as the unit of measurement, Active Lane Keeping Assist is active from speeds of 60 km/h. If the miles display unit is selected, the assistance range begins at 40 mph. G WARNING Active Lane Keeping Assist does not keep your vehicle in its lane. It is only an aid and Driving systems Rseveral or no lane markings for a single lane are present. is poor visibility, e.g. due to insufficient illumination of the road, or due to snow, rain, fog or spray. Rthere is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, the sun, or reflection from other vehicles. Rthe windscreen is dirty, misted up or covered, for instance by a sticker, in the vicinity of the camera. Rthe lane markings are worn away, dark or covered up, e.g. by dirt or snow. Rthe distance to the vehicle in front is too small and the lane markings thus cannot be detected. Rthe lane markings on the road are unclear, e.g. near roadworks. Rthe lane markings change quickly, e.g. lanes branch off, cross one another or merge. Rthe road is narrow and winding. Active Lane Keeping Assist cannot detect road and traffic conditions. It is not a substitute for attentive driving. You are responsible for the vehicle's speed, braking in good time, and steering correctly. Always adapt your driving style to suit the prevailing road and weather conditions. Always pay attention to traffic conditions and your surroundings. Otherwise, you may fail to recognise dangers in time, cause an accident and injure yourself and others. Rthere Warning vibration in the steering wheel A warning may be given if a front wheel passes over a lane marking. You will then be warned by means of an intermittent vibration in the steering wheel for up to 1.5 seconds. In order that you are warned only when necessary and in good time if you cross the lane marking, the system recognises certain conditions and warns you accordingly. The warning vibration occurs earlier if: Ryou approach the outer lane marking on a bend. Rthe road has very wide lanes, e.g. a motorway. Rthe system recognises solid lane markings. The warning vibration occurs later if: Rthe road has narrow lanes. cut the corner on a bend. No warning vibration occurs if: Ryou Ryou clearly and actively steer, brake, or accelerate. Ryou cut the corner on a sharp bend. Ra driving safety system intervenes, such as ABS, BAS or ESP®. Ryou have switched on the turn signals. In this event, the warnings are suppressed for a certain period of time. Lane-correcting brake application If you leave your lane under certain circumstances, the vehicle will brake briefly on one side. This is designed to help you bring the vehicle back into the original lane. This function is available in the range between 60 km/h and 200 km/h. A lane-correcting brake application can only be made after driving over a solid, recognisable lane marking. Before this, a warning must be emitted by means of intermittent vibration in the steering wheel. In addition, a lane with lane markings on both sides must be recognised. The brake application also slightly reduces driving speed. If a lane-correcting brake application occurs, the following appears in the multifunction display: Z Driving and parking may detect the lane markings on the road incorrectly or not at all. The system may be impaired or may not function if: 213 214 Driving systems No lane-correcting brake application occurs if: Driving and parking Ryou Example: vehicles with automatic transmission i A further lane-correcting brake applica- tion can only occur after your vehicle has returned to the original lane. G WARNING Active Lane Keeping Assist does not keep your vehicle in its lane. It is only an aid designed to assist driving. It is not a substitute for attentive driving. Corrective braking may not always be sufficient to return your vehicle to its original lane. In such cases, you must steer the vehicle yourself to ensure that it does not leave the lane. Active Lane Keeping Assist cannot detect the current traffic situation or other road users. Ensure at all times that there is sufficient lateral distance between you and other road users or obstacles. In rare cases, broken lines or certain structures on the road surface may be detected by the system as solid lane markings. You can, for example, countersteer gently at any time to cancel inappropriate braking action, e.g. if you intentionally drive across a solid lane marking. Active Lane Keeping Assist cannot take weather conditions into account. You are responsible for the vehicle's speed, correct steering and for braking in good time. Always adapt your driving style to suit the prevailing road and weather conditions. Always pay attention to traffic conditions and your surroundings. Otherwise, you may fail to recognise dangers in time, cause an accident and injure yourself and others. clearly and actively steer, brake, or accelerate. Ryou cut the corner on a sharp bend. Ryou have switched on the turn signals. Ra driving safety system intervenes, such as ESP®, PRE-SAFE® Brake or Active Blind Spot Assist. Ryou have adopted a sporty driving style with high cornering speeds or high rates of acceleration. Ron vehicles with a trailer tow hitch, the electrical connection to the trailer has been correctly established. RESP® is deactivated. Rthe transmission is not in position D. Ra loss of tyre pressure or a defective tyre has been detected and displayed. Active Lane Keeping Assist does not detect road and traffic conditions. An inappropriate brake application may be interrupted at any time if: Ryou steer slightly in the opposite direction. use a turn signal. Ryou clearly brake or accelerate. A lane-correcting brake application is interrupted automatically if: Ryou Ra driving safety system intervenes, such as ESP®, PRE-SAFE® Brake or Active Blind Spot Assist. Rlane markings can no longer be recognised. Activating Active Lane Keeping Assist Example: vehicles with automatic transmission Towing a trailer Activate Active Lane Keeping Assist using the on-board computer (Y page 238). Symbol : appears in the multifunction display. If you drive at speeds above 60 km/h and lane markings are detected, symbol : is shown in green. Active Lane Keeping Assist is ready for use. Trailer towing If you attach a trailer, make sure that you have correctly established the electrical connection. This can be accomplished by checking the trailer lighting. G WARNING If the Check trailer hitch locking mechanism message appears in the multifunction display while the vehicle is in motion, pull over immediately and check whether the ball coupling is correctly engaged. G WARNING Always observe the maximum speed permitted in Germany for vehicle/trailer combinations, even in countries where higher speeds are permitted. This lowers the risk of an accident. G WARNING Towing a trailer Notes on towing a trailer Important safety notes G WARNING When reversing the vehicle towards the trailer, make sure there is nobody between the trailer and the vehicle. Couple and uncouple the trailer carefully. If you do not couple the trailer to the towing vehicle correctly, the trailer could become detached. Make sure that the following values are not exceeded: Rthe permissible trailer drawbar noseweight Rthe permissible trailer load Rthe permissible rear axle load of the towing vehicle maximum permissible gross vehicle weight of both the towing vehicle and the trailer You will find the applicable permissible values, which must not be exceeded, in the vehicle documents. You will find the values approved by the manufacturer on the vehicle identification plates and those for the towing vehicle in the "Technical data" section. Rthe Never depress the brake pedal continuously while the vehicle is in motion, e.g. never cause the brakes to rub by applying constant slight pedal pressure. This causes the brake system to overheat, increases the braking distance and can lead to the brakes failing completely. G WARNING On no account should you attempt to draw the vehicle/trailer combination out by increasing speed. G WARNING If you exceed the maximum noseweight when using a carrier system on the ball coupling: Rthe carrier system may be thrown around. Rthe ball coupling and the carrier system may become detached from the vehicle. As a result, you may injure others or cause an accident. Do not exceed the maximum noseweight. When driving with a loaded carrier system, always adjust your driving style to the prevailing road, traffic and weather conditions and drive particularly carefully. You can use carrier systems, e.g. bicycle racks or load-bearing implements on the ball coupling. The maximum noseweight of 75 kg applies when using carrier systems on the ball coupling. Z Driving and parking X 215 216 Towing a trailer General information Driving and parking i When towing a trailer, set the tyre pres- sure on the rear axle of the towing vehicle for a maximum load; see the tyre pressure table in the fuel filler flap (Y page 361). You will find installation dimensions and loads in the "Technical data" section (Y page 387). The maximum permissible trailer drawbar noseweight on the ball coupling is 75 kg. However, the actual noseweight must not exceed the value given on the trailer tow hitch and trailer identification plates. The lowest weight applies. ! Use a noseweight as close as possible to the maximum permissible noseweight. Do not use a noseweight of less than 50 kg, otherwise the trailer may come loose. Bear in mind that the payload and the rear axle load are reduced by the actual noseweight. Please note that when towing a trailer, PARKTRONIC (Y page 196), parking guidance (Y page 199) and Blind Spot Assist (Y page 205) are only available with limitations, or not at all. i The height of the ball coupling changes with the load of the vehicle. If necessary, use a trailer with a height-adjustable drawbar. Driving tips i Observe the notes on ESP® trailer stabilisation (Y page 77). In Germany, the maximum permissible speed for vehicle/trailer combinations depends on the type of trailer, and is either 80 km/h or 100 km/h. In some countries, higher maximum speeds are permissible for vehicle/ trailer combinations. Before beginning the journey, check the trailer's documents to see what the maximum permitted speed is. For certain Mercedes-Benz vehicles, the maximum permissible rear axle load is increased when towing a trailer. Refer to the "Technical data" section to find out whether this applies to your vehicle. If you utilise any of the added maximum rear axle load when towing a trailer, the vehicle/trailer combination may not exceed a maximum speed of 100 km/h for reasons concerning the operating permit. This also applies in countries in which the permissible maximum speed for vehicle/ trailer combinations is above 100 km/h. When towing a trailer, your vehicle's handling characteristics will be different in comparison to when driving without a trailer. The vehicle/trailer combination: Ris heavier restricted in its acceleration and gradient-climbing capability Rhas an increased braking distance Ris affected more by strong crosswinds Rdemands more sensitive steering Rconsumes more fuel On long and steep downhill gradients, you must shift to a lower gear in good time, or on vehicles with automatic transmission, select the shift range 1, 2 or 3. Ris i This also applies if you have activated cruise control, SPEEDTRONIC or DISTRONIC PLUS. This will use the braking effect of the engine, so less braking will be required to maintain the speed. This relieves the load on the brake system and prevents the brakes from overheating and wearing too quickly. If you need additional braking, depress the brake pedal repeatedly rather than continuously. Towing a trailer 217 Driving tips a greater distance from the vehicle in front than when driving without a trailer. RAvoid braking abruptly. If possible, brake gently at first to allow the trailer to run on. Then, increase the braking force rapidly. RThe values given for gradient-climbing capabilities from a standstill refer to sea level. When driving in mountainous areas, note that the power output of the engine, and consequently the vehicle's gradientclimbing capability, decrease with increasing altitude. If the trailer swings from side to side: Driving and parking RMaintain Saloon Do not accelerate. Do not counter-steer. X Brake if necessary. X X Folding out the ball coupling Before you can tow a trailer with your vehicle, you must fold out the ball coupling. The release wheel is located behind the lefthand side trim panel in the boot/luggage compartment. G WARNING Make sure that the ball coupling is engaged, either in its folded-out or folded-in position, and that the indicator lamp is off. Do not turn the release wheel when a trailer is coupled up. Otherwise, the trailer might detach. Estate To open the cover (Saloon): turn handle : anti-clockwise and fold down cover ;. X To open the cover (Estate): pull handle : in the direction of the arrow and fold down cover ;. X Pull out release wheel =. X Turn release wheel = anti-clockwise until the ball coupling releases and folds out from under the rear bumper. Indicator lamp ? flashes. X Z Towing a trailer 218 Establish the electrical connection between the vehicle and the trailer. X Check that the trailer lighting system is working. Driving and parking X Decoupling a trailer G WARNING Pull the ball coupling in the direction of the arrow until it engages in a vertical position. Indicator lamp ? goes out. The power socket folds down automatically. Vehicles with a 4-button multifunction steering wheel: the Trailer hitch Check lock mech. message is shown in the multifunction display until the ball coupling has engaged. Vehicles with a 12-button multifunction steering wheel: the Trailer hitch Check lock mech. message is shown in the multifunction display until the ball coupling has engaged. X Remove the protective cap from the ball coupling and store it in a safe place. X Make sure that the ball of the ball coupling is clean and that, depending on the trailer specification, it is greased or dry (without grease) when used. X Coupling up a trailer G WARNING Do not disconnect a trailer with an engaged overrun brake. Otherwise, your hand could become trapped between the bumper and trailer drawbar. Make sure that the transmission is in position P. X Apply the parking brake. X Position the trailer level behind the vehicle. X Couple up the trailer. X As soon as you raise the trailer drawbar, the unladen vehicle rises slightly. The vehicle then lowers to driving level. Make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of the wheel arch or the underbody. You could otherwise trap yourself or others. G WARNING The vehicle is lowered as soon as you disconnect the trailer cable. Make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of the wheel arch or the underbody. You could otherwise trap yourself or others. As soon as you decouple the trailer, the unladen vehicle rises slightly. Make sure that you or others are not injured in the process. ! Do not disconnect a trailer with an engaged overrun brake. Otherwise, your vehicle could be damaged by the rebounding of the overrun brake. Make sure that the transmission is in position P. X Apply the parking brake. X Secure the trailer against rolling away. X Remove the trailer cable and decouple the trailer. X Folding in the ball coupling i Fold the ball coupling back in if you are not using the trailer tow hitch. G WARNING Make sure that no persons or animals are in the pivoting range of the ball coupling. Otherwise, they could be injured. Towing a trailer Place the protective cap on the ball coupling. The release wheel is located behind the lefthand side trim panel in the boot/luggage compartment. Saloon Pull out release wheel =. X Turn release wheel = anti-clockwise. The ball coupling unlocks and lowers. Indicator lamp ? flashes. X Driving and parking X X Press the ball coupling in the direction of the arrow until it engages behind the bumper. Indicator lamp ? goes out and the message in the multifunction display disappears. Trailer power supply Estate To open the cover (Saloon): turn handle : anti-clockwise and fold down cover ;. X To open the cover (Estate): pull handle : in the direction of the arrow and fold down cover ;. X 219 When it leaves the factory, your vehicle's trailer socket is equipped with a permanent power supply and a power supply that is switched on via the ignition lock. The permanent power supply is supplied via trailer socket pin 9. The power supply that is switched on via the ignition lock is supplied via trailer socket pin 10. ! You can connect consumers with a power rating of up to 240 W to the permanent power supply and up to 180 W to the power supply that is switched on via the ignition lock. You must not charge a trailer battery using the power supply. The trailer's permanent power supply is switched off in the event of low vehicle supply voltage and after six hours at the latest. Z Driving and parking 220 Towing a trailer You can obtain further information about installing the trailer electrics from a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. X To switch the connected power supply on or off: turn the key in the ignition lock to position 2 or 0 respectively. Bulb failure indicator for LED lamps i If LED lamps are fitted in the trailer, an error message may appear in the multifunction display even if there is no fault. The reason for the error message may be that the current has fallen below the minimum of 50 milliamperes (mA). To ensure reliable operation of the bulb failure indicator, each LED chain in the trailer lighting must be guaranteed a minimum current of 50 mA. Trailer with 7-pin connector General information If your trailer has a 7-pin connector, you can connect it to the 13-pin socket on the ball coupling using an adapter or, if necessary, an adapter cable. Both of these can be obtained at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Fitting the adapter Open the socket cover. X Insert the connector with lug : into groove ; on the socket and turn the connector clockwise to the stop. X Let the cover engage. X If you are using an adapter cable, secure the cable to the trailer with cable ties. X ! Make sure that there is sufficient cable play so that the cable cannot become detached when cornering. Useful information ............................ Important safety notes .................... Displays and operation (4-button multifunction steering wheel) ......... Displays and operation (12-button multifunction steering wheel) ......... Display messages ............................. Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster ............................ 222 222 222 226 248 291 On-board computer and displays 221 On-board computer and displays 222 Displays and operation (4-button multifunction steering wheel) Useful information i This Owner's Manual describes all models and all standard and optional equipment available to your vehicle at the time of publication of the Owner's Manual. Countryspecific deviations are possible. Please note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all features described. This also applies to safety-relevant systems and functions. i Please read the information on qualified specialist workshops (Y page 28). Important safety notes You will find an illustration of the instrument cluster in the "At a glance" section (Y page 34). G WARNING Only use the on-board computer when road and traffic conditions permit. You would otherwise be distracted and unable to concentrate properly on driving, and could cause an accident. G WARNING No messages will be displayed if either the instrument cluster or the multifunction display is inoperative. As a result, you will not be able to see information about your driving conditions, such as speed, outside temperature, warning and indicator lamps, display messages or system failures. Driving characteristics may be impaired. Adjust your driving style and vehicle speed accordingly. Contact a qualified specialist workshop immediately. G WARNING The on-board computer only records and displays malfunctions and warnings from certain systems. For this reason, you should always make sure that your vehicle is safe to use. You could otherwise cause an accident by driving an unsafe vehicle. G WARNING The operating safety of your vehicle could be impaired if maintenance work is carried out incorrectly. This could cause you to lose control of your vehicle and cause an accident. Moreover, the safety systems may no longer be able to protect you or others as they are designed to do. Always have service work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Displays and operation (4-button multifunction steering wheel) Coolant temperature gauge The coolant temperature gauge is in the instrument cluster on the left-hand side. Under normal operating conditions and with the specified coolant level, the coolant temperature may rise to 120 †. The coolant temperature may rise to the top end of the scale at high outside temperatures and on long uphill stretches. Rev counter The red band in the rev counter indicates the engine's overrevving range. ! Do not drive in the overrevving range. Doing so will damage the engine. The fuel supply is interrupted to protect the engine when the red band is reached. Outside temperature display The outside temperature display is in the instrument cluster (Y page 34). Displays and operation (4-button multifunction steering wheel) On-board computer and displays G WARNING At temperatures just above freezing point, the street may be icy, especially in wooded areas or on bridges. If you do not adapt your driving style to the conditions, the vehicle could skid. For this reason, adapt your driving style and speed to the weather conditions. Changes in the outside temperature are displayed after a short delay. Operating the on-board computer The on-board computer is activated as soon as you turn the key to position 1 in the ignition lock. You can use the on-board computer to call up information relating to your vehicle and to make and adjust settings. i You can have certain functions set at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Example: Rautomatic door lock Rspeed limit for winter tyres You can obtain information about this at any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. You can control the multifunction display and the settings in the on-board computer using the buttons on the multifunction steering wheel. 223 : Multifunction display ; W Increases the volume = X Decreases the volume ? C Scrolls through lists/adjusts val- ues/confirms display messages A V Selects a menu i If you press and hold the V button, the standard display appears. i In the Day. driv. lights: menu, you can use the W or X button to switch the function on or off. You cannot adjust the volume when in the Day. driv. lights: menu. Multifunction display To activate the multifunction display: Rswitch on the ignition. on the lights. Ropen the driver's door. Rswitch Z On-board computer and displays 224 Displays and operation (4-button multifunction steering wheel) Values and settings as well as display messages are shown in multifunction display :. Displays and operation (4-button multifunction steering wheel) On-board computer and displays Menu overview Function : Standard display(Y page 225) Shows the standard display or resets the trip meter ; Trip computer(Y page 226) Displays or resets the trip computer = Range(Y page 226) ? Current fuel consumption A Digital speedometer B Message memory(Y page 248) C Service(Y page 326) Calls up the service due date D Tyre pressure loss warning system(Y page 362) E Daytime driving lights(Y page 226) Standard display 225 X Press and hold the V button on the steering wheel, until the standard display with trip meter : and total distance recorder ; is shown. Z Displays and operation (12-button multifunction steering wheel) On-board computer and displays 226 To reset the trip meter: press and hold the V until the standard display appears. X Press and hold the C button until the value has been reset. X Trip computer X Press the V button on the steering wheel repeatedly until the trip computer appears. : Distance ; Average speed = Time ? Average fuel consumption X To reset the trip computer: press and hold the C button on the steering wheel until the values have been reset. Calling up the range X Press the V button on the steering wheel repeatedly until the approximate range appears. The approximate range which can be covered depends on the fuel level and your current driving style. If there is only a small amount of fuel left in the fuel tank, the display shows a vehicle being refuelled C instead of the range. Switching the daytime driving lights on/off If you have activated the Day. driv. lights: function and the light switch is in the à position, the daytime driving lights are automatically switched on during daylight hours when the engine is running. When it is dark, the side lamps and the dipped-beam headlamps are switched on automatically. On vehicles with daytime driving lamps, the factory setting is on. If you want to change the setting for the Day. driv. lights: function, you have to turn the key in the ignition lock to position 1. X Press the V button on the steering wheel repeatedly until the Day. driv. lights: menu appears. You will see the selected setting: on or off. X Press the W or X button to change the setting. Displays and operation (12-button multifunction steering wheel) Coolant temperature gauge The coolant temperature gauge is in the instrument cluster on the left-hand side. Under normal operating conditions and with the specified coolant level, the coolant temperature may rise to 120 †. At high outside temperatures and when driving uphill, the coolant temperature may rise to the end of the scale. Rev counter The red band in the rev counter indicates the engine's overrevving range. ! Do not drive in the overrevving range. Doing so will damage the engine. The fuel supply is interrupted to protect the engine when the red band is reached. Outside temperature display The outside temperature display is in the multifunction display (Y page 228). G WARNING At temperatures just above freezing point, the street may be icy, especially in wooded areas or on bridges. If you do not adapt your driving style to the conditions, the vehicle could skid. For this reason, adapt your driving style and speed to the weather conditions. Changes in the outside temperature are displayed after a short delay. Speedometer with segments The segments in the speedometer indicate which speed range is available. Cruise control (Y page 178) activated: The segments light up from the stored speed to the maximum speed. Variable SPEEDTRONIC (Y page 180) activated: The segments light up from the start of the scale to the selected limit speed. DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 183) activated: One or two segments in the set speed range light up. DISTRONIC PLUS detects a vehicle in front: The segments between the speed of the vehicle in front and the stored speed light up. Operating the on-board computer Overview The on-board computer is activated as soon as you turn the key to position 1 in the ignition lock. You can control the multifunction display and the settings in the on-board computer using the buttons on the multifunction steering wheel. : Multifunction display ; Switches on LINGUATRONIC; see the sep- arate operating instructions = Right control panel ? Left control panel A Back button Left control panel = ; RCalls 9 : Press briefly: up the menu and menu bar RScrolls through lists a submenu or function RIn the Audio menu: selects a stored station, an audio track or a video scene RIn the Tel (telephone) menu: switches to the phone book and selects a name or telephone number RSelects Z 227 On-board computer and displays Displays and operation (12-button multifunction steering wheel) On-board computer and displays 228 Displays and operation (12-button multifunction steering wheel) 9 : a Press and hold: RIn the Audio menu: selects the previous/next station or selects an audio track or a video scene using rapid scrolling RIn the Tel (telephone) menu: starts rapid scrolling through the phone book % sage the Tel (telephone) menu: switches to the telephone book and starts dialling the selected number RIn the Audio menu: stops the station search function at the desired station Right control panel Press briefly: RBack RSwitches off LINGUATRONIC display messages or calls up the last Trip menu function used RExits the telephone book/redial memory RHides RConfirms selection/display mesRIn ~ Back button % Press and hold: RCalls up the standard display in the Trip menu Multifunction display Values and settings as well as display messages are shown in the multifunction display. RRejects or ends a call telephone book/redial memory RExits 6 RMakes or accepts a call to the redial memory RSwitches W X RAdjusts 8 RMute the volume : Description field ; Menu bar = Drive program ? Outside temperature or speed (Y page 239) A Transmission position X To show menu bar ;: press the = or ; button on the steering wheel. Vehicles with manual transmission: the indicators in the lower part of the multifunction display differ from the display shown here. Displays and operation (12-button multifunction steering wheel) On-board computer and displays The following messages can appear in the multifunction display: Z Shift recommendation (Y page 161) XjY Parking Guidance (Y page 199) è Rear window wiper (Y page 130) _ Adaptive Highbeam Assist (Y page 122) À ATTENTION ASSIST (Y page 203) ¤ ECO start/stop function (Y page 156) Ä Speed Limit Assist (Y page 204) à Lane Keeping Assist (Y page 208) or Active Lane Keeping Assist (Y page 212) HOLD function (Y page 193) HOLD Ä PRE-SAFE® Brake (Y page 78) 120km/h! Maximum permissible speed exceeded (only for certain countries) 229 Z On-board computer and displays 230 Displays and operation (12-button multifunction steering wheel) Menu overview The number of menus shown depends on the optional equipment in the vehicle. Function : Trip menu (Y page 231) ; Navi menu (navigation details) (Y page 232) = Audio menu (Y page 233) ? Tel menu (telephone) (Y page 235) A Assist. menu (assistance) (Y page 236) B Serv. menu (Y page 238) Rcalls up display messages (Y page 249) Rtyre pressure loss warning (Y page 362) Rtyre pressure monitor (Y page 363) RASSYST PLUS service interval display (Y page 326) C Settings menu (Y page 238) D AMG menu in AMG vehicles (Y page 245) The Audio, Navi and Tel menus differ slightly in vehicles with an audio system and vehicles with COMAND Online. The examples given in this Owner's Manual apply to vehicles equipped with COMAND Online. Trip menu Standard display X Press and hold the % button on the steering wheel until the Trip menu with total distance recorder : and trip meter ; is shown. Trip computer "From start" or "From reset" The values in the From start submenu are calculated from the start of a journey, whilst the values in the From reset submenu are calculated from the last time the submenu was reset (Y page 232). X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Trip menu. X Press 9 or : to select From start or From reset. Rthe ignition has been switched off for more than four hours. hours have been exceeded. R9999 kilometres have been exceeded. The From reset trip computer is reset if the trip exceeds 9999 hours or 99,999 kilometres. R999 Displaying the range and current fuel consumption Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Trip menu. X Press the 9 or : to select the current fuel consumption15 and the approximate range. X The approximate range which can be covered depends on the fuel level and your current driving style. If there is only a small amount of fuel left in the fuel tank, the display shows a vehicle being refuelled C instead of the range. Digital speedometer Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Trip menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select the digital speedometer. X Trip computer "From start" (example) : Distance ; Time = Average speed ? Average fuel consumption The From start trip computer is reset automatically when: 15 Not AMG vehicles. Z 231 On-board computer and displays Displays and operation (12-button multifunction steering wheel) Displays and operation (12-button multifunction steering wheel) On-board computer and displays 232 information, see the separate operating instructions. Switch on the audio system with Becker® MAP PILOT or COMAND Online (see the separate operating instructions). X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Navi menu. X : Shift recommendation ; Digital speedometer i If the gearshift recommendation is shown Route guidance not active in the multifunction display, it is not shown in the status bar. For further information on gearshift recommendations, see (Y page 161). Reset You can reset the values of the following functions: Rtrip meter computer "From start" Rtrip computer "From reset" X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Trip menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select the function that you wish to reset. X Press a. Rtrip : Direction of travel ; Current street Activated route guidance No change of direction announced : Distance to the destination ; Distance to the next change of direction = Current street ? Symbol for "follow the road's course" Resetting the trip computer "From start" (example) X Press : to select Yes and press a to confirm. Navigation menu Displaying navigation instructions In the Navi menu, the multifunction display shows navigation instructions. For more Change of direction announced without a lane recommendation Lane recommendation display (example) : Lane continues through change of direc: Road to which the change of direction leads ; Distance to change of direction and visual distance display = Current street ? Change-of-direction icon When a change of direction has been announced, you will see visual distance display ; next to the symbol for change of direction ?. This decreases in size as you approach the announced change of direction. Change of direction announced with a lane recommendation Lane recommendations are only displayed if the relevant data is available on the digital map. tion ; New lane during a change of direction Other status indicators of the navigation system RO: you have reached the destination or an intermediate destination. route... or Calculating route: a new route is being calculated. ROff map or Off road: the vehicle position is outside the area of the digital map (offmap position). RNo route: no route could be calculated to the selected destination. RNew Audio menu Selecting a radio station : Road to which the change of direction leads ; Distance to change of direction and visual distance display You can only change the waveband and store new stations using the audio system or COMAND Online. X Switch on the audio system or COMAND Online and select Radio (see the separate operating instructions). X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Audio menu. = Lane recommendation ? Change-of-direction icon On multi-lane roads, lane recommendation = may be shown for the next change of direction. During the change of direction, additional lanes may be displayed. Z 233 On-board computer and displays Displays and operation (12-button multifunction steering wheel) Displays and operation (12-button multifunction steering wheel) On-board computer and displays 234 To select the next/previous track: briefly press the 9 or : button. X To select a track from the track list (rapid scrolling): press and hold the 9 or : button until the desired track has been reached. X : Waveband ; Station16 To select a stored station: briefly press the 9 or : button. X To select a station from the station list: press and briefly hold the 9 or : button. X To select a station using station search17: press and briefly hold the 9 or : button. X i DAB radio mode (Digital Audio Broadcasting); see the separate operating instructions. Audio player or audio media operation Audio data from various audio devices or media can be played, depending on the equipment fitted in the vehicle. X Switch on the audio system or COMAND Online and select the audio device or medium (see the separate operating instructions). X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Audio menu. If you press and hold the 9 or : button, the rapid scrolling speed is increased. Not all audio devices or media support this function. If track information is stored on the audio device or medium, the multifunction display will show the number and name of the track. The current track does not appear in audio AUX mode (Auxiliary audio mode: external audio source connected). Video DVD operation Switch on COMAND Online and select video DVD (see the separate operating instructions). X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Audio menu. X DVD changer display (example) : Current scene To select the next or previous scene: briefly press the 9 or : button. X To select a scene from the scene list (rapid scrolling): press and hold the 9 or : button until the desired scene has been reached. X CD changer display (example) : Current track 16 If the station has been stored, the memory position will also be displayed. if no station list is received. 17 Only Telephone menu Introduction Functions and displays are dependent on the optional equipment installed in your vehicle. You can place your mobile phone in the mobile phone bracket (Y page 318), or set up a Bluetooth® connection to the audio system or COMAND Online (see the separate operating instructions). i You can obtain further information about RTelephone ready or the name of the network provider: the mobile phone has found a network and is ready to receive. RTelephone No Service: no network is available, or the mobile phone is searching for a network. Accepting a call If someone calls you when you are in the Telmenu, a display message appears in the multifunction display, for example: suitable mobile phones and connecting mobile phones via Bluetooth®: Rin any Mercedes Benz Service Centre the Internet at http:// www.mercedes-benz.com/connect Ron G WARNING Observe the legal requirements of the country in which you are currently driving regarding the use of mobile phones in the vehicle. If it is permitted to use mobile phones while the vehicle is in motion, you should only use them when the road and traffic conditions allow. Otherwise, you may be distracted from the traffic conditions, cause an accident and injure yourself and others. Switch on the mobile phone and audio system or COMAND Online (see the separate operating instructions). X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Tel menu. X You will see one of the following display messages in the multifunction display: RPlease enter PIN: the mobile phone has been placed in the mobile phone bracket and the PIN has not been entered. X Enter the PIN using the mobile phone, LINGUATRONIC, the audio system or COMAND Online. The mobile phone will search for a network. X Press the 6 button on the steering wheel to accept an incoming call. If you are not in the Tel menu, you can still accept a call. Rejecting or ending a call X Press the ~ button on the steering wheel. If you are not in the Tel menu, you can still reject or end a call. Dialling a number from the phone book If your mobile phone is able to receive calls, you can search for and dial a number from the phone book in the audio system or COMAND Online at any time. X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Tel menu. X Press the 9, : or a button to call up the phone book. X Press the 9 or : button to select the desired name. To start scrolling rapidly, press and hold the 9 or : button for longer than one Z 235 On-board computer and displays Displays and operation (12-button multifunction steering wheel) On-board computer and displays 236 Displays and operation (12-button multifunction steering wheel) second. After a short time, the rapid scroll speeds up. Rapid scrolling stops when you release the button or reach the end of the list. X If only one telephone number is stored for a name: press the 6 or a button to start dialling. or X If there is more than one number for a particular name: press the 6 or a button to display the numbers. X Press the 9 or : button to select the number you want to dial. X Press the 6 or a button to start dialling. or X If you do not want to make a call: press the ~ or % button. Redialling The on-board computer saves the last names or numbers dialled in the redial memory. X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Tel menu. X Press the 6 button to switch to the redial memory. X Press the 9 or : button to select the desired name or number. X Press the 6 or a button to start dialling. or X If you do not want to make a call: press the ~ or % button. Assistance menu Introduction In the Assist. menu you can: Rdisplay Speed Limit Assist and activate/ deactivate the message function of Speed Limit Assist Rshow the distance display Ractivate/deactivate ESP® Ractivate/deactivate PRE-SAFE® Brake Ractivate/deactivate ATTENTION ASSIST Ractivate/deactivate Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist Ractivate/deactivate Lane Keeping Assist or Active Lane Keeping Assist Speed Limit Assist Displaying Speed Limit Assist In the Speed Lim. Asst. function, a detected speed limit is displayed under certain conditions (Y page 204). X Press = or ; on the steering wheel to select the Assist. menu. X Press 9 or : to select Speed Lim. Asst.. X Press a. The multifunction display shows Speed Limit Assist. Activating/deactivating the Speed Limit Assist message function You can set Speed Limit Assist (Y page 204) to display a detected speed limit automatically for five seconds. Other messages in the multifunction display will be faded out for this length of time. Press = or ; on the steering wheel to select the Assist. menu. X Press 9 or : to select Speed Lim. Asst.. X Press a. The multifunction display shows Speed Limit Assist. X Press :. The current selection is displayed. X To activate or deactivate: press a. X If Speed Limit Assist is operational and the message function is activated, the multifunction display shows the Ä symbol when the ignition is switched on. Showing distance display This function is only available with DISTRONIC PLUS. X Press = or ; on the steering wheel to select the Assist. menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select Distance display. X Press a. The DISTRONIC PLUS distance display (Y page 189) appears in the multifunction display. Deactivating/activating ESP® G WARNING If the ÷ warning lamp in the instrument cluster flashes, proceed as follows: RUnder no circumstances should you deactivate ESP®. RWhen pulling away, only depress the accelerator pedal as far as is necessary. RAdapt your driving style to the prevailing road and weather conditions. The vehicle may otherwise begin to skid. If you drive too fast, ESP® cannot reduce the risk of an accident. ESP® cannot override the laws of physics. Activating/deactivating ESP® on AMG vehicles (Y page 76). For further information about ESP®, see (Y page 75). X Start the engine. X Press = or ; on the steering wheel to select the Assist. menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select ESP. X Press the a button. X To deactivate: press a again. The å warning lamp in the instrument cluster comes on. G WARNING If the å warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up when the engine is running, ESP® is deactivated or is unavailable due to a malfunction. The risk that your vehicle may start to skid then increases in certain situations. Always adapt your driving style to the prevailing road and weather conditions. X To activate: press a again. The å warning lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. Activating/deactivating the PRE-SAFE® Brake PRE-SAFE® Brake is only available in vehicles with DISTRONIC PLUS. X Press = or ; on the steering wheel to select the Assist. menu. X Press 9 or : to select PreSafe Brake. X Press the a button. The current selection is displayed. X To activate/deactivate: press a again. When PRE-SAFE® Brake (Y page 78) is activated, the multifunction display shows the Z 237 On-board computer and displays Displays and operation (12-button multifunction steering wheel) Displays and operation (12-button multifunction steering wheel) On-board computer and displays 238 Ä symbol as long as the HOLD function is not activated (Y page 193). Vehicles with Parking Guidance: if PARKTRONIC is activated and you are driving at a speed under 35 km/h, the j Parking Guidance symbol is shown instead of the Ä symbol. Activating/deactivating ATTENTION ASSIST Press = or ; on the steering wheel to select the Assist. menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select Attention Asst.. X Press a. The current selection is displayed. X To activate/deactivate: press a again. X When ATTENTION ASSIST (Y page 203) is activated, the À symbol appears in the multifunction display when the ignition is on. (Y page 208) or Active Lane Keeping Assist (Y page 212). X Press = or ; on the steering wheel to select the Assist. menu. X Press 9 or : to select Lane Keep. Asst.. X Press a. If the function is activated, the lane marking symbol in the multifunction display lights up red. X To activate/deactivate: press a again. When Lane Keeping Assist or Active Lane Keeping Assist is activated, the à symbol appears in the multifunction display when the ignition is on. Service menu Activating/deactivating Blind Spot Assist You can use the Blind Spot Asst. function to activate or deactivate Blind Spot Assist (Y page 205) or Active Blind Spot Assist (Y page 209). X Press = or ; on the steering wheel to select the Assist. menu. X Press 9 or : to select Blind Spot Asst.. X Press a. If the function is activated, the monitored areas in the multifunction display light up red. X To activate/deactivate: press a again. In the Service menu you can: Rcall up display messages (Y page 248) Rreset the tyre pressure loss warning system (Y page 362) or check the tyre pressure electronically (Y page 363) Rcall up the service due date (Y page 326) Settings menu Introduction Activating/deactivating Lane Keeping Assist You can use the Lane Keep. Asst. function to activate/deactivate Lane Keeping Assist The Settings menu can be used for: Rchanging the instrument cluster settings the light settings Rchanging the vehicle settings Rchanging the auxiliary heating settings Rchanging the convenience settings Rrestoring the factory settings Rchanging Instrument cluster Selecting the unit of measurement for distance The Display unit Speed-/odometer: function allows you to choose whether certain displays appear in kilometres or miles. The selected unit of measurement for distance applies to: Rthe digital speedometer in the Trip menu total distance recorder and the trip meter Rthe trip computer Rthe current consumption and the range Rthe navigation instruction in the Navi menu Rcruise control RSPEEDTRONIC RDISTRONIC PLUS RASSYST PLUS service interval display X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Inst. cluster submenu. X Press the a button to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Display unit Speed-/odometer function. You will see the selected setting: km or miles. X Press the a button to save the setting. Rthe Switching the additional speedometer on/off Only vehicles with manual transmission have this function. i Vehicles for the United Kingdom: this function is not available. The Dig. speedom [mph]: function allows you to choose whether the status area in the multifunction display always shows the speed in mph instead of the outside temperature. X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Inst. cluster submenu. X Press the a button to confirm. X Press : or 9 to select the Dig. speedo [mph]: function. You will see the selected setting: on or off. X Press the a button to save the setting. Selecting the permanent display function Only vehicles with automatic transmission have this function. i Vehicles for the United Kingdom: this function is not available. The Permanent display: function allows you to choose whether the multifunction display always shows the outside temperature or the speed in mph. X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Inst. cluster submenu. X Press the a button to confirm. X Press : or 9 to select the Perma‐ nent display function. You will see the selected setting: outside temperature or Dig. speedom [mph]. X Press the a button to save the setting. Lights Switching the daytime driving lights on/ off If you have activated the Day lights function and the light switch is set to Ã, the Z 239 On-board computer and displays Displays and operation (12-button multifunction steering wheel) On-board computer and displays 240 Displays and operation (12-button multifunction steering wheel) daytime driving lights are automatically switched on during daylight hours when the engine is running. When it is dark, the side lamps and the dipped-beam headlamps are also switched on automatically. X Switch off the engine. X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Light submenu. X Press the a button to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Day lights function. If the Day lights have been switched on, the cone of light and the W symbol in the multifunction display are shown in red. X Press the a button to save the setting. Switching the Intelligent Light System on/off If you activate the Intell. Light Sys. function, you activate the following functions: Rmotorway mode Ractive light function Rcornering light function Rextended range foglamps X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Light submenu. X Press the a button to confirm. X Press : or 9 to select the Intell. Light Sys. function. If the Intell. Light Sys. function has been switched on, the cone of light and the L symbol in the multifunction display are shown in red. X Press the a button to save the setting. If you set the dipped-beam headlamps for driving on the right/left (Y page 240), the multifunction display shows the System inoperative display message under the image of the vehicle for the Intell. Light Sys. function in the Light submenu. Setting the dipped-beam headlamps for driving on the left/right This function is only available on vehicles with the Intelligent Light System. You can use this function to switch between symmetrical beam and asymmetrical dipped beam (Y page 118). If you set the dipped-beam headlamps for driving on the right/left, then motorway mode and the extended range foglamps are not available. X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Light submenu. X Press the a button to confirm. X Press : or 9 to select the Dipped beams Setting for function. You will see the selected setting: Rightside traffic or Left-side traffic. X Press the a button to save the setting. When you change the setting, conversion does not take place until the next time the vehicle is stationary. You can also have the dipped-beam headlamps set for driving on the right or left at a qualified specialist workshop. Switching Adaptive Highbeam Assist on/ off X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Light submenu. X Press the a button to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Adapt. main beam function. If the Adapt. main beam function has been switched on, the cone of light and the _ symbol in the multifunction display are shown in red. X Press the a button to save the setting. Activating/deactivating the surround lighting and exterior lighting delayed switch-off If you have activated the Surround light‐ ing function and the light switch is set to Ã, the following functions are activated when it is dark: RSurround lighting: the exterior lighting remains lit for 40 seconds after unlocking with the key. The exterior lighting switches off when you open the driver's door. RExterior lighting delayed switch-off: the exterior lighting remains lit for 60 seconds after the engine has been switched off. If you close all the doors, the exterior lighting goes off after 15 seconds. If you activate the Surround lighting function, the following light up depending on the vehicle's equipment: Rthe side lamps Rthe foglamps Rthe daytime driving lights Rthe surround lighting in the exterior mirrors X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Light submenu. X Press the a button to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Surround lighting function. When the Surround lighting function is activated, the light cone and the area around the vehicle are displayed in red in the multifunction display. X Press the a button to save the setting. Deactivating delayed switch-off of the exterior lighting temporarily: Before leaving the vehicle, turn the key to position 0 in the ignition lock. X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock and back to position 0. The exterior lighting delayed switch-off is deactivated. X Delayed switch-off of the exterior lighting is reactivated the next time you start the engine. Activating/deactivating the interior lighting delayed switch-off If you activate the Light. delay function, the interior lighting remains on for 20 seconds after you remove the key from the ignition lock. X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Light submenu. X Press the a button to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Light. delay function. When the Light. delay function is activated, the vehicle interior is displayed in red in the multifunction display. X Press the a button to save the setting. Vehicle Setting permanent SPEEDTRONIC You can set permanent SPEEDTRONIC (Y page 183) using the Limit speed (win‐ ter tyres) function. X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Vehicle submenu. X Press the a button to confirm. X Press : or 9 to select the Limit speed (winter tyres): function. You will see the current setting. Z 241 On-board computer and displays Displays and operation (12-button multifunction steering wheel) Displays and operation (12-button multifunction steering wheel) On-board computer and displays 242 X Press the a button to confirm. X Press : or 9 to adjust permanent SPEEDTRONIC in increments of 10 (230 km/h to 160 km/h). The Off setting switches permanent SPEEDTRONIC off. X Press the a button to store the entry. X Switching the automatic locking feature on/off If you select the Automatic door lock function, the vehicle is centrally locked above a speed of around 15 km/h. Activating/deactivating the radar sensor system i You must deactivate the radar sensor system in certain countries and near radio telescope facilities. For further information, see (Y page 389). i For further information on the automatic locking feature, see (Y page 90). Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Vehicle submenu. X Press the a button to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Automatic door lockfunction. When the Automatic door locks function is activated, the vehicle doors are displayed in red in the multifunction display. X Press the a button to save the setting. X Activating/deactivating the acoustic locking confirmation If you activate the Acoustic Lock function, an audible signal sounds depending on the vehicle's date of manufacture: Rwhen locking or Ronce when unlocking and three times when locking X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Vehicle submenu. X Press the a button to confirm. Press the : or 9 button to select the Acoustic Lock function. If the Acoustic Lock function is activated, the & symbol in the multifunction display lights up red. X Press the a button to save the setting. When you are close to radio telescope facilities, the radar sensor system will be deactivated automatically. The following systems are switched off when the radar sensor system is deactivated: RDISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 183) PLUS (Y page 73) RPRE-SAFE® Brake (Y page 78) RBlind Spot Assist (Y page 205) RActive Blind Spot Assist (Y page 209) X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Vehicle submenu. X Press the a button to confirm. X Press the 9 or : button to select Radar sensor (See Owner's Man.):. You will see the selected setting: on or off. X Press the a button to save the setting. RBAS Heating menu Auxiliary heating departure time This function is only available on vehicles with auxiliary heating (Y page 143). In the Heating submenu, you can select a stored departure time or change a departure time. The auxiliary heating timer function calculates the switch-on time according to the outside temperature so that the vehicle is preheated by the departure time. When the departure time is reached, the auxiliary heating continues to heat for a further five minutes and then switches off. The auxiliary heating adopts the THERMATIC or THERMOTRONIC temperature setting. You can switch off the auxiliary heating by using the remote control or the auxiliary heating button on the centre console. G WARNING Exhaust fumes are produced when the auxiliary heating is in operation. Inhaling these exhaust fumes can be poisonous. You should therefore switch off the auxiliary heating in confined spaces without an extraction system, e.g. a garage. G WARNING When operating the auxiliary heating parts of the vehicle can get very hot. Make sure that the exhaust system does not under any circumstances come into contact with easily ignitable material such as dry grass or fuels. The material could otherwise ignite and set the vehicle alight. Choose your parking spot accordingly. Operating the auxiliary heating is thus prohibited at filling stations or when your vehicle is being refuelled. You must therefore switch off the auxiliary heating at filling stations. ! Operating the auxiliary heating/ventila- tion draws on the vehicle battery. After you have heated or ventilated the vehicle a maximum of two times, drive for a longer distance. i Switch the auxiliary heating on regularly once a month for about 10 minutes. Selecting the departure time or deactivating a selected departure time X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Heating submenu. X Press the a button to confirm. You will see the selected setting. X Press the a button to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to select one of the three departure times or Timer off (no timer active). X Press the a button to confirm. When a departure time is selected, the yellow indicator lamp lights up on the auxiliary heating button. Changing the departure time X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Heating submenu. X Press the a button to confirm. You will see the selected setting. X Press the a button to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to select Change A, B or C. X Press the a button to confirm. You can now change the departure time. X Press the = or ; button to select the display to be changed: hours, minutes. X Press the : or 9 button to set the selected display. X Press the a button to store the entry. The yellow indicator lamp on the auxiliary heating button lights up. Convenience Activating/deactivating the EASYENTRY/EXIT feature You can use the Easy Entry/Exit: function to activate or deactivate the EASY ENTRY/ EXIT feature (Y page 111). Z 243 On-board computer and displays Displays and operation (12-button multifunction steering wheel) Displays and operation (12-button multifunction steering wheel) On-board computer and displays 244 G WARNING The steering wheel moves when the EASYENTRY/EXIT feature is active. There is a risk of occupants becoming trapped. Before activating the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature, make sure that nobody can become trapped. Do not leave children unsupervised in the vehicle, even if they are secured in a child restraint system. The children could open the driver's door and thereby unintentionally activate the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature and become trapped. Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Convenience submenu. X Press the a button to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Easy Entry/Exit function. If the Easy Entry/Exit function is activated, the vehicle steering wheel is displayed in red in the multifunction display. X Press the a button to save the setting. X Switching the belt adjustment on/off For further information on belt adjustment, see (Y page 55). X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Convenience submenu. X Press the a button to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Belt adjustment function. When the Belt adjustment function is activated, the vehicle seat belt is displayed in red in the multifunction display. X Press the a button to save the setting. Switching the fold in mirrors when locking function on/off If you switch on the Auto. fold in function, the exterior mirrors fold in when you lock the vehicle. When you unlock the vehicle and then open the driver's or front-passenger door, the exterior mirrors fold out again. If you have switched the function on and you fold the exterior mirrors in using the button on the door (Y page 113), they will not fold out automatically. The exterior mirrors can then only be folded out using the button on the door. X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Convenience submenu. X Press the a button to confirm. X Press the : or 9 to select the Auto. fold in function. If the Auto. fold in function is activated, the vehicle's exterior mirror is displayed in red in the multifunction display. X Press the a button to save the setting. Resetting to factory settings For safety reasons, not all functions are reset: the Limit Speed (winter tyres) function in permanent SPEEDTRONIC can only be set in the Vehicle submenu. If you want to reset the Daytime driving lights function in the Light submenu, you must turn the key in the ignition lock to position 1. X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Factory setting submenu. X Press the a button to confirm. The Reset all settings? message appears. X Press the : or 9 button to select No or Yes. X Press the a button to confirm the selection. If you select Yes, the multifunction display shows a confirmation message. AMG menu in AMG vehicles AMG displays X Press = or ; on the steering wheel to select the AMG menu. : Drive program (C/S/S+/M) ; ESP® mode (ON/OFF) or SPORT handling mode (SPORT) RACETIMER : Digital speedometer ; Gear indicator = Upshift indicator ? Engine oil temperature A Coolant temperature Upshift indicator UP = indicates that the engine has reached the overrevving range when in the manual gearshift program. Upshift indicator UP = fades out other messages until you have shifted up. When the engine oil temperature is below 80 †, the oil temperature is shown in blue. Avoid driving at full engine output during this time. Displaying and starting the RACETIMER You can use the RACETIMER to store lap times. X Press = or ; on the steering wheel to select the AMG menu. X Press the 9 button repeatedly until the RACETIMER is shown. i If RACETIMER is selected, the menu bar cannot be called up with the = and ; buttons. SETUP SETUP shows the drive program, the ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) mode and the SPORT handling mode. X Press = or ; on the steering wheel to select the AMG menu. X Press the 9 button repeatedly until SETUP is displayed. : Lap ; RACETIMER You can start the RACETIMER when the engine is running or if the key is in position 2 in the ignition lock. X To start: press the a button to start the RACETIMER. Z 245 On-board computer and displays Displays and operation (12-button multifunction steering wheel) Displays and operation (12-button multifunction steering wheel) On-board computer and displays 246 Displaying the intermediate time Press = or ; to select Interm. Time. X Press the a button to confirm. The intermediate time is displayed for five seconds. X Starting a new lap It is possible to store a maximum of sixteen laps. X Press a to confirm New Lap. Resetting the current lap X Stop the RACETIMER. X Press = or ; to select Reset Lap. X Press a to reset the lap time to "0”. Deleting all laps If you switch off the engine, the RACETIMER is reset to "0" after 30 seconds. All laps are deleted. You cannot delete individual stored laps. If you have stopped 16 laps, the current lap does not have to be reset. X Reset the current lap. X Press a to confirm Reset. Reset Race Timer? appears in the multifunction display. X : RACETIMER ; Fastest lap time (best lap) = Lap Stopping the RACETIMER X Press the % button on the steering wheel. X Press the : button to select Yes and press the a button to confirm. All laps are deleted. Overall evaluation This function is shown if you have stored at least one lap and stopped the RACETIMER. Press = or ; on the steering wheel to select the AMG menu. X Press the 9 button repeatedly until the overall evaluation is shown. X Press a to confirm YES. The RACETIMER interrupts timing when you stop the vehicle and turn the key to position 1 in the ignition lock. When you turn the key to position 2 or 3 and then press the a to confirm Start, timing is continued. : RACETIMER overall evaluation ; Total time driven Displays and operation (12-button multifunction steering wheel) On-board computer and displays = Average speed ? Distance covered A Top speed Lap evaluation This function is only available if you have stored at least two laps and have stopped the RACETIMER. Press = or ; on the steering wheel to select the AMG menu. X Press the 9 button repeatedly until the lap evaluation is shown. Each lap is shown in a separate submenu. The fastest lap is indicated by flashing symbol :. X : Lap ; Lap time = Average lap speed ? Lap length A Top speed during lap X 247 Press the 9 or : button to select a different lap evaluation. Z On-board computer and displays 248 Display messages Display messages General notes Display messages appear in the multifunction display. Display messages with graphic displays may be shown in simplified form in the Owner's Manual and may differ from the messages shown in the multifunction display. Please respond in accordance with the display messages and follow the additional notes in this Owner's Manual. Certain display messages are accompanied by an audible warning tone or a continuous tone. When you stop and park the vehicle, please observe the notes on the HOLD function (Y page 193) and parking (Y page 174). Hiding display messages You can hide some display messages with a low priority. X Vehicles with a 4-button multifunction steering wheel: press C on the steering wheel to clear the display message. The display message is cleared. X Vehicles with a 12-button multifunction steering wheel: press a or % on the steering wheel to clear the display message. The display message is cleared. Display messages with a high priority are shown in red. You cannot hide display messages of the highest priority. The multifunction display shows these messages continuously until the causes for the messages have been remedied. Message memory Vehicles with a 4-button multifunction steering wheel The on-board computer saves certain display messages. You can call up these display messages in the message memory. X Press the V button on the steering wheel repeatedly until the message memory is shown. If there are no display messages, you will see No messages. If there are display messages, the multifunction display shows 2 messages, for example. X Using the C button, scroll through the display messages. For some display messages, the + symbol appears in the multifunction display. You will find detailed information about these display messages in the section which follows. When the ignition is switched off, all display messages are deleted apart from some highpriority display messages. Once the causes of the high-priority display messages have been rectified, the corresponding display messages are also deleted. Vehicles with a 12-button multifunction steering wheel The on-board computer saves certain display messages. You can call up the display messages in the message memory. Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Serv. menu. If there are display messages, the multifunction display shows 2 messages, for example. X Press the 9 or : button to select the entry, e.g. 2 messages. X Confirm with a. X Press the 9 or : button to scroll through the display messages. X When the ignition is switched off, all display messages are deleted apart from some highpriority display messages. Once the causes of the high-priority display messages have been rectified, the corresponding display messages are also deleted. Z 249 On-board computer and displays Display messages On-board computer and displays 250 Display messages Safety systems (4-button multifunction steering wheel) Display messages ABS curr. unavail. Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions G Risk of accident ABS (Anti-lock Braking System), ESP® (Electronic Stability Program), BAS (Brake Assist), PRE-SAFE®, the HOLD function, hill start assist and ESP® trailer stabilisation are temporarily not available. The adaptive brake lights may also have failed. In addition, the ÷, å and ! warning lamps light up in the instrument cluster. The self-diagnosis function might not be complete, for example. The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example. X Carefully drive on a suitable stretch of road, making slight steering movements, at a speed above 20 km/h. If the display message disappears, the functions mentioned above are available again. If the display message continues to be displayed: X X Drive on carefully. Visit a qualified specialist workshop. G Risk of accident ABS, ESP®, BAS, PRE-SAFE®, the HOLD function, hill start assist and ESP® trailer stabilisation are temporarily not available. The adaptive brake lights may also have failed. In addition, the ÷, å and ! warning lamps light up in the instrument cluster. For example, the on-board voltage may be insufficient. The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example. X Drive on carefully. If the display message disappears, the functions mentioned above are available again. If the display message continues to be displayed: X X Drive on carefully. Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Display messages ABS inoperative EBD and ABS inoperative J Release parking brake Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions G Risk of accident ABS, ESP®, BAS, PRE-SAFE®, the HOLD function, hill start assist and ESP® trailer stabilisation are not available due to a malfunction. The adaptive brake lights may also have failed. In addition, the ÷, å, ! and J warning lamps light up in the instrument cluster. The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. G Risk of accident EBD (electronic brake force distribution), ABS, ESP®, BAS, PRE-SAFE®, hill start assist and ESP® trailer stabilisation are not available due to a malfunction. The adaptive brake lights may also have failed. In addition, the ÷, å and ! warning lamps light up in the instrument cluster and a warning tone sounds. The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. You are driving with the parking brake applied. A warning tone also sounds. X Release the parking brake. Z 251 On-board computer and displays Display messages 252 Display messages On-board computer and displays Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions J A malfunction has occurred while the HOLD function is active. or Vehicles with manual transmission: with the HOLD function activated, you have: Brake immediately Ropened the driver's door and released the seat belt or off the engine or Ropened the bonnet A tone may also sound at regular intervals. The tone becomes louder if you attempt to lock the vehicle. You cannot start the engine. X Paying attention to the traffic situation, immediately depress the brake pedal firmly and hold until the display message disappears. X Prevent the vehicle from rolling away before you leave it (Y page 342). You can restart the engine. Rswitched J G Risk of accident Check brake fluid level There is insufficient brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir. In addition, the red J warning lamp lights up in the instrument cluster and a warning tone sounds. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances. X Apply the parking brake. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. X Do not top up the brake fluid. This does not correct the error. # The brake pads/linings have reached their wear limit. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Check brake wear PRE-SAFE inoperative ü G Risk of injury Important functions of PRE-SAFE® have failed. All other occupant safety systems, e.g. airbags, remain available. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. If the symbol appears in the multifunction display, a seat belt tongue has been clipped into a rear seat belt buckle. For further information on the status indicator for the rear seat belts: (Y page 56). Display messages ý Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions G Risk of injury If the symbol appears in the multifunction display, a seat belt tongue has not been clipped into a rear seat belt buckle. X If necessary, ask the occupants in the rear to fasten their seat belts. For further information on the status indicator for the rear seat belts: (Y page 56). Child seat position G Risk of injury Vehicles with automatic child seat recognition on the frontpassenger seat: the child seat is positioned incorrectly. X Fit the child seat in the correct position. G Risk of injury Vehicles with automatic child seat recognition on the frontpassenger seat: the automatic child seat recognition sensor is faulty. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. 6 Malfunction -Work‐ shop- 6 FL malfunc. -Work‐ shop- or FR mal‐ func. -Workshop- 6 RL malfunc. -work‐ shop- or RR mal‐ func. -Workshop- G Risk of injury There is a malfunction in the SRS (Supplemental Restraint System). The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. G Risk of injury SRS has malfunctioned at the front on the left or right. The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. G Risk of injury SRS has malfunctioned at the rear on the left or right. The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Z 253 On-board computer and displays Display messages 254 Display messages On-board computer and displays Display messages 6 R.cent.malf. Workshop- Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions G Risk of injury SRS has malfunctioned at the rear centre. The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Left windowbag mal‐ G Risk of injury function:wkshp There is a malfunction in the left-hand and/or right-hand windowor bag. The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument clusRight windowbag ter. malfunction:wkshp X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Safety systems (12-button multifunction steering wheel) Display messages !÷ currently unavail‐ able See Owner's Manual Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions G Risk of accident ABS (Anti-lock Braking System), ESP® (Electronic Stability Program), BAS (Brake Assist), PRE-SAFE®, the HOLD function, hill start assist and ESP® trailer stabilisation are temporarily not available. The adaptive brake lights, BAS PLUS and PRE-SAFE® Brake may also have failed. In addition, the ÷, å and ! warning lamps light up in the instrument cluster. The self-diagnosis function might not be complete, for example. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example. X Carefully drive on a suitable stretch of road, making slight steering movements, at a speed above 20 km/h. If the display message disappears, the functions mentioned above are available again. If the display message continues to be displayed: X X Drive on carefully. Visit a qualified specialist workshop. G Risk of accident ABS, ESP®, BAS, PRE-SAFE®, the HOLD function, hill start assist and ESP® trailer stabilisation are temporarily not available. The adaptive brake lights, BAS PLUS and PRE-SAFE® Brake may also have failed. In addition, the ÷, å and ! warning lamps light up in the instrument cluster. For example, the on-board voltage may be insufficient. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example. X Drive on carefully. If the display message disappears, the functions mentioned above are available again. Z 255 On-board computer and displays Display messages 256 Display messages On-board computer and displays Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions If the display message continues to be displayed: X X !÷ inoperative See Owner's Manual ÷ currently unavail‐ able See Owner's Manual Drive on carefully. Visit a qualified specialist workshop. G Risk of accident ABS, ESP®, BAS, PRE-SAFE®, the HOLD function, hill start assist and ESP® trailer stabilisation are not available due to a malfunction. The adaptive brake lights, BAS PLUS and PRE-SAFE® Brake may also have failed. In addition, the J, ÷, å and ! warning lamps light up in the instrument cluster. The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. G Risk of accident ESP®, BAS, PRE-SAFE®, the HOLD function, hill start assist and ESP® trailer stabilisation are temporarily not available. The adaptive brake lights, BAS PLUS and PRE-SAFE® Brake may also have failed. In addition, the ÷ and å warning lamps light up in the instrument cluster. The self-diagnosis function might not be complete, for example. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. X Carefully drive on a suitable stretch of road, making slight steering movements, at a speed above 20 km/h. If the display message disappears, the functions mentioned above are available again. If the display message continues to be displayed: X X Drive on carefully. Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Display messages ÷ inoperative See Owner's Manual T! ÷ inoperative See Owner's Manual J Release parking brake Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions G Risk of accident ESP®, BAS, PRE-SAFE®, the HOLD function, hill start assist and ESP® trailer stabilisation are not available due to a malfunction. The adaptive brake lights, BAS PLUS and PRE-SAFE® Brake may also have failed. In addition, the ÷ and å warning lamps light up in the instrument cluster. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. G Risk of accident EBD (electronic brake force distribution), ABS, ESP®, BAS, PRESAFE®, the HOLD function, hill start assist and ESP® trailer stabilisation are not available due to a malfunction. The adaptive brake lights, BAS PLUS and PRE-SAFE® Brake may also have failed. In addition, the ÷, å and ! warning lamps light up in the instrument cluster and a warning tone sounds. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. You are driving with the parking brake applied. A warning tone also sounds. X Release the parking brake. Z 257 On-board computer and displays Display messages 258 Display messages On-board computer and displays Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions J A malfunction has occurred while the HOLD function or DISTRONIC PLUS is active. or Vehicles with manual transmission: with the HOLD function activated, you have either: Brake immediately Ropened the driver's door and released the seat belt or off the engine or Ropened the bonnet A tone may also sound at regular intervals. The tone becomes louder if you attempt to lock the vehicle. You cannot start the engine. X Paying attention to the traffic situation, immediately depress the brake pedal firmly and hold until the display message disappears. X Prevent the vehicle from rolling away before you leave it (Y page 342). You can restart the engine. Rswitched J G Risk of accident Check brake fluid level There is insufficient brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir. In addition, the red J warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up and a warning tone sounds. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances. X Apply the parking brake. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. X Do not top up the brake fluid. This does not correct the error. # The brake pads/linings have reached their wear limit. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Check brake wear PRE-SAFE inoperative See Owner's Manual G Risk of injury Important functions of PRE-SAFE® have failed. All other occupant safety systems, e.g. airbags, remain available. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Display messages PRE-SAFE Functions cur‐ rently limited See Owner's Manual Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions G Risk of accident PRE-SAFE® Brake is temporarily inoperative if: Rthe DISTRONIC PLUS cover in the radiator grille is dirty. sensors in the bumpers are dirty. Rits function is impaired due to heavy rain or snow. Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio stations or other sources of electromagnetic radiation. Ryou switch off ESP® (AMG vehicles only). Rthe system is outside the operating temperature range. Rthe on-board voltage is too low. PRE-SAFE® Brake is operational again and the display message disappears if: Rthe Rthe dirt (e.g. slush) drops away while the vehicle is in motion. system detects that the sensors are fully available again. Ryou reactivate ESP® (AMG vehicles only). Rthe system is within the operating temperature range. If the display message continues to be displayed: Rthe Clean the DISTRONIC PLUS cover in the radiator grille (Y page 330). X Clean the bumpers (Y page 330). X Restart the engine. X Wait until the battery is sufficiently charged. X PRE-SAFE Functions limited See Owner's Manual ü G Risk of accident PRE-SAFE® Brake is faulty. BAS PLUS or the distance warning signal may also have failed. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. If the symbol appears in the multifunction display, a seat belt tongue has been clipped into a rear seat belt buckle. For further information on the status indicator for the rear seat belts: (Y page 56). Z 259 On-board computer and displays Display messages 260 Display messages On-board computer and displays Display messages ý Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions G Risk of injury If the symbol appears in the multifunction display, a seat belt tongue has not been clipped into a rear seat belt buckle. X If necessary, ask the occupants in the rear to fasten their seat belts. For further information on the status indicator for the rear seat belts: (Y page 56). Child seat in G Risk of injury wrong position Vehicles with automatic child seat recognition on the frontSee Owner's Manual passenger seat: the child seat is positioned incorrectly. X Fit the child seat in the correct position. G Risk of injury Vehicles with automatic child seat recognition on the frontpassenger seat: the automatic child seat recognition sensor is faulty. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. 6 G Risk of injury 6 G Risk of injury 6 G Risk of injury Restraint sys. mal‐ There is a malfunction in the SRS (Supplemental Restraint System). The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument clusfunction Consult ter. workshop X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Front left malfunc‐ SRS has malfunctioned at the front on the left or right. The 6 tion Consult work‐ warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster. shoporFront right X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. malfunction Con‐ sult workshop Rear left malfunc‐ tion Consult work‐ shoporRear right malfunction Con‐ sult workshop SRS has malfunctioned at the rear on the left or right. The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Display messages 6 Rear centre mal‐ function Consult workshop 6 Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions G Risk of injury SRS has malfunctioned at the rear centre. The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. G Risk of injury Left windowbag mal‐ There is a malfunction in the left-hand and/or right-hand windowbag. The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument clusfunction Consult ter. workshoporRight windowbag malfunc‐ X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. tion Consult work‐ shop Lights (4-button multifunction steering wheel) i Display messages about LEDs: This display message will only appear if all LEDs have failed. Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions b The left or right-hand cornering light is faulty. X Check whether you are permitted to change the bulb yourself (Y page 125). or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Left corner. light or Right corner. light b The left or right-hand dipped-beam headlamp is faulty. X Check whether you are permitted to change the bulb yourself Left dipped beam or (Y page 125). Right dipped-beam or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. b Trailer left tail lamp or Trailer right tail lamp The left or right-hand trailer tail lamp is faulty. X Check whether you are permitted to change the bulb yourself. or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. b The left or right-hand trailer turn signal lamp is faulty. X Check whether you are permitted to change the bulb yourself. Trailer left indic. or or Trailer right X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. indic. Z 261 On-board computer and displays Display messages 262 Display messages On-board computer and displays Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions b The trailer brake lamp is faulty. X Check whether you are permitted to change the bulb yourself. or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Trailer brake lamp b The rear left-hand or rear right-hand turn signal is faulty. X Check whether you are permitted to change the bulb yourself Rear left indicator (Y page 125). or Rear right indi‐ or cator X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. b Front left indica‐ tor or Front right indicator The front left-hand or front right-hand turn signal is faulty. X Check whether you are permitted to change the bulb yourself (Y page 125). or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. b The turn signal in the left-hand or right-hand exterior mirror is faulty. Left mirror indica‐ X Check whether you are permitted to change the bulb yourself tor or Right mir‐ (Y page 125). ror indicator or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. b Third brake lamp b Tail/brake lamp, left or Tail/brake lamp, right b Left main beam or Right main beam The third brake lamp is faulty. X Check whether you are permitted to change the bulb yourself (Y page 125). or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. The left or right-hand tail lamp/brake lamp is faulty. X Check whether you are permitted to change the bulb yourself (Y page 125). or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. The left or right-hand high beam is faulty. X Check whether you are permitted to change the bulb yourself (Y page 125). or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions b The left-hand or right-hand front foglamp is faulty. X Check whether you are permitted to change the bulb yourself (Y page 125). or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Left fog lamp or Right fog lamp b Rear fog lamp b Front left parking lamp or Front right parking lamp b Reversing light b Rear left marker lamp or Rear right marker lamp b Left daytime driv‐ ing lamp or Right dayt. driv‐ ing lamp b Malfunction The rear foglamp is faulty. X Check whether you are permitted to change the bulb yourself (Y page 125). or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. The front left or front right parking lamp is faulty. X Check whether you are permitted to change the bulb yourself (Y page 125). or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. The reversing lamp is faulty. X Check whether you are permitted to change the bulb yourself (Y page 125). or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. The rear left or right side marker lamp is faulty. X Check whether you are permitted to change the bulb yourself (Y page 125). or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. The left or right daytime driving lamp is defective. X Check whether you are permitted to change the bulb yourself (Y page 125). or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. The exterior lighting is faulty. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Z 263 On-board computer and displays Display messages 264 Display messages On-board computer and displays Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Vehicles with trailer tow hitch: a fuse may have blown. Check the fuses (Y page 354). X If necessary, replace the blown fuse. Observe the warning notes as you do so. X If the display message continues to be displayed: X b AUTO lights inoper‐ ative b Switch off lights Visit a qualified specialist workshop. The light sensor is faulty. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. The lights are still switched on when you leave the vehicle. A warning tone also sounds. X Turn the light switch to Ã. Lights (12-button multifunction steering wheel) i Display messages about LEDs: This display message will only appear if all LEDs have failed. Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions b The left or right-hand cornering light is faulty. X Check whether you are permitted to change the bulb yourself Left cornering (Y page 125). light or Right cor‐ or nering light X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. b The left or right-hand dipped-beam headlamp is faulty. X Check whether you are permitted to change the bulb yourself Left dipped beam or (Y page 125). Right dipped beam or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. b Trailer left tail lamp or Trailer right tail lamp The left or right-hand trailer tail lamp is faulty. X Check whether you are permitted to change the bulb yourself. or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions b The left or right-hand trailer turn signal lamp is faulty. X Check whether you are permitted to change the bulb yourself. or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Trailer left indi‐ cator or Trailer right indicator b Trailer brake lamp The trailer brake lamp is faulty. X Check whether you are permitted to change the bulb yourself. or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. b The rear left-hand or rear right-hand turn signal is faulty. X Check whether you are permitted to change the bulb yourself Rear left indicator (Y page 125). or Rear right indi‐ or cator X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. b Front left indica‐ tor or Front right indicator The front left-hand or front right-hand turn signal is faulty. X Check whether you are permitted to change the bulb yourself (Y page 125). or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. b The turn signal in the left-hand or right-hand exterior mirror is faulty. Left mirror indica‐ X Check whether you are permitted to change the bulb yourself tor or Right mir‐ (Y page 125). ror indicator or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. b Third brake lamp b Left-hand tail lamp/brake lamp or Right-hand tail lamp/brake lamp The third brake lamp is faulty. X Check whether you are permitted to change the bulb yourself (Y page 125). or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. The left or right-hand tail lamp/brake lamp is faulty. X Check whether you are permitted to change the bulb yourself (Y page 125). or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Z 265 On-board computer and displays Display messages 266 Display messages On-board computer and displays Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions b The left or right-hand high beam is faulty. X Check whether you are permitted to change the bulb yourself (Y page 125). or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Left main beam or Right main beam b Left fog lamp or Right fog lamp b Rear fog lamp b Front left parking lamp or Front right parking lamp b Reversing light b Rear left side marker lamp or Rear right side marker lamp b Left daytime driv‐ ing lamp or Right daytime driving lamp The left-hand or right-hand front foglamp is faulty. X Check whether you are permitted to change the bulb yourself (Y page 125). or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. The rear foglamp is faulty. X Check whether you are permitted to change the bulb yourself (Y page 125). or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. The front left or front right parking lamp is faulty. X Check whether you are permitted to change the bulb yourself (Y page 125). or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. The reversing lamp is faulty. X Check whether you are permitted to change the bulb yourself (Y page 125). or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. The rear left or right side marker lamp is faulty. X Check whether you are permitted to change the bulb yourself (Y page 125). or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. The left or right-hand daytime driving lamp is defective. X Check whether you are permitted to change the bulb yourself (Y page 125). or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions b The Intelligent Light System is faulty. The lights remain available without the Intelligent Light System. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Intell. Light Sys‐ tem inoperative b Malfunction See Owner's Manual The exterior lighting is faulty. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Vehicles with trailer tow hitch: a fuse may have blown. X Check the fuses (Y page 354). X If necessary, replace the blown fuse. Observe the warning notes as you do so. If the display message continues to be displayed: X b AUTO lights inoper‐ ative b Switch off lights Visit a qualified specialist workshop. The light sensor is faulty. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. The lights are still switched on when you leave the vehicle. A warning tone also sounds. X Turn the light switch to Ã. Adaptive Main-beam Assist inoperative Adaptive Highbeam Assist is faulty. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Adaptive Main-beam Assist currently unavailable See Owner's Manual Adaptive Highbeam Assist is deactivated and temporarily inoperative. Possible causes: Rthe windscreen is dirty in the camera's field of vision. is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog. X Clean the windscreen. Rvisibility If the system detects that the camera is fully operational again, the Adaptive Main-beam Assist available again message is displayed. Adaptive Highbeam Assist is operational again. Z 267 On-board computer and displays Display messages On-board computer and displays 268 Display messages Engine (4-button multifunction steering wheel) Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Top up coolant The coolant level is too low. X Top up the coolant, observing the warning notes when doing so (Y page 324). X If the coolant needs topping up more often than usual, have the engine coolant system checked at a qualified specialist workshop. ? The coolant is too hot. A warning tone also sounds. X Stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traffic conditions, and switch off the engine. X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not blocked, e.g. by frozen slush. X Wait until the display message disappears before restarting the engine. Otherwise, there is a risk of engine damage. X Pay attention to the coolant temperature display. X If the temperature increases again, visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Stop vehicle Sw. eng. Off The poly-V-belt may have torn. X Stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traffic conditions, and switch off the engine. X Open the bonnet. X Check whether the poly-V-belt is torn. If the poly-V-belt is torn: ! Do not continue driving. The engine could otherwise overheat. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. If the poly-V-belt is OK: X Wait until the display message disappears before restarting the engine. Otherwise, there is a risk of engine damage. X Pay attention to the coolant temperature display. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. ? The fan motor is faulty. X If the coolant temperature is less than 120 †, you can continue driving to the nearest qualified specialist workshop. X Avoid heavy loads on the engine as you do so, e.g. driving on mountain roads and stop-start traffic. Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions # The battery is not being charged. A warning tone also sounds. Possible causes: Rfaulty alternator poly-V-belt Ra malfunction in the electronics X Stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traffic conditions, and switch off the engine. X Open the bonnet. X Check whether the poly-V-belt is torn. Rtorn If the poly-V-belt is torn: ! Do not continue driving. The engine could otherwise overheat. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. If the poly-V-belt is OK: X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. 4 Check eng. oil level 8 Reserve fuel level C The engine oil level has dropped to the minimum level. A warning tone also sounds. X Check the oil level when next refuelling, at the latest (Y page 323). X If necessary, top up the engine oil (Y page 324). X Have the engine checked at a qualified specialist workshop if the engine oil needs topping up more often than usual. The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range. Operation of the auxiliary heating is deactivated when the fuel level drops into the reserve range. X Refuel at the nearest filling station. There is only a very small amount of fuel in the fuel tank. The auxiliary heating cannot be operated. X Refuel at the nearest filling station without fail. ¸ Vehicles with a diesel engine: the engine air filter is dirty and must be replaced. Replace air cleaner X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. ! Vehicles with a diesel engine: there is water in the fuel filter. The water must be drained off. Clean the fuel fil‐ X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. ter Z 269 On-board computer and displays Display messages On-board computer and displays 270 Display messages Engine (12-button multifunction steering wheel) Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions + The coolant level is too low. X Top up the coolant, observing the warning notes when doing so (Y page 324). X If the coolant needs topping up more often than usual, have the engine coolant system checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Top up coolant See Owner's Manual ? Coolant Stop vehi‐ cle Switch engine off The coolant is too hot. A warning tone also sounds. X Stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traffic conditions, and switch off the engine. X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not blocked, e.g. by frozen slush. X Wait until the display message disappears before restarting the engine. Otherwise, there is a risk of engine damage. X Pay attention to the coolant temperature display. X If the temperature increases again, visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. The poly-V-belt may have torn. X Stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traffic conditions, and switch off the engine. X Open the bonnet. X Check whether the poly-V-belt is torn. If the poly-V-belt is torn: ! Do not continue driving. The engine could otherwise overheat. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. If the poly-V-belt is OK: X Wait until the display message disappears before restarting the engine. Otherwise, there is a risk of engine damage. X Pay attention to the coolant temperature display. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. ? The fan motor is faulty. X If the coolant temperature is less than 120 †, you can continue driving to the nearest qualified specialist workshop. X Avoid heavy loads on the engine as you do so, e.g. driving on mountain roads and stop-start traffic. Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions # The battery is not being charged. A warning tone also sounds. Possible causes: Rfaulty alternator poly-V-belt Ra malfunction in the electronics X Stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traffic conditions, and switch off the engine. X Open the bonnet. X Check whether the poly-V-belt is torn. Rtorn If the poly-V-belt is torn: ! Do not continue driving. The engine could otherwise overheat. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. If the poly-V-belt is OK: X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. 4 Check eng. oil level when next refuelling 8 Reserve fuel level C The oil level has dropped to the minimum level. A warning tone also sounds. X Check the oil level, at the latest when next refuelling (Y page 323). X If necessary, top up the engine oil (Y page 324). X Have the engine checked at a qualified specialist workshop if the engine oil needs topping up more often than usual. The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range. Operation of the auxiliary heating is deactivated when the fuel level drops into the reserve range. X Refuel at the nearest filling station. There is only a very small amount of fuel in the fuel tank. The auxiliary heating cannot be operated. X Refuel at the nearest filling station without fail. ¸ Vehicles with a diesel engine: the engine air filter is dirty and must be replaced. Replace air cleaner X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. ! Vehicles with a diesel engine: there is water in the fuel filter. The water must be drained off. Clean the fuel fil‐ X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. ter Z 271 On-board computer and displays Display messages On-board computer and displays 272 Display messages Driving systems (4-button multifunction steering wheel) Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions HOLD Off The HOLD function is deactivated. The vehicle is skidding. A warning tone also sounds. X Reactivate the HOLD function later (Y page 193). The HOLD function is deactivated. When the brake pedal is firmly depressed, an activation condition is not fulfilled. A warning tone also sounds. X Check the activation conditions for the HOLD function (Y page 193). Cruise ctrl. / LIM inoperative Cruise control and SPEEDTRONIC are malfunctioning. A warning tone also sounds. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Limit --- km/h While depressing the accelerator pedal beyond the pressure point (kickdown), SPEEDTRONIC cannot be activated. Cruise control - - - km/h A condition for activating cruise control has not been met. You have tried to store a speed below 30 km/h, for example. X If conditions permit, drive faster than 30 km/h and store the speed. X Check the activation conditions for cruise control (Y page 178). 120 km/h 120 km/h Only for certain countries: the maximum speed has been exceeded. X Drive slower. Driving systems (12-button multifunction steering wheel) Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions À Based on specific criteria, ATTENTION ASSIST has determined that the driver is tired or paying less attention. A warning tone also sounds. X If necessary, take a break. Attention Assist: Drowsiness detec‐ ted À Attention Assist inoperative Speed Limit Assist currently unavail‐ able See Owner's Manual During long journeys, take regular breaks in good time so you get enough rest. ATTENTION ASSIST has failed. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Speed Limit Assist is deactivated and temporarily inoperative. Possible causes: Rthe windscreen is dirty in the camera's field of vision. is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog. If the display message does not disappear: Rvisibility Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Apply the parking brake. X Clean the windscreen. X If the system detects that the camera is fully operational, the display message disappears. Speed Limit Assist is operational again. Speed Limit Assist: Speed Limit Assist is only available in certain countries. Unavailable in X Drive on. this country Speed Limit Assist is available again when you drive in a country in which its use is approved. Speed Limit Assist inoperative Speed Limit Assist is faulty. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. HOLD Off The HOLD function is deactivated. The vehicle is skidding. A warning tone also sounds. X Reactivate the HOLD function later (Y page 193). Z 273 On-board computer and displays Display messages 274 Display messages On-board computer and displays Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The HOLD function is deactivated. If the brake pedal is firmly depressed, an activation condition is no longer fulfilled. A warning tone also sounds. X Check the activation conditions for the HOLD function (Y page 193). Radar sensor deac‐ tivated autom. See Owner's Manual Vehicles with a navigation system: the vehicle is close to a radio telescope facility and is therefore prohibited from transmitting any radar signals. The radar sensor system has switched off automatically (Y page 389). DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 183) is deactivated automatically if it is activated. A warning tone also sounds. Blind Spot Assist (Y page 205) or Active Blind Spot Assist (Y page 209) is deactivated automatically if it is activated. The yellow 9 indicator lamps also light up in the exterior mirrors. BAS PLUS (Brake Assist PLUS) (Y page 73) and PRE-SAFE® Brake (Y page 78) are then also not available. X Drive on. Once you have moved far enough away from the radio telescope, the above functions are available again. Vehicles with Becker® MAP PILOT: if the Becker® MAP PILOT is not connected, the radar sensor system is deactivated automatically. BAS PLUS, DISTRONIC PLUS, Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist and PRE-SAFE® Brake are not available. X Radar sensor deactivated See Owner's Manual Connect the Becker® MAP PILOT; see the separate operating instructions. The radar sensor system is deactivated. X Check whether or not the radar sensor system may be activated (Y page 389). X Switch on the radar sensor system (Y page 242). Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Lane Keeping Assist or Active Lane Keeping Assist is deactivated Lane Keeping and temporarily inoperative. Possible causes: Assist currently unavailable See Rthe windscreen is dirty in the camera's field of vision. Owner's Man‐ Rvisibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog. ualorActive Lane Keeping Assist cur‐ Rthere are no lane markings for a longer period. rently unavailable Rthe lane markings are worn, dark or covered, e.g. by dirt or snow. See Owner's Manual If the display message does not disappear: Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Apply the parking brake. X Clean the windscreen. X If the system detects that the camera is fully operational, the display message disappears. Lane Keeping Assist or Active Lane Keeping Assist is operational again. Lane Keeping Assist inopera‐ tiveorActive Lane Keeping Assist inoperative Lane Keeping Assist or Active Lane Keeping Assist is faulty. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Z 275 On-board computer and displays Display messages 276 Display messages On-board computer and displays Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Blind Spot Assist currently unavail‐ able See Owner's ManualorActive Blind Spot Assist currently unavail‐ able See Owner's Manual Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist is temporarily inoperative. Possible causes: Ryou have established the electrical connection between the trailer and your vehicle. Rthe sensors are dirty. Rfunction is impaired due to heavy rain or snow. Rthe radar sensor system is outside the operating temperature range. Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio stations or other sources of electromagnetic radiation. The yellow 9 indicator lamps also light up in the exterior mirrors. X When towing a trailer, confirm the display message with a. If you are driving without a trailer and the display message does not disappear: X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Apply the parking brake. X Clean the sensors (Y page 330). X Restart the engine. If the system detects that the sensors are fully operational, the display message disappears. Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist is operational again. Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist is faulty. Blind Spot Assist inopera‐ The yellow 9 indicator lamps also light up in the exterior mirtiveorActive Blind rors. Spot Assist inoper‐ X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. ative Parking Guidance inoperative Parking Guidance is malfunctioning (Y page 199). X Restart the engine. If the display message continues to be displayed: X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Parking Guidance cancelled Parking Guidance is deactivated. Possible causes: Rthe vehicle is skidding. sensors are dirty. Ra malfunction has occurred. A warning tone also sounds. X Reactivate Parking Guidance later (Y page 199). Rthe If the parking space symbol does not appear in the multifunction display at speeds below 30 km/h: X Clean the sensors (Y page 330). X Restart the engine. If the parking space symbol still does not appear in the multifunction display at speeds below 30 km/h: X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Parking Guidance has been deactivated because you are no longer following the recommended path. X Park again and, while doing so, observe the display messages in the multifunction display. Parking Guidance finished The vehicle is parked. A warning tone also sounds. The display message disappears automatically. DISTRONIC PLUS off DISTRONIC PLUS has been deactivated (Y page 183). If it was deactivated automatically, a warning tone also sounds. DISTRONIC PLUS available again DISTRONIC PLUS is operational again after having been temporarily unavailable. You can now reactivate DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 183). Z 277 On-board computer and displays Display messages 278 Display messages On-board computer and displays Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions DISTRONIC PLUS currently unavail‐ able See Owner's Manual DISTRONIC is deactivated and temporarily inoperative. Possible causes: Rthe DISTRONIC PLUS cover in the radiator grille is dirty. is impaired due to heavy rain or snow. Rthe sensors in the bumpers are dirty. Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio stations or other sources of electromagnetic radiation. Rthe system is outside the operating temperature range. Rthe on-board voltage is too low. A warning tone also sounds. If the display message does not disappear: Rfunction Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Clean the DISTRONIC PLUS cover in the radiator grille (Y page 330). X Clean the bumpers (Y page 330). X Restart the engine. X If the system detects that the sensors are fully operational, the display message disappears. DISTRONIC is operational again. DISTRONIC PLUS inoperative DISTRONIC PLUS is faulty. BAS PLUS and PRE-SAFE® Brake may also have failed. A warning tone also sounds. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. DISTRONIC PLUS suspended You have depressed the accelerator pedal. DISTRONIC PLUS is no longer controlling the speed of the vehicle. X Take your foot off the accelerator pedal. DISTRONIC PLUS --- km/h An activation condition for DISTRONIC PLUS is not fulfilled. X Check the activation conditions for DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 183). DISTRONIC PLUS and SPEEDTRONIC inoperative DISTRONIC PLUS and SPEEDTRONIC are faulty. A warning tone also sounds. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Cruise control and SPEEDTRONIC inoperative Cruise control and SPEEDTRONIC are malfunctioning. A warning tone also sounds. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Limit --- km/h SPEEDTRONIC cannot be activated while you are pressing the accelerator pedal beyond the pressure point (kickdown). Cruise control --- km/h A condition for activating cruise control has not been met. You have tried to store a speed below 30 km/h, for example. X If conditions permit, drive faster than 30 km/h and store the speed. X Check the activation conditions for cruise control (Y page 178). 120 km/h Maximum speed exceeded Only for certain countries: the maximum speed has been exceeded. In addition, the multifunction display shows 120 km/h. X Drive slower. Z 279 On-board computer and displays Display messages On-board computer and displays 280 Display messages Tyres (4-button multifunction steering wheel) Display messages Check tyres Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions G Risk of accident The tyre pressure loss warning system has detected a significant loss in pressure. A warning tone also sounds. X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking manoeuvres. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so. X Check the tyres and, if necessary, change the wheel (Y page 365). X Check the tyre pressures and, if necessary, set to the correct tyre pressure. X Restart the tyre pressure loss warning system when the tyre pressure is correct (Y page 362). Check tyres Restart system The tyre pressure loss warning system generated a display message and has not been restarted since. X Set the correct tyre pressure in all four tyres. X Restart the tyre pressure loss warning system (Y page 362). Run Flat Indicator inoperative The tyre pressure loss warning system is faulty. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Tyres (12-button multifunction steering wheel) Display messages Tyre pressure Check tyres Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions G Risk of accident The tyre pressure loss warning system has detected a significant loss in pressure. A warning tone also sounds. X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking manoeuvres. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so. X Check the tyres and, if necessary, change the wheel (Y page 365). X Check the tyre pressures and, if necessary, set to the correct tyre pressure. X Restart the tyre pressure loss warning system when the tyre pressure is correct (Y page 362). Check tyre pres‐ sures then restart Run Flat Indicator The tyre pressure loss warning system generated a display message and has not been restarted since. X Set the correct tyre pressure in all four tyres. X Restart the tyre pressure loss warning system (Y page 362). Run Flat Indicator inoperative The tyre pressure loss warning system is faulty. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Tyre pressures will be displayed after a few minutes of driving The tyre pressure monitor is measuring the tyre pressure. X Drive on. The tyre pressures appear in the multifunction display after you have been driving for a few minutes. Tyre press. monitor The tyre pressure monitor is faulty. inoperative X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Tyre press. monitor The wheels fitted do not have a suitable tyre pressure sensor. The tyre pressure monitor is deactivated. inoperative No wheel sensors X Fit wheels with suitable tyre pressure sensors. The tyre pressure monitor is activated automatically after driving for a few minutes. Z 281 On-board computer and displays Display messages 282 Display messages On-board computer and displays Display messages Check tyre(s) Caution, tyre defect Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions G Risk of accident The tyre pressure in one or more tyres has dropped significantly. The wheel position is displayed in the multifunction display. A warning tone also sounds. X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking manoeuvres. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so. X Correct the tyre pressure (Y page 363). X If necessary, change a wheel (Y page 365). G Risk of accident The tyre pressure in one or more tyres has dropped suddenly. The wheel position is displayed in the multifunction display. X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking manoeuvres. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so. X If necessary, change a wheel (Y page 365). Rectify tyre pressure The tyre pressure is too low in at least one of the tyres, or the tyre pressure difference between the wheels is too great. X Check the tyre pressures at the next opportunity. If necessary, correct the tyre pressure (Y page 363). Wheel sensor(s) missing There is no signal from the tyre pressure sensor of one or several wheels. The pressure of the affected tyre is not displayed in the multifunction display. X Have the faulty tyre pressure sensor replaced at a qualified specialist workshop. Tyre press. monitor Due to a source of radio interference, no signals can be received currently unavail‐ from the wheel sensors. The tyre pressure monitor is temporarily malfunctioning. able X Drive on. The tyre pressure monitor restarts automatically as soon as the problem has been solved. Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions h G Risk of accident h G Risk of accident Tyre pressure, Cau‐ The tyre pressure in one or more tyres has dropped suddenly. A warning tone also sounds. tion tyre malf. X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking manoeuvres. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so. X If necessary, change a wheel (Y page 365). Tyre pressure Check tyre(s) The tyre pressure in one or more tyres has dropped significantly. X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking manoeuvres. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so. X If necessary, change a wheel (Y page 365). X Check the tyre pressure. If necessary, correct the tyre pressure (Y page 363). h The tyre pressure is too low in at least one of the tyres, or the tyre pressure difference between the wheels is too great. X Check the tyre pressures at the next opportunity. If necessary, correct the tyre pressure (Y page 363). Please correct tyre pressure Vehicle (4-button multifunction steering wheel) Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions To start engine, shift to P or N You have attempted to start the engine with the transmission in position R or D. X Shift the transmission to position P or N. P Select Park (P) You have switched off the engine with the Start/Stop button and opened the driver's door. You wanted to lock the vehicle. A warning tone also sounds. or You have switched off the engine with the Start/Stop button and opened the driver's door with the transmission in position N. X Shift the transmission to position P. Z 283 On-board computer and displays Display messages 284 Display messages On-board computer and displays Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions With the Hold function activated, you have either: Ropened the driver's door and released the seat belt or off the engine or Ropened the bonnet A tone may also sound at regular intervals. The tone becomes louder if you attempt to lock the vehicle. You cannot start the engine. X Shift the transmission to position P. You can restart the engine. Rswitched N Saloon: the boot lid is open. X Close the boot lid. A Estate: the tailgate is open. X Close the tailgate. Mor? C G Risk of accident Vehicles with an anti-theft alarm system: the bonnet is open. A warning tone also sounds. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Apply the parking brake. X Close the bonnet. At least one door is open. A warning tone also sounds. X Close all doors. Rear left seat G Risk of injury backr. not locked Vehicles with the through-loading feature in the rear bench seat: or Rear right seat backrest not locked The backrest in the rear is not engaged on the left-hand and/or right-hand side. A warning tone also sounds. X Push the backrest back until it engages . Display messages Check trailer hitch lock Pwr. steering malfunc. Top up washer fluid Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions G Risk of accident Vehicles with a retractable trailer coupling: The trailer tow hitch is not correctly engaged. A warning tone also sounds. X Stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traffic conditions, and switch off the engine. X Apply the parking brake. X Allow the trailer tow hitch ball coupling to engage in the end position (Y page 217). G Risk of accident The power steering assistance is faulty. You will need to use more force to steer. A warning tone also sounds. X Check whether you are able to apply the extra force required. X If you are able to steer safely: carefully drive on to a qualified specialist workshop. X If you are unable to steer safely: do not drive on. Contact the nearest qualified specialist workshop. The washer fluid level in the washer fluid reservoir has dropped below the minimum. X Top up the washer fluid (Y page 325). Vehicle (12-button multifunction steering wheel) Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions To start engine, shift to either P or N You have attempted to start the engine with the transmission in position R or D. X Shift the transmission to position P or N. P Select Park (P) You have switched off the engine with the Start/Stop button and opened the driver's door. You wanted to lock the vehicle. A warning tone also sounds. or You have switched off the engine with the Start/Stop button and opened the driver's door with the transmission in position N. X Shift the transmission to position P. Z 285 On-board computer and displays Display messages 286 Display messages On-board computer and displays Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions While the HOLD function or DISTRONIC PLUS is active, you have: Ropened the driver's door and released the seat belt or off the engine or Ropened the bonnet A tone may also sound at regular intervals. The tone becomes louder if you attempt to lock the vehicle. You cannot start the engine. X Shift the transmission to position P. You can restart the engine. Rswitched N Saloon: the boot lid is open. X Close the boot lid. A Estate: the tailgate is open. X Close the tailgate. Mor? C _ G Risk of accident Vehicles with an anti-theft alarm system: the bonnet is open. A warning tone also sounds. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Apply the parking brake. X Close the bonnet. At least one door is open. A warning tone also sounds. X Close all doors. G Risk of injury Saloon with through-loading feature in the rear bench seat: Rear left seat backrest not locked The backrest in the rear is not engaged on the left-hand and/or or Rear right seat right-hand side. A warning tone also sounds. backrest not locked X Push the backrest back until it engages. Display messages j Check trailer hitch lock D Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions G Risk of accident The trailer tow hitch is not correctly engaged. A warning tone also sounds. X Stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traffic conditions, and switch off the engine. X Apply the parking brake. X Allow the trailer tow hitch ball coupling to engage in the end position (Y page 217). G Risk of accident Power steering mal‐ The power steering assistance is faulty. You will need to use more force to steer. function See Own‐ er's Manual A warning tone also sounds. X Check whether you are able to apply the extra force required. X If you are able to steer safely: carefully drive on to a qualified specialist workshop. X If you are unable to steer safely: do not drive on. Contact the nearest qualified specialist workshop. & inoperative Bat‐ tery low & inoperative Refuel vehicle & inoperative See Owner's Manual The on-board voltage is too low. The auxiliary heating has switched itself off or cannot be switched on (Y page 143). X Drive for a longer distance. The battery is being charged. The auxiliary heating is operational again as soon as the on-board electrical system voltage is sufficient. The fuel level in the fuel tank is too low. The auxiliary heating cannot be switched on (Y page 143). X Refuel at the nearest filling station. The auxiliary heating has a temporary malfunction or is faulty. X When the vehicle is on a level surface and the engine has cooled down, make up to four attempts to switch on the auxiliary heating, waiting several minutes between each attempt (Y page 143). X If the auxiliary heating does not switch on, consult a qualified specialist workshop. Z 287 On-board computer and displays Display messages 288 Display messages On-board computer and displays Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Telephone No Service Your vehicle is outside the network provider's transmitter/ receiver range. X Wait until the mobile phone operational readiness symbol appears in the multifunction display. ¥ The washer fluid level in the washer fluid reservoir has dropped below the minimum. Top up washer fluid X Top up the washer fluid (Y page 325). Key (4-button multifunction steering wheel) Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Key does not belong to vehicle X + Replace key + Change battery Key not detected (Red display message) You have put the wrong key in the ignition lock. Use the correct key. The key needs to be replaced. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. The batteries of the KEYLESS-GO key are discharged. X Change the batteries (Y page 86). The KEYLESS-GO key is not in the vehicle. A warning tone also sounds. If the engine is switched off, you can no longer lock the vehicle centrally or start the engine. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Apply the parking brake. X Locate the KEYLESS-GO key. The KEYLESS-GO key is not detected while the engine is running because there is interference from a strong source of radio waves. A warning tone also sounds. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Apply the parking brake. X Operate the vehicle with the key in the ignition lock if necessary. Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Key not detected (White display message) The KEYLESS-GO key cannot be detected at present. X Change the location of the key with the KEYLESS-GO functions in the vehicle. If the KEYLESS-GO key is still not detected: Change the location of the key with the KEYLESS-GO functions in the vehicle. X Operate the vehicle with the key in the ignition lock if necessary. X + Key still in vehi‐ cle + Insert key Close doors to lock veh. The KEYLESS-GO key has been detected inside the vehicle during locking. X Remove the KEYLESS-GO key from the vehicle. KEYLESS-GO is temporarily malfunctioning or is defective. A warning tone also sounds. X Insert the key into the ignition lock and turn it to the desired position. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. At least one door is open. A warning tone also sounds. X Close all doors and lock the vehicle again. Key (12-button multifunction steering wheel) Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions  You have put the wrong key in the ignition lock. X Use the correct key. Key does not belong to vehicle  Replace key  Change key batter‐ ies The key needs to be replaced. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. The batteries of the KEYLESS-GO key are discharged. X Change the batteries (Y page 86). Z 289 On-board computer and displays Display messages 290 Display messages On-board computer and displays Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions  The KEYLESS-GO key is not in the vehicle. A warning tone also sounds. If the engine is switched off, you can no longer lock the vehicle centrally or start the engine. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Apply the parking brake. X Locate the KEYLESS-GO key. Key not detec‐ ted(red display message) The KEYLESS-GO key is not detected while the engine is running because there is interference from a strong source of radio waves. A warning tone also sounds. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Apply the parking brake. X Operate the vehicle with the key in the ignition lock if necessary.  Key not detected (White display message) The KEYLESS-GO key cannot be detected at present. X Change the location of the key with the KEYLESS-GO functions in the vehicle. If the KEYLESS-GO key is still not detected: X  Key still in vehi‐ cle  Remove starting button, then insert key  Close doors to lock vehicle Operate the vehicle with the key in the ignition lock if necessary. The KEYLESS-GO key has been detected inside the vehicle during locking. X Remove the KEYLESS-GO key from the vehicle. KEYLESS-GO is temporarily malfunctioning or is defective. A warning tone also sounds. X Insert the key into the ignition lock and turn it to the desired position. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. At least one door is open. A warning tone also sounds. X Close all doors and lock the vehicle again. Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster Seat belts Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions 7 Only for certain countries: the red seat belt warning lamp lights up for six seconds after the engine starts. The seat belt warning lamp reminds the driver and front passenger to fasten their seat belts. X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 53). 7 G Risk of injury Only for certain coun- The driver's seat belt is not fastened. tries: the red seat belt warning lamp lights up X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 53). The warning tone ceases. after the engine starts. In addition, a warning tone sounds for up to six seconds. 7 G Risk of injury The red seat belt warn- The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt. ing lamp lights up after X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 53). the engine starts, as The warning lamp goes out. soon as the driver's or the front-passenger G Risk of injury door is closed. There are objects on the front-passenger seat. X Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stow them in a secure place. The warning lamp goes out. Z 291 On-board computer and displays Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 292 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster On-board computer and displays Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions 7 G Risk of injury The red seat belt warn- The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt. At ing lamp flashes and an the same time, you are driving faster than 25 km/h or have briefly intermittent audible driven faster than 25 km/h. warning sounds. X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 53). The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning tone ceases. G Risk of injury There are objects on the front-passenger seat. At the same time, you are driving faster than 25 km/h or have briefly driven faster than 25 km/h. X Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stow them in a secure place. The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning tone ceases. Safety systems Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions J G Risk of accident The red brake system There is insufficient brake fluid in the fluid reservoir. warning lamp comes on while the engine is run- X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving ning. A warning tone under any circumstances. also sounds. X Apply the parking brake. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. Do not top up the brake fluid. This does not correct the error. ! G Risk of accident The yellow ABS warning ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) has been deactivated due to a fault. lamp is lit while the For this reason, BAS (Brake Assist), BAS PLUS, ESP® (Electronic engine is running. Stability Program), PRE-SAFE®, PRE-SAFE® Brake, the HOLD function, hill start assist, the adaptive brake lights and ESP® trailer stabilisation are also deactivated, for example. The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. If the ABS control unit is faulty, there is also a possibility that other systems, such as the navigation system or the automatic transmission, will not be available. Z 293 On-board computer and displays Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 294 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster On-board computer and displays Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ! G Risk of accident The yellow ABS warning ABS is temporarily unavailable. Therefore, BAS, BAS PLUS, ESP®, lamp is lit while the EBD (electronic brake force distribution), PRE-SAFE®, engine is running. PRE-SAFE® Brake, the HOLD function, hill start assist, the adaptive brake lights and ESP® trailer stabilisation, for example, are also deactivated. Self-diagnosis is not yet complete or the on-board voltage may be insufficient, for example. The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. X Carefully drive on a suitable stretch of road, making slight steering movements, at a speed above 20 km/h. The functions mentioned above are available again when the warning lamp goes out. If the warning lamp is still on: Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. X ! The yellow ABS warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. A warning tone also sounds. G Risk of accident EBD is faulty. Therefore, ABS, BAS, BAS PLUS, ESP®, PRE-SAFE®, PRE-SAFE® Brake, the HOLD function, hill start assist, the adaptive brake lights and ESP® trailer stabilisation, for example, are not available either. The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Problem J÷å! The red brake warning lamp, the yellow ESP® and ESP® OFF warning lamps and the yellow ABS warning lamp are lit while the engine is running. ÷ Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions G Risk of accident ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning. Therefore, BAS, BAS PLUS, EBD, PRE-SAFE®, PRE-SAFE® Brake, the HOLD function, hill start assist, the adaptive brake lights and ESP® trailer stabilisation, for example, are not available either. The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. G Risk of accident The yellow ESP® warn- ESP® or traction control has intervened because there is a risk of ing lamp flashes while skidding or at least one wheel has started to spin. the vehicle is in motion. Cruise control or DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated. X Only depress the accelerator pedal as far as necessary when pulling away. X Accelerate more gently during the journey. X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions. X Vehicles with a 12-button multifunction steering wheel only: do not deactivate ESP®. Exceptions: (Y page 75). å G Risk of accident Vehicles with a 12-butESP® and ESP® trailer stabilisation are deactivated. ESP® will not ton multifunction steerstabilise the vehicle if it starts to skid or if a wheel starts to spin. ing wheel only: X Reactivate ESP®. The yellow ESP® OFF For exceptions, see: (Y page 75). warning lamp is lit while X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions. the engine is running. If ESP® cannot be activated: X Have ESP® checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Z 295 On-board computer and displays Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 296 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster On-board computer and displays Problem M AMG vehicles only: The yellow SPORT handling mode warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions G Risk of accident SPORT handling mode is activated. ESP® only stabilises the vehicle in extreme situations. ESP® intervention may not be able to provide sufficient assistance in such situations, and the vehicle may start to skid. X Reactivate ESP®. For exceptions, see: (Y page 75). If ESP® cannot be activated: X ÷å The yellow ESP® and ESP® OFF warning lamps are lit while the engine is running. Have ESP® checked at a qualified specialist workshop. G Risk of accident ESP®, BAS, BAS PLUS, PRE-SAFE®, PRE-SAFE® Brake, the HOLD function, hill start assist, the adaptive brake lights and ESP® trailer stabilisation are not available due to a malfunction. ESP® will not stabilise the vehicle if it starts to skid or if a wheel starts to spin. The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Problem ÷å The yellow ESP® and ESP® OFF warning lamps are lit while the engine is running. Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions G Risk of accident ESP®, BAS, PRE-SAFE®, the HOLD function, hill start assist and ESP® trailer stabilisation are temporarily not available. The adaptive brake lights, BAS PLUS and PRE-SAFE® Brake may also have failed. ESP® will not stabilise the vehicle if it starts to skid or if a wheel starts to spin. Self-diagnosis is not yet complete. The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. X Carefully drive on a suitable stretch of road, making slight steering movements, at a speed above 20 km/h. The functions mentioned above are available again when the warning lamp goes out. If the warning lamp is still on: Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. X J You are driving with the parking brake applied. The red brake system X Release the parking brake. warning lamp comes on The warning lamp goes out and the warning tone ceases. while the vehicle is moving. A warning tone also sounds. 6 The red SRS warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. G Risk of injury The restraint systems are malfunctioning. The airbags or belt tensioners may either be triggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered at all. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Z 297 On-board computer and displays Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster On-board computer and displays 298 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster Engine Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ; There may be a fault, for example: The yellow engine diag- Rin the engine management nostics warning lamp Rin the fuel injection system lights up while the Rin the exhaust system engine is running. Rin the ignition system (for vehicles with petrol engines) Rin the fuel system The emission limit values may be exceeded and the engine may be running in emergency mode. X Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible at a qualified specialist workshop. Vehicles with a diesel engine: the fuel tank has been run dry (Y page 173). X Start the engine three to four times after refuelling. If the yellow engine diagnostics warning lamp goes out, emergency running mode is cancelled. The vehicle need not be checked. 8 The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range. The yellow reserve fuel Operation of the auxiliary heating is deactivated when the fuel level warning lamp lights up drops into the reserve range. while the engine is run- X Refuel at the nearest filling station. ning. ? The red coolant warning lamp lights up while the engine is running and the coolant temperature gauge is at the start of the scale. The temperature sensor for the coolant temperature gauge is faulty. The coolant temperature is no longer being monitored. There is a risk of engine damage if the coolant temperature is too high. X Stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traffic conditions, and switch off the engine. Do not continue driving under any circumstances. X Apply the parking brake. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ? The red coolant warning lamp comes on while the engine is running. The coolant level is too low. If the coolant level is correct, the airflow to the engine radiator may be blocked or the electric engine radiator fan may be malfunctioning. The coolant is too hot and the engine is no longer being cooled sufficiently. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traffic conditions, and switch off the engine. X Let the engine and coolant cool down. X Check the coolant level and top up the coolant (Y page 324). Observe the warning notes as you do so. X If you have to top up the coolant frequently, have the engine cooling system checked. X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not blocked, e.g. by frozen slush. X If the coolant temperature is less than 120 †, you can continue driving to the nearest qualified specialist workshop. X Avoid heavy loads on the engine as you do so, e.g. driving on mountain roads and stop-start traffic. ? The red coolant warning lamp comes on while the engine is running. A warning tone also sounds. The coolant temperature has exceeded 120 †. The airflow to the engine radiator may be blocked or the coolant level may be too low. The engine is not being cooled sufficiently and may be damaged. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traffic conditions, and switch off the engine. X Let the engine and coolant cool down. X Check the coolant level and top up the coolant (Y page 324). Observe the warning notes as you do so. X If you have to top up the coolant frequently, have the engine cooling system checked. X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not blocked, e.g. by frozen slush. X If the coolant temperature is less than 120 †, you can continue driving to the nearest qualified specialist workshop. X Avoid heavy loads on the engine as you do so, e.g. driving on mountain roads and stop-start traffic. Z 299 On-board computer and displays Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster On-board computer and displays 300 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster Driving systems Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions · G Risk of accident The red distance warn- The distance to the vehicle in front is too small for the speed ing lamp lights up while selected. the vehicle is in motion. X Increase the distance. · G Risk of accident The red distance warn- The warning is issued if you approach a stationary vehicle or a ing lamp lights up while vehicle driving ahead of you at too high a speed. the vehicle is in motion. X Be prepared to brake immediately. A warning tone also X Pay careful attention to the traffic situation. You may have to sounds. brake or take evasive action. More information about DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 183) and PRE-SAFE® Brake (Y page 78). Tyres Problem h The yellow tyre pressure monitor warning lamp is on. Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions G Risk of accident The tyre pressure monitor has detected a loss of pressure in at least one of the tyres. X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking manoeuvres. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Check the tyre pressure. If necessary, correct the tyre pressure (Y page 363). X If necessary, change a wheel (Y page 365). 301 302 302 302 314 Stowing and features Useful information ............................ Loading guidelines ............................ Stowage areas .................................. Features ............................................. 302 Stowage areas Useful information Stowing and features i This Owner's Manual describes all models and all standard and optional equipment available to your vehicle at the time of publication of the Owner's Manual. Countryspecific deviations are possible. Please note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all features described. This also applies to safety-relevant systems and functions. i Please read the information on qualified specialist workshops (Y page 28). Loading guidelines G WARNING Secure and position the load as described in the loading guidelines. Otherwise, vehicle occupants could be injured by the load being thrown around in the event of sharp braking, a sudden change in direction or an accident. You will find further information in the "Securing a load" section. Even if you follow all the loading guidelines, the load will increase the risk of injury in the event of an accident. G WARNING Keep the boot lid/tailgate closed while the vehicle is in operation. Otherwise, exhaust fumes could enter the vehicle interior and poison you. The handling characteristics of a laden vehicle are dependent on the distribution of the load within the vehicle. For this reason, you should observe the following notes when transporting a load: Rwhen transporting a load, never exceed the maximum permissible gross vehicle weight or the permissible axle loads for the vehicle (including occupants). Rposition heavy loads as far forwards as possible and as low down in the boot/luggage compartment as possible. Rthe load must not protrude above the upper edge of the seat backrests. Ralways place the load against the rear or front seat backrests. Make sure that the seat backrests are securely locked into place. Ralways place the load behind unoccupied seats if possible. Rsecure the load with sufficiently strong and wear-resistant lashing material. Pad sharp edges for protection. i Load restraints are available at any qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a MercedesBenz Service Centre. Stowage areas Stowage compartments Important safety notes G WARNING The stowage compartments must be closed when items are stored in them. Luggage nets are not designed to secure heavy items of luggage. You or other vehicle occupants could be injured by objects being thrown around if you: Rbrake sharply Rchange direction suddenly Rare involved in an accident Sharp-edged and fragile objects must not be placed in the luggage net. Do not place hard objects in the map pockets. Objects must not protrude from the map pockets. Stowage areas 303 Front stowage compartments X To open: pull down spectacles compartment : by the handle. Stowage compartment in the centre console To open: pull handle : and open glove compartment flap ;. X To close: fold glove compartment flap ; upwards until it engages. X The glove compartment can only be locked and unlocked using the emergency key element. X To lock: insert the emergency key element into the lock and turn it 90° clockwise to position 2. X To unlock: insert the emergency key element into the lock and turn it 90° anticlockwise to position 1. X To open: slide cover : back. Stowage compartment/telephone compartment under the armrest i Depending on the vehicle's equipment, a USB port and an AUX-IN jack or a Media Interface are installed in the stowage compartment. A Media Interface is a universal interface for portable audio equipment, e.g. for an iPod® or MP3 player (see the separate Audio or COMAND operating instructions). Spectacles compartment There is a compartment to stow spectacles in the roof lining on the driver's side. Z Stowing and features Glove compartment i The glove compartment can be cooled (Y page 148). Stowage areas 304 Rear stowage compartments Stowing and features Stowage compartment in the rear compartment X To open: press left-hand button ; or righthand button :. The stowage compartment opens. Stowage compartment under the front seats G WARNING Only load the stowage compartment with the maximum permissible load of 1.5 kg. Otherwise, the transported load could, for example, be thrown out of the stowage compartment if you change direction suddenly or brake sharply and could injure you or others. i On vehicles with a fire extinguisher instead of a stowage compartment, the fire extinguisher is installed under the driver's seat. X X To open: fold down seat armrest ;. Fold cover : of the armrest upwards. Luggage nets G WARNING Only place lightweight objects in the luggage net. Do not use it to transport heavy, sharpedged or fragile objects. The luggage net cannot secure the objects sufficiently in the event of an accident. Luggage nets are located in the frontpassenger footwell, on the rear of the driver's and front-passenger seat backrests and on the left-hand side in the boot (Saloon) or on the left and right-hand side of the luggage compartment (Estate). Through-loading facility in the rear bench seat Important safety notes X To open: pull handle : up and fold cover ; forwards. G WARNING Do not carry heavy or hard objects inside the vehicle or in the boot unless they are secured. Otherwise, you and other vehicle occupants could be injured by objects being thrown around the vehicle in the event of sharp brak- Stowage areas 305 ing, a sudden change in direction or an accident. G WARNING The left-hand and right-hand rear seat backrests can be folded down separately to increase the boot capacity. Folding the seat backrest forwards X X Fold rear seat backrest ; forwards. Move the driver's or front-passenger seat back if necessary. Folding back the seat backrest ! Before you fold down the rear seat back- rest, remove the side head restraints for the integrated child seat; see the "Side head restraints for integrated child seat" section. The side head restraints could otherwise be damaged. Move the driver's or front-passenger seat forward if necessary. X Open the boot. X Pull right-hand or left-hand rear seat backrest release handle :. The corresponding rear seat backrest is released. X Fully insert the rear seat backrest head restraints. X X Move the driver's or front-passenger seat forward if necessary. ! Make sure that the seat belt does not become trapped when folding the rear seat backrest back. Otherwise, it could be damaged. X Fold rear seat backrest : back until it engages. G WARNING Make sure that the rear seat backrest is correctly engaged. Otherwise, vehicle occupants could be injured by objects being thrown around if you: Rbrake sharply Rchange direction suddenly Rare involved in an accident Z Stowing and features Always drive with the boot lid closed. Exhaust fumes could otherwise enter the vehicle interior. Stowage areas 306 If the rear seat backrest is not engaged, this will be shown in the multifunction display in the instrument cluster. Stowing and features i You should always engage the rear seat backrests if you do not need the throughloading feature. This will prevent unauthorised access to the boot from the vehicle interior. Adjust the head restraints if necessary (Y page 107). X Move the driver's or front-passenger seat back if necessary. X section. The side head restraints could otherwise be damaged. The left-hand and right-hand rear seat backrests can be folded forwards separately to increase the luggage compartment capacity. Folding the rear seat backrest forward If the combined luggage cover and net is fitted with the luggage compartment cover and safety net, both rear seat backrests can be folded forwards only if you first fold the righthand rear seat backrest forwards. Otherwise, only the right-hand backrest can be folded forwards individually. Enlarging the luggage compartment (Estate) Important safety notes G WARNING Do not carry heavy or hard objects inside the vehicle or in the luggage compartment unless they are secured. Otherwise, you and other vehicle occupants could be injured by objects being thrown around the vehicle in the event of sharp braking, a sudden change in direction or an accident. When using the enlarged luggage compartment, always clip in the safety net. When transporting objects in the luggage compartment, the combined luggage cover and net (luggage compartment cover and safety net) must be attached to the rear seat backrest. G WARNING Always drive with the tailgate closed. Exhaust fumes could otherwise enter the vehicle interior. ! Before you fold down the rear seat backrest, remove the side head restraints for the integrated child seat; see the "Side head restraints for integrated child seat" Fully insert the backrest head restraints (Y page 107). X Move the driver's or front-passenger seat forward if necessary. X Pull left-hand or right-hand release handle ; of the seat backrest forwards. Corresponding seat backrest : is released. X Fold seat backrest : forwards. X Move the driver's or front-passenger seat back if necessary. X Stowage areas Folding the rear seat backrest back 307 Otherwise, vehicle occupants could be injured by objects being thrown around if you: Rbrake sharply direction suddenly Rare involved in an accident Please observe the loading guidelines. Observe the following notes on securing loads: Rsecure X Move the driver's or front-passenger seat forward if necessary. ! Make sure that the seat belt does not become trapped when folding the rear seat backrest back. Otherwise, it could be damaged. X Fold seat backrest : back until it engages. Red lock status indicator ; is no longer visible. the load using the lashing eyelets. not use elastic straps or nets to secure a load, as these are only intended as an anti-slip protection for light loads. Rdo not route lashing materials across sharp edges or corners. Rpad sharp edges for protection. There are four lashing eyelets in the boot or luggage compartment. Rdo G WARNING Make sure that the seat backrest is correctly engaged. The red lock verification indicators on the left and right sides should no longer be visible. If they are visible, the backrests are not locked in position. Occupants could otherwise be injured in the event of an accident, e.g. by objects being thrown forwards through the vehicle interior from the luggage compartment. Saloon with through-loading feature in the rear bench seat : Lashing eyelets Adjust the head restraints if necessary (Y page 107). X Move the driver's or front-passenger seat back if necessary. X Securing a load Lashing eyelets G WARNING Distribute the load on the lashing eyelets evenly. Estate without EASY-PACK load-securing kit : Lashing eyelets Z Stowing and features Rchange Stowage areas 308 Stowing and features Saloon Estate with EASY-PACK load-securing kit : Lashing eyelets ; Mounting elements = Lashing eyelets X : Bag hook Estate Estate with EASY-PACK load-securing kit: insert mounting elements ; and slide to the desired position (Y page 310). Bag hooks in the boot/luggage compartment Important safety notes G WARNING Only hang light loads on the bag holders. Do not use them to transport heavy, sharp-edged or fragile objects. When braking sharply, changing direction quickly or in the event of an accident, the bag hooks will not secure the items sufficiently. This could result in injury to yourself or others. ! The bag hook can bear a maximum load of 5 kg. Do not use it to secure a load. X To open: press bag hook : (arrow). Bag hook : slides out. X To close: press bag hook : until it engages. Luggage compartment cover (Estate) Important safety notes G WARNING The luggage compartment cover is not a restraint system. Secure the load under the luggage compartment cover by suitable means. Make sure that the luggage compartment cover is engaged securely. If luggage is not sufficiently secured, it can be thrown over the backrest into the passenger compartment, for instance during heavy braking, sudden changes of direction or in the event of an Stowage areas ! When loading the vehicle, make sure that you do not stack the load in the luggage compartment higher than the lower edge of the side windows. Do not place heavy objects on top of the luggage compartment cover. The luggage compartment cover and the safety net are attached to the rear bench seat backrest as a combined luggage cover and net. To retract: press handle ; briefly. The luggage compartment cover rolls up automatically. X If necessary, fold cover shield : upwards or downwards to the detent. X Removing the combined luggage cover and net Make sure that the safety net and the luggage compartment cover are rolled up. X Fold the left and right rear seat backrest forwards (Y page 306). X Extending and retracting the luggage compartment cover Push combined luggage compartment cover and net ; to the left until it extends out of guide rails :. X Remove combined luggage compartment cover and net ;. X To extend: position cover shield : horizontally. X Pull luggage compartment cover back using grab handle ; until it engages in the guides on the left and right-hand sides. X Safety net (Estate) Important safety notes G WARNING The safety net cannot secure heavy loads. You should therefore always lash down the load. You could otherwise be injured by objects which have not been sufficiently secured being thrown around in the event of sharp braking, a sudden change of direction or an accident. Z Stowing and features accident. You could cause an accident or cause injury to yourself and others. 309 Stowage areas 310 Stowing and features G WARNING In the event of sharp braking, a sudden change of direction, or an accident, light loads can be thrown about. This could result in injury to yourself or others. Therefore, if you are transporting light loads, use the safety net. When transporting objects in the luggage compartment, the combined luggage cover and net must be attached to the rear seat backrest. Coat hooks on the tailgate G WARNING The tailgate may close if too great a load is placed on the coat hooks. This could cause you or others to be trapped and injured. If you use the coat hooks, only hang light clothing on them. Make sure that nobody can become trapped. Safety net without luggage compartment enlargement : Coat hooks EASY-PACK load-securing kit (Estate) X Pull the safety net up by tab : and hook it into eyelets ;. Safety net with luggage compartment enlargement Fold the left and right rear seat backrest forwards (Y page 306). X Guide the safety net up by tab : and hook it into eyelets ;. X Components and storage The EASY-PACK load-securing kit allows you to use your luggage compartment for a variety of purposes. The accessory parts are located under the luggage compartment floor. X Open the luggage compartment floor (Y page 312). Stowage areas 311 Otherwise, vehicle occupants could be injured by objects being thrown around if you: Rbrake sharply direction suddenly Rare involved in an accident Please observe the loading guidelines. Luggage holder ; Luggage holder The luggage holder can be used to secure light loads against the side wall of the luggage compartment to prevent them from moving around. = Telescopic rod ! Only use the luggage holder to secure EASY-PACK load-securing kit accessory parts : Brackets loads with a maximum weight of 7 kg and with dimensions that the luggage holder can safely and securely contain. Inserting the brackets into the loading rail Insert bracket : into the centre of loading rail ?. X Press release button ; and push bracket : into the desired position in loading rail ?. X Let go of release button ;. X Press locking button =. Bracket : is locked in loading rail ?. X If necessary, fold lashing eyelet A upwards. X G WARNING Distribute the load on the lashing eyelets evenly. To install: insert two brackets A into the left or right loading rail (Y page 310). X Press release button : of the luggage holder and pull the strap out slightly. X Insert luggage holder ; into brackets A and press down until it engages. X Press release button : of the luggage holder and pull the strap out in the direction of the arrow. X Place the load between the strap and the luggage compartment side wall. X Using one hand, press locking button : of the luggage holder. X Z Stowing and features Rchange Stowage areas 312 With your other hand, let the strap go slowly until the load is secured. X Make sure that locking button ? on brackets A is pressed. This keeps brackets A in place on the loading rail. X Stowing and features X To remove: press release button = on respective bracket A and remove luggage holder ; by pulling upwards and out. Telescopic rod X To open: pull handle : upwards. X Hook handle : into rain trough ;. The telescopic rod can be used to secure the load against the rear seats to prevent it from moving around. ! Remove the handle again before closing To install: insert one bracket ; into both the left and the right loading rails and slide it to the desired position (Y page 310). X Insert telescopic rod : into brackets ; and press downwards until it engages. X Make sure that locking button = on brackets ; is pressed. This keeps brackets ; in place on the loading rail. X X To remove: press release button ? on respective bracket ; and remove telescopic rod : by pulling it upwards and out. Stowage well under the boot floor The TIREFIT kit, the vehicle tool kit, etc. are located in the stowage compartment. the boot lid and snap it in tightly to prevent the handle flap from protruding. Otherwise, you could damage the handle. Stowage well under the luggage compartment floor (Estate) G WARNING Never drive with the luggage compartment floor open. Otherwise, you and other vehicle occupants could be injured by objects being thrown around the vehicle in the event of sharp braking, a sudden change in direction or an accident. A removable insert under the luggage compartment floor contains the parts of the EASYPACK load-securing kit and a folding box. TIREFIT, the vehicle tool kit, etc. are stored beneath this insert. To open: open the tailgate. Holding the ribbing, press handle : downwards ;. Handle : folds upwards. X Swing the luggage compartment floor upwards using handle : until it rests against the luggage compartment cover. This helps to prevent damage to the vehicle. Position the load on the roof carrier in such a way that the vehicle will not sustain damage even when it is in motion. Make sure that if the roof carrier is fitted: Rthe sliding sunroof/panorama sliding sunroof can be fully raised, depending on the vehicle's equipment. Rthe boot lid/ tailgate can be fully opened. Rthe aerial on the roof does not touch the roof carrier. X X ! To avoid damaging or scratching the covers, do not use metallic or hard objects to open them. Attaching the roof carrier (Saloon) To close: fold the luggage compartment floor down. X Press the luggage compartment floor down ; until it engages. X Roof carrier Important safety notes G WARNING An incorrectly secured roof carrier, ski rack or load could become detached from the vehicle. These objects might then be thrown around and could injure you or others or cause an accident. Follow the roof carrier/ski rack manufacturer's installation instructions and special instructions for use. The roof load raises the vehicle's centre of gravity, thereby affecting vehicle handling. You must always observe the maximum roof load of 100 kg. Always adapt your driving style to the prevailing road, traffic and weather conditions and drive with particular care if the roof is laden. Open covers : carefully in the direction of the arrow. X Fold covers : upwards. X Only secure the roof carrier to the anchorage points under covers :. X Observe the manufacturer's installation instructions. X Attaching the roof carrier (Estate) X X Secure the roof carrier to the roof rails. Observe the manufacturer's installation instructions. ! Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use roof carriers that have been tested and approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles. Z 313 Stowing and features Stowage areas Features 314 Features Cup holders Removing and fitting the cup holder Removing Important safety notes Stowing and features G WARNING Keep the cup holder closed while the vehicle is in motion. Otherwise, vehicle occupants could be injured by objects being thrown around if you: Rbrake sharply Rchange direction suddenly Rare involved in an accident Only use the cup holders for containers of a suitable size and which have lids. The drinks could otherwise spill. Cup holders should not be used for hot drinks. You may otherwise scald yourself. Cup holder in the front centre console Pry groove ; away carefully on the frontpassenger side using a suitable tool until lug = becomes visible. X Pull the cup holder upwards slightly, to the stop. X Pry groove : away carefully on the driver's side using a suitable tool. At the same time, pull the cup holder upwards slightly, to the stop. X Pry groove on driver's side : and frontpassenger side ; away alternately. When doing so, lift the cup holder upwards until it can be removed. X Fitting : Cup holders ; Cover X To open: slide cover ; back. X Insert left-hand and right-hand grooves ; of the cup holder into lateral springs =. Insert the cup holder so that the wedge of Features 315 the upper section of cup holder : faces forwards. X Press the cup holder downwards until it engages on the front-passenger side. Cup holder in the rear seat armrest on the rear seat armrest when it is folded down, as you could otherwise damage it. ! Close the cup holder before folding the rear seat armrest up. Otherwise, the cup holder could be damaged. : Mirror light ; Bracket = Retaining clip, e.g. for a car park ticket ? Vanity mirror A Mirror cover Vanity mirror in the sun visor Mirror light : only functions if the sun visor is clipped into retainer ; and mirror cover A has been folded up. Glare from the side Fold down the rear seat armrest. To open: raise the rear seat armrest cover. X Press release catch :. Cup holder ; folds out forwards. X Fold the cover of the rear seat armrest back down again if necessary. X To close: lift the cover of the rear seat armrest. Swing cup holder ; back until it engages. X X X X Fold down the sun visor. Pull the sun visor out of retainer ;. X Swing the sun visor to the side. Sunblinds on the rear side windows Sun visors Sun visor overview G WARNING Keep the mirrors in the sun visors covered while driving. You could otherwise be dazzled, which may impair your view of traffic conditions and as a result could cause an accident. X To extend: pull the roller sunblind out by tab : and hook it onto retainers ; at the top of the window. Z Stowing and features ! Do not sit on or support your body weight Features 316 ! Always guide the roller sunblind by hand. Do not let it snap back suddenly as this would damage the automatic roller mechanism. Stowing and features ! Do not drive the vehicle with the roller sunblind hooked in and the side windows opened simultaneously. The roller sunblind can jump out of the retainers and spring back suddenly when driving at high speeds, e.g. when driving on the motorway. This could damage the inertia reel. Therefore, either close the side window or retract the roller sunblind before driving at high speeds. Ashtray Ashtray in the front centre console i You can remove the ashtray insert and use the resulting compartment for stowage. ! The stowage space under the ashtray is not heat resistant. Before placing lit cigarettes in the ashtray, make sure that the ashtray is properly engaged. Otherwise, the stowage space could be damaged. Rear window roller sunblind (Saloon) Extending/retracting the roller sunblind ! Make sure that the roller sunblind can move freely. Otherwise, the roller sunblind or other objects could be damaged. Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. X To extend or retract: briefly press button :. The roller sunblind fully extends or fully retracts. X To open: slide cover : forwards until it engages. X To remove the insert: hold insert = by the ribbing at the sides and lift it up ; and out. X To refit the insert: press insert = into the holder until it engages. X To close: press cover : briefly at the front. The cover moves back. X Features Press in cigarette lighter ;. Cigarette lighter ; will pop out automatically when the heating element is red-hot. X To close: press cover : briefly at the front. The cover moves back. X 12 V sockets Points to observe before use To open: pull cover ; out by its top edge. To remove the insert: press release button = and lift the insert up and out. X To fit the insert: fit insert : from above into the holder and press down into the holder until it engages. X X The sockets can be used for accessories with a maximum current draw of 180 W (15 A), e.g. lamps or chargers for mobile phones. If you use the sockets for long periods when the engine is switched off, the battery may discharge. X Turn the key to position 1 in the ignition lock. i An emergency cut-off ensures that the on- board voltage does not drop too low. If the on-board voltage is too low, the power to the sockets is automatically cut. This ensures that there is sufficient power to start the engine. Cigarette lighter G WARNING Only hold the hot cigarette lighter by its knob. Otherwise, you might burn yourself. Make sure that children travelling in the vehicle are not able to injure themselves on the hot cigarette lighter or cause a fire with it. Socket in the front centre console To open: slide cover : forwards until it engages. X Lift up the cover of socket ;. X To close: press cover : briefly at the front. The cover moves back. X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. X To open: slide cover : forwards until it engages. X Z Stowing and features Ashtray in the rear-compartment centre console 317 Features 318 Socket in the rear-compartment centre console Stowing and features A socket is fitted in the centre console in the rear compartment in vehicles with an ashtray and a cigarette lighter. motion, you must only do so if the traffic situation permits. Otherwise, you could be distracted from the traffic conditions, cause an accident and injure yourself and others. Two-way radios and fax equipment used without low-reflection exterior aerials can interfere with the vehicle's electronics and thereby jeopardise the operating safety of the vehicle and your safety. Therefore, you must only use this equipment if it is correctly connected to a separate reflection-free exterior aerial. G WARNING X X Pull cover ; out by its top edge. Lift up the cover of socket :. Socket in the luggage compartment (Estate) Excessive levels of electromagnetic radiation may cause damage to your health and the health of others. Using an exterior aerial takes into account current scientific discussions relating to the possible health risk posed by electromagnetic fields. Mercedes-Benz recommends the use of an approved exterior aerial. This ensures: Roptimal mobile phone reception quality in the vehicle Rmutual influences between the vehicle electronics and mobile phones are minimised An exterior aerial has the following advantages: Rit conducts the electromagnetic fields gen- erated by a wireless device to the exterior. field strength in the vehicle interior is lower than in a vehicle that does not have an exterior aerial. Rthe X Lift up the cover of socket :. Mobile phone Important notes G WARNING Observe the legal requirements of the country in which you are currently driving regarding operating mobile communications equipment in a vehicle. If it is permitted by law to operate communications equipment while the vehicle is in i There are various mobile phone brackets that may be fitted to your vehicle; in some cases, these are country-specific. i Even if your vehicle is equipped with convenience telephony, you can connect a Bluetooth® capable mobile phone to Audio 20 or COMAND Online via the Bluetooth® interface. Features Rat your Mercedes-Benz Service Centre the Internet at http://www.mercedesbenz.com/connect Ron i The functions and services available when If you take the key out of the ignition lock, the mobile phone stays on but you can no longer use the hands-free system. If you are making a call and you would like to take the key out of the ignition lock, first remove the mobile phone from the bracket. Otherwise, the call will be ended. i When a mobile phone bracket is used that is connected to the mobile phone via Bluetooth®: if you want to continue a call in "Private mode", you have to perform the necessary steps on the mobile phone (see the separate mobile phone operating instructions). you use the phone depend on your mobile phone model and service provider. Inserting the mobile phone Open the telephone compartment (Y page 303). X Place the mobile phone bracket into the pre-installed bracket (see the separate mobile phone bracket installation instructions). X Insert the mobile phone into the mobile phone bracket (see the separate mobile phone bracket installation instructions). X You can fold the pre-installed bracket up to improve access to the stowage space beneath it. Depending on the vehicle's equipment, a USB connection and an AUX-IN connection/Media Interface are fitted in the stowage compartment (Y page 303). If the mobile phone is inserted in the mobile phone bracket, you can speak to the person you are calling using the hands-free system. i On some mobile phone brackets, you first have to connect the mobile phone via Bluetooth® to a mobile phone bracket (see the separate operating instructions for the mobile phone bracket). On these mobile phone brackets, the mobile phone does not have to be inserted into the bracket for you to be able to use the telephone functions. In this case, the charging function and aerial function are not available. X X To fold the bracket up: press button :. To fold the bracket down: press the bracket down and allow it to engage. Floormat on the driver's side Operating the mobile phone G WARNING You can operate the telephone using the 6 and ~ buttons on the luxury multifunction steering wheel. You can operate other mobile phone functions via the onboard computer (Y page 235). Make sure that there is sufficient clearance around the pedals when floormats are used, and that the floormats are properly secured. The floormats must be correctly secured at all times using retainers and press-studs. Z Stowing and features More information on suitable mobile phones, mobile phone brackets and on connecting Bluetooth® capable mobile phones to Audio 20 or COMAND Online can be obtained: 319 Features 320 Stowing and features Before you drive off, check the floormats and secure if necessary. A floormat which is not properly secured can slip and, thereby, interfere with the movement of the pedals. Do not place floormats on top of one another. Slide the seat backwards. To fit: place the floormat in the footwell. X Press studs : onto retainers ;. X X To remove: pull the floormat off retainers ;. X Remove the floormat. X Retrofitted anti-glare film Anti-glare film retrofitted to the inside of the windows can interfere with radio/mobile phone reception. This is particularly the case for conductive or metallic-coated films. Information about anti-glare film can be obtained from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. 321 322 322 326 327 Maintenance and care Useful information ............................ Engine compartment ........................ Maintenance ...................................... Care .................................................... 322 Engine compartment Useful information Maintenance and care i This Owner's Manual describes all models and all standard and optional equipment available to your vehicle at the time of publication of the Owner's Manual. Countryspecific deviations are possible. Please note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all features described. This also applies to safety-relevant systems and functions. i Please read the information on qualified specialist workshops (Y page 28). Engine compartment Bonnet Opening the bonnet G WARNING Do not pull the release lever while the vehicle is in motion. If you do so, the bonnet may open up and block your view. G WARNING There is a risk of injury if the bonnet is open, even if the engine is not running. Some engine components can become very hot. To avoid the risk of burns, only touch those components described in the Owner's Manual and observe the relevant safety notes. G WARNING The radiator fan between the radiator and the engine can start automatically, even if the key has been removed from the ignition lock. For this reason, you must not reach into the fan rotation area. You could otherwise be injured. Vehicles with a petrol engine: The electronic ignition system uses high voltage. For this reason, you must never touch ignition system components (ignition coil, ignition cables, spark plug connectors or test socket) while: Rthe engine is running engine is being started Rthe ignition is switched on and the engine is being cranked by hand You could otherwise suffer an electric shock and be seriously or even fatally injured. Vehicles with a diesel engine: The electronic injection control uses high voltage. For this reason, you must never touch injection system components while: Rthe Rthe engine is running engine is being started Rthe ignition is switched on You could otherwise suffer an electric shock and be seriously or even fatally injured. Rthe X Make sure that the windscreen wipers are switched off. G WARNING The windscreen wipers and wiper linkage could be set in motion. When the bonnet is open, you or others could be injured by the wiper linkage. Make sure that the windscreen wipers are switched off. Remove the key or make sure that no ignition position has been selected with KEYLESS-GO. All indicator lamps must be off in the instrument panel. Engine compartment 323 Lower the bonnet and let it fall from a height of approximately 20 cm. X Check that the bonnet has engaged properly. If the bonnet can be raised slightly, it is not properly engaged. Open it again and close it with a little more force. X X Pull release lever : on the bonnet. The bonnet is released. ! Make sure that the windscreen wipers are not folded away from the windscreen. Otherwise, you could damage the windscreen wipers or the bonnet. i Vehicles with diesel engine: do not cover the radiator. Do not use thermal mats, insect protection covers or anything similar. Doing so can cause the Onboard Diagnostics System to display inaccurate values. Some of these values are legally required and must be correct. Engine oil Notes on the oil level Depending on driving style, the vehicle consumes a maximum of 0.8 l oil per 1000 km. The oil consumption may be higher than this when the vehicle is new or if you frequently drive at high engine speeds. X Reach into the gap, pull bonnet catch handle ; up and lift the bonnet. If you lift the bonnet by approximately 40 cm, the bonnet is opened and held open automatically by the gas-filled strut. Checking the oil level using the oil dipstick Closing the bonnet G WARNING Make sure that nobody can become trapped as you close the bonnet. Example: vehicles with a petrol engine Z Maintenance and care Radiator Engine compartment Maintenance and care 324 Example: vehicles with a diesel engine Example: engine oil cap Park the vehicle on a level surface. To check the oil level with the engine at normal operating temperature, switch the engine off and wait for approximately five minutes. X Pull oil dipstick : out of the oil dipstick tube. X Wipe off oil dipstick :. X Slowly slide oil dipstick : into the guide tube to the stop, and take it out again. If the level is between MIN mark = and MAX mark ;, the oil level is correct. X If the oil level has dropped to MIN mark = or below it, top up with 0.5 to 1.0 litres of engine oil. Turn cap : anti-clockwise and remove it. Top up the engine oil. If the oil level is at or below the MIN mark on the dipstick, top up with 0.5 to 1.0 litres of engine oil. X Replace cap : on the filler neck and turn clockwise. Make sure that the cap locks into place securely. X Check the oil level again with the oil dipstick (Y page 323). X Adding engine oil G WARNING If engine oil comes into contact with hot engine parts, it may ignite and you could burn yourself. Do not spill any engine oil on hot engine parts. H Environmental note When topping up the oil, take care not to spill any. If oil enters the soil or waterways, it is harmful to the environment. ! Do not add too much oil. If the oil level is above the "max" mark on the dipstick, too much oil has been added. This can lead to damage to the engine or the catalytic converter. Have excess oil siphoned off. X X Further information on engine oil (Y page 381). Checking and adding other service products Checking the coolant level Only check the coolant level when the vehicle is on a level surface and the engine has cooled down. X Turn the key to position 2 (Y page 153) in the ignition lock. On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, press the Start/Stop button twice (Y page 153). X Check the coolant temperature display in the instrument cluster. G WARNING The cooling system is pressurised. Therefore, only unscrew the cap once the engine has cooled down. The coolant temperature gauge You can identify service products approved by Mercedes-Benz by the following inscriptions on the container: RMB-Freigabe (e.g. MB-Freigabe 371.0) RMB-Approval (e.g. MB-Approval 371.0) Other labels and recommendations that make reference to quality level or a specification according to an MB Sheet no. (e.g. MB 371.0) are not necessarily approved by Mercedes-Benz. You can obtain further information from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. must display less than 70 † . Otherwise, you could be scalded if hot coolant escapes. Slowly turn cap : half a turn anti-clockwise and allow excess pressure to escape. X Turn cap : further anti-clockwise and remove it. If the coolant is at the level of marker bar = in the filler neck when cold, there is enough coolant in coolant expansion tank ;. If the coolant level is approximately 1.5 cm above marker bar = in the filler neck when warm, there is enough coolant in coolant expansion tank ;. X If necessary, top up with coolant that has been tested and approved by MercedesBenz. X Replace cap : and turn it clockwise as far as it will go. X G WARNING Windscreen washer fluid is highly flammable. Fire, naked flames and smoking are prohibited when handling washer fluid concentrate. ! Only use washer fluid concentrate which is suitable for plastic lamp lenses. Unsuitable washer fluid concentrate could damage the plastic lamp lenses of the headlamps. ! Do not use distilled or de-ionised water in the washer fluid reservoir. Otherwise, the level sensor may be damaged. i Add windscreen washer concentrate, e.g. MB SummerFit, to the washer fluid all year round. For further information on coolant, see (Y page 383). Windscreen washer system and headlamp cleaning system The washer fluid reservoir is used for both the windscreen washer system and the headlamp cleaning system. i Components and service products must be matched. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use products tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz. They are listed in this Mercedes-Benz Owner's Manual in the appropriate section. Example: washer fluid reservoir Mix the windscreen washer fluid in a container beforehand. X At temperatures above freezing: fill the washer fluid reservoir with a mix of water X Z 325 Maintenance and care Engine compartment Maintenance and care 326 Maintenance and windscreen washer concentrate (e.g. MB SummerFit). X At temperatures below freezing: fill the washer fluid reservoir with a mix of water and windscreen washer concentrate (e.g. MB WinterFit). Adapt the mixing ratio to the outside temperatures. X To open: pull cap : upwards by the tab. X Top up with the premixed washer fluid. X To close: press cap : onto the filler neck until it engages. Maintaining the time-dependent service schedule: X or X Service messages Information on the type of service and service intervals (see separate Service Booklet). You can obtain further information from a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. The ASSYST PLUS service interval display informs you when the next service is due. If a service due date has been exceeded, you also hear an acoustic signal. The multifunction display shows a service message for a few seconds, e.g. Next service A due in .. days Service A due Service A overdue by ... days The letter indicates which service is due. A stands for a minor service and B for a major service. A number or another letter may be displayed after the letter. This figure indicates any necessary additional maintenance work to be performed. If you report this displayed information to a qualified specialist workshop, for example a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre, they can inform you of the costs the service will incur. The ASSYST PLUS service interval display does not take into account any periods of time during which the battery is disconnected. Subtract the battery disconnection periods from the service date shown on the display after reconnecting the battery. i The ASSYST PLUS service interval display does not show any information on the engine oil level. Observe the notes on the engine oil level (Y page 323). Maintenance ASSYST PLUS service interval display Note down the service due date displayed in the multifunction display before disconnecting the battery. Hiding a service message 4-button multifunction steering wheel: press C. X 12-button multifunction steering wheel: press % or a. X Displaying service messages X Switch on the ignition. 4-button multifunction steering wheel X Use V to select the Service menu. The service due date appears in the multifunction display. 12-button multifunction steering wheel X Press the = or ; button to select the Service menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select the ASSYST PLUS submenu and confirm by pressing the a button. The service due date appears in the multifunction display. Points to remember Resetting the ASSYST PLUS service interval display A qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre, will reset the ASSYST PLUS service interval display after Care ! If the ASSYST PLUS service interval dis- play has been inadvertently reset, this setting can be corrected at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Have service work carried out as described in the Service Booklet. This may otherwise lead to increased wear and damage to the major assemblies or the vehicle. Driving abroad An extensive Mercedes-Benz Service network is also available in other countries. The Service Hotline's current telephone numbers for use when you are abroad are to be found in the "Mercedes-Benz Service24h" section of the Service Booklet. Care Notes on care Regular care of your vehicle is a condition for retaining the quality in the long term. Use care products and cleaning agents recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz. ! For cleaning your vehicle, do not use any of the following: Rdry, rough or hard cloths cleaning agents Rsolvents Rcleaning agents containing solvents Do not scrub. Do not touch the surfaces or protective films with hard objects, e.g. a ring or ice scraper. You could otherwise scratch or damage the surfaces and protective film. Rabrasive H Environmental note Dispose of empty packaging and cleaning cloths in an environmentally responsible manner. ! Do not park up the vehicle for an extended period straight after cleaning it, particularly after having cleaned the wheels with wheel cleaner. Wheel cleaners could cause increased corrosion of the brake discs and brake pads/linings. For this reason, you should drive for a few minutes after cleaning. Braking heats the brake discs and the brake pads/linings, thus drying them. The vehicle can then be parked up. Care of the exterior Automatic car wash G WARNING Braking efficiency is reduced after washing the vehicle. This could cause an accident. For this reason, following a car wash, drive with particular care until the brakes are dry. You can wash the vehicle in an automatic car wash from the very start. If the vehicle is very dirty, pre-wash it before cleaning it in an automatic car wash. ! Make sure that the automatic transmis- sion is in position N when washing your vehicle in a tow-through car wash. The vehicle could be damaged if the transmission is in another position. ! Make sure that: Rthe side windows and sliding sunroof are closed completely. blower for the ventilation/heating is switched off (OFF button is depressed). Rthe windscreen wiper switch is at position 0. The vehicle could otherwise be damaged. Rthe After using an automatic car wash, wipe off wax from the windscreen and the wiper Z Maintenance and care the necessary service work has been carried out. You can obtain further information, e.g. regarding service work, from a MercedesBenz Service Centre or directly from Mercedes-Benz. 327 328 Care blades. This will prevent smears and reduce wiping noises caused by residue on the windscreen. Maintenance and care Washing by hand In some countries, washing by hand is only allowed at specially equipped washing bays. Observe the legal requirements for each individual country. X Do not use hot water and do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight. X Use a soft sponge to clean. X Use a mild cleaning agent, such as a car shampoo approved by Mercedes-Benz. X Thoroughly hose down the vehicle with a gentle jet of water. X Do not point the water jet directly towards the air inlet. X Use plenty of water and rinse out the sponge frequently. X Rinse the vehicle with clean water and dry thoroughly with a chamois. X Do not let the cleaning agent dry on the paintwork. When using the vehicle in winter, remove all traces of road salt deposits carefully and as soon as possible. High-pressure cleaning equipment G WARNING Do not use high-pressure cleaners with circular-jet nozzles (dirt grinders) to clean your vehicle, in particular the tyres. You could otherwise damage the tyres and cause an accident. ! Always maintain a distance of at least 30 cm between the vehicle and the highpressure cleaner nozzle. Information about the correct distance is available from the equipment manufacturer. Move the high-pressure cleaner nozzle around when cleaning your vehicle. Do not aim directly at any of the following: Rtyres Rdoor gaps, roof gaps, joints etc. components Rbattery Rconnectors Rlights Rseals Rtrim elements Rventilation slots Damaged seals or electrical components can lead to leaks or failures. Relectrical Cleaning the wheels ! Do not use acidic wheel cleaning products to remove brake dust. This could damage wheel bolts and brake components. ! Do not park up the vehicle for an extended period straight after cleaning it, particularly after having cleaned the wheels with wheel cleaner. Wheel cleaners could cause increased corrosion of the brake discs and brake pads/linings. For this reason, you should drive for a few minutes after cleaning. Braking heats the brake discs and the brake pads/linings, thus drying them. The vehicle can then be parked up. Cleaning the paintwork Scratches, corrosive deposits, areas affected by corrosion and damage caused by inadequate care cannot always be completely repaired. In such cases, visit a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. X Remove impurities immediately, where possible, whilst avoiding rubbing too hard. X Soak insect remains with insect remover and rinse off the treated areas afterwards. X Soak bird droppings with water and rinse off the treated areas afterwards. Care ! Do not affix: Rstickers Rfilms Rmagnetic plates or similar items to painted surfaces. You could otherwise damage the paintwork. Care and treatment of matt paintwork If your vehicle has a clear matt finish, observe the following instructions in order to avoid damage to the paintwork due to incorrect care. These notes also apply to light alloy wheels with a clear matt finish. ! Never polish the vehicle or the light alloy wheels. Polishing makes the paintwork shiny. ! The following may cause the paint to become shiny and thus reduce the matt effect: RVigorous rubbing with unsuitable materials. RFrequent use of car washes. RWashing the vehicle in direct sunlight. ! Never use paint cleaner, buffing or pol- ishing products, or gloss preserver, e.g. wax. These products are only suitable for high-gloss surfaces. Their use on vehicles with matt finish leads to considerable surface damage (shiny, spotted areas). Always have paintwork repairs performed at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. ! Do not use wash programs with a hot wax treatment under any circumstances. i The vehicle should preferably be washed by hand using a soft sponge, car shampoo and plenty of water. i Use only insect remover and car shampoo from the range of recommended and approved Mercedes-Benz care products. Cleaning the windows G WARNING Switch off the windscreen wipers and remove the key from the ignition lock before cleaning the windscreen or the wiper blades. On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, press the Start/Stop button repeatedly until all indicator lamps in the instrument cluster have gone off. The windscreen wipers could otherwise move and injure you. ! Only fold the windscreen wipers away from the windscreen when vertical. Otherwise, you will damage the bonnet. X Clean the inside and outside of the windows with a damp cloth and a cleaning agent that is recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz. ! Do not use dry cloths, abrasive products, solvents or cleaning agents containing solvents to clean the inside of the windows. Do not touch the insides of the windows with hard objects, e.g. an ice scraper or ring. There is otherwise a risk of damaging the windows. ! Clean the water drainage channels of the windscreen and the rear window at regular intervals. Deposits such as leaves, petals and pollen may under certain circumstances prevent water from draining away. This can lead to corrosion damage and damage to electronic components. Cleaning the wiper blades G WARNING Switch off the windscreen wipers and remove the key from the ignition lock before cleaning Z Maintenance and care Remove coolant, brake fluid, tree resin, oils, fuels and greases by rubbing gently with a cloth soaked in petroleum ether or lighter fluid. X Use tar remover to remove tar stains. X Use silicone remover to remove wax. X 329 Care 330 the windscreen or the wiper blades. On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, press the Start/Stop button repeatedly until all indicator lamps in the instrument cluster have gone off. The windscreen wipers could otherwise move and injure you. Cleaning the sensors ! Only fold the windscreen wipers away Maintenance and care from the windscreen when vertical. Otherwise, you will damage the bonnet. ! Do not pull on the wiper blade. Otherwise, the wiper blade could be damaged. ! Do not clean wiper blades too often and do not rub them too hard. Otherwise, the graphite coating could be damaged. This could cause wiper noise. Fold the wiper arms away from the windscreen. X Clean the wiper blades carefully using a damp cloth. X Fold the windscreen wipers back again before switching on the ignition. X X ! If you clean the sensors with a high-pressure cleaner, make sure that you keep a distance of at least 30 cm between the vehicle and the high-pressure cleaner nozzle. Information about the correct distance is available from the equipment manufacturer. ! Hold the wiper arm securely when folding back. The windscreen could be damaged if the wiper arm hits against it suddenly. Cleaning the exterior lighting X Clean sensors : of the driving systems with water, car shampoo and a soft cloth. Cleaning the reversing camera Clean the plastic lenses of the exterior lighting using a wet sponge and a mild cleaning agent, e.g. Mercedes-Benz car shampoo or cleaning cloths. ! Only use cleaning agents or cleaning cloths that are suitable for plastic lenses. Unsuitable cleaning agents or cleaning cloths could scratch or damage the plastic lenses of the exterior lighting. Example: Saloon X Use clear water and a soft cloth to clean camera lens :. ! Do not clean the camera lens and the area around the reversing camera with a highpressure cleaner. Care Cleaning the exhaust tail pipes H Environmental note Impurities combined with the effects of road grit and corrosive environmental factors may cause flash rust to form on the surface. You can restore the original shine of the exhaust tail pipe by cleaning it regularly, especially in winter and after washing. Dispose of oily and greasy cloths in an environmentally-responsible manner. alkaline-based cleaning agents, such as wheel cleaner. X Clean the exhaust tail pipes with a chrome care product tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz. Cleaning the trailer tow hitch The ball coupling must be cleaned if it becomes dirty or corroded. X Remove rust, e.g. with a wire brush. X Remove dirt with a clean, lint-free cloth or a brush. ! Do not clean the ball coupling with a highpressure cleaner. Do not use solvents. Interior care Cleaning the display Before cleaning the display, make sure that it is switched off and has cooled down. X Clean the display surface using a commercially-available microfibre cloth and TFT/ LCD display cleaner. X Dry the display surface using a dry microfibre cloth. X ! For cleaning, do not use any of the following: Ralcohol-based thinner or petrol cleaning agents Rcommercially-available household cleaning agents These may damage the display surface. Do not put pressure on the display surface when cleaning. This could lead to irreparable damage to the display. Rabrasive Cleaning the plastic trim G WARNING After cleaning, lightly oil or grease ball coupling :. X Check that the vehicle's trailer tow hitch is working properly. X ! Observe the note on care provided by the trailer manufacturer. i You can also have the maintenance work on the ball coupling and the trailer tow hitch carried out by a qualified specialist workshop. When cleaning the steering wheel boss and dashboard, do not use cockpit sprays or cleaning agents containing solvents. Cleaning agents containing solvents cause the surface to become porous, and as a result plastic parts may break away and be thrown around the interior when an airbag is deployed, which may result in severe injuries. ! Do not affix the following to plastic surfaces: Rstickers Rfilms Rscented oil bottles or similar items You could otherwise damage the plastic. Z Maintenance and care ! Do not clean the exhaust tail pipes with 331 Care 332 ! Do not allow cosmetics, insect repellent that have been tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz. You can obtain these from a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service centre. Rclean artificial leather covers with a cloth moistened with a solution containing 1% detergent (e.g. washing-up liquid). Rclean cloth covers with a microfibre cloth moistened with a solution containing 1% detergent (e.g. washing-up liquid). Rub carefully and always wipe entire seat sections to avoid leaving visible lines. Leave the seat to dry afterwards. Cleaning results depend on the type of dirt and how long it has been there. Rclean Alcantara® covers with a damp cloth. Make sure you wipe entire seat sections to avoid leaving visible lines. or sunscreen to come in contact with the plastic trim. This maintains the high-quality look of the surfaces. Wipe the plastic trim with a damp, lint-free cloth, e.g. a microfibre cloth. X Heavy soiling: use car care and cleaning products recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz. The surface may change colour temporarily. Wait until the surface is dry again. Maintenance and care X Cleaning the steering wheel and gear or selector lever X Thoroughly wipe with a damp cloth or use leather care agents that have been recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz. Cleaning wooden trim and trim elements Wipe the wooden trim and trim pieces with a damp, lint-free cloth, e.g. a microfibre cloth. X Heavy soiling: use car care and cleaning products recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz. X i Note that regular care is essential to ensure that the appearance and comfort of the covers is retained over time. Cleaning the seat belts X ! Do not clean the seat belts using chemical cleaning agents. Do not dry the seatbelts at temperatures above 80 † or by exposing them to direct sunlight. ! Do not use solvent-based cleaning agents such as tar remover, wheel cleaners, polishes or waxes. There is otherwise a risk of damaging the surface. Cleaning the seat covers Cleaning the roof lining and carpets X Roof lining: use a soft brush or a cleaning agent recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz to remove heavy soiling. X Carpets: use the carpet and textile cleaning agents recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz. ! Do not use microfibre cloths to clean genuine leather, artificial leather or Alcantara® covers. If used often, these can damage the cover. ! Observe the following when cleaning: Rclean genuine leather covers carefully with a damp cloth and then wipe the covers down with a dry cloth. Make sure that the leather does not become soaked. It may otherwise become rough and cracked. Only use leather care agents Use clean, lukewarm water and soap solution. 333 334 334 337 346 350 351 354 Breakdown assistance Useful information ............................ Where will I find...? ........................... Flat tyre ............................................. Battery ............................................... Jump-starting .................................... Towing and tow-starting .................. Electrical fuses ................................. Where will I find...? 334 Useful information i This Owner's Manual describes all models and all standard and optional equipment available to your vehicle at the time of publication of the Owner's Manual. Countryspecific deviations are possible. Please note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all features described. This also applies to safety-relevant systems and functions. Breakdown assistance i Please read the information on qualified X specialist workshops (Y page 28). Remove warning triangle : from the stowage well. Setting up the warning triangle Where will I find...? Warning triangle Removing the warning triangle Saloon: the warning triangle is secured on the inside of the boot lid. X Open the boot lid. X X Fold feet = down and out to the side. Pull side reflectors ; upwards to form a triangle and lock them at the top using upper press-stud :. First-aid kit X Press warning triangle holder : up in the direction of the arrow, open it and remove the warning triangle. Estate: the warning triangle is located in the stowage well under the luggage compartment floor. X Open the tailgate. X Lift the luggage compartment floor up (Y page 312). Saloon: depending on the vehicle's equipment, the first-aid kit is located either in an open stowage space or behind the left-hand side trim panel. X Saloon: open the boot lid. Where will I find...? To open the cover: turn rotary knob : in the direction of the arrow and fold down cover ;. X Remove the first-aid kit. X X Remove first-aid kit =. i Check the expiry date on the first-aid kit at least once a year. Replace the contents if necessary, and replace missing contents. Fire extinguisher The fire extinguisher is located underneath the front of the driver's seat. Example: first-aid kit in an open stowage space X Remove first-aid kit :. X Estate: open the tailgate. X X Pull tab : upwards. Remove fire extinguisher ;. i Have the fire extinguisher refilled after each use and checked every one or two years. It may otherwise fail in an emergency. Observe the legal requirements in all countries concerned. X X Pull handle :. Fold down cover ;. Vehicle tool kit The vehicle tool kit can be found in the stowage well under the boot floor/luggage compartment floor. Breakdown assistance Example: first-aid kit behind the side trim panel 335 Where will I find...? 336 i Vehicles without a spare wheel are not equipped with the tools needed to change a wheel when they leave the factory, e.g. a jack or wheel wrench. Country-specific differences are possible. Some tools for changing a wheel are specific to the vehicle. To obtain tools approved for your vehicle, visit a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Breakdown assistance X Vehicles with a TIREFIT kit: lift up the boot floor/luggage compartment floor (Y page 312) or (Y page 312). : Vehicle tool kit tray ; Stowage well = Spare wheel/"Minispare" emergency spare wheel The vehicle tool kit contains: RFoldable RFuse wheel chock allocation chart RJack ROne pair of gloves wrench RTowing eye RWheel : Tyre sealant filler bottle ; Tyre inflation compressor = Towing eye ? Folding wheel chock A Wheel wrench B Jack C One pair of gloves (behind jack) X Vehicles with a spare wheel/"Minispare" emergency spare wheel: lift up the boot floor/luggage compartment floor (Y page 312) or (Y page 312). Spare wheel/"Minispare" emergency spare wheel The spare wheel or "Minispare" emergency spare wheel is located in the stowage well under the boot/luggage compartment floor. X Saloon: lift up the floor of the boot (Y page 312). X Estate: lift up the floor of the luggage compartment (Y page 312). Flat tyre X Remove stowage well :. 337 Stop the vehicle as far away as possible from traffic on solid, non-slippery and level ground. X Switch on the hazard warning lamps. X Firmly depress the parking brake. X Bring the front wheels into the straightahead position. X Vehicles with manual transmission: engage first or reverse gear. X Vehicles with automatic transmission: move the selector lever to P. To remove the spare wheel or "Minispare" emergency spare wheel: remove vehicle tool kit tray :. X Turn stowage well ; anti-clockwise and remove it. X Remove the spare wheel or "Minispare" emergency spare wheel =. X For further information on changing a wheel and fitting the spare wheel, see (Y page 341). Flat tyre Preparing the vehicle Your vehicle may be equipped with: Ra TIREFIT kit emergency spare wheel Ra spare wheel RMOExtended tyres (tyres with run-flat characteristics) (Y page 345) Ran i Vehicle preparation is not necessary on vehicles with MOExtended tyres. i Vehicles with MOExtended tyres are not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. It is therefore recommended that you additionally equip your vehicle with a TIREFIT kit if you fit tyres that do not feature run-flat properties, e.g. winter tyres. A TIREFIT kit can be obtained from a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. X Switch off the engine. Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: remove the key from the ignition lock. X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: open the driver's door. The on-board electronics have status 0, which is the same as the key having been removed. X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: remove the Start/Stop button from the ignition lock (Y page 153). X All occupants must get out of the vehicle. Make sure that they are not endangered as they do so. X Make sure that no one is near the danger area whilst a wheel is being changed. Anyone who is not directly assisting in the wheel change should, for example, stand behind the barrier. X Get out of the vehicle. Pay attention to traffic conditions when doing so. X Close the driver's door. X Place the warning triangle (Y page 334) a suitable distance away. Observe legal requirements. X TIREFIT kit Using the TIREFIT kit You can use the TIREFIT kit to seal small punctures, particularly those in the tyre tread. Breakdown assistance X Flat tyre 338 You can use TIREFIT at outside temperatures down to Ò20 †. G WARNING In the following situations, your safety is at particular risk as tyre sealant is unable to provide sufficient breakdown assistance: Breakdown assistance Rthere are cuts or punctures in the tyre greater than 4 mm. Rthe wheel rim is damaged. Ryou have driven at very low tyre pressures or on a flat tyre. Do not drive any further. Consult a qualified specialist workshop which has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools to carry out the work required. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose. In particular, work relevant to safety or on safety-related systems must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Do not remove any foreign objects which have penetrated the tyre, e.g. screws or nails. X Remove the tyre sealant bottle, the accompanying "max. 80 km/h" sticker and the tyre inflation compressor from the stowage well underneath the boot floor/luggage compartment floor (Y page 335). X G WARNING TIREFIT must not come into contact with your skin, eyes or clothing. RIf TIREFIT comes into contact with your eyes or skin, immediately rinse thoroughly with clean water. RChange out of clothing which has come into contact with TIREFIT immediately. RIf an allergic reaction occurs, consult a doctor immediately. Keep TIREFIT away from children. RIf TIREFIT is swallowed, immediately rinse your mouth out thoroughly and drink plenty of water. RDo not induce vomiting. Consult a doctor immediately. RDo not inhale TIREFIT fumes. i If TIREFIT leaks out, allow it to dry. It can then be removed like a layer of film. If you get TIREFIT on your clothing, have it cleaned as soon as possible with perchloroethylene. Your vehicle is provided with one of two different TIREFIT kits: RVersion 1: the tyre inflation compressor and the tyre filler bottle both have their own fixed hoses. RVersion 2: the tyre inflation compressor and the tyre filler bottle do not come with a fixed hose. This is in the housing of the tyre inflation compressor. TIREFIT kit version 1 Affix part : of the sticker within the driver's field of vision. X Affix part ; of the sticker near the valve on the wheel with the defective tyre. X Flat tyre Pull plug ? with the cable and hose A out of the housing. X Screw hose A onto flange B of tyre sealant bottle :. X Insert tyre sealant bottle : head downwards into recess ; of the tyre inflation compressor. 339 The tyre inflation compressor can be operated again once it has cooled down. X If a pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi) has been achieved after five minutes, see (Y page 340). If a pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi) has not been achieved after five minutes, see (Y page 340). Remove the cap from valve C on the faulty tyre. X Screw filler hose D onto valve C. X Insert plug ? into the cigarette lighter socket (Y page 317) or into a 12 V socket in your vehicle (Y page 317). X Turn the key to position 1 (Y page 153) in the ignition lock. X Press on/off switch = on the tyre inflation compressor to I. The tyre inflation compressor is switched on. The tyre is inflated. i First, TIREFIT is pumped into the tyre. The pressure can briefly rise to approximately 500 kPa (5 bar/73 psi). Do not switch off the tyre inflation compressor during this phase. X X Remove filler hose B and plug = from the bottom section of the tyre inflation compressor housing. X Slide the yellow filler hose connector into the mounting on yellow cap A of tyre sealant bottle : until the plug engages. X With the sealing rings in front, slide yellow cap A of tyre sealant bottle : into the mounting of tyre inflation compressor ; until the cap and both hooks engage. X Allow the tyre inflation compressor to run for five minutes. The tyre should then have attained a pressure of at least 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi). ! Do not operate the tyre inflation com- pressor for longer than six minutes at a time without a break. It may otherwise overheat. Remove the cap from valve C on the faulty tyre. X Screw filler hose D onto valve. X Z Breakdown assistance TIREFIT kit version 2 Flat tyre 340 Insert plug = into the socket of the cigarette lighter (Y page 317) or into a 12 V power socket in your vehicle (Y page 317). X Turn the key to position 1 (Y page 153) in the ignition lock. X Press on/off switch ? on the tyre inflation compressor to ON. The tyre inflation compressor is switched on. The tyre is inflated. i First, TIREFIT is pumped into the tyre. The pressure can briefly rise to approximately 500 kPa (5 bar/73 psi). Do not switch off the tyre inflation compressor during this phase. Breakdown assistance X X Allow the tyre inflation compressor to run for five minutes. The tyre should then have attained a pressure of at least 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi). ! Do not operate the tyre inflation com- pressor for longer than six minutes at a time without a break. It may otherwise overheat. The tyre inflation compressor can be operated again once it has cooled down. If a pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi) has been achieved after five minutes, see (Y page 340). If a pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi) has not been achieved after five minutes, see (Y page 340). Tyre pressure of at least 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi) not reached If, after five minutes, a pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi) has not been achieved: Switch off the tyre inflation compressor. X Unscrew the filler hose from the valve of the faulty tyre. X Very slowly drive forwards or reverse approximately 10 m. X Pump up the tyre again. X G WARNING If after five minutes a pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi) cannot be achieved, the tyre is too severely damaged. Do not drive any further. Consult a qualified specialist workshop which has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools to carry out the work required. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose. In particular, work relevant to safety or on safety-related systems must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Tyre pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/ 26 psi) is reached X X Switch off the tyre inflation compressor. Unscrew the filler hose from the valve of the faulty tyre. ! After use, excess TIREFIT may run out of the filler hose. This may cause stains. Therefore, place the filler hose in the plastic bag which contained the TIREFIT kit. Stow the tyre sealant bottle, the tyre inflation compressor and the warning triangle. X Pull away immediately. X G WARNING Do not exceed the maximum speed of 80 km/h. The "max. 80 km/h" label must be affixed in the driver's field of vision. The vehicle's handling characteristics may be affected. X Stop after driving for approximately ten minutes and check the tyre pressure with the tyre inflation compressor. G WARNING If the tyre pressure is less than 130 kPa (1.3 bar/20 psi), the tyre is too severely damaged. Do not drive any further. Consult a qualified specialist workshop which has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools to Flat tyre X X Correct the tyre pressure if it is still at least 130 kPa (1.3 bar/20 psi) (for the values, see the fuel filler flap). To increase the tyre pressure: switch on the tyre inflation compressor. TIREFIT kit version 2: to remove the tyre sealant bottle from the tyre inflation compressor, press together the locking tabs on the yellow cap. X TIREFIT kit version 2: pull the tyre sealant bottle out of the tyre inflation compressor. The filler hose stays on the tyre sealant bottle. X Stow the tyre sealant bottle, the tyre inflation compressor and the warning triangle. X Drive to the nearest workshop and have the tyre changed there. X Have the tyre sealant bottle and the filler hose replaced as soon as possible at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. X H Environmental note Have the used tyre sealant bottle disposed of professionally, e.g. at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Example: TIREFIT kit, version 2 X To reduce the tyre pressure: press pressure release button : next to pressure gauge ;. TIREFIT kit version 1: pull the tyre sealant bottle from the recess of the tyre inflation compressor. X TIREFIT kit version 1: unscrew the hose from the tyre inflation compressor to the flange of the tyre sealant bottle. X TIREFIT kit version 2 X Have the tyre sealant bottle replaced every four years at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Changing a wheel and fitting the spare wheel Preparing the vehicle G WARNING The wheel and tyre size of the emergency spare wheel/spare wheel may differ to that of the damaged wheel. When using an emergency spare wheel/spare wheel the handling characteristics of the vehicle may change. Adapt your style of driving accordingly. Never operate the vehicle with more than one emergency spare wheel/spare wheel that differs in size. Only use an emergency spare wheel/spare wheel of a differing size briefly and do not switch off ESP®. Z Breakdown assistance carry out the work required. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose. In particular, work relevant to safety or on safety-related systems must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. 341 Flat tyre 342 When using an emergency spare wheel you must not exceed the maximum speed of 80 km/h. The folding wheel chock is an additional securing measure to prevent the vehicle from rolling away, for example when changing a wheel. Breakdown assistance G WARNING Have the emergency spare wheel/spare wheel replaced with a new wheel as soon as possible at a qualified specialist workshop which has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools to carry out the work required. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose. In particular, work relevant to safety or on safety-related systems must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. i Vehicles without an emergency spare wheel/spare wheel are not equipped with wheel-changing tools at the factory. For more information on which tools are required to perform a wheel change on your vehicle, e.g. wheel chock, wheel wrench or centring pin, consult a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Prepare the vehicle as described (Y page 337). X If a trailer is coupled to the vehicle, uncouple it. X Remove the following items (depending on the vehicle's equipment) from the stowage well under the boot/luggage compartment floor: Rthe emergency spare wheel or spare wheel Rthe folding wheel chock Rthe wheel wrench Rthe jack Fold both plates upwards :. Fold out lower plate ;. X Guide the lugs on the lower plate fully into the openings in base plate =. X X X X Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling away. Securing the vehicle to prevent it from rolling away If your vehicle is equipped with a wheel chock, it can be found in the vehicle tool kit (Y page 335). Securing the vehicle on level ground (example: Saloon) X On level ground: place chocks or other suitable items under the front and rear of the wheel that is diagonally opposite the wheel you wish to change. Flat tyre 343 points. Before positioning the jack, remove any dirt that may have collected in the jacking points. Please note that you must position the jack in the opening of the jacking point. X On downhill gradients: place chocks or other suitable items in front of the wheels of the front and rear axle. X Raising the vehicle G WARNING The jack is intended only for lifting the vehicle briefly for wheel changes. The vehicle must be placed on stands if you intend to work under it. Make sure that the jack is placed on a firm, non-slip, level surface. Do not use wooden blocks or similar objects as a jack underlay. The vehicle could otherwise slip off the jack and seriously injure you. Do not start the engine at any time while the wheel is being changed. Do not lie under the vehicle when it is being supported by the jack. If you do not raise the vehicle as described, it could slip off the jack (e.g. if the engine is started or a door or the boot lid/tailgate is opened or closed) and seriously injure you. Using wheel wrench :, loosen the bolts on the wheel you wish to change by about one full turn. Do not unscrew the bolts completely. The jacking points are located just behind the front wheel arches and just in front of the rear wheel arches (arrows). Jacking points (example: Saloon) G WARNING If you fail to position the jack correctly, the vehicle may: Rslip off the jack you or others Rbe damaged. Therefore, make sure that the jack is positioned correctly in the respective jacking Rinjure X Position jack = at jacking point ;. Z Breakdown assistance Securing the vehicle on slight downhill gradients (example: Saloon) Flat tyre 344 Make sure that the base of the jack is positioned directly under the jacking point. X Turn crank ? clockwise until jack = sits completely on jacking point ; and the base of the jack lies evenly on the ground. X Turn crank ? until the tyre is raised a maximum of 3 cm from the ground. Breakdown assistance X G WARNING Only use wheel bolts that have been designed for the wheel and the vehicle. For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use wheel bolts which have been approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and the respective wheel. Other wheel bolts could work loose or damage the brake system. Do not tighten the wheel bolts completely while the vehicle is still jacked up. The vehicle could topple off the jack. X Clean the wheel and wheel hub contact surfaces. X Slide the emergency spare wheel/spare wheel onto the wheel hub and push it on. X Tighten the wheel bolts until they are finger-tight. Removing a wheel X Unscrew the wheel bolts. ! Do not place wheel bolts in sand or dirt. The threads of the wheel bolts and wheel hubs could otherwise be damaged when the bolts are tightened. X Remove the wheel. Fitting a new wheel G WARNING Replace damaged or corroded wheel bolts. Never oil or grease wheel bolts. This could cause the bolts to loosen in the wheel hub. G WARNING If a wheel hub thread is damaged, you must not drive the vehicle any further. Consult a qualified specialist workshop which has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools to carry out the work required. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre or Service 24h for this purpose. In particular, work relevant to safety or on safety-related systems must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Lowering the vehicle Turn the crank of the jack anti-clockwise until the vehicle is once again standing firmly on the ground. X Place the jack to one side. X Flat tyre 345 tioning sensors. The defective wheel should no longer be in the vehicle. X Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a crosswise pattern in the sequence indicated (: to A ). The tightening torque must be 130 Nm. G WARNING Have the tightening torque checked immediately after a wheel is changed. The wheels could work loose if they are not tightened to a torque of 130 Nm. X Turn the jack back to its initial position and store it together with the rest of the tyrechange tool kit in the boot/luggage compartment. X Transport the faulty wheel in the boot/luggage compartment. or X Depending on the size of the wheel, you may also be able to secure the faulty wheel in the spare wheel well. In this case, you will have to remove the stowage well casing from the spare wheel well and stow it securely in the boot/luggage compartment. i When you are driving with the collapsible emergency spare wheel fitted, the tyre pressure loss warning system or the tyre pressure monitor cannot function reliably. Only restart the tyre pressure loss warning system/tyre pressure monitor when the defective wheel has been replaced with a new wheel. Vehicles with tyre pressure monitor: all fitted wheels must be equipped with func- MOExtended tyres (tyres with run-flat characteristics) allow you to continue driving the vehicle even when one or more tyres lose all air pressure. MOExtended tyres may only be used in conjunction with the activated tyre pressure loss warning system or with the tyre pressure monitor. The maximum permissible distance which can be driven in run-flat mode depends on the load in the vehicle. It is 80 km if the vehicle is partially laden and 30 km if fully laden. The maximum permissible distance which can be driven in run-flat mode is counted from the moment the tyre pressure loss warning appears in the multifunction display. You must not exceed a maximum speed of 80 km/h. G WARNING The handling characteristics of your vehicle deteriorate in run-flat mode, for example: Rwhen cornering braking Rwhen accelerating rapidly Adapt your driving style accordingly and avoid sudden changes in direction and sudden acceleration, as well as driving over obstacles (i.e. kerbs, potholes), and driving off-road. This is particularly the case when the vehicle is heavily laden. The maximum permissible distance that can be driven in run-flat mode depends to a large extent on the loads placed on the vehicle. It can be shorter due to high speeds, a heavy load, sudden changes in direction, the road surface condition, outside temperature, etc., or further if you drive carefully and conservatively. Rwhen Z Breakdown assistance MOExtended tyres (tyres with run-flat characteristics) 346 Battery Do not continue to drive in run-flat mode if: Ryou hear banging noises. vehicle starts to shake. Ryou see smoke and smell rubber. Rthe RESP® is intervening constantly. are tears in the sidewalls of the tyre. After driving in run-flat mode, you must have the wheel(s) checked for damage at a qualified specialist workshop which has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools to carry out the work required. The faulty tyre must be replaced in every case. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose. In particular, work relevant to safety or on safety-related systems must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Breakdown assistance Rthere i When replacing one or all tyres, make sure that you only use tyres marked MOExtended and of the specified size for the vehicle. i Vehicles with MOExtended tyres are not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. It is therefore recommended that you additionally equip your vehicle with a TIREFIT kit if you fit tyres that do not feature run-flat properties, e.g. winter tyres. A TIREFIT kit can be obtained from a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Battery Consult a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre if you wish to leave your vehicle parked up for a long period of time. G WARNING Comply with safety precautions and take protective measures when handling batteries. Risk of explosion Fire, naked flames and smoking are prohibited when handling the battery. Avoid creating sparks. Battery acid is caustic. Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing. Wear suitable protective clothing, in particular gloves, an apron and a face mask. Immediately rinse acid splashes off with clean water. Consult a doctor if necessary. Wear eye protection. Keep children away. Observe this Owner's Manual. Important safety notes In order for the battery to achieve the maximum possible service life, it must always be sufficiently charged. Have the battery charge checked more frequently if you use the vehicle mainly for short trips or if you leave it standing idle for a lengthy period. Only replace a battery with a battery that has been recommended by Mercedes-Benz. H Environmental note Batteries contain pollutants. It is against the law to dispose of them with the household rubbish. They must be collected separately and Battery may otherwise destroy electronic components, such as the alternator. i When you park the vehicle, remove the key if you do not require any electrical consumers. The vehicle will then use very little energy, thus conserving battery power. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you do not carry out work on batteries yourself, e.g. removing or charging. Have this work performed at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. G WARNING For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use batteries which have been tested and approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz. These batteries provide increased impact protection to prevent vehicle occupants from suffering acid burns should the battery be damaged in the event of an accident. To prevent acid burns, observe the following safety notes when handling batteries: Rdo not lean over the battery. Rdo not place any metal objects on a battery. Otherwise, you could cause a short circuit and the battery's gas mixture could ignite. Rmake sure that you do not create an electrostatic charge, e.g. by wearing synthetic clothing or as a result of friction on fabrics. Therefore, you should not pull or slide the battery over carpets or other synthetic materials. Rnever touch the battery first. To discharge a possible electrostatic charge, step out of the vehicle first and touch the bodywork. Rdo not wipe the battery using a cloth. The battery may explode as a result of electrostatic charge or due to flying sparks. Installation location of the battery Your vehicle is equipped with a battery in the engine compartment. It is fitted in front of the front bulkhead on the right-hand side of the vehicle when viewed in the direction of travel. AMG vehicles: the battery is in the boot/ luggage compartment in the spare wheel well on the right-hand side under the boot/luggage compartment floor. X Apply the parking brake firmly and, on vehicles with automatic transmission, shift the transmission to position P. X Switch off all electrical consumers (e.g. radio, blower, etc.). X Turn the key to position 0(Y page 153) in the ignition lock and remove it, or, on vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, make sure that the ignition has been switched off (Y page 153). All indicator lamps in the instrument cluster must be off. X Battery in the engine compartment: open the bonnet (Y page 322). ! Switch off the engine and remove the key before disconnecting the terminal clamps from the battery. On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, make sure that the ignition is switched off. Check that all the indicator lamps in the instrument cluster are off. You Z Breakdown assistance recycled in an environmentally responsible manner. Dispose of batteries in an environmentally responsible manner. Take discharged batteries to a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre, or to a special collection point for old batteries. 347 Battery 348 Release clamps ; on filter box : using a suitable object, such as a screwdriver. X Remove filter box :. X AMG vehicles: open the boot/luggage compartment (Y page 92). X Lift the boot/luggage compartment floor (Y page 312). X Remove the cover from the spare wheel well. Breakdown assistance X Disconnecting the battery ! Always disconnect the battery in the order described below. Never swap the terminal clamps. You may otherwise damage the vehicle electronics. In vehicles with automatic transmission, the transmission is locked in position P after disconnecting the battery. The vehicle is secured against rolling away. You can then no longer move the vehicle. AMG vehicles Loosen the negative terminal clamp on the battery and remove it from negative terminal =. X Remove cover ; from the positive terminal clamp. X Loosen the positive terminal clamp on battery : and remove it from the positive terminal. X Remove breather hose ? from the side of battery : X Removing/fitting the battery To remove: disconnect the battery (Y page 348). X Loosen the bolt that holds the battery in place. X AMG vehicles: loosen the tensioning strap that also secures the battery. X Remove the battery. X To fit: follow the steps described in "To remove" in reverse order. X Reconnecting the battery ! Always connect the battery in the order described below. Never swap the terminal clamps. You may otherwise damage the vehicle electronics. Battery in the engine compartment Battery i If the power supply has been interrupted, e.g. if you reconnect the battery, you will have to: Rset the clock; see the separate operating instructions. the function for automatically folding the exterior mirrors in/out by folding the mirrors out once (Y page 113). Rreset Charging the battery G WARNING Battery acid is caustic. Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing. ! Only charge the installed battery with a battery charger which has been tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz. These battery chargers allow the battery to be charged while still installed. ! Only use battery chargers with a maximum charging voltage of 14.8 V. ! Only charge the battery using the jumpstart connection point. The jump-starting connection point is in the engine compartment (Y page 350). X Open the bonnet (Y page 322). X Connect the battery charger to the positive terminal and earth point in the same order as when connecting the donor battery in the jump-starting procedure (Y page 350). X Read the battery charger's operating instructions before charging the battery. G WARNING Only charge the battery in a well-ventilated area. As the battery is being charged, gases can escape and generate minor explosions. This could injure you and other persons or cause damage to the paintwork or acid corrosion on the vehicle. You can obtain information about battery chargers which allow the battery to be charged while still installed from a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. G WARNING There is a risk of acid burns during the charging process due to the gases which escape from the battery. Do not lean over the battery during the charging process. Z Breakdown assistance Switch off all electrical consumers (e.g. radio, blower, etc.). X Connect the positive terminal clamp and secure the cover. X Connect the negative terminal clamp. X Battery in the engine compartment: put the filter box back in place. X Clip in the filter box's retaining clamps and close them. X Close the bonnet. X AMG vehicles: fold down and close the boot/luggage compartment floor. X Close the boot/luggage compartment. X 349 Jump-starting 350 Jump-starting G WARNING There is a risk of acid burns when jump-starting a vehicle due to the gases which escape from the battery. Do not lean over the battery while the engine is being jump-started. G WARNING Breakdown assistance Gases escaping from the battery during jump-starting may cause minor explosions. Avoid creating sparks. Keep naked flames away from the battery, and do not smoke. Comply with safety precautions when handling batteries. You will find these under "Battery" in the index. ! Avoid repeated and lengthy starting attempts. Otherwise, non-combusted fuel may dam- age the catalytic converter18 and create a risk of fire. Do not use a rapid-charging device to start the engine. Make sure the jump leads are not damaged. Make sure the jump leads are not touching any other metal objects when they are connected to the battery. If your vehicle's battery is discharged, the engine can be jump-started from another vehicle or from a second battery using jump leads. Observe the following points: X The battery is not accessible in all vehicles. If the other vehicle's battery is not accessible, jump-start the vehicle using a second battery or a jump-starting device. X Only jump-start the vehicle when the engine is cold and the catalytic converter system has cooled down19 . X Do not start the engine if the battery is frozen. Let the battery thaw first. X Jump-starting may only be performed from batteries with a nominal voltage of 12 V. X Only use jump leads which have a sufficient cross-section and insulated terminal clamps. X Make sure that the jump leads cannot come into contact with parts, such as the pulley or the fan. These parts move when the engine is started and while it is running. X If the battery is fully discharged, leave the battery that is being used to jump-start connected for a few minutes before attempting to start. This charges the empty battery a little. i Jump leads and further information about jump-starting can be obtained from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre, for example. Make sure that the two vehicles do not touch. Apply the parking brake firmly. X Manual transmission: engage neutral. X Automatic transmission: move the selector lever to P. X Switch off all electrical consumers (e.g. radio, blower, etc.). X Open the bonnet (Y page 322). X X 18 Only 19 Only vehicles with a petrol engine. vehicles with a petrol engine. Position number B identifies the charged battery of the other vehicle or an equivalent jumpstarting device. X Slide cover : of positive terminal ; in the direction of the arrow. X Connect positive terminal ; on your vehicle to positive terminal = of donor battery B using the jump lead, beginning with your own battery. X Start the engine of the donor vehicle and run it at idling speed. X Connect negative terminal ? of donor battery B to earth point A of your vehicle using the jump lead, connecting the jump lead to donor battery B first. X Start the engine. X Allow the engine to run for a few minutes before disconnecting the jump lead. X First, remove the jump lead from earth point A and negative terminal ?, then from positive terminal ; and positive terminal =, each time disconnecting from the contacts on your own vehicle first. X After removing the jump lead, close cover : on positive terminal ;. X Have the battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. The jump-starting procedure is not a standard operating state; therefore, have the battery checked. Towing and tow-starting Important safety notes Observe the legal requirements for the relevant countries when towing and tow-starting. G WARNING If you tow the vehicle, you must use a rigid towing bar if: Rthe engine is not running. is a brake system malfunction. Rthere is a malfunction in the power supply or the vehicle's electrical system. The power assistance for the steering and the brake force booster do not work when the engine is not running. You will need more force to steer and brake, you may have to depress the brake pedal with maximum force. Rthere Z 351 Breakdown assistance Towing and tow-starting 352 Towing and tow-starting Before towing away, make sure that the steering can be moved and is not locked. If you tow or tow-start another vehicle, its weight must not exceed the maximum permissible gross vehicle weight of your vehicle. G WARNING Breakdown assistance The vehicle is braked when the HOLD function or DISTRONIC PLUS is activated. Therefore, deactivate HOLD and DISTRONIC PLUS if the vehicle is to be towed. It is better to have the vehicle transported than to have it towed. ! You may tow the vehicle for a maximum of 50 km. A towing speed of 50 km/h must not be exceeded. For towing distances over 50 km, the entire vehicle must be lifted up and transported. ! Only secure the tow rope or towing bar to the towing eyes. The vehicle may otherwise be damaged. ! Do not use the towing eye for recovery, as this could damage the vehicle. If in doubt, recover the vehicle with a crane. ! Pull away smoothly when towing away or tow-starting a vehicle. If the tractive power is too high, the vehicles could be damaged. ! On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, use the Vehicles with automatic transmission: release the selector lever lock manually to move it out of position P (Y page 168). i Before the vehicle is towed, switch off the automatic locking feature (Y page 90). You could otherwise be locked out when pushing or towing the vehicle. Deactivate tow-away protection (Y page 81) before the vehicle is towed. Fitting/removing the towing eye Fitting the towing eye Vehicles with a trailer tow hitch: if you intend to use the vehicle for towing, fold out the ball coupling and connect the towbar to it (Y page 217). X Remove the towing eye from the vehicle tool kit (Y page 335). G WARNING The exhaust tail pipe may be hot. You could burn yourself if you touch the tail pipe. Be particularly careful when removing the rear cover. The mountings for the removable towing eyes are located in the bumpers. They are at the front and at the rear, under the covers. key instead of the Start/Stop button. Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock and shift the automatic transmission to N. Then, turn the key back to 0 and leave it in the ignition lock. When towing a vehicle with an automatic transmission, the transmission must be in position N. The battery must be connected and charged. Otherwise, you: Rcannot turn the key in the ignition lock to position 2 Rcannot shift the transmission to position N on vehicles with automatic transmission Example: Saloon Towing and tow-starting Press the mark on cover : inwards in the direction of the arrow. Take cover : off the opening. X Screw the towing eye in clockwise to the stop and tighten it. X Removing the towing eye X Loosen the towing eye and unscrew it. Attach cover : to the bumper and press until it engages. X Place the towing eye in the vehicle tool kit. X Towing the vehicle with the rear axle raised Only possible on vehicles without 4MATIC. When towing your vehicle with the rear axle raised, it is important that you observe the safety instructions (Y page 351). ! The ignition must be switched off if you are towing the vehicle with the rear axle raised. Intervention by ESP® could otherwise damage the brake system. Switch on the hazard warning lamps (Y page 121). X Turn the key in the ignition lock to position 0 and remove the key from the ignition lock. X When leaving the vehicle, take the key or the KEYLESS-GO key with you. X Towing the vehicle with both axles on the ground It is important that you observe the safety instructions when towing away your vehicle (Y page 351). G WARNING The power assistance for the steering and the brake force booster do not work when the engine is not running. You will then need much more effort to brake and steer the vehicle. Adapt your style of driving accordingly. Switch on the hazard warning lamps (Y page 121). i When towing with the hazard warning lamps switched on, use the combination switch as usual to signal a change of direction. In this case, only the turn signals for the desired direction flash. When the combination switch is reset, the hazard warning lamps start flashing again. X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. X When the vehicle is stationary, depress the brake pedal and keep it depressed. X Vehicles with manual transmission: depress the clutch pedal. X Engage neutral. or X Vehicles with automatic transmission: shift the automatic transmission to position N. X Release the brake pedal. X Release the parking brake. X Transporting the vehicle The towing eyes or trailer tow hitch can be used to pull the vehicle onto a trailer or transporter if you wish to transport it. X Vehicles with manual transmission: shift to neutral. X Vehicles with automatic transmission: turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. X Move the selector lever to N. As soon as the vehicle is loaded: Prevent the vehicle from rolling away by applying the parking brake. X Vehicles with manual transmission: shift to first gear or reverse gear. X Z Breakdown assistance X 353 Electrical fuses 354 Vehicles with automatic transmission: move the selector lever to P. X Turn the key in the ignition lock to position 0 and remove the key from the ignition lock. X Secure the vehicle. X ! Only lash the vehicle down by the wheels Breakdown assistance or wheel rims, not by parts of the vehicle such as axle or steering components. Otherwise, the vehicle could be damaged. Notes for 4MATIC vehicles ! Vehicles with 4MATIC must not be towed with the front or rear axle raised; otherwise, the transmission may be damaged. If the vehicle has transmission damage or damage to the front or rear axle, have it transported on a transporter or trailer. In the event of damage to the electrical system If the battery is defective, the automatic transmission will be locked in position P. To shift the automatic transmission to position N, you must provide power to the vehicle's electrical system in the same way as when jump-starting (Y page 350). Have the vehicle transported on a transporter or trailer. Tow-starting (emergency engine starting) When tow-starting, it is important that you observe the safety instructions (Y page 351) and the legal requirements in each respective country. ! Vehicles with automatic transmission must not be tow-started. The transmission may otherwise be damaged. Before tow-starting the following conditions must be fulfilled: Rthe battery is connected. engine has cooled down. Rthe catalytic converters have cooled down. X Switch on the hazard warning lamps (Y page 121). X Fit the towing eye (Y page 352). X Secure the rigid towing bar or the towing rope. X Depress and hold the brake pedal. X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. X Depress the clutch pedal and keep it depressed. X Shift to neutral. X Release the brake pedal. X Tow-start the vehicle. X Engage second gear. X Release the clutch pedal slowly; do not operate the accelerator pedal while doing so. The engine is started. X Depress the clutch pedal and shift to neutral. X Stop at a suitable place. X Apply the parking brake. X Remove the rigid towing bar or towing rope. X Remove the towing eye (Y page 353). X Switch off the hazard warning lamps. Rthe Electrical fuses Important safety notes The fuses in your vehicle serve to close down faulty circuits. If a fuse blows, all the components on the circuit and their functions stop operating. G WARNING Only use fuses that have been approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and which have the correct fuse rating for the systems con- Electrical fuses Dashboard fuse box ! Do not use a pointed object such as a screwdriver to open the cover in the dashboard. You could damage the dashboard or the cover. Blown fuses must be replaced with fuses of the same rating, which you can recognise by the colour and value. The fuse ratings are listed in the fuse allocation chart. A MercedesBenz Service Centre will be happy to advise you. If the newly inserted fuse also blows, have the cause traced and rectified at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. ! Only use fuses that have been approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and which have the correct fuse rating for the system concerned. Otherwise, components or systems could be damaged. To open: pull out cover : slightly at the bottom in the direction of arrow =. X Pull cover : outwards in the direction of arrow ; and remove it. X To close: clip in cover : on the front of the dashboard. X Fold cover : inwards until it engages. X Before changing a fuse Park the vehicle and apply the parking brake. X Switch off all electrical consumers. X Remove the key from the ignition lock. X The fuses are located in various fuse boxes: Rfuse box on the driver's side of the dashboard Rfuse box in the engine compartment on the left-hand side of the vehicle, when viewed in the direction of travel Rfuse box in the boot/luggage compartment on the right-hand side of the vehicle, when viewed in the direction of travel The fuse allocation chart is located in the vehicle tool kit (Y page 335) in the stowage compartment under the boot/luggage compartment floor. Fuse box in the engine compartment X Make sure that the windscreen wipers are turned off. G WARNING Make sure that the windscreen wipers are turned off and the key is pulled out of the ignition lock before you open the cover of the fuse box. Otherwise, the windscreen wipers and the wiper rods above the cover could be set in motion. This could lead to you or others being injured by the wiper rods. X Open the bonnet (Y page 322). Z Breakdown assistance cerned. Do not attempt to repair or bridge faulty fuses. Otherwise, a circuit overload could cause a fire. Have the cause traced and rectified at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. 355 Electrical fuses 356 To open: turn rotary catch : clockwise. X Open cover ; downwards in the direction of the arrow. X Fuse box in the luggage compartment (Estate) X Open the tailgate (Y page 92). X To open: pull handle :. Open cover ; downwards. Remove any existing moisture from the fuse box using a dry cloth. X Take lines ; from the guides. X To open: open clamps :. X Remove the fuse box cover forwards. Breakdown assistance X ! Make sure that no moisture can enter the fuse box when the cover is open. To close: check whether the rubber seal is lying correctly in the cover. X Insert the cover at the rear of the fuse box into the retainer. X Fold down the cover and close clamps :. X Secure lines ; in the guides. X ! The cover must be fitted properly, other- wise moisture or dirt could impair the function of the fuses. X Close the bonnet (Y page 323). Fuse box in the boot (Saloon) X Open the boot lid (Y page 92). X 357 358 358 358 359 361 365 366 Wheels and tyres Useful information ............................ Important safety notes .................... Operation ........................................... Winter operation ............................... Tyre pressure .................................... Changing a wheel ............................. Wheel and tyre combinations .......... 358 Operation Useful information i This Owner's Manual describes all models and all standard and optional equipment available to your vehicle at the time of publication of the Owner's Manual. Countryspecific deviations are possible. Please note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all features described. This also applies to safety-relevant systems and functions. i Please read the information on qualified specialist workshops (Y page 28). vehicle as soon as possible to check the wheels and tyres for damage. Hidden tyre damage could also be causing the unusual handling characteristics. If you find no signs of damage, have the wheels and tyres examined at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. RWhen parking your vehicle, make sure that the tyres do not get deformed by the kerb or other obstacles. If it is necessary to drive over kerbs, speed humps or similar elevations, try to do so slowly and at an obtuse angle. Otherwise, the tyres, particularly the sidewalls, can get damaged. Wheels and tyres Important safety notes G WARNING Tyres, wheels or accessories which have not been approved by Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle or are not used as they should be, can impair driving safety. As a result, you could cause an accident. Before purchasing and using them, enquire about their suitability, legal stipulations and factory recommendations at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Modification work on the brake system and wheels is not permitted, nor is the use of spacer plates or brake dust shields. This invalidates the General Operating Permit for the vehicle. i Further information about tyres and wheels can be obtained from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Operation Notes on driving RWhile driving, pay attention to vibrations, noises and unusual handling characteristics, e.g. pulling to one side. This may indicate that the wheels or tyres are damaged. If you suspect that a tyre is defective, reduce your speed immediately. Stop the Notes on regularly inspecting wheels and tyres RRegularly check the wheels and tyres of your vehicle for damage (e.g. cuts, punctures, tears, bulges on tyres and deformation, cracks or severe corrosion on wheels), at least every 14 days, as well as after driving off-road or on rough roads. Damaged wheels can cause a loss of tyre pressure. RRegularly check the tyre tread depth and the condition of the tread across the whole width of the tyre (Y page 359). If necessary, turn the front wheels to full lock in order to inspect the inner side of the tyre surface. RAll wheels must have a valve cap to protect the valve against dirt and moisture. Do not fit anything onto the valve (such as tyre pressure monitoring systems) other than the standard valve cap or other valve caps approved by Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle. RRegularly check the pressure of all the tyres including the emergency spare wheel or the spare wheel, particularly prior to long trips, and correct the pressure as necessary (Y page 361). Winter operation G WARNING Bear in mind that: Rtyre grip decreases rapidly on wet roads when the tread depth is less than 3 mm. Thus, you should replace tyres that have insufficient tread. Rwinter tyres should be replaced when the tread depth is 4 mm or less as they no longer provide adequate grip. Rthe tread on a tyre may not wear evenly. Thus, you should regularly check the tread depth and the condition of the tread across the entire width of all tyres. If necessary, turn the front wheels to full lock in order to inspect the tyre tread more easily. Otherwise, you could lose control of the vehicle and cause an accident due to the reduced grip of the tyres on the road. Notes on selecting, fitting and replacing tyres ROnly fit tyres and wheels of the same type and make. ROnly fit tyres of the correct size onto the wheels. RAfter fitting new tyres, run them in at moderate speeds for the first 100 km, as they only reach their full performance after this distance. RDo not drive with tyres which have too little tread depth, as this significantly reduces the traction on wet roads (aquaplaning). RReplace the tyres after six years at the latest, regardless of wear. This also applies to the emergency spare wheel/spare wheel. vehicle even when one or more tyres lose all air pressure. MOExtended tyres may only be used in conjunction with the tyre pressure loss warning system or with the tyre pressure monitor and on wheels specifically tested by MercedesBenz. i Vehicles with MOExtended tyres are not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. It is therefore recommended that you additionally equip your vehicle with the TIREFIT kit if you fit tyres that do not feature runflat properties, e.g. winter tyres. A TIREFIT kit can be obtained from a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Notes on driving with MOExtended tyres in the event of a flat tyre can be found in the "Breakdown assistance" section (Y page 345). Winter operation Points to remember At the onset of winter, have your vehicle winterproofed at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Observe the notes in the "Changing a wheel" section (Y page 365). Driving with summer tyres At temperatures below +7 †, summer tyres lose elasticity and therefore traction and braking power; change the tyres on your vehicle to M+S tyres. Using summer tyres at very cold temperatures could cause tears to form, thereby damaging the tyres permanently. Mercedes-Benz cannot accept responsibility for this type of damage. MOExtended tyres (tyres with run-flat characteristics) MOExtended tyres (tyres with run-flat characteristics) allow you to continue driving the Z Wheels and tyres Tyre tread 359 Winter operation 360 M+S tyres At temperatures below +7 †, use winter tyres or all-season tyres. Both types of tyre are identified by the M+S marking. Only winter tyres bearing the i snowflake symbol in addition to the M+S marking provide the best possible grip in wintry road conditions. Only these tyres will allow driving safety systems such as ABS and ESP® to function optimally in winter. These tyres have been developed specifically for driving in snow. Use M+S tyres of the same make and tread on all wheels to maintain safe handling characteristics. G WARNING If you fit the spare wheel when driving with M +S tyres, bear in mind that driving stability will be impaired due to unstable cornering characteristics caused by the different tyres. You should therefore adapt your driving style and drive carefully. Have the spare wheel replaced at the nearest qualified specialist workshop which has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools to carry out the work required. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose. In particular, work relevant to safety or on safety-related systems must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Wheels and tyres G WARNING M+S tyres with a tread depth of less than 4 mm must be replaced. They are no longer suitable for winter use and can no longer provide sufficient grip. This could cause you to lose control of your vehicle and cause an accident. Always observe the maximum permissible speed specified for the M+S tyres you have fitted. If you fit M+S tyres that have a lower maximum permissible speed than that of the vehicle, affix an appropriate warning sign in the driver's field of vision. This can be obtained at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Under these circumstances, you should also restrict the maximum speed of the vehicle using permanent SPEEDTRONIC so that it does not exceed the maximum permissible speed for the M+S tyres(Y page 183). When you have fitted M+S tyres: Check the tyre pressures (Y page 361). X Restart the tyre pressure loss warning system (Y page 362). X Restart the tyre pressure monitor (Y page 365). X Snow chains For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use snow chains that have been specially approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz, or that are of a corresponding standard of quality. If you intend to fit snow chains, please bear the following points in mind: Rit is not permissible to attach snow chains to all wheel-tyre combinations; see the information under "Wheel/tyre combinations" in the "Wheels and tyres" section. Rsnow chains must not be fitted to emergency spare wheels, e.g. a "Minispare" emergency spare wheel. Ronly fit snow chains in pairs and to the rear wheels, even on vehicles with 4MATIC. Observe the manufacturer's installation instructions. ! Vehicles with steel wheels: if you wish to fit snow chains to steel wheels, make sure that you remove the respective wheels' hubcaps first. The hubcaps may otherwise be damaged. Do not exceed the maximum permissible speed of 50 km/h. Tyre pressure (Y page 75) when pulling away with snow chains fitted. This way you can allow the wheels to spin in a controlled manner, achieving an increased driving force (cutting action). Tyre pressure Tyre pressure specifications You will find a table of tyre pressures for various operating conditions on the inside of your vehicle's fuel filler flap. Operation with emergency spare wheel: the applicable value for the emergency spare wheel is stated on the spare wheel and in the technical data section. Operation with a trailer: the applicable value for the rear tyres is the maximum tyre pressure value stated on the table inside the fuel filler flap. The table inside the fuel filler flap may state tyre pressures for different load conditions. These are defined in the table as different numbers of passengers and amounts of luggage. The actual number of seats may vary – for more information, please refer to the vehicle's registration documents. If no other data is stated, the tyre pressures specified on the fuel filler flap apply for all tyres approved for this vehicle. G WARNING Tyre pressure that is either too high or too low has a negative effect on the vehicle's driving safety, which could lead you to cause an accident. Therefore, you should regularly check the pressure of all the tyres, particularly prior to long trips, and correct the pressure as necessary. To test tyre pressure, use a suitable pressure gauge. The outer appearance of a tyre does not permit any reliable conclusion about the tyre pressure. On vehicles fitted with the electronic tyre pressure monitor, the tyre pressure can be checked using the on-board computer. G WARNING Do not fit anything else to the tyre valve other than the standard valve cap. In particular, retrofitted tyre pressure monitors which are screwed on to the valve may overload it and cause it to fail. Due to their design, the valve is kept open continuously, which may lead to air loss. G WARNING Should the tyre pressure drop repeatedly: Rcheck the tyre for foreign bodies. Rcheck whether the wheel is losing air or the valve is leaking. sure that only a valve cap approved by Mercedes-Benz is fitted on the tyre valve. Tyre pressures that are too low have a negative effect on vehicle safety, which could lead you to cause an accident. Rmake If possible, only correct tyre pressures when the tyres are cold. The tyres are cold: Rif the vehicle has been parked with the tyres If a tyre size precedes a tyre pressure, the tyre pressure information following is only valid for that tyre size. out of direct sunlight for at least three hours and Rif the vehicle has not been driven further than 1.6 km Z Wheels and tyres i You may wish to deactivate ESP® 361 362 Tyre pressure Depending on the ambient temperature, the speed you are driving at and the load on the tyres, the tyre temperature and thus the tyre pressure may change by approximately 10 kPa (0.1 bar/1.5 psi) per 10 †. Take this into account when checking the pressure of warm tyres and only correct it if it is too low for the current operating conditions. Driving with tyre pressure that is too high or too low can: Rshorten the service life of the tyres increased tyre damage Rhave a negative effect on handling characteristics and thus the driving safety (e.g. by causing aquaplaning) Rcause Wheels and tyres i The tyre pressure values given for low loads are minimum values which offer you good ride comfort characteristics. However, you can also use the values given for higher loads. These are permissible and will not adversely affect the running of the vehicle. H Environmental note Check the tyre pressure regularly, at least every 14 days. You will find information on tyre pressures for the vehicle's factory-mounted tyres on the plates described here. Tyre pressure loss warning system Important safety notes While the vehicle is in motion, the tyre pressure loss warning system monitors the set tyre pressure using the rotational speed of the wheels. This enables the system to detect significant pressure loss in a tyre. If the speed of rotation of a wheel changes as a result of a loss of pressure, a corresponding warning message will appear in the multifunction display. G WARNING The tyre pressure loss warning system does not warn you of an incorrectly set tyre pressure. The table on the inside of the fuel filler flap will help you decide whether the tyre pressures should be corrected. The tyre pressure loss warning system does not replace the need to regularly check your vehicle's tyre pressures, since an even loss of pressure on several tyres at the same time cannot be detected by the tyre pressure loss warning system. The tyre pressure monitor is not able to warn you of a sudden loss of pressure, e.g. if the tyre is penetrated by a foreign object. In the event of a sudden loss of pressure, bring the vehicle to a halt by braking carefully. Do not make any sudden steering movements when doing so. The function of the tyre pressure loss warning system is limited or delayed if: Rsnow chains are fitted to your vehicle's tyres. Rroad conditions are wintry. Ryou are driving on sand or gravel. Ryou adopt a very sporty driving style (cornering at high speeds or driving with high rates of acceleration). Ryou are towing a very heavy or large trailer. Ryou are driving with a heavy load (in the vehicle or on the roof). Restarting the tyre pressure loss warning system Restart the tyre pressure loss warning system if you have: Rchanged the tyre pressure the wheels or tyres Rfitted new wheels or tyres X Before restarting, consult the table of tyre pressures on the inside of the fuel filler flap to ensure that the tyre pressure in all four Rchanged Tyre pressure G WARNING The tyre pressure loss warning system can only give reliable warnings if you have set the correct tyre pressure. If an incorrect tyre pressure is set, these incorrect values will be monitored. A tyre with insufficient pressure results in vehicle instability when driving, thus increasing the risk of an accident. Restarting using the 4-button multifunction steering wheel X Make sure that the key is in position 2 in the ignition lock. X Press the V button to select Tyre pressure Menu: R. X Press the C button. The RFI active Restart: R message appears in the multifunction display. X Press the C button. The Tyre press. OK? message appears in the multifunction display. If you wish to confirm the restart: X Press the W button. The Run Flat Indicator restarted message appears in the multifunction display. After a teach-in period, the tyre pressure loss warning system will monitor the set tyre pressures of all four tyres. or If you wish to cancel the restart: X Press the X button. The tyre pressure values stored at the last restart will continue to be monitored. Restarting with the 12-button multifunction steering wheel X Make sure that the key is in position 2 in the ignition lock. X Press the = or ; button to select the Service menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select Tyre pressure. X Press the a button. The Run Flat Indicator active Restart with OK message appears in the multifunction display. If you wish to confirm the restart: Press the a button. The Tyre press. now OK? message appears in the multifunction display. X Press the 9 or : button to select Yes. X Press the a button. The Run Flat Indicator restarted message appears in the multifunction display. After a teach-in period, the tyre pressure loss warning system will monitor the set tyre pressures of all four tyres. X or If you wish to cancel the restart: X Press the % button. or If the Tyre press. now OK? message appears, use 9 or : to select Can‐ cel. X Press the a button. The tyre pressure values stored at the last restart will continue to be monitored. X Tyre pressure monitor Important safety notes If a tyre pressure monitor system is fitted, the vehicle's wheels have sensors fitted that monitor the tyre pressures in all four tyres. Z Wheels and tyres tyres is set correctly for the respective operating conditions. X Observe the notes in the section on tyre pressures (Y page 361). 363 Tyre pressure 364 The tyre pressure monitor warns you when the pressure drops in one or more of the tyres. The tyre pressure monitor only functions if the correct sensors are fitted to all wheels. Wheels and tyres G WARNING The tyre pressure monitor does not warn you of an incorrectly set tyre pressure. The table on the inside of the fuel filler flap will help you decide whether the tyre pressures should be corrected. The tyre pressure monitor is not able to warn you of a sudden loss of pressure, e.g. if the tyre is penetrated by a foreign object. In the event of a sudden loss of pressure, bring the vehicle to a halt by braking carefully. Do not make any sudden steering movements when doing so. Information on tyre pressures is displayed in the multifunction display. After a few minutes of driving, the current tyre pressure of each tyre is shown in the multifunction display. i The tyre pressure values indicated by the on-board computer may differ from those measured at a filling station with a pressure gauge. The tyre pressures shown by the onboard computer refer to those measured at sea level. At high altitudes, the tyre pressure values indicated by a pressure gauge are higher than those shown by the onboard computer. In this case, do not reduce the tyre pressures. i The operation of the tyre pressure monitor can be affected by interference from radio transmitting equipment (e.g. radio headphones, two-way radios) that may be being operated in or near the vehicle. Checking tyre pressure electronically Make sure that the key is in position 2 (Y page 153) in the ignition lock. X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Servicemenu. X Press the 9 or : button to select Tyre pressure. X Press the a button. The current tyre pressure for each wheel will be displayed in the multifunction display. X If the vehicle has been parked for longer than 20 minutes, the Tyre pressures will be displayed after a few minutes of driving message appears. After a teach-in period, the tyre pressure monitor automatically recognises new wheels or new sensors. As long as a clear allocation of the tyre pressure values to the individual wheels is not possible, the Tyre pressure monitor active display message is shown instead of the tyre pressure display. The tyre pressures are already being monitored. i If a spare wheel/emergency spare wheel is fitted, the system may continue to show the tyre pressure of the wheel that has been removed for a few minutes. If this occurs, note that the value displayed for the position where the spare wheel/emergency spare wheel is fitted is not the same as the spare wheel/emergency spare wheel's current tyre pressure. Tyre pressure monitor warning messages If the tyre pressure monitor detects a significant pressure loss on one or more tyres, a warning message is shown in the multifunction display. A warning tone also sounds and the tyre pressure warning lamp lights up in the instrument cluster. Each tyre that is affected by a significant loss of pressure is highlighted in the pressure display. If the Please correct tyre pressure message appears in the multifunction display: X Check the tyre pressure on all four wheels and correct it if necessary. Changing a wheel interchanged, the tyre pressures may be displayed for the wrong positions for a short time. This is rectified after a few minutes of driving, and the tyre pressures are displayed for the correct positions. If you wish to confirm the restart: X Restarting the tyre pressure monitor When you restart the tyre pressure monitor, all existing warning messages are deleted and the warning lamps go out. The monitor uses the currently set tyre pressures as the reference values for monitoring. In most cases, the tyre pressure monitor will automatically detect the new reference values after you have changed the tyre pressure. Press the a button. The Tyre press. monitor restarted message appears in the multifunction display. After you have driven for a few minutes, the system checks whether the current tyre pressures are within the specified range. The new tyre pressures are then accepted as reference values and monitored. If you wish to cancel the restart: X Press the % button. The tyre pressure values stored at the last restart will continue to be monitored. i For an overview of the menus, see Radio type approval for the tyre pressure monitor If you wish to define the new reference values manually: In certain countries, a radio type approval for the tyre pressure monitor may be required. The radio type approval number for the tyre pressure monitor can be found online at: http://www.mercedes-benz.de/ betriebsanleitung. (Y page 230). Use the table on the inside of the fuel filler flap to ensure that the tyre pressure is set correctly in all four tyres for the current operating conditions. Also observe the notes in the section on tyre pressures (Y page 361). X Make sure that the key is in position 2 in the ignition lock. X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Servicemenu. X Press the 9 or : button to select Tyre pressure. X Press the a button. The multifunction display shows the current tyre pressure of the individual tyres or the Tyre pressures will be dis‐ played after a few minutes of driv‐ ing message. X Press the : button. The Use current pressures as new reference values message appears in the multifunction display. X Changing a wheel Flat tyre The "Breakdown assistance" section (Y page 337) contains information and notes on how to deal with a flat tyre. It also provides instructions on changing a wheel or fitting the spare wheel or emergency spare wheel. Interchanging the wheels G WARNING Interchange the front and rear wheels only if they have the same dimensions, for example size, offset, etc. After every wheel interchange/change, have the tightening torque checked at a qualified specialist workshop that has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools to carry out Z Wheels and tyres i If the wheel positions on the vehicle are 365 366 Wheel and tyre combinations Wheels and tyres the work required. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose. In particular, work relevant to safety or on safety-related systems must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. The wheels could work loose if they are not tightened to a torque of 130 Nm. For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use wheel bolts of the correct size which have been approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles. The wear patterns on the front and rear tyres differ, depending on the operating conditions. Interchange the wheels before a clear wear pattern has formed on the tyres. Front tyres typically wear more on the shoulders and the rear tyres in the centre. On vehicles that have the same size front and rear wheels, you can interchange the wheels every 5000 km to 10,000 km depending on the degree of tyre wear. Do not reverse the direction of tyre rotation. Clean the contact surfaces of the wheel and the brake disc thoroughly every time a wheel is interchanged. Check the tyre pressure and, if necessary, restart the tyre pressure loss warning system or the tyre pressure monitor. ! On vehicles fitted with a tyre pressure monitor, electronic components are located in the wheel. Tyre-fitting tools should not be applied in the area of the valve, as this could damage the electronic components. Always have the tyres changed at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a MercedesBenz Service Centre. Direction of rotation Tyres with a specified direction of rotation have additional benefits, e.g. if there is a risk of aquaplaning. You will only gain these benefits if the correct direction of rotation is observed. An arrow on the sidewall of the tyre indicates its correct direction of rotation. You may fit an emergency spare wheel/spare wheel against the direction of rotation. Observe the time restriction on use as well as the speed limitation specified on the emergency spare wheel/spare wheel. Storing wheels Store wheels that are not being used in a cool, dry and preferably dark place. Protect the tyres against oil, grease, petrol and diesel. Cleaning the wheels G WARNING Do not use high-pressure cleaners with circular-jet nozzles (dirt grinders) to clean your vehicle, in particular the tyres. You could otherwise damage the tyres and cause an accident. Wheel and tyre combinations Points to remember ! For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz rec- ommends that you only use tyres and wheels which have been approved by Mercedes-Benz specifically for your vehicle. These tyres have been specially adapted for use with the control systems, such as ABS or ESP®, and are marked as follows: RMO = Mercedes-Benz Original RMOE = Mercedes-Benz Original Extended (tyres with run-flat characteristics) RMO1 = Mercedes-Benz Original (only cer- tain AMG tyres) Mercedes-Benz Original Extended tyres may only be used on wheels that have been specifically approved by Mercedes-Benz. Only use tyres, wheels or accessories tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz. Cer- Wheel and tyre combinations ! Retreaded tyres are neither tested nor recommended by Mercedes-Benz, since previous damage cannot always be detected on retreaded tyres. As a result, Mercedes-Benz cannot guarantee vehicle safety if retreaded tyres are fitted. Do not fit used tyres if you have no information about their previous usage. ! Large wheels: the lower the section width for a certain wheel size, the lower the ride comfort is on poor road surfaces. Roll comfort and suspension comfort are reduced and the risk of damage to the wheels and tyres as a result of driving over obstacles increases. i You will find a table of tyre pressures on the inside of your vehicle's fuel filler flap. For further information on tyre pressure, see (Y page 361). i Notes on the vehicle equipment – always fit the vehicle: Rwith tyres of the same size on a given axle (left/right) the same type of tyres at a given time (summer tyres, winter tyres, MOExtended tyres) Rwith i Vehicles with MOExtended tyres are not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. It is therefore recommended that you additionally equip your vehicle with a TIREFIT kit if you fit tyres that do not feature run-flat properties, e.g. winter tyres. A TIREFIT kit can be obtained from a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. i Overview of abbreviations used in the following tyre tables: RBA: both axles front axle RRA: rear axle RFA: In the following table, the wheel/tyre combinations are allocated to the vehicle models through variants, e.g. V1, V2 etc.: Saloon V1 C 18020, C 180 KOMPRESSOR20, 21, C 180 CDI20, 21, C 200 CDI20 V2 C 20020, C 220 CDI20, C 25021, C 25020, C 250 CDI20, C 250 CDI 4MATIC20 V3 C 30020, 21, C 300 4MATIC20, 21 V4 C 300 CDI 4MATIC20, C 35020, C 350 4MATIC20, C 350 CDI20 V5 C 63 AMG Estate V1 C 18020, C 180 KOMPRESSOR20, 21, C 180 CDI20, 21 V2 C 200 CDI20, C 20020, C 220 CDI20, C 25020, C 250 CDI20, C 250 CDI 4MATIC20 V3 C 30020, 21, C 300 CDI 4MATIC20, C 35020, C 350 CDI20 V4 C 63 AMG 20 BlueEFFICIENCY 21 Only in certain countries. Z Wheels and tyres tain characteristics, e.g. handling, vehicle noise emissions or fuel consumption, may otherwise be adversely affected. In addition, when driving with a load, tyre dimension variations could cause the tyres to come into contact with the bodywork and axle components. This could result in damage to the tyres or the vehicle. Mercedes-Benz accepts no liability for damage resulting from the use of tyres, wheels or accessories other than those tested and approved. Further information about tyres, wheels and approved combinations can be obtained from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. 367 368 Wheel and tyre combinations i Not all wheel/tyre combinations can be Wheels and tyres mounted at the factory in all countries. Wheel and tyre combinations 369 Tyres Summer tyres Light-alloy wheels V1 V2 V3 V4 V5 BA 195/60 R16 89 V22 6.0 J x 16 H2 ET 39 # — — — — BA 205/55 R16 91 V22 7.0 J x 16 H2 ET 43 # # — — — BA 205/55 R16 91 W22 7.0 J x 16 H2 ET 43 # # # — — BA 225/50 R16 92 V22 7.5 J x 16 H2 ET 53 # # — — — BA 225/50 R16 92 W22 7.5 J x 16 H2 ET 53 # # # — — BA 225/45 R17 91 W22 7.5 J x 17 H2 ET 47 # # # # — BA 225/45 R17 91 W MOExtended22, 23 7.5 J x 17 H2 ET 47 # # # # — FA RA 225/45 R17 91 W 245/40 R17 91 W24 7.5 J x 17 H2 ET 47 8.5 J x 17 H2 ET 58 # # # # — FA RA 225/45 R17 91 W MOExtended23 7.5 J x 17 H2 ET 47 8.5 J x 17 H2 ET 58 245/40 R17 91 W MOExtended23, 24 # # # # — BA 225/40 R18 92 Y XL22, 25 7.5 J x 18 H2 ET 47 # # # # — FA RA 225/40 R18 92 Y XL25, 26 245/35 R18 92 Y XL24, 25, 26 7.5 J x 18 H2 ET 47 8.5 J x 18 H2 ET 58 # # # # — FA RA 225/40 R18 92 Y XL25 245/35 R18 94 Y XL24, 25, 27 7.5 J x 18 H2 ET 47 8.5J x 18 H2 ET 54 # # # # — FA RA 225/40 ZR18 92 Y XL25 255/35 ZR18 94 Y XL24, 25, 27 8.0 J x 18 H2 ET 50 8.5J x 18 H2 ET 54 # # # # — 22 Not in combination with sports suspension code 486 or dynamic handling package code 483. tyres (tyres featuring run-flat characteristics) only in combination with an activated tyre pressure loss warning system or tyre pressure monitor. 24 Use of snow chains is not permitted. Observe the notes in the "Snow chains" section. 25 Observe notes on "large wheels" in the "Wheel/tyre combinations" section. 26 Not for vehicles with 4MATIC. 27 Additional measures necessary (hub caps on rear axle, code 776). 23 MOExtended Z Wheels and tyres Saloon Wheels and tyres 370 Wheel and tyre combinations Summer tyres Light-alloy wheels FA RA 235/40 ZR18 95 Y XL 255/35 ZR18 94 Y XL24, 25 8.0 J x 18 H2 ET 45 9.0 J x 18 H2 ET 54 — — — — # FA RA 235/35 ZR19 XL25 255/30 ZR19 XL24, 25 8.0 J x 19 H2 ET 45 9.0 J x 19 H2 ET 54 — — — — # Winter tyres Light-alloy wheels V1 V2 V3 V4 V5 BA 195/60 R16 89 H M+Si 6.0 J x 16 H2 ET 39 # — — — — BA 205/55 R1 6 91 H M+Si 7.0 J x 16 H2 ET 43 # # — — — BA 205/55 R16 92 H M+Si 7.5 J x 16 H2 ET 53 # # # — — BA 225/45 R17 91 H M+Si 7.5 J x 17 H2 ET 47 # # # # — BA 225/45 R17 91 H M+SiMOExtended23 7.5 J x 17 H2 ET 47 # # # # — BA 225/40 R18 92 H XL M+Si25 7.5 J x 18 H2 ET 47 # # # # — BA 225/40 R18 92 H XL M+Si25 8.0 J x 18 H2 ET 50 # # # # — BA 225/40 R18 92 V XL M+Si25 8.0 J x 18 H2 ET 45 — — — — # BA 235/40 R18 95 V XL M+Si 8.0 J x 18 H2 ET 45 — — — — # FA RA 235/40 R18 95 V XL M+Si 255/35 R18 94 V XL M+Si24, 25 8.0 J x 18 H2 ET 45 9.0 J x 18 H2 ET 54 — — — — # 24 Use V1 V2 V3 V4 V5 of snow chains is not permitted. Observe the notes in the "Snow chains" section. notes on "large wheels" in the "Wheel/tyre combinations" section. 23 MOExtended tyres (tyres featuring run-flat characteristics) only in combination with an activated tyre pressure loss warning system or tyre pressure monitor. 25 Observe Wheel and tyre combinations 371 "Minispare" emergency spare wheel24 Tyres Wheels V1 V2 V3 V4 V5 T 125/90 R16 99 M Tyre pressure: 420 kPa (4.2 bar/61 psi) 3.5 B x 16 H2 ET 20 # # T 125/80 R17 99 M Tyre pressure: 420 kPa (4.2 bar/61 psi) 3.5 B x 17 H2 ET 20 — — T 125/70 R18 99 M Tyre pressure: 420 kPa (4.2 bar/61 psi) 3.5 B x 18 H2 ET 20 — — # — — # # — — — # 28 Your vehicle may be equipped with TIREFIT or a "Minispare" emergency spare wheel, depending on the country, the engine and the wheels fitted. i The specified tyre pressure is printed in yellow on the emergency spare wheel. Summer tyres Light-alloy wheels V1 V2 V3 V4 BA 205/55 R16 91 V 7.0 J x 16 H2 ET 43 # — — — BA 205/55 R16 91 W 7.0 J x 16 H2 ET 43 — # — — BA 225/50 R16 92 V 7.5 J x 16 H2 ET 53 # — — — BA 225/50 R16 92 W 7.5 J x 16 H2 ET 53 — # — — BA 225/45 R17 91 W 7.5 J x 17 H2 ET 47 # # — — BA 225/45 R17 91 W MOExtended23 7.5 J x 17 H2 ET 47 # # — — BA 225/45 R17 91 Y 7.5 J x 17 H2 ET 47 # # — — BA 225/45 R17 91 Y MOExtended23 7.5 J x 17 H2 ET 47 # # # — FA RA 225/45 R17 91 W 245/40 R17 91 W24 7.5 J x 17 H2 ET 47 8.5 J x 17 H2 ET 58 # # # — FA RA 225/45 R17 91 W MOExtended23 245/40 R17 91 W MOExtended23, 24 7.5 J x 17 H2 ET 47 8.5 J x 17 H2 ET 58 # # — — FA RA 225/45 R17 91 Y 245/40 R17 91Y24 7.5 J x 17 H2 ET 47 8.5 J x 17 H2 ET 58 — — # — 24 Use of snow chains is not permitted. Observe the notes in the "Snow chains" section. only in conjunction with Sports package optional equipment. 23 MOExtended tyres (tyres featuring run-flat characteristics) only in combination with an activated tyre pressure loss warning system or tyre pressure monitor. 28 Use Z Wheels and tyres Estate 372 Wheel and tyre combinations Wheels and tyres Summer tyres Light-alloy wheels V1 V2 V3 V4 7.5 J x 17 H2 ET 47 8.5 J x 17 H2 ET 58 — — # — FA RA 225/45 R17 91 Y 245/40 R17 91 Y MOExtended23, 24 BA 225/40 R18 92 Y XL25 7.5 J x 18 H2 ET 47 # # — — FA RA 225/40 R18 92 Y XL25, 26 245/35 R18 92 Y XL25, 26 7.5 J x 18 H2 ET 47 8.5 J x 18 H2 ET 58 # # # — FA RA 225/40 R18 92 Y XL25 245/35 R18 94 Y XL25, 27 7.5 J x 18 H2 ET 47 8.5J x 18 H2 ET 54 # # # — FA RA 225/40 ZR18 92 Y XL25 255/35 ZR18 94 Y XL24, 25 8.0 J x 18 H2 ET 50 8.5J x 18 H2 ET 54 — — # — FA RA 235/40 ZR18 95 Y XL 255/35 ZR18 94 Y XL24, 25 8.0 J x 18 H2 ET 45 9.0 J x 18 H2 ET 54 — — — # FA RA 235/35 ZR19 XL25 255/30 ZR19 XL24, 25 8.0 J x 19 H2 ET 45 9.0 J x 19 H2 ET 54 — — — # Winter tyres Light-alloy wheels V1 V2 V3 V4 BA 205/55 R1 6 91 H M+Si 7.0 J x 16 H2 ET 43 # # — — BA 205/55 R16 92 H M+Si 7.5 J x 16 H2 ET 53 # # — — BA 225/45 R17 91 H M+Si 7.5 J x 17 H2 ET 47 # # # — BA 225/45 R17 91 H M+SiMOExtended23 7.5 J x 17 H2 ET 47 # # # — BA 225/40 R18 92 H XL M+Si25 7.5 J x 18 H2 ET 47 # # # — BA 225/40 R18 92 H XL M+Si25 8.0 J x 18 H2 ET 50 # # # — BA 225/40 R18 92 V XL M+Si25, 29 8.0 J x 18 H2 ET 45 — — — # 23 MOExtended MOExtended23 tyres (tyres featuring run-flat characteristics) only in combination with an activated tyre pressure loss warning system or tyre pressure monitor. 24 Use of snow chains is not permitted. Observe the notes in the "Snow chains" section. 25 Observe notes on "large wheels" in the "Wheel/tyre combinations" section. 26 Not for vehicles with 4MATIC. 27 Additional measures necessary (hub caps on rear axle, code 776). 29 Maximum permissible speed 220 km/h. Wheel and tyre combinations Winter tyres Light-alloy wheels V1 V2 V3 V4 BA 235/40 R18 95 V XL M+Si 8.0 J x 18 H2 ET 45 — — — # FA RA 235/40 R18 95 V XL M+Si 255/35 R18 94 V XL M+Si24, 25 8.0 J x 18 H2 ET 45 9.0 J x 18 H2 ET 54 — — — # 373 Tyres Wheels V1 V2 V3 V4 T 125/90 R16 99 M Tyre pressure: 420 kPa (4.2 bar/61 psi) 3.5 B x 16 H2 ET 20 # # — — T 125/80 R17 99 M Tyre pressure: 420 kPa (4.2 bar/61 psi) 3.5 B x 17 H2 ET 20 — #28 # — T 125/70 R18 99 M Tyre pressure: 420 kPa (4.2 bar/61 psi) 3.5 B x 18 H2 ET 20 — — — # Your vehicle may be equipped with TIREFIT or a "Minispare" emergency spare wheel, depending on the country, the engine and the wheels fitted. i The specified tyre pressure is printed in yellow on the emergency spare wheel. 24 Use of snow chains is not permitted. Observe the notes in the "Snow chains" section. notes on "large wheels" in the "Wheel/tyre combinations" section. 28 Use only in conjunction with Sports package optional equipment. 25 Observe Z Wheels and tyres "Minispare" emergency spare wheel24 374 375 376 376 376 377 379 379 384 386 387 389 Technical data Useful information ............................ Notes on the technical data ............. Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts ......... Vehicle electronics ........................... Vehicle identification plates ............ Service products and capacities ..... Vehicle data ...................................... Boot lid and tailgate opening dimensions ........................................ Trailer tow hitch ................................ 24-GHz radar sensor system (country overview) ..................................... 376 Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts Useful information i This Owner's Manual describes all models and all standard and optional equipment available to your vehicle at the time of publication of the Owner's Manual. Countryspecific deviations are possible. Please note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all features described. This also applies to safety-relevant systems and functions. i Please read the information on qualified specialist workshops (Y page 28). Notes on the technical data You can find technical data on the Internet at: http://www.mercedes-benz.com Technical data i The technical data was determined in accordance with EC Directives. All data applies to the vehicle's standard equipment. Therefore, the data may differ for vehicles with optional equipment. You can obtain further information from a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. approved parts may invalidate the vehicle's general operating permit. This is the case if: Rthey cause a change of the vehicle type from that for which the vehicle's general operating permit was granted. Rother road users could be endangered. Rthe emission or noise levels are adversely affected. G WARNING Driving safety may be impaired if nonapproved parts, tyres and wheels or safetyrelevant accessories are used. This could lead to malfunctions in safety-relevant systems, e.g. the brake system. This could cause you to lose control of your vehicle and cause an accident. For this reason, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use genuine Mercedes-Benz parts or parts of equal quality. Only use tyres, wheels and accessories that have been specifically approved for your vehicle. ! Airbags and seat belt tensioners, as well as control units and sensors for these restraint systems may be installed in the following areas of your vehicle: Rdoors Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts Mercedes-Benz tests genuine parts and conversion parts and accessories which have been specifically approved for your vehicle for their reliability, safety and suitability. Despite ongoing market research, Mercedes-Benz is unable to evaluate other parts. MercedesBenz therefore accepts no responsibility for the use of such parts in Mercedes-Benz vehicles, even if they have been independently or officially approved. In Germany and some other countries, certain parts are only officially approved for installation or modification if they comply with legal requirements. All genuine Mercedes-Benz parts meet this requirement. The use of non- Rdoor pillars sills Rseats Rdashboard Rinstrument cluster Rcentre console Do not install accessories such as audio systems in these areas. Do not carry out repairs or welding. You could impair the operating efficiency of the restraint systems. Have aftermarket accessories installed at a qualified specialist workshop. MercedesBenz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose. Rdoor Vehicle electronics Daimler AG also supplies reconditioned assemblies and parts which are of the same quality as new parts. For these, the same warranty applies as for new parts. Always specify the vehicle identification number (VIN) (Y page 379) and the engine number (Y page 379) when ordering genuine Mercedes-Benz parts. Vehicle electronics Tampering with the engine electronics If your vehicle has fittings for two-way radio equipment, use the power supply or aerial connections intended for use with the basic wiring. Be sure to observe the manufacturer's additional instructions when installing the fittings. ! Have aftermarket radio frequency transmitting equipment installed at a qualified specialist workshop. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose. The transmission output at the aerial base must not exceed the maximum values below. Waveband Maximum transmission output (PEAK) Short wave (f < 54 MHz) 100 W 4 m waveband 30 W 2 m waveband 50 W G WARNING Only have work on the engine electronics and related components carried out at a qualified specialist workshop which has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools to carry out the work required. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose. In particular, work relevant to safety or on safety-related systems must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Otherwise, the vehicle's roadworthiness could be affected. ! Only have maintenance work on the engine electronics and its associated parts, such as control units, sensors and connector leads, carried out at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Vehicle components may otherwise wear more quickly and the vehicle's operating permit may be invalidated. Technical data H Environmental note 377 Trunked radio/Tetra 35 W 70 cm waveband 35 W GSM 900/AMPS 10 W GSM 1800 10 W UMTS 10 W The following aerial positions may be used if RF transmitters have been properly installed: Retrofitting of two-way radios and mobile phones (RF transmitters) Use the Technical Specification ISO/TS 2160930 implementation regulation when retrofitting RF (radio frequency) transmitters. 30 ISO/TS 21609 – Technical Specification for Road Vehicles (EMC) guidelines for installation of aftermarket radio frequency transmitting equipment. Z 378 Vehicle electronics Saloon : Front roof area31, 32 ; Rear roof area32 = Rear wing33 Technical data ? Boot lid Estate : Front roof area31, 32 ; Rear roof area = Rear wing33 G WARNING Incorrect retrofitting of RF transmitters can lead to increased electromagnetic radiation in the vehicle interior. Using an exterior aerial takes into account current scientific discussions relating to the possible health hazards that may result from electromagnetic fields. Have aftermarket radio frequency transmitting equipment installed at a qualified specialist workshop. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose. Deviations with respect to aerial locations, output and frequencies must be approved by Mercedes-Benz. There is no restriction for aerial positions in the outer area of the vehicle for these wavebands: trunked radio/Tetra, 70 cm waveband, GSM 900/AMPS, GSM 1800 and UMTS. Legal provisions for fittings must be observed. RF transmitters with a maximum transmission output of 100 mW (PEAK) may be used in the vehicle without restrictions. ! The operating permit may be invalidated if the instructions for installation and use of RF transmitters are not observed, e.g. approved wavebands, maximum output and aerial positions on the vehicle. G WARNING Incorrect retrofitting of RF transmitters can cause the vehicle electronics to malfunction. The vehicle's operating safety and thus your own safety are impaired. Have aftermarket radio frequency transmitting equipment installed at a qualified specialist workshop. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose. 31 Vehicles with a sliding sunroof: observe the roof's sweep. with a panorama sliding sunroof: this area is not permitted. 33 Recommended installation position: on the side which faces the centre of the road. 32 Vehicles Service products and capacities Vehicle identification plate with vehicle identification number (VIN) and paint code number X Open the front right-hand door. You will see vehicle identification plate :. number (VIN) is also stamped onto the vehicle body. It is located on the floor in front of the righthand front seat. Slide the right-hand front seat to its rearmost position. X Fold floor covering : upwards. You will see vehicle identification number (VIN) ;. X Engine number The engine number is stamped into the crankcase. More information can be obtained from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Vehicle identification plate (example) : Vehicle identification plate ; Vehicle manufacturer = EU type approval number ? Vehicle identification number (VIN) A Maximum permissible gross vehicle B C D E weight Gross combination mass Maximum permissible front axle load Maximum permissible rear axle load Paint code Vehicle identification number (VIN) In addition to being stamped on the vehicle identification plate, the vehicle identification Service products and capacities Important safety notes Service products include the following: Rfuels (e.g. petrol, diesel) Rlubricants (e.g. engine oil, transmission oil) Rcoolant Rbrake fluid Rwindscreen washer fluid Vehicle components and their respective lubricants must match. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use products that have been tested and specially approved by Mercedes-Benz. These products are listed in this Mercedes-Benz Owner's Manual in the relevant section. Z Technical data Vehicle identification plates 379 380 Service products and capacities You can recognise service products approved by Mercedes-Benz by the following inscription on the containers: RMB-Freigabe (e.g. MB-Freigabe 229.51) RMB Approval (e.g. MB Approval 229.51) Other designations or recommendations relate to a level of quality or a specification in accordance with an MB Sheet number (such as MB 229.5). They have not necessarily been approved by Mercedes-Benz. You can obtain further information from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Technical data G WARNING When handling, storing and disposing of any service products, please observe the relevant regulations, as you could otherwise endanger yourself and others. Keep service products away from children. To protect your health, do not allow service products to come into contact with your eyes or open wounds. See a doctor immediately if any service product is swallowed. H Environmental note Dispose of service products in an environmentally-responsible manner. Fuel Important safety notes G WARNING Fuel is highly flammable. Fire, naked flames and smoking are therefore prohibited when handling fuels. Switch off the engine and the auxiliary heating before refuelling. G WARNING Do not come into contact with fuels. 34 BlueEFFICIENCY 35 Only for certain countries. It is hazardous to your health if your skin comes into direct contact with fuels or you breathe in fuel vapours. Tank capacity Total capacity C 18034 C 20034 C 25034 C 180 CDI34, 35 C 200 CDI34 C 220 CDI34 C 250 CDI34 C 250 CDI 4MATIC34 59 l Total capacity all other models AMG vehicles 66 l Reserve fuel in AMG vehicles Approximately 14 l Reserve fuel in all other models Approximately 8 l ! Do not use petrol to refuel vehicles with a diesel engine. Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with a petrol engine. Even small amounts of the wrong fuel result in damage to the fuel system and the engine. Further information on refuelling and on fuels (Y page 168). Notes on fuel consumption The vehicle will use more fuel than usual in the following situations: Rat very low outside temperatures urban traffic Ron short journeys Rin Service products and capacities Rin towing a trailer mountainous terrain i Only for certain countries: you can find the current consumption and emission values of your vehicle in the COC documents (EU CERTIFICATE OF CONFORMITY). These documents are delivered with your vehicle. The consumption figures were in each case based on the currently applicable version: Rfor vehicles up to and including the EURO 4 standard, in accordance with EU Directive 80/1268/ECC Rfor vehicles above the EURO 5 standard, in accordance with Regulation (EC) No. 715/2007 Deviations from these values may occur under normal operating conditions. ! Do not use any fuel additives, as they can cause malfunctions and engine damage. H Environmental note CO2 (carbon dioxide) is the gas which scientists believe to be principally responsible for global warming (the greenhouse effect). Your vehicle's CO2 emissions are directly related to fuel consumption and therefore depend on: Refficient use of the fuel by the engine Rdriving style Rother non-technical factors, such as environmental influences or road conditions You can minimise your vehicle's CO2 emissions by driving carefully and having it serviced regularly. Engine oil engine oils that correspond to the current technical standard. Therefore, only Mercedes-Benz approved engine oils may be used in Mercedes-Benz engines. Further information on tested and approved engine oils can be obtained from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. MercedesBenz recommends that you have the oil change carried out at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Mercedes-Benz approval is indicated on the oil container by the inscription "MB Approval" and the corresponding designation, e.g. MB Approval 229.51. The table shows which engine oils have been approved for your vehicle. Petrol engines MB Approval C 180 KOMPRESSOR36, 37 229.3, 229.31, 229.5, 229.51 C 18036 C 20036 C 25036 229.3, 229.5, 229.51 C 350 4MATIC36 C 35036 229.3, 229.5 C 63 AMG38 229.5 Technical data Rwhen Missing values were not available at time of going to print. Petrol engines MB Approval C 25037 C 300 4MATIC36, 37 C 30036, 37 Please bear the following in mind The quality of engine oils is decisive for the function and service life of an engine. After extensive tests, Mercedes-Benz approves 36 BlueEFFICIENCY. 37 Only 381 for certain countries. only SAE 0W-40/SAE 5W-40 engine oils may be used. 38 Restriction: Z 382 Service products and capacities Diesel engines MB Approval Vehicles with a diesel particle filter C 180 CDI36, 37 C 200 CDI36 C 220 CDI36 C 250 CDI36 C 250 CDI 4MATIC36 C 350 CDI36 C 300 CDI 4MATIC36 228.51, 229.31, 229.51 You can call up an overview of approved engine oils on the Internet at http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com by entering the designation, e.g. 229.5. i If the engine oils listed in the table are not available, you may add the following engine oils until the next oil change: Technical data Rvehicles with a petrol engine: MB Approval 229.1 or ACEA A3 Rvehicles with a diesel engine: MB Approval 229.1 or ACEA C3 Engine oil may only be added once, and no more than 1.0 l may be added. Capacities The following values refer to an oil change including the oil filter. 36 BlueEFFICIENCY. 37 Only for certain countries. external oil cooler. 39 Including Model Capacity C 180 C 18036 C 20036 C 25036 5.5 l C 30036, 37 C 300 4MATIC36, 37 C 35036 C 350 4MATIC36 C 180 CDI36, 37 C 200 CDI36 C 220 CDI36 C 250 CDI36 C 250 CDI 4MATIC36 6.5 l C 25037 C 350 CDI36 C 300 CDI 4MATIC36 8.0 l C 63 AMG39 8.5 l KOMPRESSOR36, 37 Additives ! Do not use additives in engine oil. This could damage the engine. Engine oil viscosity Viscosity describes the flow characteristics of a fluid. If an engine oil has a high viscosity rating, it flows slowly; the lower the viscosity, the faster it flows. Engine oil selection is based on the respective outside temperatures and in accordance with the SAE classification (viscosity). The table below shows you which SAE classifications are to be used. The low-temperature properties of engine oils can be significantly impaired during operation due to, for example, ageing or soot and fuel accretion. It is Service products and capacities therefore strongly recommended to observe regular oil changes using an approved engine oil with the appropriate SAE classification. 383 Coolant Important safety notes The coolant is a mixture of water and antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor. It performs the following tasks: Ranti-corrosion protection protection Rraising the boiling point Rantifreeze i When the vehicle is first delivered, it is filled with a coolant mixture that ensures adequate antifreeze and corrosion protection. G WARNING Over a period of time, the brake fluid absorbs moisture from the air; This lowers its boiling point. If the boiling point of the brake fluid is too low, vapour pockets may form in the brake system when the brakes are applied hard (e.g. when driving downhill). This impairs braking efficiency. You should have the brake fluid renewed at regular intervals. The brake fluid change intervals can be found in the Service Booklet. Only use brake fluid approved by MercedesBenz. Information about approved brake fluids can be obtained from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre or on the Internet at http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com i There is usually a notice in the engine compartment to remind you when the next brake fluid change is due. ! Only add coolant that has been premixed with the desired antifreeze protection. The engine could otherwise be damaged. Further information on coolants and on filling can be found in the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Service Products, MB Approval 310.1, e.g. on the Internet at http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com. You can also consult a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. ! Always use a suitable coolant mixture, even in countries where high temperatures prevail. Otherwise, the engine cooling system is not sufficiently protected from corrosion and overheating. If antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor is present in the correct concentration, the boiling point of the coolant during operation will be around 130 †. The antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor concentration in the engine cooling system should: Rbe at least 50%. This will protect the engine cooling system against freezing down to around -37 †. Rnot exceed 55% (antifreeze protection down to -45 † ); otherwise, heat will not be dissipated as effectively. If the vehicle has lost coolant, top it up with equal amounts of water and antifreeze/corZ Technical data Brake fluid 384 Vehicle data rosion inhibitor. Mercedes-Benz recommends an antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor which has been approved for Mercedes-Benz. ! The engine cooling system is filled with coolant that must be renewed after 15 years, or after 250,000 km at the latest. Vehicle data Please note that for the specified vehicle data: Technical data Rthe heights specified may vary as a result of: - tyres - load - condition of the suspension - optional equipment Ritems of optional equipment increase the unladen weight and reduce the maximum payload. The unladen weight is specified in accordance with EC directive and includes: - driver (68 kg) - luggage (7 kg) - all fluids (fuel tank 90% full) Rvehicle-specific weight information can be found on the vehicle identification plate (Y page 379). Ronly for certain countries: you can find vehicle-specific vehicle data in the COC documents (CERTIFICATE OF CONFORMITY). These documents are delivered with your vehicle. All models Vehicle length (ECE), Saloon 4591 mm Vehicle length (ECE), Estate 4606 mm Vehicle width including exterior mirrors 2008 mm 40 Only for certain countries. All models Vehicle width without exterior mirrors 1770 mm Wheelbase, except for AMG vehicles 2760 mm Maximum roof load 100 kg Maximum boot load 100 kg C 180 KOMPRESSOR BlueEFFICIENCY40 Manual transmission Unladen weight, Saloon 1480 kg Unladen weight, Estate 1530 kg Automatic transmission Unladen weight, Saloon 1495 kg Unladen weight, Estate 1545 kg C 180 BlueEFFICIENCY Manual transmission Unladen weight, Saloon 1480 kg Unladen weight, Estate 1540 kg Automatic transmission Unladen weight, Saloon 1495 kg Unladen weight, Estate 1555 kg Vehicle data C 200 BlueEFFICIENCY C 180 CDI BlueEFFICIENCY C 200 CDI BlueEFFICIENCY Manual transmission Unladen weight, Saloon 1500 kg Automatic transmission 1560 kg Unladen weight, Saloon 1590 kg Unladen weight, Estate Unladen weight, Estate 1645 kg Automatic transmission Unladen weight, Saloon 1505 kg Unladen weight, Estate 1565 kg C 250 BlueEFFICIENCY Unladen weight, Saloon 1505 kg Unladen weight, Estate 1575 kg C 220 CDI BlueEFFICIENCY Manual transmission Unladen weight, Saloon 1600 kg Unladen weight, Estate 1655 kg Unladen weight, Saloon 1610 kg Unladen weight, Estate 1670 kg Unladen weight, Saloon 1610 kg Unladen weight, Estate 1665 kg Technical data Automatic transmission C 350 BlueEFFICIENCY C 250 CDI BlueEFFICIENCY C 350 4MATIC BlueEFFICIENCY Unladen weight, Saloon 385 1670 kg Manual transmission Unladen weight, Saloon 1615 kg Unladen weight, Estate 1675 kg Automatic transmission C 180 CDI BlueEFFICIENCY C 200 CDI BlueEFFICIENCY Manual transmission Unladen weight, Saloon 1565 kg Unladen weight, Estate 1615 kg Unladen weight, Saloon 1615 kg Unladen weight, Estate 1675 kg Z 386 Boot lid and tailgate opening dimensions C 250 CDI 4MATIC BlueEFFICIENCY C 63 AMG Unladen weight, Saloon 1675 kg Unladen weight, Estate 1795 kg Unladen weight, Estate 1735 kg Wheelbase 2765 mm C 300 CDI 4MATIC BlueEFFICIENCY Unladen weight, Saloon 1735 kg Unladen weight, Estate 1795 kg Technical data C 350 CDI BlueEFFICIENCY Unladen weight, Saloon 1700 kg Unladen weight, Estate 1750 kg Missing values were not available at time of going to print. C 25041 C 300 BlueEFFICIENCY41 C 300 4MATIC BlueEFFICIENCY41 Boot lid and tailgate opening dimensions Models with ECO start/stop function Unladen weight, Saloon 1705 kg Unladen weight, Estate 1760 kg C 63 AMG Vehicle length (ECE), Saloon 4702 mm Vehicle height, Saloon 1433 mm Unladen weight, Saloon 1730 kg Vehicle length (ECE), Estate 4696 mm Vehicle height, Estate 1448 mm 41 Only for certain countries. : Opening height ; Maximum headroom : ; Saloon 1757 – 1761 mm — Estate 1990 – 1994 mm 1877 – 1881 mm Trailer tow hitch 387 i The values specified may differ from the actual values, depending on the tyres, load, optional equipment and the state of the suspension. Trailer tow hitch Mounting dimensions G WARNING ! If you have a trailer tow hitch retrofitted, changes to the cooling system may be necessary, depending on the vehicle type. If you have a trailer tow hitch retrofitted, observe the anchorage points on the chassis frame. Anchorage points for the trailer tow hitch (example) : Anchorage points ; Overhang dimension = Rear axle centre line For trailer tow hitches fitted at the factory, the overhang dimension including protective covering is 1154 mm (Saloon without the AMG sports package) or 1182 mm (Estate and Saloon with the AMG sports package). Z Technical data Only have a trailer tow hitch retrofitted at a qualified specialist workshop which has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools to carry out the work required. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose. In particular, work relevant to safety or on safety-related systems must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. 388 Trailer tow hitch Trailer loads All models42 Permissible trailer load, unbraked 750 kg43, 44 Permissible trailer load, braked45 1800 kg46 75 kg Technical data Maximum drawbar noseweight47 42 The C 63 AMG cannot be used to tow a trailer. KOMPRESSOR BlueEFFICIENCY Saloon with manual transmission and C180 BlueEFFICIENCY Saloon with manual transmission: 740 kg. 44 C180 KOMPRESSOR BlueEFFICIENCY Saloon with automatic transmission and C180 BlueEFFICIENCY Saloon with automatic transmission: 745 kg. 45 At a minimum gradient-climbing capability of 12% from a standstill. 46 C180 KOMPRESSOR BlueEFFICIENCY Saloon and Estate with manual transmission: 1700 kg. 47 The drawbar noseweight is not included in the trailer load. 43 C180 24-GHz radar sensor system (country overview) 389 Permissible rear axle load when towing a trailer Missing values were not available at time of going to print. Saloon Estate Manual transAutomatic Manual transAutomatic mission transmission mission transmission C 180 KOMPRESSOR48 1180 kg 1185 kg 1245 kg 1250 kg C 18048 1180 kg 1185 kg 1245 kg 1250 kg C 20048 1190 kg 1190 kg 1255 kg 1255 kg – 1195 kg – 1265 kg C 35048 – 1220 kg – 1285 kg C 350 4MATIC48 – 1215 kg – – C 180 CDI48 1205 kg 1200 kg 1260 kg 1260 kg C 200 CDI48 1205 kg 1200 kg 1260 kg 1260 kg C 220 CDI48 1200 kg 1205 kg 1270 kg 1275 kg C 250 CDI48 1210 kg 1210 kg 1280 kg 1280 kg C 250 CDI 4MATIC48 – 1205 kg – 1275 kg C 300 CDI 4MATIC48 – 1235 kg – 1310 kg C 350 CDI48 – 1250 kg49 – 1325 kg C 250 C 25048 C 30048 Technical data C 300 4MATIC48 24-GHz radar sensor system (country overview) The 24 GHz radar sensor system requires separate approval for each country. When you are driving in a country in which the radar sensor system is not approved, you must deactivate the system using the on-board computer (Y page 242). The current country overview can be obtained from a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Vehicles with a navigation system: the radar sensor system is deactivated automatically near radio telescope facilities. 48 BlueEFFICIENCY 49 For C 350 CDI BlueEFFICIENCY with ECO start/stop function: 1245 kg. Z 390 24-GHz radar sensor system (country overview) The currently active systems are automatically deactivated: RDISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 183) Spot Assist (Y page 205) RActive Blind Spot Assist(Y page 209) RPRE-SAFE® Brake (Y page 51) A display message appears in the multifunction display to tell you that the radar sensor system is being switched off (Y page 274). BAS PLUS (Y page 73) is then also unavailable. If the deactivation does not occur automatically, you must deactivate the radar sensor system using the on-board computer (Y page 242). Vehicles without navigation and vehicles for Australia: you must deactivate the radar sensor system using the on-board computer when you are near a radio telescope facility (Y page 242). RBlind Technical data Country Radio telescope facilities Geographical latitude and longitude Distance to be maintained from the facility Egypt – – – Andorra – – – Australia Parkes 32°59'59" S,148°15'44" E 10 km Narrabri 30°18'52" S,149°32'56" E 10 km Canberra 35°23'54" S,148°58'40" E 3 km Western Australia 26°37'13"S,117°30'40" E 10 km Bahrain – – – Belgium – – – Bosnia-Herzegovina – – – Bulgaria – – – Denmark – – – Germany Effelsberg 50°31'32" N, 06°53'00" E 6.5 km Estonia – – – Finland Metsähovi 60°13'04" N, 24°23'37" E 7 km Tuorla 60°24'56" N, 22°26'31" E 5 km Plateau de Bure 44°38'01" N, 05°54'26" E 35 km Floirac 44°50'10" N, 00°31'37" W 35 km – – – France Gibraltar 24-GHz radar sensor system (country overview) Radio telescope facilities Geographical latitude and longitude Distance to be maintained from the facility Greece – – – Cambridge 52°09'59" N, 00°02'20" E 9 km Darnhall 53°09'22" N, 02°32'03" W 5 km Jodrell Bank 53°14'10" N, 02°18'26" W 9 km Knockin 52°47'24" N, 02°59'45" W 5 km Pickmere 53°17'18" N, 02°26'38" W 5 km Ireland – – – Iceland – – – Medicina 44°31'14" N,11°38'49" E 20 km Noto 36°52'34" N, 14°59'21" E 8 km Sardinia 39°29'50" N, 09°14'40" E 15 km Yemen – – – Jordan – – – Canada – – – Qatar – – – Croatia – – – Kuwait – – – Latvia Ventspils 57°33'12" N, 21°51'17" E 8.5 km Lebanon – – – Lithuania – – – Luxembourg – – – Malaysia – – – Malta – – – Macedonia – – – Mexico – – – Mongolia – – – New Zealand – – – Netherlands – – – United Kingdom Italy Technical data Country 391 Z 392 24-GHz radar sensor system (country overview) Country Radio telescope facilities Geographical latitude and longitude Distance to be maintained from the facility Norway – – – Oman – – – Austria – – – Pakistan – – – Kraków-Fort Skała 50°03'18" N, 19°49'36" E 1 km Toruń-Piwnice 52°54'48" N, 18°33'30" E 1 km Portugal – – – Romania – – – Dimitrov 56°26'00" N, 37°27'00" E 35 km Kalyazin 57°13'22" N, 37°54'01" E 35 km Pushchino 54°49'00" N, 37°40'00" E 35 km Zelenchukskaya 43°49'53" N, 41°35'32" E 35 km – – – Sweden Onsala 57°23'45" N, 11°55'35" E 12 km Switzerland Bleien 47°20'26" N, 08°06'44" E 3 km Singapore – – – Slovakia – – – Slovenia – – – Yebes 40°31'27" N, 03°05'22" W 15 km Robledo 40°25'38" N, 04°14'57" W 7 km South Africa – – – Syria – – – Czech Republic – – – Turkey – – – Ukraine – – – Hungary Penc 47°47'22" N, 19°16'53" E 2 km – – – Poland Technical data Russia Saudi Arabia Spain USA 24-GHz radar sensor system (country overview) Radio telescope facilities Geographical latitude and longitude Distance to be maintained from the facility United Arab Emirates – – – Cyprus – – – Technical data Country 393 Z 394 395 396